unfoldingWord_en_tn/tn_MRK.tsv

Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
front:intro	r2f2				0	# Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Mark\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–13)\n2. Jesus’ early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n3. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)\n4. Jesus expands his ministry and encounters opposition (6:7–8:21)\n5. Jesus instructs his disciples and journeys toward Jerusalem (8:22–10:52)\n6. Jesus in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)\n7. Jesus’ last days and death (14:1–15:47)\n8. Jesus’ resurrection (16:1–8)\n\n### What is the book of Mark about?\n\nThe Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Mark wrote much about what Jesus did and how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles. Many Christians believe that this Gospel was the first one to be written.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel According to Mark.” Or they may choose a different title, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark Wrote.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Mark?\n\nThe book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark, also known as John Mark. This Mark did not know Jesus during his life on earth, and he did not witness the events that he writes about in this Gospel. However, he was a close friend of the Apostle Peter. Most likely, Mark recorded what Peter said about Jesus and then wrote this Gospel based on that eyewitness testimony.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What does the phrase “the kingdom of God” mean?\n\nMark refers to “the kingdom of God” 14 times. This phrase is both important and difficult to translate. In general, the word “kingdom” refers to a monarch ruling over a group of people in a specific area. In various contexts, the word can primarily emphasize the area, the people, or the ruling. However, the term usually refers to all three of these elements, even if one is emphasized more than the others. Consider how you might express the idea of “kingdom” in your language. Some translations emphasize the idea of ruling and express the idea with a clause like “God ruling as king” or “God’s reign.” Other translations emphasize the idea of the people who are ruled and express the idea with a clause like “belonging to God’s people.” However, both of these options do not fully express the idea of “kingdom.” If you have a word or phrase that describes a situation in which a king rules over people in a specific area, you could use it here. Since that word in English is “kingdom,” the ULT and UST both use “kingdom.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/kingdom]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])\n\n### What were “disciples” in Jesus’ culture?\n\nIn both Jewish culture and in Greco-Roman culture, teachers had “disciples” who learned from them and were committed to them. Sometimes these disciples would go wherever their teacher went and imitate what the teacher did. Jesus’ disciples similarly were committed to him and learned from him. Some of his closest disciples traveled and lived with Jesus, particularly those whom Mark refers to as The Twelve. Other disciples would go to see Jesus and learn from him, but they did not always travel or live with him. Consider how you might refer to these kinds of relationships in your language. The ULT expresses the idea with the word “disciple,” and the UST uses the word “apprentice.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])\n\n### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?\n\nIn the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase can express two primary ideas:\n\n1. It can refer to someone who is a human. This meaning for the phrase appears frequently in the book of Ezekiel (for example, see [Ezekiel 2:1](../ezk/02/01.md) or [Ezekiel 47:6](../ezk/47/06.md)). So, Jesus uses the phrase to refer to himself in the third person while identifying himself as a human being.\n2. It can refer more specifically to a specific person who appears in [Daniel 7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). This person approaches God, who gives him dominion and authority. So, when he uses the phrase, Jesus is identifying himself with this person. Scholars are not sure whether people in Jesus’ culture used the title “Son of Man” to refer to the Messiah. However, Jesus is probably using the title to implicitly claim a special role, perhaps that of the Messiah.\n\nThere are three primary issues to consider when translating the phrase “the Son of Man”:\n\n1. When Jesus uses the phrase, he is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would not understand this, you may need to express the idea in the first person. See the notes on the phrase “the Son of Man” throughout the book for ways to do this.\n2. The phrase figuratively refers to someone who is human by identifying that person’s father as a “man.” If that figure of speech does not make sense in your language, you could refer to someone who is human in another way. Some translations use a phrase like “the human one” to express the idea.\n3. The phrase refers to the specific figure from the book of Daniel. If you have a translation of the book of Daniel, you could translate the phrase as it is expressed there. If you do not have a translation of the book of Daniel, you could consider translating the phrase as a title that refers to a special person, implicitly the Messiah. You could make this clear by capitalizing the phrase (for example, “the Human One”) or by using a different form that indicates that this is a title (for example, “the one called Son of Man”).\n\nA note related to translating the idea of “Son of Man” appears at its first occurrence. After that, if possible express the idea consistently throughout the rest of the book. Notes providing translation options for expressing the idea in first person instead of third person appear at every occurrence. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What are the Synoptic Gospels?\n\nThe Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”\n\nThe texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. The ULT represents these parallels by using the same words whenever the parallel passages are exactly the same. When the parallel passages are slightly different, the ULT represents the differences as much as possible by using different words. Make sure that your translation represents these similarities and differences as closely as possible.\n\n### Why does Mark use the word “immediately” so frequently?\n\nMark uses the word “immediately” 42 times. Most likely, he does this to make his narration more exciting and vivid. It is not always clear how close together events connected by the word “immediately” are. Because of that, it is best to use a general word or phrase that indicates that something happens soon after something else. If possible, express the idea with the same word or phrase throughout the book. The UST often expresses the idea with the phrase “as soon as.”\n\n### When is “you” singular, and when is “you” plural?\n\nAs he is telling his story, Mark uses both singular and plural forms of “you.” These were distinct in his language, but in English both singular and plural are expressed with the word “you.” So, in the introduction to each chapter, there is a section stating whether Mark uses the singular or plural form of “you” more frequently in that chapter. Then, notes throughout the chapter will indicate whenever Mark uses the less frequent form of “you.” Look for this section in each chapter introduction if your language distinguishes between singular and plural forms of “you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### Why does Mark uses present tense verbs for actions that happened in the past?\n\nThroughout this book, Mark often uses present tense verbs to refer to actions that happened in the past. Sometimes he uses a present tense verb in the same sentence with past tense verbs. He does this particularly frequently with verbs that introduce speech. Scholars debate why Mark uses these present tense verbs. Most likely, he included them to highlight or call attention to the action that they describe. In other words, when Mark uses a present tense verb in past narration, he probably does so in order to make his readers pay attention. If present tense verbs in past narration would not accomplish this goal in your language, you could use past tense verbs in your translation and draw the attention of your readers in another way. Since Mark uses these present tense verbs frequently, there are not translation notes at each occurrence. Instead, each chapter introduction lists the verses in which Mark uses present tense verbs in this way. Make sure that your translation deals with this issue consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Mark?\n\nSome versions of the Bible include some verses in Matthew that other versions do not include. This is because some ancient manuscripts include these verses. However, the best ancient manuscripts do not include them. Here are the verses:\n\n* “If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear” ([7:16](../07/16.md)).\n* “where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched” ([9:44](../09/44.md)).\n* “where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched” ([9:44](../09/44.md)).\n* “But if you do not forgive, neither will your Father in the heavens forgive your trespasses” ([11:26](../11/26.md)).\n* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, “And he was counted with lawless ones’” ([15:28](../15/28.md)).\n\nIt is recommended that you do not include these passages. However, if in your region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, you may include them. If they are included, they should be put in footnotes or inside square brackets to indicate that they were probably not originally part of Matthew.\n\nFurther, the manuscripts that scholars consider to be the most reliable do not include the words in [16:9–20](../16/09.md). So, the ULT and UST put these words in brackets, and there are no translation notes on these verses. It is recommended that you also indicate in some way that Mark probably did not write these words. See the introduction to chapter 16 for more information.\n\nFinally, in the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations with which your readers may be familiar to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n* “Jesus Christ, the Son of God” ([1:1](../01/01.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Jesus Christ.”\n* “having had compassion” ([1:41](../01/41.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “having become angry.”\n* “he appointed 12, whom he also named apostles” ([3:14](../03/14.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he appointed 12.”\n* “And he appointed the Twelve, and he added” ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “And he added.”\n* “guilty of an eternal sin” ([3:29](../03/29.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “deserving of eternal judgment.”\n* “your brothers” ([3:32](../03/32.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “your brothers and your sisters.”\n* “Gerasenes” ([5:1](../05/01.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Gadarenes.” Other manuscripts have this: “Gergesenes.”\n* “for a testimony against them” ([6:11](../06/11.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “for a testimony against them. Truly I say to you, it will be more tolerable for Sodom and Gomorrah in the day of judgment than for that city.”\n* “they were saying” ([6:14](../06/14.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he was saying.”\n* “he was much perplexed” ([6:20](../06/20.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he was doing many things.”\n* “his daughter, of Herodias” ([6:22](../06/22.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the daughter of Herodias herself.”\n* “copper vessels” ([7:4](../07/04.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “copper vessels and beds.”\n* “the tradition of men” ([7:8](../07/08.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the tradition of men, washings of pitchers and cups and many other similar such things you do.”\n* “you may keep” ([7:9](../07/09.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “you may establish.”\n* “enter into the town” ([8:26](../08/26.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “enter into the town nor speak to anyone in the town.”\n* “prayer and fasting” ([9:29](../09/29.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “prayer.”\n* “in your name” ([9:38](../09/38.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “in your name, who does not follow us.”\n* “into Gehenna” ([9:45](../09/45.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “into Gehenna, into the unquenchable fire.”\n* “salted with fire” ([9:49](../09/49.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “salted with fire, and every sacrifice will be salted with salt here.”\n* “will leave his father and mother” ([10:7](../10/07.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “will leave his father and mother and will be joined to his wife.”\n* “follow me” ([10:21](../10/21.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “follow me, having taken up the cross.”\n* “how hard it is” ([10:24](../10/24.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “how hard it is for the ones trusting in riches.”\n* “saying to him” ([10:26](../10/26.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “saying to themselves.”\n* “he sends it back” ([11:3](../11/03.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he sends it.”\n* “under your feet” ([12:36](../12/36.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “as a footstool of your feet.”\n* “famines” ([13:8](../13/08.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “famines and troubles.”\n* “Stay awake and pray” ([13:33](../13/33.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Stay awake.”\n* “blood of the covenant” ([14:24](../14/24.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “blood of the new covenant.”\n* “into the forecourt” ([14:68](../14/68.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “into the forecourt, and a rooster crowed.”\n* “having come up” ([15:8](../15/08.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “having cried out.”\n* “I do {with the one} you call the King of the Jews” ([15:12](../15/12.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “I do {with} the King of the Jews.”\n* “he expired in this way” ([15:37](../15/37.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “crying out in this way he expired.”
1:intro	c6ep				0	# Mark 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–13)\n      * Opening (1:1–3)\n      * The ministry of John the Baptist (1:4–8)\n      * Jesus is baptized and tempted (1:9–13)\n2. Jesus’ early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n      * Jesus calls four disciples (1:14–20)\n      * Jesus teaches and casts out a demon (1:21–28)\n      * Jesus heals Simon’s mother-in-law and many others (1:29–34)\n      * Jesus teaches and heals people throughout Galilee (1:35–39)\n      * Jesus heals a leper (1:40–45)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:2–3](../01/02.md), which is made up of quotations from [Malachi 3:1](../mal/03/01.md) and [Isaiah 40:3](../isa/40/03.md).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Baptism\n\nThe word “baptism” refers to a ritual washing, usually with water. John’s baptism is similar to Christian baptism, but it does not mean exactly the same thing (see [Acts 18:24–26](../act/18/24.md)). Mark writes that John’s baptism is “of repentance” (see [1:4](../01/04.md)). Most likely, it symbolized the removal of the sins that people were repenting of and the beginning of a new way of living. However, even Jesus received this baptism despite the fact that he did not need to repent of any sins. In this case, the baptism may symbolize complete dedication to God. Consider how you might refer to this kind of ritual washing in your language.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in speeches that John the Baptist delivers to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 38, 40, 41, and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
1:1-4	ewhd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ & καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ: ἰδοὺ, ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου πρὸ προσώπου σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου & φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ & ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης	1	Here, the phrase **Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet** and the quotation that follows could go with: (1) verse 1: **The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God**. In this case, Mark means that the**gospel** had its **beginning** just as Isaiah prophesied. Alternate translation: “The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God, happened just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, “Behold, I am sending my messenger before your face, who will prepare your way; a voice crying out in the wilderness, ‘Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight.’” And so John came” (2) verse 4: **John came**. In this case, Mark means that **John came** as Isaiah had prophesied. Alternate translation: “This is the beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God. Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, “Behold, I am sending my messenger before your face, who will prepare your way; a voice crying out in the wilderness, ‘Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight,’” John came”
1:1	ybv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **beginning**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Here begins the gospel”
1:1	kpq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that is about **Jesus Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of the gospel concerning Jesus Christ”
1:1	i3bc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
1:1	et9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Many ancient manuscripts include the phrase **the Son of God**. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
1:2	e3by		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ	1	In Mark’s culture, **Just as it has been written in Isaiah the prophet** is a normal way to introduce quotations from important texts, in this case, the Old Testament books written by the prophet Malachi and by **Isaiah the prophet** (see [Malachi 3:1](../mal/03/01.md) and [Isaiah 40:3](../isa/40/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is quoting from important texts. Alternate translation: “Just as you can read in what Isaiah the prophet wrote” or “Just as it says in the Scriptures connected with Isaiah the prophet”
1:2	fc4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah the prophet wrote”
1:2	z8b7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ	1	Here, **Isaiah the prophet** represents the book written by Isaiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the scroll of Isaiah the prophet”
1:2	br10		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word **Behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “See” or “Pay attention”
1:2	gu7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρὸ προσώπου σου	1	Here, the phrase **before your face** means before or in front of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in front of you” or “before I send you”
1:2	kl12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου	1	Here the author of the quotation speaks of helping people to get ready for the coming of the Messiah as if it were preparing the **way** or road for the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will help people get ready for you to arrive”
1:3	cf0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	φωνὴ βοῶντος	1	The author of the quotation is using **voice** to represent a person speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person calling out” or “someone calling out”
1:3	lkm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ,	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “of one calling out in the wilderness and saying” or “of one calling out in the wilderness, declaring”
1:3	dqi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. If you do, you will need to delete the single quotation mark at the end of this quotation. Alternate translation: “the wilderness that people must make ready the way of the Lord, that they must make his paths straight”
1:3	v3n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a connecting word in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Make ready the way of the Lord, yes, make his paths straight”
1:3	peh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ	1	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if people should build or maintain roads for **the Lord** to travel on as he comes to visit his people. He means that people need to be living and acting in proper ways when **the Lord** appears to his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the metaphor in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Live and behave in a way that pleases God, as if you were making a road ready for him to travel on”
1:3	tz2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἑτοιμάσατε & ποιεῖτε	1	Because the person who is **crying out** is speaking to many people, the commands **Make ready** and **make** are plural.
1:4	pmse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης, ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καὶ κηρύσσων	1	Here, the phrase translated **the one baptizing** could be: (1) a description of what John did, in parallel with the word **preaching**. Alternate translation: “John came. He was baptizing in the wilderness and preaching” (2) a title (“the Baptist”) that people called **John**. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist came in the wilderness, preaching”
1:4	je3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης	1	This phrase introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “There was a man named John” or “A man called John appeared”
1:4	q9np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “preaching, ‘Receive a baptism of repentance for forgiveness of sins.’”
1:4	s05n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	Here Mark implies that John was **preaching** that people should undergo **a baptism of repentance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “preaching that people should receive a baptism of repentance” or “preaching that people should ask to receive a baptism of repentance”
1:4	dtqv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **repentance** and **forgiveness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that people should be baptized to show that they had repented, so that their sins would be forgiven”
1:4	vz74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a **baptism** that shows or expresses **repentance**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a baptism that expresses repentance” or “a baptism that demonstrates repentance”
1:4	p86z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	Here, the phrase **for the forgiveness of sins** indicates the goal of the **baptism of repentance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that indicates the goal of an action. Alternate translation: “that would lead to forgiveness of sins”
1:5	cf75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες	1	Mark twice writes **all** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most of the Judea region and most of the Jerusalemites”
1:5	u9yg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα	1	Here, the phrase **all the Judea region** represents the people who live in that area. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the inhabitants of the Judea region”
1:5	pgyh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξεπορεύετο	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “were coming out”
1:5	b9u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν	1	Here the people were **confessing their sins** before they **were being baptized**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the elements so that these events are in sequential order, or you could use another form to indicate the sequence. Alternate translation: “confessing their sins, they were being baptized by him in the Jordan River” or “were being baptized by him in the Jordan River after they confessed their sins”
1:5	h8h7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was baptizing them”
1:5	yezj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξομολογούμενοι	1	Here it is the people who are **confessing**, not John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as they confessed”
1:6	n3rk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ & ὁ Ἰωάννης	1	Here Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. The word does not introduce another event in the story. This background information is found in [1:6–8](../01/06.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Concerning this John, he”
1:6	kyy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦν & ἐνδεδυμένος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “clothed himself with”
1:6	j141		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦν & ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου	1	Here Mark implies that John wore clothes made from **camel hair**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “wore clothing made from the hair of camels”
1:6	h518		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ζώνην δερματίνην	1	A **leather belt** is a thin strap made from animal skin that holds clothing in place. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of clothing, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “an animal skin strap” or “a band made from animal skin”
1:7	p7tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
1:7	bk1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔρχεται & ὀπίσω μου	1	Here John speaks as if someone is walking behind him. He means that soon someone will continue what he has started doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will preach after I have preached”
1:7	x7iz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	ἔρχεται	1	Here John uses the present tense to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will come”
1:7	g8fw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς, κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ	1	Here, **to untie the strap** of someone’s **sandals** was a duty of a slave. John means that he is not worthy to be a slave to this person who is **coming after** him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am not worthy to be the slave who, stooping down, unties the strap of his sandals” or “I am not worthy to act as his slave”
1:7	lyjx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἱκανὸς, κύψας λῦσαι	1	The expression **stooping down** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “worthy to untie”
1:7	nnbj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ	1	In Jesus’ culture, people wore **sandals** on their feet by tying them on with a **strap**. To take off the **sandals**, someone had to **untie the strap**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly what it means **to untie the strap**, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to help him remove his sandals by untying the strap” or “to remove his sandals”
1:8	rtdf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	ἐβάπτισα	1	Here John could be using the past tense: (1) to refer generally to how he baptizes people. Alternate translation: “always baptize” (2) to refer specifically to how he just baptized some people. Alternate translation: “I have baptized”
1:8	ghzs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς	-1	Since John is speaking to many people, the word **you** is plural throughout this verse.
1:8	e4qi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	Here John indicates that the one coming after him will cause people to experience **the Holy Spirit**, just as John caused people to experience **water** in baptism. If possible, preserve the baptism metaphor or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “but he will baptize you, as it were, with the Holy Spirit” or “and he also will perform something like baptism, but he will use the Holy Spirit”
1:8	r1j9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **but** introduces what the one coming after John will use for baptism in contrast to what John uses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “and, in contrast,”
1:9	u65k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	The phrase **And it happened that** marks the beginning of a new event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “Next,”
1:9	arc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	Here, Matthew uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that identifies a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “during that time”
1:9	y8ea		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	The phrase **those days** refers to the time period when John was preaching and baptizing people at the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “John was preaching and baptizing people when”
1:9	zv8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
1:9	gi39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη & ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “John baptized him”
1:10	stwh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐθὺς ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος, εἶδεν	1	Here, the word **immediately** indicates that as soon as John baptized Jesus, Jesus **saw the heavens being split open** as he was **coming up out of the water**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “right away, as he was coming up out of the water, he saw”
1:10	jeof		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus was in the Jordan River when he was baptized. Afterwards, he came up out of the river. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “leaving the water of the river” or “stepping out of the river”
1:10	vxaa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀναβαίνων & καταβαῖνον	1	In contexts such as these, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “going up … going down”
1:10	d9zr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς, καὶ	1	Here Mark is referring to a phenomenon in which heaven and earth are connected in a special way so that someone or something can move from one place to the other. Jesus was able to see this happening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly what it means for the heavens to be **split open**. Alternate translation: “he could see the heavens being split open to connect heaven and earth, and he saw” or “he saw the entrance to the heavens opening and”
1:10	n8sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the heavens splitting open” or “God splitting the heavens open”
1:10	m5f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	The phrase **like a dove** could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he was **coming down** upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Spirit coming down on him, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descended upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “the Spirit coming down on him as a dove comes down to earth”
1:10	c7c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	Here Mark implies that **the Spirit** came down from **the heavens**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “coming down on him from the heavens”
1:11	jh9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	φωνὴ ἐγένετο	1	Mark is using **voice** to represent the person who is speaking, which is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person spoke” or “God the Father spoke”
1:11	s6f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός	1	**Son** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
1:11	l2j2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱός & ὁ ἀγαπητός	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Son, whom I love”
1:11	ogiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν σοὶ εὐδόκησα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You please me”
1:12	mh8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ εὐθὺς	1	Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that”
1:12	yv6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει	1	Here Mark speaks as if **the Spirit** physically picked up Jesus and **casts him out** into the wilderness. He means that **the Spirit** compelled Jesus to go to the wilderness, although he did not force Jesus to go against his will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “compels him to go” or “leads him out”
1:13	k2kt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Satan was tempting him”
1:13	siu3			ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων	1	Alternate translation: “Jesus was living among the wild animals”
1:14	sp0r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
1:14	q12s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μετὰ & τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context (see [6:17–29](../06/17.md)) that it was the soldiers of King Herod Antipas, the ruler of **Galilee**. Alternate translation: “after soldiers handed John over to the authorities” or “after the king of Galilee arrested John”
1:14	lzry		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦλθεν & εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus was going back **to Galilee**, since he had originally come from there to meet John (see [1:9](../01/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came to Galilee again” or “returned to Galilee”
1:14	ys3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
1:14	ns6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that relates to **God**. More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that came from God” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God”
1:15	rhom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
1:15	fzq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς	1	When **time has been fulfilled**, that means that it is now the moment that God has appointed for something to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The time that God appointed has arrived” or “The time is right”
1:15	quab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The time has come” or “The time is here”
1:15	yo11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤγγικεν	1	Here Matthew uses this phrase in the sense of **near** in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “is about to begin” or “is about to happen”
1:15	gtpl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	μετανοεῖτε & πιστεύετε	1	Since Jesus is speaking to many people, the commands **Repent** and **believe** are plural.
1:16	giar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “One time,”
1:16	ba2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Σίμωνα καὶ Ἀνδρέαν, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Σίμωνος, ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ; ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς	1	Here Mark introduces two new characters into the story. Consider how you might introduce new characters into a story, and follow that form here. You may need to rearrange some elements of the sentence to do so. Alternate translation: “two fishermen who were net-casting into the sea. They were Simon and Andrew, Simon’s brother”
1:16	cnl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τὸν ἀδελφὸν Σίμωνος	1	Mark never says whether **Simon** or **Andrew** was older, but he mentions **Simon** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **Andrew** was younger. Alternate translation: “the younger brother of Simon”
1:16	z3j9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ	1	Here Mark implies that they were **net-casting** in order to catch fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “net-casting into the sea to catch fish”
1:16	cccr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν	1	Some cultures use a **net** to catch fish. A **net** is a mesh or network of cords or ropes which fishermen throw into the water to trap fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to how people catch fish in your culture, or you could use a general phrase. Alternate translation: “fishing in” or “trying to catch fish in”
1:16	xor6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	γὰρ	1	Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why **Simon and Andrew** were **net-casting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces this kind of background information. Alternate translation: “which they did because” or “since”
1:17	zui3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου	1	Here, the phrase **Come after me** is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be my disciples” or “Travel with me as my students”
1:17	gufa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	δεῦτε & ὑμᾶς	1	Since Jesus is speaking to Simon and Andrew, the command **Come** and the word **you** are plural.
1:17	mlc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων	1	Here Jesus speaks of preaching the gospel and helping people believe in Jesus as if it were fishing. He means that, just as fishermen catch many fish, so Simon and Andrew will help many people believe. If possible, preserve the metaphor here, since it relates directly to what Simon and Andrew were doing when Jesus saw them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea as a simile. Alternate translation: “I will make you to become people who collect men for me, just as you now collect fish”
1:17	i2sr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans” or “of men and women”
1:18	tnuc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀφέντες τὰ δίκτυα	1	See how you expressed the idea of “net-casting” in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “having stopped fishing”
1:18	gvia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ	1	Here, the phrase **they followed him** indicates that they traveled with Jesus and were his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they became his disciples” or “they traveled with him as his students”
1:19	xqa0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προβὰς ὀλίγον	1	Here Mark means that Jesus walked a short distance beside the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having gone a short way along the shore”
1:19	rpej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἰάκωβον τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου, καὶ Ἰωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα	1	Here Mark introduces two more new characters into the story. Consider how you might introduce new characters into a story, and follow that form here. You may need to rearrange some elements of the sentence to do so. Alternate translation: “two men who were in a boat, mending their nets. They were James, the son of Zebedee, and his brother John”
1:19	iwe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Mark never says whether **James** or **John** was older, but he mentions **James** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **John** was younger. Alternate translation: “his younger brother”
1:19	xl2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὰ δίκτυα	1	Translate the word **nets** as you did in [1:18](../01/18.md). Alternate translation: “the tools they used for fishing”
1:20	zjz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **called them** to “come after him,” that is, to travel with him and be his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he called them to come after him” or “he called them to travel with him as his students”
1:20	b2ci			ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ	1	See how you expressed the similar clause “they followed him” in [1:18](../01/18.md). Alternate translation: “they became his disciples” or “they traveled with him as his students”
1:20	f77b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀπῆλθον	1	Here, **they** refers to James and John. It does not refer to the servants, who stayed in the boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to James and John more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John went away”
1:21	xu4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἰσπορεύονται	1	The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus and the four disciples he just called to follow him: Simon, Andrew, James, and John. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples enter”
1:21	guzx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς Σάββασιν	1	Here Mark uses the phrase **on the Sabbaths** to indicate that this event occurred on one specific Sabbath day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on one of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”
1:22	bsc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ; ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And he was teaching them as having authority and not as the scribes. So, they were astonished at his teaching”
1:22	mio6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “his teaching astonished them”
1:22	axno		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξεπλήσσοντο	1	The pronoun **they** refers to the people who in the “synagogue” (see [1:21](../01/21.md)). If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “those who were in the synagogue were astonished”
1:22	gmpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **teaching**, you could express the same idea in another way. Mark could be focusing primarily on: (1) the way in which Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “at how he taught” (2) what Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “at what he taught”
1:22	e9gf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαν ἔχων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “one having been authorized”
1:22	kmxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς	1	Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to put a comma before it. Alternate translation: “and he was not teaching them as the scribes were teaching them”
1:23	l591		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ	1	Here Mark is introducing this **man** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man in their synagogue. He had an unclean spirit”
1:23	kzko		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people living in this region. Mark means that this is the same **synagogue** that Jesus was teaching in. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “that Jewish synagogue” or “that synagogue”
1:23	w7z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ	1	Here Mark implies that an **unclean spirit**, or demon, was possessing or controlling this **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a demon-possessed man” or “a man controlled by an unclean spirit”
1:24	edx0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he asked”
1:24	ra8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ?	1	The demon is using the question form to confront Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth!”
1:24	jl0l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί	1	Here, the question **What to us and to you** asks whether **you** and **us** have anything in common or have any reason to be together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What do you and we have in common” or “What reason do you have to get involved with us”
1:24	qsig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς	1	In both places, the pronoun **us** could refer to: (1) the demon and other demons like it. Alternate translation: “to us demons … all of us demons” (2) the multiple demons controlling the man. Alternate translation: “to us who control this man … us who control this man”
1:24	m8gz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς?	1	This sentence could be: (1) a rhetorical question. In this case, the demon uses the question form to indicate what it thinks Jesus has **come** to do. Alternate translation: “I know that you have come to destroy us!” or “You have come to destroy us.” (2) a true question. In this case, the demon is asking Jesus whether his mission includes destroying the demons. Alternate translation: “Tell me, have you come to destroy us?”
1:24	xscp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ Ἅγιος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the demon could be using the possessive form to describe a **Holy One**: (1) whom **God** has made holy in a special way. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has made holy in a special way” (2) whom **God** sent. Alternate translation: “the Holy One from God” or “the Holy One whom God sent”
1:25	dgy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he commanded”
1:25	hs43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φιμώθητι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Stop speaking” or “Keep quiet”
1:25	gdm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus is commanding the demon to stop possessing or controlling the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “stop controlling him” or “cease possessing him”
1:26	bpii		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σπαράξαν αὐτὸν	1	Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having caused him to have a seizure”
1:26	hvbx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	φωνῆσαν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	Here, the phrase **cried out with a loud voice** means that the demon raised the volume of its voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly”
1:26	uuiv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξῆλθεν ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:25](../01/25.md). Alternate translation: “stopped controlling him” or “ceased possessing him”
1:27	oi1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐθαμβήθησαν ἅπαντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus did and taught. Alternate translation: “what they saw and heard amazed all of them”
1:27	miqc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντας	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they asked”
1:27	z90b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν τοῦτο?	1	The people in the synagogue are using the question form to express their surprise and amazement. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We are impressed.” or “This is amazing!”
1:27	ahqj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	διδαχὴ καινή κατ’ ἐξουσίαν! καὶ τοῖς πνεύμασι τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις ἐπιτάσσει	1	Here, the phrase **according to authority** could go with: (1) **A new teaching**. Alternate translation: “A new teaching, one according to authority! And he commands the unclean spirits” (2) **And he commands the unclean spirits**. Alternate translation: “A new teaching! According to authority he commands even the unclean spirits”
1:27	zuvl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατ’ ἐξουσίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from one having been authorized” or “that sounds authoritative”
1:28	pzq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1	This sentence marks the end of this story by describing how people in the area responded. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. Alternate translation: “After that, the hearing of him immediately went out everywhere into the whole surrounding region of Galilee”
1:28	hrbh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς	1	Mark speaks of **the hearing of him** as if it were something that could go out actively by itself. This expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who then told even more people about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people immediately spread the hearing of him”
1:28	kv2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came out”
1:28	mpzh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe what people were **hearing** about **Jesus**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what people were hearing about Jesus” or “the news about him”
1:28	lomb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1	Here, Mark could be using the possessive form to describe a **surrounding region** that is: (1) the region of **Galilee**. Alternate translation: “the whole surrounding region, which is Galilee” (2) the area within **Galilee** that is near Capernaum. Alternate translation: “all the regions of Galilee that surround Capernaum” (3) made up of the regions that border on **Galilee**. Alternate translation: “all the regions that surround Galilee”
1:29	q252		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ εὐθὺς	1	Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that”
1:29	uyuy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
1:29	jpbm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦλθον εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Σίμωνος καὶ Ἀνδρέου, μετὰ Ἰακώβου καὶ Ἰωάννου	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus and his four disciples (Simon, Andrew, James, and John) together went to **the house of Simon and Andrew**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus went with Simon and Andrew into their home, and James and John went with them”
1:29	ybs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went”
1:30	bvvl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἡ δὲ πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα καὶ εὐθὺς	1	Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “While all that was happening, the mother-in-law of Simon was sick with a fever and was lying down in the house. Immediately”
1:30	gwkx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἡ δὲ πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα	1	Here Mark introduces **the mother-in-law of Simon** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Now the mother-in-law of Simon was in the house. She was lying down, being sick with a fever”
1:30	dxak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	ἡ & πενθερὰ	1	The word **mother-in-law** refers to the mother of Simon’s wife. In your translation, you could use the term or expression in your own language for this relationship.
1:30	vnp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πυρέσσουσα	1	A **fever** is a symptom of an illness in which the temperature of the body temporarily increases. People with fevers feel sick and weak. If your reader would not be familiar with fevers, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate Translation: “having a high body temperature” or “being ill with an elevated temperature”
1:30	hysq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγουσιν	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people who were in the house of Simon and Andrew. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these people. Alternate translation: “some people who were in the house speak”
1:31	bzd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρατήσας τῆς χειρός	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause describes what Jesus did before what the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “having taken hold of her hand, he raised her up”
1:31	sff6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός	1	Here Mark speaks of **the fever** as if it were a person that **left her**. He means that she was no longer sick with the fever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “she was no longer sick with a fever” or “her fever was gone”
1:31	wi9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὁ πυρετός	1	See how you translated **fever** in [1:30](../01/30.md). Alternate translation: “the high body temperature” or “the elevated temperature”
1:31	i5br		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διηκόνει αὐτοῖς	1	Here Mark implies that she took food and offered it to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “she was giving them food”
1:32	h0y2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
1:32	ytjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ ἥλιος	1	The implication is that the people waited until **the sun set** because that marked the end of the Sabbath, and they could then do the work of bringing the sick to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “after the sun set and the Sabbath had ended”
1:32	ph2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔφερον	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “other people were bringing”
1:32	d1i7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας	1	Mark says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large group of”
1:32	hg82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sick people”
1:32	y4ky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοὺς δαιμονιζομένους	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom demons possessed”
1:33	grp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλη ἡ πόλις	1	Here, the word **city** represents the people who lived in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone in the city”
1:33	pa4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅλη	1	Mark says **whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “majority of”
1:33	k4dl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦν & ἐπισυνηγμένη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” or “came together”
1:33	vkx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τὴν θύραν	1	Here Mark implies that **the door** is the entrance to house where Simon and Andrew lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the door of the house of Simon and Andrew” or “at the door of the house where Jesus was”
1:34	ogir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κακῶς ἔχοντας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “men and women who were ill”
1:34	a168		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐκ ἤφιεν λαλεῖν τὰ δαιμόνια, ὅτι ᾔδεισαν αὐτόν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because the demons knew him, he was not permitting them to speak”
1:34	m04o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ᾔδεισαν αὐτόν	1	Here Mark implies that the **demons** knew that Jesus was the Christ, the Son of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they knew who he really was” or “they knew that he was the Christ”
1:35	mffz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρωῒ ἔννυχα λείαν	1	Here Mark is referring to a time early in morning before the sun rose. Consider how you might naturally refer to this time period in your language. Alternate translation: “early the next day, before dawn”
1:35	dmov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξῆλθεν καὶ ἀπῆλθεν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **went out** of Simon and Andrew’s house and then **went away** from the town of Capernaum into **a desolate place**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he went out of Simon and Andrew’s house and went away from the town of Capernaum to a desolate area”
1:35	y1bp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out”
1:36	sy21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark is referring to other people who were there with **Simon** in the house, including Andrew, James, and John and probably other people who were staying there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer more explicitly to people who were staying at the house of **Simon**. Alternate translation: “the other people staying in his house”
1:36	emic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	κατεδίωξεν	1	Here Mark speaks as if **Simon and the ones with him** were hunting Jesus down or trying to capture him. He uses the word **pursued** as an overstatement to emphasize how urgently they were looking for Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “looked everywhere” or “diligently looked”
1:37	p2s3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντες ζητοῦσίν σε	1	Here the disciples imply that they think that Jesus should come back with them to **All** the people who are **seeking** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “All are seeking you! Will you come back with us?”
1:37	o3hn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Mark is using the adjective **All** as a noun to mean all the people in Capernaum. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “All people”
1:37	vgc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες	1	Simon and those with him say **All** here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “Very many”
1:38	tzvb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ εἰς τὰς ἐχομένας κωμοπόλεις, ἵνα καὶ ἐκεῖ κηρύξω; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ἐξῆλθον	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Because I went out to preach in many places, let us go elsewhere, into the surrounding towns, so that I may preach there also”
1:38	plm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ	1	Here Jesus implies that he will not go back to Capernaum to meet all the people who were looking for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Instead of going back to Capernaum, let us go elsewhere”
1:38	z53z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἐξῆλθον	1	Here Jesus does not start where he **went out** from. He may be referring to how he left Capernaum, or he may be referring to how he came to the world as a human being, or he may be implying to both of these meanings. If possible, do not indicate where Jesus **went out** from. Alternate translation: “I came” or “I went here”
1:38	lz0f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “I came out”
1:38	jh2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἰς τοῦτο	1	The pronoun **this** refers to Jesus preaching in **the surrounding towns**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to that action more directly. Alternate translation: “to do that very thing” or “to preach in many places”
1:39	pu9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἦλθεν κηρύσσων & εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. However, it was only Jesus who was **preaching** and **casting out demons**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went in all Galilee, and he was preaching”
1:39	lb9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he went”
1:39	sntp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people living in **Galilee**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish synagogues” or “the synagogues in that area”
1:40	wryd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτὸν λεπρὸς	1	Here Mark introduces **a leper** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man who was a leper. He comes to Jesus”
1:40	fn8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “goes”
1:40	kq50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	γονυπετῶν	1	In this man’s culture, **kneeling down** before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what **kneeling down** means. Alternate translation: “prostrating himself before him” or “bowing down to him in respect”
1:40	mwv9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι	1	The man is using this statement to make a request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in request form. Alternate translation: “please make me clean”
1:40	uotm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	με καθαρίσαι	1	The man talks about becoming **clean** ceremonially, but it is implicit that he has become unclean because of his leprosy, so he is primarily asking Jesus to heal him of this disease. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to heal my disease”
1:41	l9jg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having sympathized with him”
1:41	jz24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **having had compassion**. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts read “having become angry.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
1:41	qjz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θέλω	1	Here Jesus implies that he is **willing** to cleanse or heal the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am willing to cleanse you”
1:42	lc7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα	1	Here, Mark speaks of the man’s **leprosy** as if it were a person who **departed from him**. He means that the man no longer had **leprosy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his leprosy was gone” or “he was no longer a leper”
1:42	lkks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκαθερίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “he was clean” or “Jesus had made him clean”
1:43-44	iw7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	καὶ ἐμβριμησάμενος αὐτῷ, εὐθὺς ἐξέβαλεν αὐτόν & καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, ὅρα μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς; ἀλλὰ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	Jesus **strictly warned** the man using the words recorded in [1:44](../01/44.md) before he **sent him away**. It might be helpful to make it clear that Jesus **strictly warned** the man before he **sent him away**. Alternate translation: “While he was immediately sending him away, he strictly warned him by saying to him, ‘See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.’” or “He immediately sent him away. Before he went, Jesus strictly warned him, saying to him, ‘See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.’”
1:44	xc4d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς	1	The implication is that the man is not to tell **anyone** that Jesus healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you tell no one that I healed you”
1:44	k2e0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς	1	The words translated **nothing** and **anyone** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “you certainly do not say anything to anyone”
1:44	xhu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ	1	Jesus told the man to **show** himself **to the priest** so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest for inspection if they had been unclean but were now clean. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “ask to be inspected by the priest” or “let yourself be examined by the priest”
1:44	he7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς	1	Jesus assumes that the man will know that the law required a person who had been healed from a skin disease to make a specific sacrifice. This made the person ceremonially clean, and they could participate once again in community religious activities. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “offer the sacrifice that Moses commanded so that you could become ceremonially clean once again”
1:44	w6b2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	Here Jesus means that the man should show himself to the priest and offer the gift to prove or provide **testimony** that he had been healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for a testimony to them that you have been cleansed”
1:44	plof		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that it testifies to them”
1:44	a6tj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “to people” (2) the priests specifically. Alternate translation: “to the priests”
1:45	yjjc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθὼν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
1:45	i91a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον	1	The phrases **to proclaim often** and **to report the word** mean similar things. Mark is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single clause. Alternate translation: “to proclaim the word much” or “to report the word much”
1:45	ov5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here, **word** represents what the man said about how Jesus healed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus had done for him”
1:45	b9n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὥστε μηκέτι αὐτὸν δύνασθαι φανερῶς εἰς πόλιν εἰσελθεῖν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **was able no longer to enter into a town openly** because people who had heard about him would crowd around him so much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that, because so many people would crowd around him, he was able no longer to enter into a town openly”
1:45	tq0w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἤρχοντο	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “they were going”
1:45	z363		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντοθεν	1	The phrase **from all sides** is an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” or “from very many places”
2:intro	zhb5				0	# Mark 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. Jesus’ early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n      * Jesus heals a paralytic (2:1–12)\n      * Jesus calls Levi and dines at his house (2:13–17)\n      * Jesus brings something new (2:18–22)\n      * Picking heads of grain on the Sabbath (2:22–28)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### “Sinners”\n\nWhen Mark uses the word “sinners,” he is describing a group of people whom many Jewish religious groups would have considered to be living in ways that were improper for those who were part of God’s people. Some of these people may have committed significant sins, while others may have disagreed with many of the Jewish religious groups about how Jews could properly behave. If possible, use a word or phrase that identifies people who are not living as many religious groups think that people should live. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Fasting and feasting\n\nIn Jesus’ culture, people would “fast,” or abstain from eating for a period of time, in order to honor God or to repent of their sins. They would “feast,” or eat a lot of food, when they were celebrating some important event, such as a wedding. Consider how you will refer to these behaviors in [2:15–22](../02/15.md), in which Jesus feasts and teaches about why he and his disciples do not fast. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])\n\n### The Sabbath\n\nIn the law that God gave to Moses, God commanded the Israelites to rest on the seventh day, which was called the Sabbath. The Jewish religious leaders disagreed with each other about what kinds of things a person could do on the Sabbath and still rest as God had commanded. In [2:22–28](../02/22.md), the Pharisees and Jesus engage in these kinds of debates about the Sabbath. Jesus disagrees with how the Pharisees understand the Sabbath, and he argues for a different view. If your readers may not understand what the Sabbath is and why Jesus and the Pharisees are debating about it, you may need to include some information in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### The short parables in [2:19–22](../02/19.md)\n\nIn these verses, Jesus gives three short parables that emphasize how certain things do not go well together. Fasting does not happen during a wedding celebration. An unshrunk piece of cloth does not make a good patch for an old garment. Old wineskins do not make good containers for fresh wine that still needs to ferment. Jesus tells these parables to illustrate how his ministry and preaching do not match well with how people had previously done things. In other words, Jesus wants people to expect what he does to be new, and this may require thinking and doing many new things. You should preserve these parables, since they are not direct metaphors. If necessary, you could introduce them in such a way that your readers recognize that they are parables or illustrations. See the notes on each verse for possible translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, 17, 18, 25. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
2:1	j6pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δι’ ἡμερῶν	1	Here, the phrase **after {some} days** indicates that the events Mark is about to narrate occurred a few, but not very many, days after the event he just narrated, the healing of the leper. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that indicates that a few **days** passed between the previous event and this event. Alternate translation: “a few days later”
2:1	ir5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠκούσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was people who were in **Capernaum**. Alternate translation: “the people there heard”
2:1	afvi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν οἴκῳ	1	Here Mark implies that this **house** was Jesus’ home while he was in Capernaum. This **house** could belong to: (1) Simon and Andrew, since he stayed at their house previously (see [1:29](../01/29.md)). Alternate translation: “in Simon and Andrew’s house” (2) Jesus and his relatives, who may have moved to Capernaum. Alternate translation: “in his house”
2:2	zja1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ	1	Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”
2:2	pv8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνήχθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered” or “came together”
2:2	m8pw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μηκέτι χωρεῖν	1	Here, the clause **it could no longer receive** means that the house was so full that no one else could fit inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was no space left” or “no one else could fit”
2:2	ilsu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν	1	Here Mark means that there were so many people even outside the house that no one could get near **the door**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and no one could even get to the door” or “and there was no space even at the door into the house”
2:2	zkka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Mark is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, that Jesus preached using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
2:3	sotm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν, αἰρόμενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων	1	Here Mark could be implying that: (1) more than four people came, but only **four** of them were carrying the paralytic. Alternate translation: “people come bringing to him a paralytic, being carried by four of them” (2) **four** people came and were carrying the paralytic. Alternate translation: “four men come bringing to him a paralytic, whom they were carrying”
2:3	h1t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
2:3	s21g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	παραλυτικὸν	1	A **paralytic** is someone who is not able to use or control some or all of his or her arms and legs because of injury or sickness. If your readers would not be familiar with this sickness, you could use the name of something like this in your language, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a paralyzed person” or “a person who could not move his limbs”
2:3	k1ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἰρόμενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom four men were carrying”
2:3	i2wu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἰρόμενον	1	As the next verse states, the **four men** carried the **paralytic** on a “mat.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea explicit here. Alternate translation: “being carried on a mat”
2:4	gbvn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ δυνάμενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when, because of the crowd, they were not able to bring to him”
2:4	i44b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ	1	Here Mark implies that they were not able to **bring** the paralytic to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to bring the paralytic to Jesus”
2:4	v6ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι	1	In the region where Jesus lived, houses usually had flat roofs that could be reached by staircases on the outside of the houses. These roofs were usually made of wooden beams, branches, and packed dirt or clay. Here Mark describes how these people **dug** through the branches and clay to create a hole in the roof through which they could lower the paralytic on his mat. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of roof, you could use descriptive phrases, or you could use more general terms. Alternate translation: “they demolished the part of the flat roof above where he was, and having dug a hole in it, they lower” or “they cut a hole in the roof and lower through it”
2:4	rrvf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἐξορύξαντες	1	Here Mark uses the phrase **having dug {it} out** to indicate that they finished making a hole before they lowered the man down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this sequence more explicitly. Alternate translation: “once they had dug it out” or “after digging it out”
2:4	q22b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν	1	Here Mark implies that they first climbed up onto **the roof** before they **removed** it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they climbed onto the roof of the house where he was and removed it”
2:4	ouxr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κράβαττον	1	A **mat** was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bed, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a stretcher”
2:4	b32f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὁ παραλυτικὸς	1	See how you translated the word **paralytic** in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “the paralyzed person” or “the person who could not move his limbs”
2:5	trg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having recognized that they were convinced that he could heal the paralytic”
2:5	u57m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how they trusted”
2:5	kuvm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ παραλυτικῷ	1	See how you translated the word paralytic in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”
2:5	hzg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνον	1	Here Jesus calls the paralytic **Child** to indicate that he cares for him. The word also implies that the paralytic was younger than Jesus. The paralytic was not actually Jesus’ son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that an older person would use to show that they care for a younger person. Alternate translation: “My friend” or “Young one”
2:5	lix5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφέωνται σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is Jesus. Alternate translation: “I forgive your sins”
2:6	ihb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces something that was happening while Jesus was speaking to the paralytic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happened at the same time as something that has already been narrated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “While that was happening,”
2:6	le6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	In Mark’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **hearts** by referring to the places where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in their heads” or “within themselves”
2:7	yr5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ?	1	The scribes are using the question form to show that they disapprove of how Jesus was speaking. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is not right for this one to speak in this way.” or “This one should not be speaking in this way!”
2:7	fp38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1	If, in your language, it would appear that the scribes were making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Only one, God, is able to forgive sins, right?” or “Who is able to forgive sins? It is only God, right?”
2:7	sj6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός?	1	The scribes are using the question form to indicate that they are confident that only God can forgive sins. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one is able to forgive sins except one, God.” or “No one can ever forgive sins except one, God!”
2:8	h3zp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus knew what the scribes were thinking even though they did not say it out loud. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having known in his spirit their thoughts,”
2:8	niy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the word **spirit** refers to inner parts of Jesus, the parts where he thought and willed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the inner part of Jesus or to Jesus more generally. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “in himself”
2:8	wga7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the scribes. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “What you are debating in your hearts is wrong.” or “Stop debating in your hearts whether I am blaspheming!”
2:8	vfkd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	διαλογίζεσθε & ὑμῶν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the scribes, the words **you** and **your** are plural.
2:8	s3m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν	1	See how you translated **hearts** in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “in your heads” or “within yourselves”
2:9	wv5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει?	1	Jesus is using the question form to show the scribes which of these things is **easier** to say. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. He could mean: (1) that saying **Your sins are forgiven** is easier than saying **Get up and take up your mat and walk**. This is because it is easy to show that someone is lying when they try to heal a paralytic, but it is not easy to show that someone is lying when they claim to forgive sins. Alternate translation: “It is easier to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven,’ than to say, ‘Get up and take up your mat and walk.’” (2) that both things are equally easy to say. Alternate translation: “Saying ‘Your sins are forgiven’ is just as easy as saying, ‘Get up and take up your mat and walk.’”
2:9	q905		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this sentence so that there are no quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to say to the paralytic that his sins are forgiven or to tell him to get up and take up his mat and walk”
2:9	r5bq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ παραλυτικῷ	1	See how you translated the word paralytic in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”
2:9	aiif		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I have forgiven your sins”
2:9	nmp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν κράβαττόν σου	1	See how you translated **mat** in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “your stretcher”
2:10	cmms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces a slight contrast with the comparison in the previous verse. Jesus now shows that he will both forgive and heal the paralytic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a slight contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” or “Leaving that aside,”
2:10	g4jn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα & εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, (λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ)	1	Here, the phrase **in order that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus **says to the paralytic** the commands that he gives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that provides the stated purpose for which a person performs an action. Alternate translation: “here is what I will do so that you might know that the Son of Man has authority on the earth to forgive sins.’ Then he says to the paralytic,”
2:10	jhy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	εἰδῆτε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the scribes, the word **you** is plural.
2:10	jsyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, have”
2:10	ipgg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Jesus for the first time in Mark uses the title **Son of Man** to refer to himself. He is using the title to refer to himself, a human, and also to implicitly identify himself with the important and powerful figure named “the son of man” in the Old Testament book of Daniel (see [Daniel 7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md)). See the book introduction for more information about this title. Consider how you might best translate this title here and throughout the rest of Mark. Alternate translation: “the Human One” or “the one called Son of Man”
2:10	uedr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαν ἔχει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has been authorized”
2:10	t8qy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ παραλυτικῷ	1	See how you translated the word paralytic in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”
2:11	f369		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	τὸν κράβαττόν σου	1	See how you translated **mat** in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “your stretcher”
2:12	la3i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἠγέρθη, καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον, ἐξῆλθεν	1	The implication is that the man was able to get up because Jesus had healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having been healed, he got up, immediately took up the mat, went out”
2:12	ki94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν κράβαττον	1	See how you translated **mat** in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the stretcher”
2:12	e0xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out”
2:12	c6zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων & πάντας	1	In both places, Mark is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people who were there. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “all the people there … all those people”
2:12	zid9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξίστασθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “marveled”
2:12	btim		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγοντας, ὅτι οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδομεν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying that they had never seen thus”
2:12	q3u6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντας	1	If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
2:13	ma6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
2:13	eaev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out”
2:13	zecn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἤρχετο	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “was going”
2:14	xi5p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	εἶδεν Λευεὶν τὸν τοῦ Ἁλφαίου, καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον	1	Here Mark introduces a tax collector named **Levi** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “he saw a man who was called Levi, the son of Alphaeus. Levi was sitting at the tax collector’s office”
2:14	sc4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁλφαίου	1	The word **Alphaeus** is the name of a man.
2:14	jhhz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον	1	Here Mark means that Levi worked as a tax collector. He would sit at **the tax collector’s office** and make sure that people paid their taxes to the Roman empire, who had control over this area. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “who worked to collect taxes for the Romans at the tax collection office”
2:14	ekv0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀκολούθει μοι & ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ	1	Here, the phrase **Follow me** is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciple. Similarly, the phrase **he followed him** indicates that Levi did travel with Jesus and become his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be my disciple … he was his disciple” or “Come with me as my student … he went with him as his student”
2:15	e2bz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καὶ γίνεται	1	Here, the phrase **And it happens {that}** introduces something that happened soon after what Mark previously narrated. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that introduces an event that came soon after the previous event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,”
2:15	zafq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατακεῖσθαι	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “was sitting down to eat” or “was eating”
2:15	zqcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **for** introduces an explanation that gives further information about the people who were dining with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **for** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and indeed”
2:15	l0on		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦσαν & πολλοὶ	1	The pronoun **they** could refer to: (1) the **tax collectors and sinners** who were dining with Jesus. Alternate translation: “the tax collectors and sinners were many” (2) Jesus’ **disciples**. Alternate translation: “his disciples were many”
2:15	bwv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ	1	Here, the phrase **they were following him** indicates that these people were traveling with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were his disciples” or “they were traveling with him as his students”
2:16	rwu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων	1	Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe **scribes** who were also **Pharisees**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the scribes, ones who were Pharisees” or “some scribes, who were also Pharisees”
2:16	b1bi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει?	1	The scribes of the Pharisees are using the question form to criticize what Jesus is doing. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “He has no reason to eat with tax collectors and sinners.” or “He should by no means eat with tax collectors and sinners!”
2:17	ak1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs	οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες	1	Jesus begins his response by quoting or creating a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a figurative comparison. Just as sick people need to see a doctor to be healed, so sinners need to see Jesus in order to be forgiven and restored. But since Jesus explains the comparison in the following sentence, you do not need to explain it here. Rather, you could translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor, but people who are unwell do”
2:17	c62j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones having sickness have need of a physician”
2:17	lh4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones who are sick”
2:17	re1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἦλθον	1	Here, the word **come** refers to Jesus entering this world as a human to do what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I did not come to this world” or “I am not acting”
2:17	lgl4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	δικαίους	1	Jesus is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun to mean righteous people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “righteous people”
2:17	ca4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners”
2:18	j1h2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,”
2:18	y7bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες & καὶ	1	Here Mark introduces background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “it happened that the disciples of John and the Pharisees were fasting. And”
2:18	z394		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔρχονται	1	The pronoun **they** refers to some people who asked Jesus this question. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people without identifying who they are. Alternate translation: “certain people come”
2:18	nywl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων νηστεύουσιν, οἱ δὲ σοὶ μαθηταὶ οὐ νηστεύουσιν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could turn this sentence into two sentences, one giving the reason for the question, and the other asking the question. Alternate translation: “The disciples of John and the disciples of the Pharisees fast. For what reason do your disciples not fast?”
2:19-20	l0f0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? ὅσον χρόνον ἔχουσιν τὸν νυμφίον μετ’ αὐτῶν, οὐ δύνανται νηστεύειν & ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος, καὶ τότε νηστεύσουσιν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	To help the people who asked him the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers a brief illustration. He wants them to think of him as if he were a **bridegroom** and of his disciples as if they were the **sons of the bridal chamber**. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Jesus is like the **bridegroom**, and his disciples are like the **sons of the bridal chamber**. Alternate translation: “The sons of the bridal chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they? As much time as they have the bridegroom with them, they are not able to fast. But days will come when the bridegroom will be taken away from them, and in those days, then they will fast. I am like the bridegroom, and my disciples are like the sons of the bridal chamber.”
2:19	eke3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to teach the people who asked him the question. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The sons of the bridal chamber are certainly not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them.” or “The sons of bridal chamber cannot fast while the bridegroom is still with them!”
2:19	wetb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος	1	The expression **sons of** describes people who share the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of being an integral part of a wedding. These are the male friends who attend the groom during the ceremony and the festivities. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The groom’s attendants”
2:20	y79o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐλεύσονται & ἡμέραι ὅταν & ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	Here Jesus is using the word **days** to refer to a particular time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a time will come when … in that time” or “there will be a time when … at that time”
2:20	vg2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπαρθῇ & ὁ νυμφίος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone will take the bridegroom away”
2:20	vfc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τότε & ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	The expression **in those days, then** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “in those days”
2:21	vdza		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν; εἰ δὲ μή αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ, τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται.	1	To help the people who asked the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers another brief illustration. He wants them to think of the new things that he teaches and does as **a patch of unshrunk cloth** and of the current ways of doing things as if they were **an old garment**. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that what Jesus does and teaches is like the **patch of unshrunk cloth**, and the normal way of doing things is like **an old garment**. Alternate translation: “no one sews a patch of unshrunk cloth on an old garment, but if not, the patch tears away from it, the new from the old, and a worse tear happens. What I say and do is like the unshrunk cloth, and the normal way of doing things is like an old garment.”
2:21	v6xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν	1	Here Jesus refers to the practice of patching a hole or tear in a **garment** by sewing or attaching a **patch** to the **garment** to cover the hole or tear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “no one patches an old garment with a patch of unshrunk cloth”
2:21	vzsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ δὲ μή	1	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Use a natural method in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “but if someone actually did” or “but were a person to do that”
2:21	opbt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus implies that **the patch** will tear away when the garment is washed, because **the patch** will shrink and rip the old garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when the garment is washed, the patch shrinks and tears away from it”
2:21	m3sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ	1	Jesus is using the adjectives **new** and **old** as nouns to mean new and old cloth. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the new patch from the old garment”
2:22	q5fg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	καὶ οὐδεὶς βάλλει οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς; εἰ δὲ μή ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς, καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί; ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς	1	To help the people who asked the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers another brief illustration. He wants them to think of the new things that he teaches and does as **new wine** and of the current ways of doing things as if they were **old wineskins**. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that what Jesus does and teaches is like the **new wine**, and the normal way of doing things is like **old wineskins**. Alternate translation: “And no one puts new wine into old wineskins, but if not, the wine will burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins are destroyed, but new wine into new wineskins. What I say and do is like the new wine, and the normal way of doing things is like the old wineskins.”
2:22	g99g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀσκοὺς…ἀσκοὺς	1	These were bags made out of animal skins. They were used for holding wine. If your readers would not be familiar with wineskins, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “leather bags … leather bags”
2:22	fk15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ δὲ μή ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς, καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί	1	Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Use a natural method in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “but if someone actually did, the wine would burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins would be destroyed” or “but were a person to do that, the wine would burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins would be destroyed”
2:22	alse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς	1	Here Jesus implies that the new **wine**, when it ferments, will expand and burst the **wineskins**, which are old and so no longer able to stretch. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when the wine ferments, the wineskins cannot stretch and will burst”
2:22	n0iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wine and the wineskins become useless” or “this destroys the wine and the wineskins”
2:22	dgcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but people put new wine into new wineskins”
2:23	bb93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	Here, the phrase **And it happened {that}** introduces the next event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,” or “One time,”
2:23	u6ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν τοῖς Σάββασιν	1	Here Mark uses the phrase **on the Sabbaths** to indicate that this event occurred on one specific Sabbath day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on one of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”
2:23	gwir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	αὐτὸν & παραπορεύεσθαι	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, was passing”
2:23	ko42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῶν σπορίμων	1	The word **grainfields** refers to places where grain is grown and harvested. This grain is usually ground and made into bread. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of field, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “fields where grain is grown”
2:23	s8rg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤρξαντο ὁδὸν ποιεῖν	1	Here, the phrase **to make a way** means that the disciples were traveling or walking along. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “also began to travel along” or “started to go with him”
2:23	jya1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας	1	Here Mark implies that the disciples ate the **heads of grain** after **picking** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “picking and eating the heads of grain”
2:23	k3pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς στάχυας	1	The **heads** are the topmost part of the **grain** plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant, which are the parts that people eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the tops of the grain plants” or “the edible parts of the grain plants”
2:24	qybi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἴδε	1	Here, the word **Behold** is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the person to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “See” or “Listen:”
2:24	h41a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν?	1	The Pharisees are using the question form to confront Jesus about the behavior of his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “they are doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths.” or “they should certainly not be doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths!”
2:24	ec3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν	1	The Pharisees considered even the small action of picking heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. This kind of work was prohibited on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “are they harvesting grain, which is work that is not lawful to do on the Sabbaths”
2:24	bf8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς Σάββασιν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “on any of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”
2:25-26	g8sf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ & πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπὶ Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς; καὶ ἔδωκεν καὶ τοῖς σὺν αὐτῷ οὖσιν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to show the Pharisees that they should have learned a principle from the story about **David** that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You have not understood what you have read about what David did when he had need and was hungry, he and the ones with him—how he went into the house of God in the time of Abiathar the high priest and ate the loaves of the presence, which is not lawful to eat except for the priests, and he also gave to the ones being with him.”
2:25-26	jyt2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ & πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπὶ Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς; καὶ ἔδωκεν καὶ τοῖς σὺν αὐτῷ οὖσιν?	1	Here Jesus refers to a story about **David** before he became king. The current king, Saul was trying to kill David. So, David ran away to the priest who was serving God at the time, **Abiathar**. David and the men who ran away with him were very hungry, so they asked the Abiathar for food. Abiathar gave them the special bread that was laid out in God’s presence every day, and David and his men ate this bread. You can read this story in [1 Samuel 21:1–6](../1sa/21/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some extra information in your translation or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Have you never read what David did when he had need and was hungry after he and the ones with him escaped from King Saul, who wanted to kill him? He visited the high priest Abiathar, went into the house of God, and ate the loaves of the presence, which was not lawful to eat except for the priests. He also gave some of it to the ones being with him.”
2:25	wxd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the word **you** is plural.
2:25	cjzx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	χρείαν ἔσχεν	1	Here Jesus is implying that David did not have everything that he needed, especially food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he had need of something to eat”
2:26	nion		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	εἰσῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came”
2:26	xeac		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Jesus uses the phrase **the house of God** to refer to the tabernacle, the place where God’s presence was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the tabernacle” or “the sanctuary”
2:26	y57j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως	1	The phrase **the loaves of the presence** refers to loaves of bread that were placed every day on a table in the tabernacle or temple as an offering to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the loaves that were presented to God” or “the loaves of bread that were placed in God’s presence every morning”
2:26	wz3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “which is lawful for only the priests to eat”
2:27	fse5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs	τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο, καὶ οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον	1	Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that God set up the **Sabbath** for the sake of people. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “Humans were made first, and then the Sabbath was set up because of them. It is not true that the Sabbath was set up first, and then humans were made because of it”
2:27	i374		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for man”
2:27	v3mb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἄνθρωπον & ὁ ἄνθρωπος	1	The word **man** represents men and women in general, not one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people … people”
2:27	s2yd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “man was made not for the Sabbath” or “it is not that God made man for the Sabbath”
2:28	wgwu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference that Jesus draws from what he just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “In the end, then”
2:28	kq1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, am”
2:28	twr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Κύριός & καὶ τοῦ Σαββάτου	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a **Lord** who rules over **the Sabbath**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has authority over even the Sabbath” or “rules over even the Sabbath”
3:intro	x969				0	# Mark 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. Jesus’ early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n      * Healing a man on the Sabbath\n3. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)\n      * Jesus ministers to many people (3:7–12)\n      * Jesus appoints the twelve apostles (3:13–19)\n      * Jesus and his family, part one (3:20–21)\n      * Jesus and the scribes debate whether he has a demon (3:22–30)\n      * Jesus and his family, part two (3:31–35)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nIn this chapter, just as in chapter 2, the Pharisees and Jesus are in conflict about the Sabbath. For more information about the Sabbath, see the General Notes to chapter 2.\n\n### Blaspheming against the Spirit\n\nIn [3:29](../03/29.md), Jesus speaks about blaspheming against the Spirit. He indicates that God will forgive all kinds of sins, but he will not forgive people who blaspheme against the Holy Spirit. Jesus says these things because the Pharisees said that he cast out demons by the power of Beelzebul. Jesus implies that he actually cast out demons by the power of the Holy Spirit. So, since the Pharisees have called the Holy Spirit Beelzebul, they have blasphemed or spoken against the Spirit. Christians debate what counts as this kind of blasphemy and why God will not forgive people for it. In your translation, you should not be more specific than Jesus is. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### The parable about the strong man\n\nIn [3:27](../03/27.md), Jesus describes how thieves must subdue and tie up a strong man before they can steal things from his house. Jesus does not directly state how to apply this proverb. However, most Christians think that Satan is like the strong man, and the demons that Jesus casts out are like the strong man’s things. In this case, Jesus is like the thieves who tie up the strong man. Jesus is saying that, since he can cast out demons, it proves that he has subdued and conquered Satan, just as thieves can only steal things after they have subdued the strong man. You should not include this extra information in your translation, but if it would be helpful for your readers, you could include it in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])\n\n### Jesus’ mother and brothers\n\nIn [3:31–35](../03/31.md), Jesus’ mother and brothers arrive and want to talk with Jesus. In response, Jesus says that his disciples, those who do God’s will, are his mother and brother and sister. In other words, Jesus calls his disciples, who are those who do God’s will, his family members. He means that they are as close and important to him as his own family. This is an important metaphor that appears throughout the Bible, so preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### The 12 disciples\n\nThe following are the lists of the 12 disciples in Matthew, Mark, and Luke:\n\nIn [Matthew 10:2–4](../mat/10/02.md):\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn [Mark 3:16–19](../mrk/03/16.md):\n\nSimon (Peter), James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Andrew, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn [Luke 6:14](../luk/06/14.md):\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, Judas son of James, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nThese lists do not always follow the same order or use the same names for the disciples. In that culture, people often had two or three names. For example, it is likely that that Thaddaeus was also named Judas or Jude. So, do not harmonize these lists by using the same sequence or names in each case. You should translate Mark’s list as Mark presents it.\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 3, 4, 5, 13, 20, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
3:1	bm6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
3:1	mjfa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν εἰς συναγωγήν	1	Here Mark implies that this is a **synagogue** that Jesus has already visited, most likely the one in Capernaum (see [1:21](../01/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “again into the synagogue in Capernaum”
3:1	rn8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος, ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα	1	Here Mark introduces a **man** with **a withered hand** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain man was in the synagogue, and he had a withered hand”
3:1	ye6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα	1	This means that the man’s **hand** was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Use a word or phrase that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “having a shriveled hand” or “whose hand was atrophied”
3:2	mw6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	παρετήρουν αὐτὸν, εἰ τοῖς Σάββασιν θεραπεύσει αὐτόν, ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first and second clauses describe. Alternate translation: “And they wanted to accuse him. So, they were watching him closely, if he will heal him on the Sabbaths”
3:2	vr25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρετήρουν αὐτὸν & κατηγορήσωσιν	1	The pronouns **they** and **they** refer to the Pharisees who were there, as [3:6](../03/06.md) shows. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees were watching him closely … they might accuse”
3:2	dw2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς Σάββασιν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day” or “during a Sabbath day”
3:2	q35x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that they would **accuse** Jesus of breaking the Sabbath commandments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might accuse him of wrongdoing” or “they might accuse him of breaking the law of Moses”
3:3	pi5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἔχοντι ξηράν	1	See how you expressed this idea in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “having the shriveled hand” or “whose hand was atrophied”
3:3	nm6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον	1	Here, the implication is that Jesus wanted this man to stand where everyone could see him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Stand up where everyone can see you”
3:4	dujn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & οἱ	1	Just as in [3:2](../03/02.md), the pronouns **them** and **they** refer to the Pharisees who were there, as [3:6](../03/06.md) shows. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to the Pharisees … they”
3:4	mh3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Pharisees. He knows that they would agree with what his question implies. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you realize that it is lawful on the Sabbaths to do good and not to do harm; to save a life and not to kill.” or “Surely you know that it is lawful on the Sabbaths to do good and not to do harm; to save a life and not to kill!”
3:4	zvln		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς Σάββασιν	1	See how you translated this phrase in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “on any of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”
3:4	fodz			ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι	1	Alternate translation: “to help people or to hurt people”
3:4	vz6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “is it lawful on the Sabbaths to save a life or to kill”
3:4	nut4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ψυχὴν σῶσαι	1	Here, the phrase **save a life** refers to preventing a person from dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to rescue from death” or “to keep people from dying”
3:5	x9ln		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετ’ ὀργῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **anger**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in an angry way”
3:5	los0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνλυπούμενος ἐπὶ τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what caused the action, it is clear from the context that it was **the hardness of their heart**. Alternate translation: “the hardness of their heart grieving him”
3:5	thek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hardness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how hard their heart was”
3:5	n4ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	Here, Jesus is speaking of the Pharisees’ **heart** as if it were characterized by **hardness**. He means that the Pharisees are stubborn and refuse to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their stubbornness” or “their unwillingness to listen”
3:5	zr89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “of their hearts”
3:5	itqu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖρα σου	1	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I heal you. Now stretch out your hand!”
3:5	c3qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπεκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored his hand” or “his hand became healthy”
3:6	nmkb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
3:6	nvk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μετὰ τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν συμβούλιον ἐποίουν κατ’ αὐτοῦ	1	The **Herodians** were a group of people who supported the ruler Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a short phrase to describe them. Alternate translation: “were making counsel against him with people who wanted King Herod to continue to rule”
3:6	qu9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μετὰ τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν συμβούλιον ἐποίουν κατ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the phrase **were making counsel with the Herodians against him** indicates that the Pharisees were working together with the Herodians to figure out ways to harm Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were making plans with the Herodians concerning Jesus” or “were coming up with ideas with the Herodians about how they could harm Jesus”
3:7-8	bi1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ πολὺ πλῆθος ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἠκολούθησεν, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας & καὶ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰδουμαίας, καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου, καὶ περὶ Τύρον καὶ Σιδῶνα; πλῆθος πολύ ἀκούοντες ὅσα ἐποίει, ἦλθον πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Here Mark twice uses the phrase **a great multitude**. He could be: (1) distinguishing between two groups, one group from Galilee who **followed** Jesus to the Sea of Galilee, and one group from all the other areas who traveled to meet Jesus by the Sea of Galilee. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to create a verse bridge for these two verses. Alternate translation: “and a great multitude followed from Galilee. And hearing how much he was doing, a great multitude from Judea and from Jerusalem and from Idumea and beyond the Jordan and around Tyre and Sidon came to him” (2) referring twice to the same group of people, who came from all these areas. Alternate translation: “and a great multitude followed from Galilee and from Judea and from Jerusalem and from Idumea and beyond the Jordan and around Tyre and Sidon. That great multitude, hearing how much he was doing, came to him”
3:8	nibm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου	1	Here, the phrase **beyond the Jordan** refers to regions to the east of the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the areas on the east side of the Jordan River”
3:8	mm5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσα ἐποίει	1	Here Mark refers to the powerful and amazing things that Jesus was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the amazing things that he was doing” or “about all the miracles he was doing”
3:8	weie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
3:9-10	ib6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν & πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [3:9](../03/09.md) and [3:10](../03/10.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason why Jesus wants to get into a boat before he gives his disciples instructions about the boat. Alternate translation: “And he healed many, so that as many as had afflictions pressed against him so that they might touch him. So, because of the crowd, he spoke to his disciples so that a small boat might be ready for him, so that the crowd might not press against him”
3:9	tozr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples, ‘Make sure that a small boat is waiting for me because of the crowd, so that they do not press against me.’”
3:9	lmvb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus plans to get into this **small boat** to get away from **the crowd**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a small boat might be ready for him to embark on to get away from the crowd”
3:9	zu5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus is concerned that the **crowd** will **press against him** and crush or injure him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might not press against him and injure him” or “they might not hurt him”
3:10	e86s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Jesus was concerned about people pressing against him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for something, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is why Jesus wanted a boat:” or “Indeed,”
3:10	ywtb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὺς	1	Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”
3:10	qyyv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἶχον μάστιγας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **afflictions**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “were afflicted”
3:10	bkh0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ	1	Here Mark implies that the people in the crowd **pressed** against each other, or were shoving and pushing each other, in order to get to **him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “pressed against each other to reach him” or “shoved each other around”
3:10	ge71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται	1	Here Mark implies that they wanted to **touch** Jesus because they thought that touching him would heal them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that they might touch him and be healed”
3:11	ca5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα	1	Here Mark implies that **the unclean spirits** forced the people whom they were possessing to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were making the people they possessed fall down before him and cry out, saying”
3:11	tful		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ	1	In Mark’s culture, the phrase **falling down before him** refers to kneeling down and putting one’s face close to the ground in front of someone. This was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they were throwing themselves on the ground before him” or “they were lying down before him to show respect”
3:11	ogev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντα	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
3:11	xf41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
3:12	w7to		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	πολλὰ & αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσιν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them much, ‘Do not make me known.’”
3:12	wypa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσιν	1	Here, the phrase **make him known** refers to telling people who Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might not say who he was” or “they might not speak about him”
3:13	zq1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
3:13	dfy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀναβαίνει	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “comes” instead of **goes**. Alternate translation: “he comes up”
3:13	fatx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τὸ ὄρος	1	Mark does not clarify what **mountain** this is or how high up it is. If possible, use a general word for a hill or small mountain without indicating one particular place. Alternate translation: “a high place” or “a small mountain”
3:14	vjl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	δώδεκα	1	Mark is using the number **12** as a noun to mean 12 men. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “12 people”
3:14	v0y4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	οὓς καὶ ἀποστόλους ὠνόμασεν	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **whom he also named apostles**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
3:14	ild2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὦσιν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark means that these **12** men would go wherever Jesus went, listen to what he said, and spend much time with him as his closest disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might go everywhere with him” or “they might always follow him”
3:15	c2wc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχειν ἐξουσίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be authorized”
3:16	ndtw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα: καὶ	1	Here Mark repeats a phrase that he already used in [3:14](../03/14.md). He does not mean that Jesus **appointed the Twelve** again. Rather, he is using this phrase to introduce who these **Twelve** were. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Here are the names of the Twelve that he appointed:”
3:16	ywli		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **And he appointed the Twelve**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
3:16	ozli		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	Mark is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun to refer to Jesus’ closest disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”
3:16	bt0f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον	1	Here Mark introduces the first person in the list of **the Twelve**, and he clarifies that Jesus gave a new name to **Simon**: **Peter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates both that **Simon** is the first in the list of twelve men and that Jesus named him **Peter**. Alternate translation: “and they were Simon, to whom he gave the name Peter”
3:17	puod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τὸν ἀδελφὸν τοῦ Ἰακώβου	1	Mark never says whether **James** or **John** was older, but he mentions **James** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **John** was younger. Alternate translation: “the younger brother of James”
3:17	n1be		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Βοανηργές	1	The word **Boanerges** is a Hebrew word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means at the end of the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.
3:17	n4gy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	υἱοὶ βροντῆς	1	The expression **Sons of** describes people who shares the qualities of something. In this case, the name indicates that James and John share the qualities of **Thunder**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “People Like Thunder” or “Thunder-Like”
3:18	bugz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Θαδδαῖον	1	The word **Thaddaeus** is the name of a man.
3:18	tgmg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	τὸν Καναναῖον	1	**Cananaios** is a word borrowed from Aramaic that describes someone as a “zealot,” that is, someone who is very zealous about something. You will need to decide if you will also borrow this word into your language or if you will translate the meaning. If you borrow the word, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then put the translation in a footnote. If you translate the word’s meaning, **Cananaios** could be: (1) a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the Patriot” (2) a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the Passionate One”
3:19	r3zs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν	1	Mark writes **who also handed him over** to provide some extra information about what Judas did to Jesus later. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “who would later also hand him over”
3:20	d9uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
3:20	qy7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἔρχεται	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, comes”
3:20	whej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes”
3:20	jxr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἶκον	1	This is probably the same **house** that Mark mentioned in [2:1](../02/01.md). See how you expressed the idea there. Alternate translation: “Simon and Andrew’s house” or “his house”
3:20	v0y9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν	1	Here Mark implies that the **crowd** was so large that Jesus and his disciples did not have time, or perhaps even space, to **eat**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were so busy that they could not even eat bread” or “they had no opportunity even to eat bread”
3:20	rq6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἄρτον φαγεῖν	1	Mark is using **bread** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat anything”
3:21	koc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here the phrase **the ones from him** could refer to: (1) Jesus’ relatives, most specifically his mother and brothers, who are the ones who arrive at the house in [3:31](../03/31.md). Alternate translation: “his family” (2) Jesus’ friends from his hometown, Nazareth. Alternate translation: “his friends”
3:21	ar7c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξῆλθον κρατῆσαι αὐτόν; ἔλεγον γὰρ, ὅτι ἐξέστη	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “were saying, ‘He is out of his mind.’ Therefore, they went out to seize him”
3:21	sgba		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came out”
3:21	hjdb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κρατῆσαι αὐτόν	1	Here Mark implies that **the ones from him** intend to compel Jesus to return with them in their custody or control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to take him into their custody” or “to restrain him”
3:21	vqyg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον & ὅτι ἐξέστη	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that he was out of his mind”
3:21	uyl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1	The pronoun **they** could refer to: (1) **the ones from him**. Alternate translation: “the ones from him were saying” or “these ones were saying” (2) people in general. Alternate translation: “people were saying”
3:21	mf5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξέστη	1	Here, the clause **He is out of his mind** means that these people think that Jesus is insane, that is, acting irrationally. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is crazy” or “He is acting irrationally”
3:22	e45n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οἱ γραμματεῖς, οἱ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων καταβάντες ἔλεγον	1	Here Mark uses the phrase **having come down from Jerusalem** to distinguish these **scribes** from any other scribes. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “the scribes, the ones having come down from Jerusalem, were saying”
3:22	a971		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	καταβάντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone down”
3:22	egv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον, ὅτι Βεελζεβοὺλ ἔχει; καὶ, ὅτι ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων, ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια	1	It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “were saying that he had Beelzebul and that by the ruler of the demons he was casting out the demons.”
3:22	prj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Βεελζεβοὺλ ἔχει	1	Here the scribes mean that Jesus is possessed or controlled by **Beelzebul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is possessed by Beelzebul” or “Beelzebul possesses him”
3:22	mhmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων	1	Here the scribes mean that Jesus has power from **the ruler of the demons** to cast out demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “By the power of the ruler of the demons” or “As he is empowered by the ruler of the demons”
3:22	t3ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων	1	The phrase **the ruler of the demons** refers to the devil, that is, **Beelzebul**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Beelzebul, the ruler of the demons,”
3:23	iuqw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the scribes and the people who were nearby. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the scribes and the rest of the people” or “the people who were nearby”
3:23	q8f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the scribes. The question shows that it does not make any sense for **Satan** to cast out **Satan**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Satan cannot cast out Satan.” or “It makes no sense for Satan to cast out Satan!”
3:23	xb13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν	1	In both places, **Satan** represents people who act by the power of **Satan**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are Satan’s followers able to cast out Satan’s followers” or “are those who act by Satan’s power able to cast out others who also act by Satan’s power”
3:24	j5sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη	1	To teach the people, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: If a kingdom has been divided against itself, that kingdom is not able to stand”
3:24	my56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη	1	Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if a **kingdom** were **divided against itself**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine a kingdom that has been divided against itself. That kingdom is not able to stand”
3:24	b4z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ	1	Here, the word **kingdom** represents the people who live in that kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people in one kingdom have been divided against each other”
3:24	mc3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacks itself”
3:24	k3bz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι	1	Here, the phrase **is not able to stand** means that the **kingdom** will not exist much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will fall” or “will no longer exist”
3:25	dm6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι	1	To teach the people, Jesus offers a second story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to another illustration: If a house has been divided against itself, that house will not be able to stand”
3:25	dlev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι	1	Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if a **house** were **divided against itself**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine a house that has been divided against itself. That house will not be able to stand”
3:25	zcr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ	1	Here, the word **house** represents the people who live in that house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people in one house have been divided against each other”
3:25	jagu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacks itself”
3:25	w62b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ δυνήσεται & σταθῆναι	1	Here, the phrase **will not be able to stand** means that the **house** will not exist much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will fall” or “will no longer exist”
3:26	w7na		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη, οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει	1	Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if **Satan rose up against himself and was divided**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine that Satan rose up against himself and was divided. In that case, he would not be able to stand, but he would have an end”
3:26	g3ob		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη	1	Jesus is using **Satan** to represent Satan and his demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Satan and the demons that obey him rose up against themselves and were divided”
3:26	niio		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη	1	The phrases **rose up against himself** and **was divided** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single clause. Alternate translation: “was divided against himself”
3:26	vc3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐμερίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacked himself”
3:26	vif7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει	1	The clauses **he is not able to stand** and **he has an end** mean similar things. The first clause states the meaning negatively, and the second clause states the meaning positively. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second clause is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses. Alternate translation: “he is not able to stand; yes, he has an end” or “he has his end”
3:26	df2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ δύναται στῆναι	1	Here, the phrase **is not able to stand** means that **Satan** will not have authority or power much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will no longer have power” or “he will not remain in control”
3:26	m3pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τέλος ἔχει	1	Here, the word **end** refers to a time when Satan no longer has power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his rule ends” or “his authority fails”
3:27	mvr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ἀλλ’ οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς	1	To teach the people, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But listen to this story: No one is able”
3:27	rzbb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what is true in contrast to the hypothetical situations he has been using to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces what is true in contrast to a hypothetical situation, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “However, as it really is,”
3:27	x9lk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ εἰσελθὼν τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δήσῃ	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “no one, unless he has first bound the strong man, is able, entering into the house of that strong man, to steal his belongings”
3:27	i7tr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	μὴ πρῶτον & δήσῃ & διαρπάσει	1	Although the term **he** in both these places is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “that person has not first bound … that person will plunder”
3:27	o503		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει	1	Here, the word **he** refers to the person who is stealing. The word **his** refers to the strong man. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the thief will plunder the strong man’s”
3:28-29	m0s5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	πάντα ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν & ὃς δ’ ἂν βλασφημήσῃ εἰς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only sin or blasphemy that will not be forgiven the sons of men is the blasphemy against the Holy Spirit. Whoever does that” or “most sins and blasphemies, as much as they blaspheme, will be forgiven the sons of men, but the blasphemy against the Spirit will not be forgiven. Whoever has done that”
3:28	w02f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the crowd, the word **you** is singular.
3:28	x85u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντα ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “God will forgive the sons of men for all the sins and the blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme”
3:28	moeq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντα ἀφεθήσεται & τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν	1	Here Jesus is indicating that God forgives all kinds of **sins** and **blasphemies**, not that God will forgive every single sin or blasphemy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all sins and blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, can be forgiven” or “all kinds of sins and blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven men”
3:28	vbwa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πάντα ἀφεθήσεται & τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sins** and **blasphemies**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “all sinful and blasphemous things, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven” or “whenever anyone sins or blasphemes in any way, it will be forgiven”
3:28	gg74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀφεθήσεται & αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν	1	The expression **whatever they may blaspheme** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “all the blasphemies will be forgiven”
3:28	p6sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, the phrase **the sons of men** refers to people in general, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men and women” or “humans”
3:29	ips3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔχει ἄφεσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will not be forgiven”
3:29	kx41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	Here, the phrase **to eternity** means that something lasts forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “forever”
3:29	zznr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἔνοχός & αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **guilty of an eternal sin**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “deserving of eternal judgment.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
3:29	xea7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος	1	Here Jesus means that the **sin** has **eternal** consequences. In other words, the person who commits this **sin** will always be guilty for it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a sin with eternal consequences” or “eternally of this sin”
3:30	yt1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Here, the word **because** introduces a reason why Jesus gave the teaching that Mark quotes in [3:23–29](../03/23.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces this kind of reason. Alternate translation: “which things he said because” or “and the reason for his teaching was that”
3:30	etf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον, πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that he had an unclean spirit”
3:30	sfa2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει	1	Here the scribes meant that they thought that Jesus was possessed or controlled by **an unclean spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is possessed by an unclean spirit” or “An unclean spirit possesses him”
3:31	c8oa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
3:31	gef8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	These were Jesus' younger **brothers**. They were sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you could use it here.
3:31	xxfh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go”
3:31	d6w3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔξω στήκοντες	1	Here Mark implies that they are **standing outside** the house that Jesus is in, most likely the house mentioned in [3:20](../03/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “standing outside the house” or “standing outside the place where Jesus was teaching”
3:31	pu1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέστειλαν πρὸς αὐτὸν καλοῦντες αὐτόν	1	Here Mark means that Jesus’ mother and brothers sent a person to Jesus to ask him to come out and meet them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they sent a messenger to him to summon him” or “they had someone go in and tell him to come out”
3:32	n20m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου, ἔξω ζητοῦσίν σε	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they say to him that his mother and his mothers were seeking him outside”
3:32	dkbm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word **Behold** is intended to draw the attention of Jesus and to ask him to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks someone to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Excuse me”
3:32	tivd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	οἱ ἀδελφοί σου	1	See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md).
3:32	kucs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	οἱ ἀδελφοί σου	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **your brothers**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “your brothers and your sisters.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
3:32	lbfz			ἔξω ζητοῦσίν σε	1	Alternate translation: “want to see you outside” or “are outside, and they want to talk with you”
3:33	qe8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου?	1	Jesus is using the question form to teach his audience about whom he considers to be part of his family. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Since Jesus answers the question in [3:34–35](../03/34.md), you should not include an implied answer here. Alternate translation: “I will inform you about whom I call my mother and my brothers.” or “Let me tell you whom I love as if they were my mother or my brothers.”
3:33	j6u0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	οἱ ἀδελφοί μου	1	See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md).
3:34	j305		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ μου	1	Here, the word **Behold** indicates that the audience should look where Jesus looked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Consider these people to be my mother” or “These are my mother”
3:34	aw65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου	1	Here Jesus speaks of **the ones sitting in a circle around him** as if they were his **mother** and **brothers**. He means that he considers them to be part of his family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning of the metaphor more explicitly. Alternate translation: “those whom I call my mother and my brothers” or “the people I love as if they were my mother and my brothers”
3:34	bouy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	οἱ ἀδελφοί μου	1	See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md).
3:35	wmif		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation concerning why Jesus can call the people who are sitting around him his mother and brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “I say that because”
3:35	dr45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God desires”
3:35	yr9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν	1	Here Jesus speaks of everyone who does God’s will as if they were his **brother and sister and mother**. He means that he considers them to be part of his family. Express the idea as you did in the previous verse ([3:34](../03/34.md)). Alternate translation: “I call this one my brother and sister and mother” or “this is a person whom I love as if he or she were my brother and sister and mother”
4:intro	f5ua				0	# Mark 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)\n      * The parable of the sower (4:1–9)\n      * Jesus explains the parable of the sower (4:10–20)\n      * Jesus teaches about secrets and knowledge (4:21–25)\n      * The parable of the seeds growing by themselves (4:26–29)\n      * The parable of the mustard seed (4:30–32)\n      * Summary statement (4:33–34)\n      * Jesus calms a storm (4:35–41)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [4:12](../04/12.md), which is a quotation from [Isaiah 6:9–10](../isa/06/09.md).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Farming\n\nJesus refers to several different farming practices in this chapter. In his culture, farmers often threw seeds over their fields, a process called sowing. After throwing the seeds, they would use a tool called a plow to cover the seeds with dirt. Then, they would water and take care of the seeds until they sprouted and grew. Finally, when the plants produced grain or other kinds of crops, they would cut down the plants, separate the edible parts from the inedible parts, and store the edible parts in a safe place. See the notes on the verses in which Jesus discusses farming practices for specific information and translation options.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Parables\n\nThroughout this chapter, Jesus uses several parables to teach the crowds and his disciples. Each parable is a short story that includes a specific lesson. Jesus uses parables to teach so that people who already know his message will learn more but people who do not know his message will not learn anything (see [4:11–12](../04/11.md)). Jesus explains one of the parables, but he does not explain any of the others. Possible explanations for each parable are included below, but only for help in translation. Your translation should not directly explain the meaning of any parable more than Jesus does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])\n\n* The parable of the sower—In [4:3–9](../04/03.md), Jesus tells a story about a man who sows seed and about what happens to the seed. Jesus explains this parable in [4:14–20](../04/14.md). Even with this explanation, Christians debate who the sower is, what the seed represents, and what the different areas in the field represent. The sower could be Jesus himself, God, or anyone who preaches the gospel. The seed could be the gospel or the person who hears the gospel. The different areas in the field could be regions or areas where people hear the gospel, different kinds of people, or different ways of responding to the gospel. Most likely, the seed and the area in the field together describe what happens when people respond to the gospel in these four ways.\n\n* The parable of the seeds growing by themselves—In [4:26–29](../04/26.md), Jesus tells a story about a farmer who sows seed. The seed sprouts, grows, and produces a crop all by itself, and the farmer does not know how it happens. However, when the crop is ready, he harvests it. Most likely, Jesus is describing how God’s kingdom grows and expands, even without help from people. By the time God judges everyone, which is like a harvest, the kingdom will be very large and productive, even though people do not always know how that happens.\n\n* The parable of the mustard seed—In [4:30–32](../04/30.md), Jesus tells a story about how a very small seed (a mustard seed) grows into a very large plant. Most likely, he is describing how his group of followers was very small but will eventually become very large. Jesus mentions that birds nest in the shadow of this large plant. Some people think that Jesus is referring to passages like [Ezekiel 17:23](../ezk/17/23.md), which could suggest that the birds represent Gentiles who become part of God’s kingdom. Others think that the detail about the birds simply illustrates how large the plant is. If possible, your translation should allow for all of these interpretations.\n\n### Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMost of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in teaching that Jesus gives to his disciples and to the crowds. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
4:1	q0xe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “One day,”
4:1	cqq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὄχλος πλεῖστος	1	Mark says **the largest crowd** here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “a huge crowd” or “an enormous crowd”
4:1	ufxn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνάγεται πρὸς αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered to him” or “came to listen to him”
4:1	i95e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ	1	In Jesus’ culture, teachers usually **sat down** when they were going to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sat down on the sea to instruct them” or “sat down on the sea as a teacher does”
4:1	bzp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ	1	Here Mark means that Jesus sat down in the boat, which was floating **on the sea**. Jesus did not sit directly on top of the water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the boat as it was on the sea” or “in it”
4:1	fnuh			πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	Alternate translation: “on the shore”
4:2	h2a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “here is what he taught:”
4:3	vqh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων	1	To teach the people in the crowd, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story: Behold, the sower went out”
4:3	gmdi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the words **Listen** and **Behold** draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these words with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Picture this:” or “Pay attention to this:”
4:3	w0ng		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων	1	Here Jesus introduces a **sower** as a character in his story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a sower. He went out”
4:4	xqj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ ἐγένετο	1	Here, the phrase **And it happened that** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next action, or you could leave **And it happened that** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
4:4	zc07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ σπείρειν	1	While there are many ways to sow or plant seeds, here Jesus is describing a practice in which farmers pick up handfuls of seed and throw them so that they are scattered all over the top of the soil. This method is a quick and easy way to plant seeds in large fields, but some seeds land on ground that is not good for them to grow in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit what kind of sowing this is. Alternate translation: “as he threw the seeds over the ground” or “as he scattered the seeds over the field”
4:4	si37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, καὶ ἦλθεν τὰ πετεινὰ καὶ κατέφαγεν αὐτό	1	Here Jesus implies that the seeds that fall **beside the road** do not sink into the ground. Instead, they just sit on top of the hard-packed dirt by the **road** and are unprotected from birds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “some fell on the hard ground beside the road, and the birds came and easily devoured them”
4:4	w50s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὃ	1	Jesus is using the adjective **some** as a noun to mean some of the seeds. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some seed”
4:4	ob8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὰ πετεινὰ	1	The phrase **the birds** represents any birds, not particular birds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “birds”
4:4	j2w9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτό	1	Here, although the pronoun **it** is singular, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “them”
4:5	wuw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλο	1	Jesus is using the adjective **other** as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seed that did not fall beside the road. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seed”
4:5	w3g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ πετρῶδες, ὅπου οὐκ εἶχεν γῆν πολλήν	1	Here Jesus describes an area that has a thin layer of soil on top of a layer of rocks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes this kind of area. Alternate translation: “a thin layer of soil on top of rocks” or “a rocky area, where there was very little soil”
4:5	uhlr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἄλλο & οὐκ εἶχεν & ἐξανέτειλεν & τὸ μὴ ἔχειν	1	In this verse, the word **other** and the word **it** throughout the verse are singular in form, but they refer to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “others … they did not have … they sprang up … they did not have”
4:5	hyj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εὐθὺς ἐξανέτειλεν διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν βάθος γῆς	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because it did not have deep soil, immediately it sprang up”
4:5	u5rz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξανέτειλεν	1	Here, the phrase **sprang up** refers to how plants sprout or begin to grow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “it came up” or “it began to grow”
4:6	z2el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος	1	Here, the phrase **the sun rose** refers to the sun coming up over the horizon in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the sun came up” or “the sun began to shine in the morning”
4:6	bm38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκαυματίσθη & τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν ἐξηράνθη	1	Here, although the pronoun **it** is singular throughout the verse, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed in [4:5](../04/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “they were scorched … they had no root, they withered”
4:6	ee49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκαυματίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the sun. Alternate translation: “the sun scorched it”
4:6	yzk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν	1	Jesus says **no root** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it had almost no root” or “it had very small roots”
4:7	dfph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἄλλο & αὐτό & οὐκ ἔδωκεν	1	In this verse, the word **other** and the word **it** throughout the verse are singular in form, but they refer to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “others … them … they did not produce”
4:7	bw62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλο	1	Jesus is using the adjective **other** as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seed that did not fall beside the road or on rocky soil. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated the word in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seed”
4:7	f0j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ συνέπνιξαν αὐτό	1	Here Jesus means that the **thorns** grew quickly and took all the nutrients, water, and sunlight, so the farmer’s plants could not grow well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the thorns grew very large and crowded it out” or “the thorns grew faster and kept it from growing well”
4:7	fgz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καρπὸν οὐκ ἔδωκεν	1	Here the word **fruit** refers to the crop that the plants that grew from the seeds should have produced. Since the farmer is sowing wheat seeds, this crop would have been more wheat seeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it did not produce more seeds” or “when it sprouted it did not produce a harvest”
4:7	pj8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	καρπὸν	1	Here, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fruits”
4:8	oo4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλα	1	Jesus is using the adjective **others** as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seeds that did not fall beside the road, on rocky soil, or onto thorns. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seeds”
4:8	u327		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἐδίδου καρπὸν, ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ αὐξανόμενα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the phrases **growing up and being increased** describe something that happened before what the phrase **it was giving fruit** describes. Alternate translation: “growing up and being increased, it was giving fruit”
4:8	b0of		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐδίδου καρπὸν	1	Here the word **fruit** refers to the crop that the plants that grew from the seeds produced. Since the farmer is sowing wheat seeds, this crop would be more seeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it was producing more seeds” or “it sprouted and produced a harvest”
4:8	isto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐδίδου	1	Here, although the pronoun **it** is singular, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “they were giving”
4:8	yzp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	καρπὸν	1	Here, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fruits”
4:8	c0r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ αὐξανόμενα	1	The terms **growing up** and **being increased** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “growing very large” or “quickly increasing in size”
4:8	cukq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐξανόμενα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “increasing”
4:8	ym3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	Here Jesus means that each of the plants produced either **30**, **60**, or **100** new seeds. Jesus does not mean that there were only three plants. Scholars estimate that these numbers of seeds are very good in Jesus’ time period, although not impossible or unheard of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “some plants were producing 30 seeds, and some plants were producing 60 seeds, and other plants were producing 100 seeds” or “they were bearing many times more than the farmer planted: one group of plants 30 times more, and one group of plants 60 times more, and one group of plants 100 times more”
4:8	d5q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	Jesus is using the number **one** as a noun to mean one of the plants. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “one plant was bearing 30, and one plant, 60, and one plant, 100”
4:8	v3sr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one was bearing 60, and one was bearing 100”
4:9	p2us		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	Here, the phrase **ears to hear** represents the willingness to understand and obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Whoever wishes to understand, let him understand and obey” or “Whoever can listen to me should pay attention”
4:9	qxy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, not about other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person plural here. Alternate translation: “You who have ears to hear should hear” or “If you have ears to hear, then hear”
4:9	f0ty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ἀκουέτω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he should hear”
4:9	fr1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀκουέτω	1	Although the term **him** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “let that person hear”
4:10	u2nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτε ἐγένετο κατὰ μόνας	1	The phrase **he was alone** does not mean that there was no one at all with Jesus. Rather, it means that the crowds were gone, and Jesus was only with the 12 disciples and some of his other close followers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the crowds left” or “when the crowds were gone”
4:10	nlf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἱ περὶ αὐτὸν	1	Here, the phrase **the ones around him** refers to disciples who were near Jesus at the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the disciples who were near him”
4:10	kqcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”
4:10	hvgd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἠρώτων αὐτὸν & τὰς παραβολάς	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “were asking him, ‘Please tell us about the parables’”
4:11	t9ee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δέδοται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has given”
4:11	rs81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ μυστήριον & τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **the mystery** that is about **the kingdom of God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the mystery concerning the kingdom of God”
4:11	q2az		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκείνοις & τοῖς ἔξω	1	Here Jesus speaks of people who are not his disciples as if they were **outside**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those, the ones who are not my disciples”
4:11	espn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται	1	Here Jesus implies that **everything** is what is he teaches, and he only teaches **in parables**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I teach is in parables” or “I use parables whenever I teach anything”
4:12	c18b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus uses parables when teaching people who are not his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “which is true in order that” or “and that is so that”
4:12	e33y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν; καὶ ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι καὶ μὴ συνιῶσιν; μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν καὶ ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “so that, as the Scriptures say, looking, they may look but may not see, and hearing, they may hear but may not understand, lest they might turn back, and it might be forgiven to them”
4:12	ydqt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἵνα	1	Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Isaiah 6:9–10](../isa/06/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that, in the words of one of the prophets,” or “so that, as Isaiah the prophet wrote in the Scriptures,”
4:12	p4fv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέποντες, βλέπωσι & ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι	1	Here the author of the quotation repeats the words **look** and **hear** in order to emphasize that the people really do **look** and **hear**. If your language can repeat words for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use that construction here in your translation. Otherwise, you could express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “They will certainly look … they will certainly hear” or “They will indeed look … they will indeed hear”
4:12	p9yr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	The author of the quotation is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. So, to **turn back** would be to start listening to and obeying God again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might start obeying God again”
4:12	g14p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “they might receive forgiveness” or “God might give them forgiveness”
4:13	fs1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke and teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You do not understand this parable. Because of that, you will not understand all the parables.” or “If you do not understand this parable, you cannot understand all the parables!”
4:14	m72p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει	1	Here Jesus speaks about what **the word** as if it were what the **sower sows** in the parable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what the sower sows is like the word”
4:14	xdaj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον σπείρει	1	See how you translated “sow” in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “throws the word like seeds over the ground” or “scatters the word like seeds over the field”
4:14	rp6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:15	j8ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next topic, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,”
4:15	p68u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗτοι & εἰσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν	1	Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown **beside the road**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happens to some people is like what happened to the seeds that were sown beside the road”
4:15	jzok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σπείρεται ὁ λόγος & τὸν ἐσπαρμένον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the actions, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone is sowing the word … that someone sowed”
4:15	xea4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος & τὸν λόγον	1	Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel … the gospel”
4:15	gcuh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὐθὺς ἔρχεται ὁ Σατανᾶς, καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐσπαρμένον εἰς αὐτούς	1	Here Jesus speaks about the gospel as if it were seeds that had been **sown in** people. He speaks of **Satan** as if he were a bird that swoops down and **takes away** the seeds. Since these figures of speech connect to the parable that Jesus told, if possible you should preserve them or express the ideas in simile form. Alternate translation: “Satan immediately comes like a bird and takes away the word, which had been sown like seeds in them”
4:16	jm75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ & ὁμοίως	1	Here, the phrase **And similarly** indicates that Jesus is about to describe what happens to other people and that what happens is similar to what happened to the people he described in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a similar event or experience. Alternate translation: “Likewise” or “In a similar way”
4:16	ty3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	οὗτοί εἰσιν & οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι; οἳ	1	Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were **sown on the rocky ground**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “what happened to the seeds having been sown on the rocky ground is like what happens to those who”
4:16	d7ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σπειρόμενοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”
4:16	l3oe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ πετρώδη	1	Here, just as in [4:5](../04/05.md), Jesus refers to an area that has a thin layer of soil on top of a layer of rocks. Express the idea as you did in that verse. Alternate translation: “a thin layer of soil on top of rocks” or “a rocky area”
4:16	gdq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:16	fcfj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ χαρᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “joyfully”
4:17	s057		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **and** introduces what happens to these people in contrast with how they at first received the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
4:17	p5fr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιροί εἰσιν	1	Here Jesus speaks about these people as if they were the plants in the parable that had **no root** and were only **temporary** since they withered when the sun rose. Since this figure of speech connects to the parable that Jesus told, if possible you should preserve it or express the ideas in simile form. Alternate translation: “they are like plants with no roots that do not live for long”
4:17	s5mh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οὐκ & ῥίζαν	1	Here, just as in [4:6](../04/06.md), Jesus says **no root** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “almost no root” or “very small roots”
4:17	mwg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	γενομένης θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **tribulation** and **persecution**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “when they are afflicted or persecuted”
4:17	hqvw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:17	cazb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σκανδαλίζονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they stumble”
4:17	t21w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκανδαλίζονται	1	Here, Jesus speaks of ceasing to believe the gospel as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the stop believing” or “they cease to trust the good news”
4:18	uu9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρόμενοι	1	Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown **into the thorns**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happened to the seeds having been sown into the thorns is like what happens to others”
4:18	wlab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σπειρόμενοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”
4:18	o3pb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:19	glok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **and** introduces what happens to these people in contrast with how they received the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
4:19	wa3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου, καὶ αἱ περὶ τὰ λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **worries**, **deceitfulness**, and **desires**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they worry about this age and are deceived by riches and desire other things. These things”
4:19	r7ez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **worries** that are related to **this age**. In other words, the **worries** are about things and problems that exist in **this age** or world. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worries about things in this age” or “the worries about what happens in this age”
4:19	k04f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **riches** that are characterized by **deceitfulness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “deceitful riches” or “riches that deceive”
4:19	g1v0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰσπορευόμεναι	1	Here Jesus speaks as if **the worries of the age and the deceitfulness of riches and the desires concerning other things** were people who could be **entering in** a place. He means that these things begin to be part of these people’s lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which these people start to experience” or “which characterize these people’s lives”
4:19	s7s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνπνίγουσιν τὸν λόγον καὶ ἄκαρπος γίνεται	1	Here Jesus continues to speak about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown into the thorns. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “prevent the word from being effective, just as the thorns choked the seeds and made them unfruitful”
4:19	zg3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:20	axh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες; οἵτινες ἀκούουσιν τὸν λόγον καὶ παραδέχονται καὶ καρποφοροῦσιν, ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	Here Jesus speaks about what happens to this person as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown **on the good soil** and produced crops of various sizes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happened to the seeds sown on the good soil is like what happens to the one hearing the word and receiving it. That person will be like a seed that bears fruit—one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100”
4:20	tdwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σπαρέντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”
4:20	cxfw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:20	xbq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	καρποφοροῦσιν	1	Here, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “bear fruits”
4:20	pwiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	Here Jesus means that each of the plants produced either 30, 60, or 100 new seeds. Jesus does not mean that there were only three plants. Scholars estimate that these numbers of seeds are very good in Jesus’ time period, although not impossible or unheard of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. See how you expressed the idea in [4:8](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “some producing 30 seeds, and some producing 60 seeds, and some producing 100 seeds”
4:20	d3r7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one was bearing 30, and one was bearing 60, and one was bearing 100”
4:20	a9yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν	1	Jesus is using the number **one** as a noun to mean one of the plants. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “one plant, 30, and one plant, 60, and one plant, 100”
4:21	enzz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) all the people who were nearby, including both the disciples and the crowds. Alternate translation: “to the disciples and the crowds” or “everyone who was with him” (2) just the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”
4:21	nn7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν τεθῇ?	1	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “The lamp does not come so that it might be put under a basket or under the bed but so that it might be put on the lampstand.” or “The lamp certainly does not come so that it might be put under a basket or under the bed! No, it comes so that it might be put on the lampstand!”
4:21	l79p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν τεθῇ	1	The words **The lamp**, **the basket**, **the bed**, and **the lampstand** represent lamps, baskets, beds, and lampstands in general, not one particular lamp, basket, bed, or lampstand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Lamps do not come so that they might be put under baskets or under beds, do they? Is it not so that they might be put on lampstands”
4:21	zzw7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος	1	Here Jesus speaks as if the **lamp** were a person who could **come**. He means that someone lights the lamp and brings it into a house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The lamp is not lit … is it” or “The lamp is not brought into a house … is it”
4:21	dkq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τεθῇ & οὐχ ἵνα & τεθῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone might put it … Is it not so that someone might put it”
4:21	u7lq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον	1	A **basket** is a large circular container that stores food or other items. If someone put a lamp under this kind of container, it would completely hide the light from the lamp. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “in a box” or “under a container that hides its light”
4:21	y7f9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην	1	A **bed** is a piece of furniture that people would lie on when they were eating or sleeping. Most likely, this kind of **bed** had short legs that raised it off the floor. If someone put a lamp under this kind of furniture, it would hide the light from the lamp. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “under a couch” or “under furniture”
4:21	gc4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν	1	Here Jesus implies that the lamp can illuminate a large area when it is on a **lampstand**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the lampstand to that it illuminates the whole room” or “on the lampstand where it lights up the area”
4:22	pjxi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of the illustration that Jesus gave in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “And so,”
4:22	ov23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs	οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that things that are **hidden** or **secret** only in order that they might **be revealed** or **come into visibility**. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “things are not hidden except so that they might be revealed. Things have not become secret except so that they might come into visibility”
4:22	kc6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses into one. Alternate translation: “it is not hidden except so that it might be revealed; yes, it has not become secret except so that it might come into visibility” or “it is not hidden except so that it will come into visibility”
4:22	y5kn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making statements here and then contradicting them, you could reword this sentence to avoid using exception clauses. Alternate translation: “it is only hidden so that it might be revealed, and it has only become secret so that it might come into visibility”
4:22	hou4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the actions, you could: (1) use indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “they do not hide it except so that they might reveal it, nor do they make it secret except so that they might bring it into visibility” (2) indicate that God did them. Alternate translation: “God has not hidden it except so that he might reveal it, nor has he made it secret except so that he might bring it into visibility”
4:22	x0dp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ & ἐστιν & οὐδὲ ἐγένετο	1	The pronoun **it** in both places refers generally to anything. Jesus may more specifically have in mind the meaning of his preaching or the kingdom of God. However, since Jesus uses a general proverb form, if possible you also should use a general form that could refer to many things. Alternate translation: “nothing is … nothing has become” or “something is not … nor has something become”
4:22	h8pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **visibility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “it might become visible”
4:22	qzfx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	Here, the phrase **it will come into visibility** means that something will be revealed or become known. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it will be known”
4:23	k1a8			εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	See how you translated the similar sentence in [4:9](../04/09.md).
4:24	r2r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Here, just as in [4:21](../04/21.md), the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) all the people who were nearby, including both the disciples and the crowds. Alternate translation: “to the disciples and the crowds” or “everyone who was with him” (2) just the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”
4:24	d1bs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέπετε	1	Here Jesus speaks as if people who **Watch** things that they **hear**. He means that they need to pay attention to what they **hear**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to”
4:24	en93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs	ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb. He could be using it to teach: (1) that people learn and understand only whatever they chose to listen carefully to. Alternate translation: “Whatever you pay attention to is what you will learn and know” or “How you listen shows what you will know and understand” (2) that people eventually experience for themselves how they have treated other people. Alternate translation: “what you give to others is what you will get and acquire in return” or “what you do to others will be done to you”
4:24	zis1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **measure**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you measure”
4:24	c4xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God will measure it to you, and he will add it to you”
4:24	lqor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	In both places, the word **it** refers to what **you measure**. Jesus is speaking in general about anything that people **measure**, so you should avoid making the phrase specific. Alternate translation: “the same thing will be measured to you, and it will be added to you” or “that very thing will be measured to you, and it will be added to you”
4:24	sbmk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν	1	Here Jesus uses the phrase **will be added to you** to indicate that God will give all what is **measured**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it will be given to you”
4:25	xmeh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Jesus said in the previous verse about paying careful attention to what one hears. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is what I mean:” or “To put it another way,”
4:25	nkth		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs	ὃς & ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ; καὶ ὃς οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that people who have something usually gain more of it, while people who have very little usually lose everything. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “people who have things receive more, and people who do not have things lose what they used to have”
4:25	arv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃς & ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ; καὶ ὃς οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus implies that what the person has or does not have is knowledge or understanding about the good news that Jesus proclaims. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he who has understanding, it will be given to him, and he who does not have understanding, even what he has will be taken away from him” or “he who has knowledge about the gospel, more will be given to him, and he who does not have knowledge about the gospel, even what knowledge he has will be taken away from him”
4:25	i24l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται & ἀρθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God will give … God will take away”
4:25	jfog		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ὃς & αὐτῷ & ὃς οὐκ ἔχει & ἔχει & αὐτοῦ	1	Although the terms **he** and **him** are masculine in this verse, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “the person who … to that person … the person who does not have … that person … him or her”
4:25	oceg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **and** introduces a person **who does not have** in contrast to the person **who has**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
4:25	emrz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὃς οὐκ ἔχει	1	Jesus says **he who does not have** here as a generalization for emphasis. It is clear in the second half of the sentence that the person did have something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “he who has almost nothing” or “he who does not have much”
4:26	n1mq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	To teach his audience, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story. Thus is the kingdom of God: As a man throws seed on the ground”
4:26	r5n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: ὡς ἄνθρωπος	1	Jesus is saying that the **kingdom of God** is like **a man** who throws seed on the ground. The following verses will give further information about this comparison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that introduces this kind of comparison. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God is like a man who”
4:26	htar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1	Here and in the following verses, Jesus tells a story about a specific **man**. It is not important for the story whether the person is a man or a woman. If you have a form that refers to any person without identifying a gender, you could use it here. Otherwise, you could identify the person as a man, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “a person”
4:26	in2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	While there are many ways to sow or plant seeds, here Jesus is describing a practice in which a farmer picks up handfuls of **seed** and **throws** them so that they are scattered all over the top of the soil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what the **man** is doing. Alternate translation: “sows the seed on the earth” or “scatters the seeds over the field”
4:26	gd9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τὸν σπόρον	1	Here, the word **seed** is singular in form, but it refers to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “the seeds”
4:27	b0us		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καθεύδῃ καὶ ἐγείρηται, νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν	1	Here Jesus means that the farmer **sleeps** at **night** and **gets up** when it is **day**. This indicates that the farmer lives a normal life and does what he normally does over a period of many days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he sleeps at night and gets up in the morning each day” or “he lives a normal life over the next days”
4:27	dgym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ σπόρος	1	See how you translated **the seed** in [4:26](../04/26.md). Alternate translation: “the seeds”
4:27	pul0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς	1	Here Jesus implies that the farmer does not understand the process by which **the seed sprouts and grows**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “how the seed does that” or “the way in which that happens”
4:27	yqr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτός	1	Jesus uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that the farmer **does not know**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “he indeed”
4:28	b4xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ γῆ καρποφορεῖ	1	Here, Jesus speaks of **The soil** as if it were a person who could produce **a crop**. He means that the plants grow out of the **soil** and produce **a crop**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The crop grows from the soil” or “Each plant sprouts out of the soil to produce a crop”
4:28	dcwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτομάτη	1	Here, the phrase **of its own accord** indicates that the **soil** produced the crop without help or assistance from anyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by itself” or “without any help”
4:28	cew8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	χόρτον	1	Here, the word **blade** refers to a leaf of the grain plant. This is the first part of the plant that comes up through the soil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a leaf” or “a sprout”
4:28	i7lq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	στάχυν & τῷ στάχυϊ	1	The **head** is the topmost part of the grain plant. The **head** holds the **mature grain** or seeds of the plant, which are the parts that people eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the top of the grain plant … the top of the grain plant” or “the edible part of the grain plant … the edible part of the grain plant”
4:28	gesi			πλήρης σῖτον	1	Alternate translation: “full-grown grain” or “grain that is ready to eat”
4:29	s2cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	παραδοῖ ὁ καρπός	1	Here, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits, or seeds of grain, as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “grain seeds hand over”
4:29	hepg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παραδοῖ ὁ καρπός	1	Here, the clause **the fruit hands over** means that the crop of grain is ripe and ready to be used for food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the fruit is ripe” or “the fruit is ready”
4:29	hdp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εὐθὺς ἀποστέλλει τὸ δρέπανον, ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because the harvest has come, he immediately sends the sickle”
4:29	ah9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ δρέπανον	1	Here, **the sickle** represents workers who use sickles to harvest the grain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people with sickles” or “workers who use sickles to harvest the crop”
4:29	yd1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	δρέπανον	1	A **sickle** is a tool with a curved blade that agricultural workers use to cut down standing crops in order to harvest them. If your readers would not be familiar with what a sickle is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “sharp harvesting tool”
4:29	hx6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός	1	Here, the clause **the harvest has come** means that it is the right time for **the harvest** to begin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is harvest time” or “it is the right time for the harvest”
4:30	ivk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to introduce what he is about to teach. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We will now compare the kingdom of God to something. We will put it in a parable.”
4:30	v30a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν	1	By **we**, Jesus means himself and his audience, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Jesus uses this form because he wants his audience to be involved in thinking about how parables can help explain the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “What would be a good comparison for us to use for the kingdom of God, or what parable could we use for it”
4:30	lj2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Here, the word **or** introduces another similar question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related question, or you could leave **or** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and” or “or again,”
4:30	jduf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν	1	Here Jesus speaks as if **the kingdom of God** were an object that he could **put** in a **parable**, which he speaks about as if it were a container. He means that he can explain **the kingdom of God** by using a **parable**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what parable will we describe it” or “what parable can we use to explain it”
4:31	qvr0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ὡς κόκκῳ σινάπεως	1	To teach his audience, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story: It is like a mustard seed”
4:31	l8gh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κόκκῳ σινάπεως	1	A **mustard seed** is a very small seed that grows into a large plant. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of seed, in your translation you could use the name of another seed like it, or you could use a general phrase. Alternate translation: “a very small seed”
4:31-32	dfkf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ὃς ὅταν σπαρῇ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, μικρότερον ὂν πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς & καὶ ὅταν σπαρῇ, ἀναβαίνει	1	Here Jesus repeats the clause **when it has been sown**. This was a natural way in his language to describe the seed and the action. If repeating this clause would be redundant in your language, you could rearrange the clauses and only include the repeated clause once. Alternate translation: “which, being the smallest of all the seeds on the earth, when it has been sown, grows”
4:31	w4l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σπαρῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “a person has sown it” or “they have sown it”
4:31	jf5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	μικρότερον & πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων	1	Jesus says **smallest of all the seeds** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “one of the smallest seeds” or “smaller than most seeds”
4:32	osdk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σπαρῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. See how you expressed the idea in [4:31](../04/31.md). Alternate translation: “a person has sown it” or “they have sown it”
4:32	p9nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πάντων τῶν λαχάνων	1	The phrase **vegetable plants** refers to plants that people grow so that they can eat them or parts of them. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “all the other plants that people grow to eat” or “all the plants that people have in their gardens”
4:32	x1xh			ποιεῖ κλάδους μεγάλους	1	Alternate translation: “it grows large branches”
4:32	tyok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	In your language, it might seem that this phrase expresses unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the birds”
4:32	lu6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατασκηνοῦν	1	Here, the word **nest** could indicate that: (1) the birds are building nests in the **shadow** of the mustard plant. Alternate translation: “build nests” (2) the birds are perching or resting in the **shadow** of the mustard plant. Alternate translation: “perch” or “roost”
4:32	dywv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ τὴν σκιὰν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the phrase **in its shadow** could imply that the birds are nesting: (1) in the lower branches of the plant, which are in the **shadow** of the higher branches. Alternate translation: “in its shadow in the lower branches” (2) on the ground that is in the **shadow** of the plant. Alternate translation: “in its shadow on the ground”
4:33-34	y7i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς, ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν & χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς, κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς ἰδίοις μαθηταῖς, ἐπέλυεν πάντα	1	This sentence marks the end of Jesus’ teaching by summarizing how Jesus taught the crowds. Use a natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a speech. Alternate translation: “Before he stopped teaching them, he used many such parables to speak the word to them, just as they were able to hear; but he did not speak to them without a parable, but by himself he explained everything to his own disciples”
4:33	nfck		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Mark is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which Jesus preached using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:33	vofc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the people who were there with him, not just the disciples. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “to the crowds” or “to the people who were near him”
4:33	u82i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν	1	Here Mark could mean that: (1) Jesus told his audience as much as he knew that they could **hear**. Alternate translation: “teaching them all the things that they were able to hear” (2) Jesus spoke to his audience in a way that he knew they could **hear**. Alternate translation: “teaching them in a way that they could hear”
4:33	kol8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκούειν	1	Here Mark uses the word **hear** to refer to both hearing and understanding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to realize what he meant”
4:34	oo4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	χωρὶς & παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “he was only speaking to them with a parable”
4:34	gp99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντα	1	Here, the word **everything** refers to every parable that Jesus spoke to the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “every parable”
4:35	jz5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ πέραν	1	Here Jesus implies that he wants to go with the disciples **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee”
4:36	y2y2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παραλαμβάνουσιν αὐτὸν	1	Here Mark implies that they took Jesus across the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they take him across the lake with them”
4:36	iybd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς ἦν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ	1	Here Mark means that Jesus was already in the boat, so they could leave right away (see [4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as he was already in the boat” or “using the boat he was sitting in”
4:36	z8gs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄλλα πλοῖα ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that other people got into **boats** and sailed with Jesus and his disciples across the lake. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “many people got into other boats to sail with him”
4:37	fmgz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλλεν εἰς	1	When waves are **breaking into** a boat, they are high enough that they come over the side of the boat and splash water into it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were coming over the sides into”
4:37	oad8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤδη γεμίζεσθαι τὸ πλοῖον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the waves. Alternate translation: “the waves were already filling the boat”
4:38	cets		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἦν	1	Mark uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that Jesus was **in the stern, sleeping**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “as for Jesus, he was”
4:38	uauq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῇ πρύμνῃ	1	The word **stern** is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back end of the boat”
4:38	lwed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ προσκεφάλαιον	1	A **cushion** is a soft object that person would lie or rest on. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of object, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the sleeping pad” or “a soft surface”
4:38	b4xb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα?	1	The disciples are using the question form to show Jesus that they are afraid and to convince him to do something to help them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “it should be a concern to you that we are perishing.” or “it is clearly not a concern to you that we are perishing!”
4:38	viz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ μέλει σοι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **concern**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “does it not concern you”
4:38	fu0n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σοι	1	Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the word **you** here is singular.
4:38	qtb3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀπολλύμεθα	1	Here, the word **we** includes both Jesus and the disciples. Your language may require you to mark this form.
4:39	yym6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σιώπα, πεφίμωσο	1	The terms **Be silent** and **Be still** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Be very calm!” or “Be completely still!”
4:39	mnsa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σιώπα, πεφίμωσο	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the sea, the commands **Be silent** and **Be still** are singular.
4:39	ydoa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο γαλήνη μεγάλη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **calm**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sea became very calm”
4:40	w5n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples for being **cowardly** and for **not yet** having **faith**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “You should not be cowardly. I am disappointed that you do not have more faith.” or “Do not be cowardly! You should already have faith!”
4:40	t6qf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Jesus could be implying that this **faith** is in: (1) God. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet believe God” (2) himself. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet trust me”
4:41	txh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐφοβήθησαν φόβον μέγαν	1	Here, the phrase **feared a great fear** means that they were extremely afraid. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were extremely afraid” or “they were terrified”
4:41	u8e1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ?	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could turn this into two sentences, one asking the question, and the other giving the reason for the question. Alternate translation: “Who then is this? Even the wind and the sea obey him!”
4:41	biog			τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ	1	This is a genuine question, not a statement in question form. The disciples are looking for information about what kind of person Jesus could be if he can do these things. Alternate translation: “Who then is this person, for even the wind and the sea obey him”
4:41	hc6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τίς ἄρα	1	Here, the word **then** indicates that the disciples ask this question in response to what Jesus has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “So then, who” or “Given what he just did, who”
5:intro	lh25				0	# Mark 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)\n      * Casting demons out of a man (5:1–20)\n      * Healing a woman and resurrecting a girl (5:21–43)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Resurrecting the dead\n\nIn [5:21–24](../05/21.md) and [5:35–43](../05/35.md), Mark narrates how Jesus raised a girl from the dead. While Jesus describes her as only “sleeping,” he uses this word to indicate that the girl will “wake up” from being dead. The story clearly indicates that the girl had died and that Jesus raises her from the dead by touching her.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### How to refer to the demons and the demon-possessed man\n\nIn [5:1–20](../05/01.md), Jesus encounters a man whom demons had possessed. As Jesus interacts with this man, it becomes clear that there are three different entities who are involved. First, there is the man himself, but what he says and does is only what the demons want him to do. Second, there is a specific demon who seems to act as the spokesperson or leader for multiple demons. Third, there are the other demons, of whom there are so many that the man is called “Legion.” As Mark narrates the story, he sometimes refers to the man, sometimes to the individual demon, and sometimes to all the demons. Further, it is not always clear which of these three entities speaks and is spoken to by Jesus. Consider how you might refer to a demon-possessed person in this situation. If possible, preserve Mark’s switches between singular and plural, since learning that there are many demons is an important part of the story. Further, Mark implies that the man and the demons are so closely connected that referring to what the man did is the same as referring to what the demons did, and vice versa.\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 15, 19, 22, 23, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
5:1	fix1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
5:1	gt8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they came”
5:1	vsc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	The name **Gerasenes** refers to the people who lived in and near the town of Gerasa.
5:1	dzc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τῶν Γερασηνῶν	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **Gerasenes**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “Gadarenes,” and other ancient manuscripts read “Gergesenes.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
5:2	pf16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντος	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
5:2	zwtq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν μνημείων ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ	1	Here Mark introduces **a man with an unclean spirit** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain man came from the tombs to meet him. This man had an unclean spirit”
5:3	pinm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ὃς τὴν κατοίκησιν εἶχεν ἐν τοῖς μνήμασιν	1	Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. This background information continues in [5:4](../05/04.md) and [5:5](../05/05.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “and here is what that man was like. He had his dwelling in the tombs”
5:3-4	nll4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	καὶ οὐδὲ ἁλύσει οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτὸν δῆσαι & διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md) into a verse bridge in order to include the basis for the claim that **no one was able to bind him anymore** before the claim. Alternate translation: “and he had often been bound with shackles and chains, and the chains had been torn apart by him and the shackles had been shattered. So, no one was strong enough to subdue him or to bind him anymore, not even with a chain”
5:3	pjsx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτὸν δῆσαι	1	Here Mark implies that people tried to **bind** this man to keep him from hurting people and breaking things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “no one was able to bind him anymore to keep him from hurting others” or “no one was able to use bonds to restrain him anymore”
5:3	dryi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο	1	The words translated **no one** and **anymore** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “people were able … no longer”
5:3	nsol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἁλύσει	1	A **chain** is a long, flexible fastener that is made from multiple rings of metal connected together. Chains are usually used to secure objects or bind things together. If your readers would not be familiar with chains, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “with metal links connected together”
5:4	da4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτὸν πολλάκις & δεδέσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who lived nearby. Alternate translation: “the people who lived there had often bound him”
5:4	fk7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πέδαις & τὰς πέδας	1	The word **shackles** refers to pieces of metal that are fastened around the ankles of prisoners. These pieces of metal are connected together by ropes or chains, which prevent the prisoners from moving quickly or far. If your readers would not be familiar with shackles, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “with leg irons … the leg irons” or “with strong restraints … the restraints”
5:4	dk1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἁλύσεσι & τὰς ἁλύσεις	1	See how you translated the word **chains** in [5:3](../05/03.md). Alternate translation: “metal links connected together … the metal links”
5:4	rjo3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	2	Here, the word **and** introduces what the demon-possessed man did in contrast to what the people who tied him up wanted him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
5:4	nep6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he had torn apart the chains and had shattered the shackles”
5:5	ohvk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διὰ παντὸς νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας	1	Here, the phrase **throughout every night and day** indicates that this man was **crying out and cutting himself with stones** during both the day and the night. This means that he was doing those things very often every day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “during every day and every night”
5:6	y6c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν	1	Here Mark stops giving background information and returns to the events in the story that he is telling. He implies that the man saw Jesus when he arrived in the boat from the other side of the Sea of Galilee (see [5:1–2](../05/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Now, having seen Jesus from a distance when he got out of the boat”
5:6	w9zd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ	1	In the Jesus’ culture, bowing down to a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what bowing down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated himself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect”
5:7-8	ux6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	καὶ κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ λέγει, τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? ὁρκίζω σε τὸν Θεόν, μή με βασανίσῃς & ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ, ἔξελθε, τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἀκάθαρτον ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:7](../05/07.md) and [5:8](../05/08.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason why the man cried out as he did before stating that the man cried out. Alternate translation: “And Jesus was saying to him, ‘Come out from the man, unclean spirit.’ So, crying out with a loud voice, he says, ‘What to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God? I make you swear by God, do not torment me.’”
5:7	x6qj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	Here, the phrase **crying out with a loud voice** means that the demon raised the volume of its voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly”
5:7	ppu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου?	1	The man, controlled by the demon, is using the question form to insist on something urgently. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God!”
5:7	fatr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί	1	Here, the question **What to me and to you** asks whether **you** and **me** have anything in common or have any reason to be together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What do you and I have in common” or “What reason do you have to get involved with me”
5:7	kd19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου	1	**Son of the Most High God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
5:7	urq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula	ὁρκίζω σε τὸν Θεόν	1	Here the man, controlled by the demon, puts Jesus under oath, or makes him **swear by God** that he will not **torment** him. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “I make you swear before God” or “I require that you solemnly promise God”
5:8	ahtn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the man, controlled by the demon, acted as he did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for an action, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “He said that because” or “That was because”
5:9	h6ch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν.	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “We are many, so my name is Legion”
5:9	oa64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λεγιὼν	1	A **Legion** is the name of a group of about 6,000 soldiers. So, translate the word **Legion** with a word in your language that refers to a large number of soldiers. You could show that this was the name of the man by using the convention in your language for proper names. Alternate translation: “is Army” or “is Battalion” or “is Brigade”
5:9	pdyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλοί ἐσμεν	1	Here the demon indicates that he is speaking for many demons who are together controlling the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I and the other demons with me are many”
5:10	gtq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	πολλὰ, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὰ ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “much, ‘Do not send us demons out of this region’” or “much, ‘Do not send the legion of demons out of this region’”
5:11	jvrk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Mark uses the word **But** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. It does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “At the same time,”
5:12	ttpu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
5:12	kkf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πέμψον ἡμᾶς εἰς τοὺς χοίρους	1	Here the demons imply that they want Jesus to **Send** them **into the pigs** when Jesus casts them out of the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Whenever you cast us out of this man, send us into the pigs”
5:12	trn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	πέμψον	1	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you send”
5:12	zmsp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & εἰσέλθωμεν	1	Here, the words **us** and **we** refer only to the demons, not to Jesus or any of his disciples. Your language may require you to mark this form.
5:12	z2j0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς αὐτοὺς εἰσέλθωμεν	1	Here the demons speak of wanting to **enter into** the herd of pigs. They mean that they want to enter and control the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we might enter into them and possess them”
5:13	iff6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **permitted** the demons to enter into the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he permitted them to enter into the pigs”
5:13	lfgr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he told them, ‘You may do so’”
5:13	lv3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξελθόντα	1	Here Mark implies that the demons came out of the man whom they had been controlling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having come out of the man whom they had been possessing”
5:13	ntl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντα	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
5:13	zsd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [5:12](../05/12.md). Alternate translation: “entered into the pigs and possessed them”
5:13	a28z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς δισχίλιοι	1	Here Mark indicates that the herd was made up of **about 2,000** pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which was made up of about 2,000 pigs” or “about 2,000 pigs in all”
5:13	tdfk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπνίγοντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “died by drowning”
5:14	cw1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ οἱ βόσκοντες αὐτοὺς ἔφυγον	1	Here Mark introduces **the ones feeding them** as new characters in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing new characters. Alternate translation: “And the ones feeding them were there. They ran away”
5:14	e32p			οἱ βόσκοντες αὐτοὺς	1	Alternate translation: “the ones who were herding the pigs”
5:14	m4r2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς	1	Here, Mark is referring to that whole region by naming its two primary parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “throughout the whole area”
5:14	zser		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς	1	Here, the **city** is most likely Gerasa, since Jesus got out of the boat near this town (see [5:1](../05/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the town of Gerasa and in the countryside around it”
5:14	hlen		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξῆλθον	1	The pronoun **they** refers to the people who were living **in the city and in the countryside**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in those places went out”
5:14	y60p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “they came out”
5:15	yghh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
5:15	g5j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον	1	Here Mark is referring to the man who had been **demon-possessed** until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the one who used to be demon-possessed”
5:15	jkqa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the demons possessed”
5:15	vvsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἱματισμένον καὶ σωφρονοῦντα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “wearing clothes and having a sound mind”
5:15	fb4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σωφρονοῦντα	1	Here, the phrase **being sound-minded** means that the man was acting rationally and thinking like a normal person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “thinking sanely” or “acting rationally”
5:15	dg5o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὸν ἐσχηκότα τὸν λεγεῶνα	1	Here Mark means that the man had been possessed or controlled by **the legion**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one that had been possessed by the legion” or “the one whom the legion had possessed”
5:15	qih4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν λεγεῶνα	1	See how you translated the word **legion** in [Mark 5:9](../05/09.md). Here, however, the word is a not a name, so use the appropriate form to refer to a large number of demons. Alternate translation: “the army” or “the battalion” or “the brigade”
5:15	ntu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν	1	The implication is that **they were afraid** of what else such a powerful person as Jesus might do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of what else Jesus might do, since they recognized what great power he had”
5:16	yy4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἰδόντες	1	Here Mark implies that these people saw what happened to the man and the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “those who had seen what had happened”
5:16	is0r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ	1	Here Mark is referring to the man who had been **demon-possessed** until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “to the one who used to be demon-possessed”
5:16	nivb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the one whom the demons possessed”
5:17	hhqm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτὸν ἀπελθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please depart from our region’”
5:18	z69m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ δαιμονισθεὶς	1	Here Mark is referring to the man who had been **demon-possessed** until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “the one who used to be demon-possessed”
5:18	ayyh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ δαιμονισθεὶς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the demons had possessed”
5:18	pup5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτὸν & ἵνα μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please let me be with you!’”
5:18	gbni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ	1	Here Mark means that the man wanted to go wherever Jesus went, listen to what he said, and spend much time with him as a disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he might go with him” or “he might follow him”
5:19	m8oq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man wanted him to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But”
5:19	p7iq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς σούς	1	Here, the phrase translated **your {people}** could refer to: (1) the man’s family, relatives, and friends. Alternate translation: “the people you know” (2) just the man’s family. Alternate translation: “your family”
5:19	dxnp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ὅσα ὁ Κύριός σοι πεποίηκεν, καὶ ἠλέησέν σε	1	The phrases **has done for you** and **had mercy on you** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “as much as the Lord has done for you; yes, as much as he has had mercy on you” or “as much as the Lord has mercifully done for you”
5:19	h82t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Κύριός & πεποίηκεν	1	Here, the phrase **the Lord** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord, has done” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “I, the Lord, have done”
5:19	e4y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἠλέησέν σε	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “been merciful to you”
5:20	g8ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῇ Δεκαπόλει	1	The word **Decapolis** is a name for a region to the southeast of Galilee. The nadaughtersans “the Ten Towns.”
5:20	y8vn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Mark is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people who heard what the man proclaimed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all the people who listened to him”
5:21	lbcd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ διαπεράσαντος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ πάλιν εἰς τὸ πέραν, συνήχθη ὄχλος πολὺς ἐπ’ αὐτόν, καὶ ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν	1	This verse introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “At that time, Jesus crossed over again to the other side in the boat. When he arrived, a great crowd was gathered around him, and he was beside the sea.”
5:21	pf3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διαπεράσαντος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Mark is referring to **Jesus** to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, along with his disciples, having crossed over”
5:21	wzus		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ πέραν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus crossed over **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee”
5:21	mtol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνήχθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered” or “came together”
5:22	ilnk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “picture this” or “suddenly”
5:22	s3xe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἔρχεται εἷς τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων ὀνόματι Ἰάειρος	1	Here Mark introduces the synagogue ruler as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “a man comes. He was one of the synagogue rulers, Jairus by name”
5:22	v1dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάειρος	1	The word **Jairus** is the name of a man.
5:22	u1rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “goes”
5:22	ueds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	πίπτει πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	In Jesus’ culture, falling at someone’s feet was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “he throws himself on the ground” or “he falls at his feet to show respect”
5:23	oku2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
5:23	x9qg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐσχάτως ἔχει	1	Jairus is using the phrase **is having {her} end** to indicate that his daughter is about to die. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is on her deathbed” or “will soon breath her last” or “will die soon”
5:23	jd27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα ἐλθὼν, ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ	1	Here, the phrase **so that** introduces what Jairus wants Jesus to do in response to what Jairus has told him about his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduce a desired response to a situation. Alternate translation: “so I ask that you, coming, lay your hands on her” or “and so, coming, I wish that you will lay your hands on her”
5:23	budr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθὼν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “going”
5:23	kzz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. Alternate translation: “you might heal her”
5:24	ptj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπῆλθεν	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went away”
5:25	e2cz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	γυνὴ οὖσα ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος δώδεκα ἔτη	1	Here Mark introduces this **woman** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a woman there. She had been with a flow of blood for 12 years”
5:25	h58w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	οὖσα ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος	1	Mark uses the phrase **a flow of blood** to refer discreetly to her condition or illness. She was probably experiencing menstrual bleeding at many times, even when it was not the normal time for that. If your language has a polite way of referring to this condition, you could use that expression here, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffering from abnormal menstruation” or “suffering from frequent menstrual bleeding”
5:26	mn67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ πολλὰ παθοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν	1	Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. This background information continues in the first part of [5:27](../05/27.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “and in the past having suffered much from many physicians”
5:26	dus5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλὰ παθοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν	1	Here Mark could mean that the woman: (1) **suffered** from the treatments that the **physicians** used. Alternate translation: “having suffered much from the physicians’ treatments” or “being made to suffer by many physicians” (2) suffering while being treated by the **physicians**. Alternate translation: “having suffered much as physicians tried to treat her”
5:26	ogxd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δαπανήσασα τὰ παρ’ ἑαυτῆς πάντα	1	Here Mark implies that she **spent everything {that was} from herself** to pay the **physicians** to treat her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having spent everything that was from herself to pay for her treatments”
5:26	k9yj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰ παρ’ ἑαυτῆς πάντα	1	Here, the phrase **everything {that was} from herself** refers to all the money and belongings that the woman had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that she had” or “all her money and possessions”
5:26	ewnx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς τὸ χεῖρον ἐλθοῦσα	1	Here, the phrase **having come to the worse** means that the woman’s situation was getting **worse**. In other words, she was becoming more sick. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “getting worse” or “worsening”
5:27-28	lhrl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ἀκούσασα τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ἐλθοῦσα ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ὄπισθεν, ἥψατο τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ & ἔλεγεν γὰρ, ὅτι ἐὰν ἅψωμαι κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:27](../05/27.md) and [5:28](../05/28.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include what the woman is thinking before she acts based on what she is thinking. Alternate translation: “heard the things about Jesus. She was saying, ‘If I touch just his clothes, I will be saved.’ So, having come up behind him in the crowd, she touched his cloak.”
5:27	z2hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that the woman heard **the things** that Jesus had done to heal people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that Jesus had healed people”
5:27	qitt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθοῦσα	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone up”
5:27	lfzg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἥψατο τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark does not explain why she touched the edge of his cloak. Since Mark does explain it in the next verse, you should not explain its meaning here.
5:28	alc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the woman touched Jesus’ clothes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for an action, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is why she did that:” or “She did that because”
5:28	ru14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγεν & ὅτι ἐὰν ἅψωμαι κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “she was saying that if she could touch just his clothes, she would be saved”
5:28	ob1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔλεγεν	1	Here Mark implies that the woman was **saying** these things to herself or that she was thinking these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “she was saying to herself” or “she was thinking”
5:28	krs2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἅψωμαι κἂν	1	Here, the word **just** indicates that the woman thinks that, to be healed, she does not need to do anything more than **touch** Jesus’ clothes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all I do is touch” or “I can just touch”
5:28	wge2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσομαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could indicate that is God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God will save me” or “he will save me”
5:29	ku4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξηράνθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “dried up” or “ceased”
5:29	c1vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could indicate that is God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God had healed her from the disease” or “Jesus had healed her from the disease”
5:29	fszt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how she was afflicted”
5:30	zk5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιγνοὺς ἐν ἑαυτῷ	1	Here Mark means that Jesus **realized** that power had gone out from him because of something inside him, not because he saw or felt what the woman had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having sensed” or “having felt inside”
5:30	ma2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν	1	When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt **the power** going out from him to heal her. However, this does not mean that Jesus no longer had that **power**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the power from him effecting somebody else” or “the power from him healing someone”
5:30	m1si		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that something powerful had happened because of him” or “that how powerful he was had accomplished something”
5:31	pgpc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βλέπεις τὸν ὄχλον συνθλίβοντά σε	1	By saying this, the disciples were implying that anyone could have touched Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You see the crowd pressing around you, so any one of them might have touched you”
5:31	t31q			καὶ λέγεις, τίς μου ἥψατο?	1	Here, the disciples could be: (1) making a statement that quotes Jesus’ question. Alternate translation: “and you are asking, ‘Who touched me?’” (2) asking a rhetorical question that implies that Jesus’ question is unreasonable. Alternate translation: “so why do you say, ‘Who touched me?’”
5:31	qfp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	2	Here, the word **and** introduces what Jesus asked in contrast to the situation that he was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but” or “yet”
5:31	cxmk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγεις, τίς μου ἥψατο	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you ask who touched you.”
5:31	l40w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	λέγεις	1	Here the disciples repeat what Jesus said to show that they think this is an unreasonable or silly question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you still say” or “for some reason you say”
5:32	ts64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces what Jesus did in contrast to what the disciples suggested he do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “Despite that,”
5:32	x9gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο ποιήσασαν	1	The pronoun **this** refers to touching Jesus’ clothing. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to this action more directly. Alternate translation: “having touched his robe” or “having done the touching”
5:33	e8xt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα, εἰδυῖα ὃ γέγονεν αὐτῇ, ἦλθεν	1	Here, the phrase **having known what had happened to her** gives a reason for why the woman behaved as she did. It could most specifically give the reason for why: (1) she **came** to Jesus. Alternate translation: “having become afraid and trembling, came because she knew what had happened to her” (2) she was **afraid** and **trembling**. Alternate translation: “having become afraid and trembling because she knew what had happened to her, came”
5:33	r3a0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with **and**. The word **trembling** tells how the woman physically experienced being **afraid**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “trembling with fear” or “trembling fearfully”
5:33	uefx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
5:33	fxxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν αὐτῷ	1	In the Jesus’ culture, falling down before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what falling down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated herself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect”
5:33	b6kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἶπεν αὐτῷ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “truthfully told him everything”
5:33	b39m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	Here Mark implies that the woman told **the whole truth** about what she had done and what happened to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the whole truth about what she had done” or “the whole truth about the events that had just occurred”
5:34	k971		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
5:34	gbk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θυγάτηρ	1	Here Jesus calls the woman **Daughter** to indicate that he cares for her. The word also implies that the woman was younger than Jesus. The woman was not actually Jesus’ daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that an older person would use to show that they care for a younger person. Alternate translation: “My friend” or “Dear woman”
5:34	unp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you believed, and that has caused you to be saved”
5:34	sbvm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	Jesus speaks of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively **saved** her. He means that her faith was the necessary condition for the healing that she received from God. Alternate translation: “because of your faith, you have been saved”
5:34	lfh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὕπαγε εἰς εἰρήνην	1	This is a way of saying goodbye and giving a blessing at the same time. Alternate translation: “May God give you peace as you go” or “As you go, do not worry anymore,”
5:34	h342		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς εἰρήνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “peacefully”
5:34	d8uz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἴσθι ὑγιὴς ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγός σου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no longer have your affliction” or “be healthy, without your affliction”
5:34	sgvs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγός σου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how you were afflicted”
5:35	n9nm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus was **still** saying what Mark recorded in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “He still saying those things” or “He still speaking to the woman”
5:35	gyx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
5:35	cxr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔρχονται	1	The pronoun **they** refers to people who were at Jairus’ house. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “people come”
5:35	sau6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου	1	Here, **the synagogue ruler** represents the house of the synagogue ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the synagogue ruler’s home”
5:35	iftj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
5:35	t2wd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον?	1	The people from Jairus’ house are using the question form to suggest how Jairus should behave. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is no need to bother the teacher further.” or “It is useless to bother the teacher further!”
5:35	vqt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον?	1	This question implies that Jesus will not be able to do anything to help, since the girl is dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Since there is nothing more that Jesus can do for you, why make him come to your house”
5:36	r1jw			παρακούσας	1	Here, the word translated **having overheard** could mean that Jesus: (1) listened in on the conversation between the messengers and Jairus. Alternate translation: “having listened in on” (2) ignored what the messengers told Jairus. Alternate translation: “having ignored” or “having disregarded”
5:36	edb0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον	1	Here, **word** represents what the messengers said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they spoke” or “the news they brought”
5:36	wuej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λαλούμενον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who came from Jairus’ house. Alternate translation: “that those people spoke”
5:36	q8at		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πίστευε	1	Here Jesus implies that Jairus, the **synagogue ruler**, should **believe** in Jesus, specifically that Jesus can help his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “believe in me” or “believe that I can save your daughter”
5:37	g616		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκ ἀφῆκεν οὐδένα μετ’ αὐτοῦ συνακολουθῆσαι, εἰ μὴ τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰακώβου	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he allowed only Peter and James and John the brother of James to accompany him”
5:37	kk98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that Jairus, the synagogue ruler, went with Jesus as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “him and the synagogue ruler” or “him and Jairus”
5:37	pshl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰακώβου	1	Mark never says whether **James** or **John** was older, but he mentions **James** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **John** was younger. See how you expressed the idea in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “the younger brother of James”
5:38	nb2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔρχονται	1	Here Mark implies that Peter, James, John, and Jairus were traveling with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they come” or “Jesus, Jairus, and the three disciples come”
5:38	pcgi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes”
5:38	flu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	θόρυβον, καὶ κλαίοντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολλά	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with **and**. The phrase **weeping and much wailing** explains what actions created the **commotion**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “a commotion, including weeping and much wailing” or “a commotion caused by weeping and much wailing”
5:38	u8ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κλαίοντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολλά	1	The terms **weeping** and **much wailing** mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “very much mourning” or “a great deal of weeping”
5:39	atr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε? τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “The child did not die but is sleeping. So, why are you being disturbed and weeping?”
5:39	a3ih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were at the house. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Stop being disturbed and weeping.” or “This is not a time to be disturbed and weeping!”
5:39	p5ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	θορυβεῖσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are you making a commotion” or “are you being noisy”
5:39	t35h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	θορυβεῖσθε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to many people in the house, the word **you** is plural.
5:39	dzrk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ παιδίον	1	Here, the word **child** refers to a very young woman. Mark clarifies in [5:42](../05/42.md) that she was about 12 years old. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to a girl who is about this age. Alternate translation: “The young girl”
5:40	g8k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark is referring to the three disciples (Peter, James, and John) whom Jesus took with him (see [5:37](../05/37.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the three disciples”
5:41	hx3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ! ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον τὸ κοράσιον, σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε!	1	The phrase **Talitha, koum** is an Aramaic phrase. Mark spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he explained what it meant: **Little girl, I say to you, arise**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “‘Talitha, koum!’ which is Aramaic for, ‘Little girl, I say to you, arise.’”
5:41	igcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which we translate as,”
5:42	lfi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα & καὶ ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ	1	In this verse, Mark introduces some extra information about the **little girl**: **she was 12 years** old. Consider where you might include this information and how you might introduce it. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl, who was 12 years, rose up and was walking, and they were immediately astonished with great amazement” or “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking, and they were immediately astonished with great amazement. Now the little girl was 12 years.”
5:42	edfv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνέστη	1	Here, the phrase **rose up** indicates both that the girl came back to life and that she stood up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came back to life and got up”
5:42	j8lq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **for** introduces an explanation that indicates that the **little girl** was old enough to walk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **for** untranslated. Alternate translation: “she was able to walk because” or “as a matter of act,”
5:42	pt5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν & ἐτῶν δώδεκα	1	Here Mark means that the **little girl** was **12 years** old. Use whatever form your language commonly uses to indicate how old someone is. Alternate translation: “she had lived 12 years” or “she was 12 years of age”
5:42	m49c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they immediately marveled”
5:42	p1dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ	1	Here, the phrase **astonished with great amazement** means that they were extremely astonished. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were immediately extremely astonished” or “they were immediately totally amazed”
5:42	atv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **amazement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and greatly amazed”
5:43	po7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἵνα μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them much, ‘No one must know about this’”
5:43	wcr2			μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο	1	Alternate translation: “they should let no one know about this”
5:43	n29k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he said, ‘Something should be given to her to eat’”
5:43	j8ro		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δοθῆναι αὐτῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that would be the girl’s parents. Alternate translation: “her parents should give her something”
6:intro	kl7n				0	# Mark 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)\n      * Jesus teaches in his hometown (6:1–6)\n4. Jesus expands his ministry and encounters opposition (6:7–8:21)\n      * Jesus sends out the Twelve (6:7–13)\n      * Herod hears about Jesus (6:14–16)\n      * Flashback: Herod executes John the Baptist (6:17–29)\n      * Jesus feeds 5,000 men (6:30–44)\n      * Jesus walks on water (6:45–52)\n      * Jesus heals people in the region of Gennesaret (6:53–56)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Jesus’ instructions on how to travel\n\nJesus instructs the disciples not to bring money, food, or extra clothing with them when they travel and preach the good news. Instead, he wants the disciples to rely on the hospitality of people they visit. Make sure that your translation indicates that the disciples should not pack money, food, or extra clothing because they will be staying with people who welcome and provide for them.\n\n### Herod and Herodias\n\nThe man named “King Herod” ([6:14](../06/14.md)) ruled over the area to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee, which is where Jesus spent much of his ministry. Herodias was married to Herod’s brother Philip, and the two of them had a daughter. However, Herodias divorced Philip and married Herod, who had also divorced his previous wife. Since the Jewish law condemned anyone who married his brother’s wife while his brother was still alive (see [Leviticus 20:21](../lev/20/21.md)), John the Baptist rebuked Herod for doing this. It was in response to this rebuke that Herod had John the Baptist put in prison and eventually executed. Make sure that your translation accurately refers to the relationships between Herod, Herodias, and Herodias’ daughter.\n\n### The miracle of multiplying food\n\nIn [6:30–44](../06/30.md), Mark tells a story in which Jesus provides 5,000 men with food. They were in a place where no people lived, and all the food that Jesus and his disciples had were five loaves of bread and two fish. Despite that, Jesus used the five loaves of bread and the two fish to feed everyone who was there. Mark does not tell us exactly how Jesus did this, but he does say that there were more leftovers than what they started with. Your translation should not explain how Jesus multiplied the food, but it should be clear that he did a miracle.\n\n### The miracle of walking on water\n\nIn [6:45–52](../06/45.md), Mark tells a story in which Jesus walks on top of the Sea of Galilee, even though there was a storm. When Jesus climbs into the boat that the disciples were in, the storm miraculously stops. Your translation should not explain exactly how Jesus walked on the water, but it should be clear that Jesus walking on the water and the storm stopping were both miracles.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### The flashback to John’s death\n\nIn this chapter, Mark includes a story that happened before the stories that appear before and after it in his narrative. Previously, Mark narrates how Jesus sent out the Twelve ([6:7–13](../06/07.md)). Then, he describes how people, and especially Herod Antipas, respond to Jesus (see [6:14–16](../06/14.md)). Then, to explain how Herod responded to Jesus, Mark includes a story that happened earlier. This type of storytelling is called a flashback. Here, the flashback tells about how John the Baptist died (see [6:17–29](../06/17.md)). In [6:30](../06/30.md), Mark returns to the main narrative and tells what happened after the events recorded in [6:7–13](../06/07.md). Make sure that you use a form that shows your readers that [6:17–29](../06/17.md) is a flashback that describes something that happened previously, and [6:30](../06/30.md) continues with the main narrative. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to his disciples. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 7, 30, 31, 37, 38, 45, 48, and 50. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
6:1	mi7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,” or “Then”
6:1	lpci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν & ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went** or “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he came out … goes”
6:1	jcu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκεῖθεν	1	Here, the word **there** refers to the house of Jairus, the synagogue ruler. His house was in the town of Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from Jairus’ house” or “from Capernaum”
6:1	vf56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the phrase **his hometown** refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his hometown, Nazareth”
6:2	qu8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες ἐξεπλήσσοντο λέγοντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus and what he said and did. Alternate translation: “he astonished many of the ones hearing him, who were saying” or “what he said astonished many of the ones hearing him, who were saying”
6:2	uf10		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες	1	Here, the phrase translated **the many ones hearing him** could refer to: (1) the **many** people who were **hearing him**. In this case, all of the **many** people were astonished. Alternate translation: “all the many people hearing him” (2) **many** of the people who were **hearing him**. In this case, not all of the people were astonished. Alternate translation: “many of the ones hearing him”
6:2	xeh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
6:2	bpq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πόθεν τούτῳ ταῦτα, καὶ τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις τοιαῦται διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ γινόμεναι?	1	The people in Jesus’ hometown are using the question form to express their surprise that Jesus has **wisdom** and can do **miracles**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We are surprised to see this one doing these things, and we are surprised that this one has been given the wisdom and such miracles happening by his hands.” or “We have no idea where these things that this one does are from, and we do not know what the wisdom that has been given to this one is, and such miracles happening by his hands!”
6:2	s2jg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πόθεν τούτῳ ταῦτα	1	Here, the phrase **From where to this one {are} these things** asks about the source from which **this one**, Jesus, was able to do **these things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What is the source of these things for this one” or “How is this one able to do these things”
6:2	cpf0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις τοιαῦται	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wisdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how is he as wise as he has been enabled to be, and what are these miracles”
6:2	y4xj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that someone has given to this one”
6:2	insz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ	1	These people are using **hands** to represent Jesus acting powerfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by him” or “through his actions”
6:3	s3wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς?	1	The people are using the question form to show that they know Jesus and his family. They mean that Jesus is just an ordinary person. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “He is only a carpenter, the son of Mary and a brother of James, Joseph, Judas, and Simon. His sisters are here with us.” or “He is only a carpenter! He is the son of Mary a brother of James and Joseph and Judas and Simon! His sisters are right here with us!”
6:3	no4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὁ τέκτων	1	The word **carpenter** refers to someone who builds things with wood. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of worker, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the man who builds with wood” or “the construction worker”
6:3	i9qi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	ἀδελφὸς	1	Jesus was the older **brother** of these men. They were sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, Jesus was actually their half-brother. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “older brother,” you could use it here.
6:3	tlub		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσῆτος & Ἰούδα & Σίμωνος	1	The words **Joses**, **Judas**, and **Simon** are the names of men.
6:3	cxgx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ	1	These were Jesus' younger **sisters**. They were daughteres of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-sisters. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger sister,” you could use it here.
6:3	d2g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ	1	Here Mark speaks as if Jesus were a lump or rock that the people in Jesus’ hometown were stumbling on. He means that these people were offended by him and rejected him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were offended by him” or “they did not listen to him”
6:3	m412		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they were stumbling on him”
6:4	b42w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “A prophet is only without honor”
6:4	l436		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν & ἄτιμος	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “has honor” or “is always honored”
6:4	yg9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄτιμος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **honor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonored” or “treated dishonorably”
6:4	y2oa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus uses three terms that refer to people who know the **prophet** well. The list starts with the broadest category (**hometown**) and ends with the most specific category (**his house**). If you have three terms that refer to different groups of people who know a person, you could use them here. Alternatively, if it would be clearer for your readers, you could use one or two terms. Alternate translation: “except among his relatives” or “in his hometown and among his family”
6:4	mgbp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus uses the phrase **in his house** to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “among his father, mother, or siblings”
6:5	qajx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἐκεῖ ποιῆσαι οὐδεμίαν δύναμιν, εἰ μὴ ὀλίγοις ἀρρώστοις, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας, ἐθεράπευσεν	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only miracles he was able to do there were healing some sick people, having laid his hands on them”
6:5	ystk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἐκεῖ ποιῆσαι οὐδεμίαν δύναμιν	1	The words translated **not** and **any** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “he was able to do not even one miracle there”
6:6-7	swqh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ ἐθαύμασεν διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν. καὶ περιῆγεν τὰς κώμας, κύκλῳ διδάσκων & καὶ προσκαλεῖται τοὺς δώδεκα, καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποστέλλειν δύο δύο, καὶ ἐδίδου αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων	1	Here, the clause **he was going around the villages teaching** could be: (1) the end of the story about Jesus visiting his hometown. Alternate translation: “And he was amazed because of their unbelief, and he was going around the villages in a circle teaching. And he calls the Twelve and began to send them out two by two, and he was giving them authority over the unclean spirits” (2) the beginning of the story about how Jesus sent out the twelve disciples. Alternate translation: “And he was amazed because of their unbelief. And he was going around the villages in a circle teaching, and he calls the Twelve and began to send them out two by two, and he was giving them authority over the unclean spirits”
6:6	e1bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐθαύμασεν διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was **their unbelief**. Alternate translation: “their unbelief amazed him”
6:6	j8mo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unbelief**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they did not believe”
6:6	h8f8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς κώμας	1	Here Mark is referring to **the villages** in a specific area. He probably means the area near Nazareth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that these villages are in a specific region. Alternate translation: “the villages of that region”
6:6	fs98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς κώμας, κύκλῳ	1	Here, the phrase **in a circle** indicates that Jesus went from village to village in the general pattern of a **circle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the villages in a circular pattern” or “around the villages, one by one,”
6:7	tdsp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
6:7	fd56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤρξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποστέλλειν	1	Here, the phrase **began to send them out** indicates that Jesus prepared them for when he would **send them out**. The **Twelve** do not actually leave on their mission until [5:12](../05/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “prepared to send them out” or “began to get them ready to send them out”
6:7	d6sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δύο δύο	1	Here, the phrase **two by two** means that Jesus sent out **the Twelve** in six groups with **two** disciples in each group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in pairs” or “in sets of two”
6:7	ldbv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐδίδου αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he was empowering them to control the unclean spirits”
6:8-9	pydl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	καὶ παρήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον, μὴ ἄρτον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ εἰς τὴν ζώνην χαλκόν & ἀλλὰ ὑποδεδεμένους σανδάλια, καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:8](../06/08.md) and [6:9](../06/09.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to put all the negative and positive commands together. Alternate translation: “and he commanded them that they should take nothing for the road—no bread, no bag, no money in the belt—and, ‘You may not wear two tunics.’ However, he allowed them to take a staff and to put on sandals.”
6:8-9	arcb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον, μὴ ἄρτον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ εἰς τὴν ζώνην χαλκόν & ἀλλὰ ὑποδεδεμένους σανδάλια, καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation for all these commands. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Take nothing for the road except only a staff—no bread, no bag, no money in the belt—but having put on sandals, and you may not wear two tunics.’”
6:8	k5hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only thing they should take for the road was a staff”
6:8	r5so		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁδὸν	1	Here, **road** represents a journey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the journey”
6:8	t9a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	μὴ ἄρτον	1	Mark is using **bread** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nothing to eat”
6:8	ykr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πήραν	1	The term **bag** means something a traveler would use to carry things that were needed on a journey. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “knapsack”
6:8	rm8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εἰς τὴν ζώνην	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would often wrap their money up in long strips of cloth and then tie them around their waists as belts. This was a way to keep the money safe while the people were traveling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “in their money bag” or “to have with you as you travel”
6:8	y56y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὴν ζώνην	1	The word **belt** represents belts in general, not one particular belt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their belts”
6:9	p4hd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας	1	If you preserved the indirect quotation in the previous clauses, it may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here also. Alternate translation: “and not wearing two tunics”
6:9	g5gq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δύο χιτῶνας	1	Here Jesus implies that they should bring only one tunic instead of **two**. In other words, they should not bring an extra one in case they needed it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second tunic” or “a spare tunic”
6:10	cbln		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσέλθητε εἰς οἰκίαν	1	Here Jesus implies that they **enter** this **house** as a guest who has been invited to stay there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you enter into a house as a guest” or “you are invited to stay at a house”
6:10	icco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκεῖθεν	1	Here, the word **there** refers to the city or village that the **house** is in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from that city or village”
6:11	uh18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς ἂν τόπος μὴ δέξηται	1	Here, **place** represents represents the people who live in that place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when the people in any place do not receive”
6:11	oa4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορευόμενοι	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming out”
6:11	b2kb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκτινάξατε τὸν χοῦν τὸν ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν	1	This action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a house or city to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider referring to it here, or you could explain the meaning of the action. Alternate translation: “wash the dirt of that place off your hands” or “shake off the dust that is under your feet to sever your relationship with that place and”
6:11	njlk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	Here Jesus implies that the **testimony** indicates that these people are in danger of being punished by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for a testimony that they will be punished”
6:11	q73q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μαρτύριον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to testify”
6:11	pkdc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς	1	Most ancient manuscripts end the verse with the words **for a testimony against them**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts include another sentence after these words: “Truly I say to you, it will be more tolerable for the land of Sodom and Gomorrah in the day of judgment than for that city.” This sentence was probably added from [Matthew 10:15](../mat/10/15.md). If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT.
6:12	qkz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
6:12	hqco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐκήρυξαν ἵνα μετανοῶσιν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they proclaimed, ‘You should repent’”
6:12	gkv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μετανοῶσιν	1	The pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “everyone should repent” or “men and women should repent”
6:13	bf3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἤλειφον ἐλαίῳ πολλοὺς ἀρρώστους	1	In Jesus’ culture, **anointing** people **with oil** was both a simple medical treatment and also a way to ask God to show favor to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what **anointing** people **with oil** means. Alternate translation: “anointing many sick people with oil to help them” or “anointing many sick people with oil to show God’s blessing”
6:14	ykou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρῴδης	1	Here Mark introduces **King Herod** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Now the ruler over that area was King Herod. And he heard about Jesus”
6:14	btoi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” or “Sometime later,”
6:14	lyiz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρῴδης, φανερὸν γὰρ ἐγένετο τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because his name became known, King Herod heard about him”
6:14	rzor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	Here, **name** represents the person or news about that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he” or “stories about him”
6:14	sx0r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἐνεργοῦσιν αἱ δυνάμεις ἐν αὐτῷ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that John the Baptist had been raised from the dead, and because of this the powers worked in him”
6:14	qzxu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1	The pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “many were saying” or “people were saying”
6:14	ylqm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἔλεγον	1	Some ancient manuscripts read **they were saying**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “he was saying.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
6:14	wixk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	These people are implying that Jesus is actually **John the Baptist**, who **has been raised from the dead** and now goes by the name Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This man Jesus is actually John the Baptist raised from the dead” or “John the Baptist has been raised from the dead and is now called Jesus”
6:14	vxo7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται	1	Here, the word** raised** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist has been restored to life”
6:14	ly7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, these people could be implying that: (1) God did it. Alternate translation: “God has raised John the Baptist” (2) John himself did it. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist has risen”
6:14	wbgy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	These people are using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people” or “from the corpses”
6:14	s0le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	Here, the phrase **because of this** introduces the result of what these people think about John being raised from the dead. They think that Jesus has powers because he has already been raised from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he has been raised,”
6:14	emjv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐνεργοῦσιν αἱ δυνάμεις ἐν αὐτῷ	1	Here these people speak as if **the powers** were people that could work in Jesus. They mean that Jesus is powerful and can do powerful things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has his powers” or “he is very powerful”
6:15	n8sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν; ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι προφήτης, ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “But others were saying that he was Elijah. But others were saying that he was a prophet, like one of the prophets”
6:15	s5cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	προφήτης	1	These people are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a prophet”
6:15	xnin		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἷς τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here these people are referring to the famous **prophets** who lived many years earlier. There are many stories in the Old Testament about the amazing things these **prophets** did and said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these specific **prophets** more explicitly. Alternate translation: “one of the famous prophets from the Scriptures” or “one of the ancient prophets”
6:16	a5hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα, Ἰωάννην οὗτος ἠγέρθη	1	Here, the phrase **this one** refers directly back to **{The one} whom I beheaded, John**. Herod expresses the idea in this way to introduce the person he is talking about and then explain what he thinks has happened to that person. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the phrase **this one** would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “The one whom I beheaded, John, has been raised”
6:16	tc0t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα, Ἰωάννην οὗτος ἠγέρθη	1	Herod is implying that Jesus is actually **John**, who **has been raised** and now goes by the name Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This man Jesus is actually the one whom I beheaded, John, who has been raised” or “The one whom I beheaded, John, this one has been raised and is now called Jesus”
6:16	ym2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα	1	Here Herod implies that he had his soldiers behead John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “my soldiers beheaded” or “I had my soldiers behead”
6:16	oidb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὗτος ἠγέρθη	1	See how you expressed the similar phrase in [6:14](../06/14.md). Alternate translation: “has been restored to life”
6:16	n6nq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἠγέρθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Herod could be implying that: (1) God did it. Alternate translation: “God has raised this one” (2) John himself did it. Alternate translation: “this one has risen”
6:17-18	recp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ διὰ Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν & ἔλεγεν γὰρ ὁ Ἰωάννης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:17](../06/17.md) and [6:18](../06/18.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reasons why Herod **seized John and bound him in prison** before stating that he did those things. Alternate translation: “For Herod had married Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip. Then, John was saying to Herod, ‘It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother.’ So, because of Herodias, Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison.”
6:17	ojtd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces background information that tells about how John died. This background information continues in [6:18–29](../06/18.md). In your translation, present this information in a way that makes it clear that this is background information, not the next event in the story. Alternate translation: “Now sometime earlier,” or “By this time, John had already died. Here is what happened:”
6:17	kphw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ διὰ Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these elements, since the second half of the verse gives reasons for the result that the first half of the verse describes. Alternate translation: “Herod married Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip. Because of her, Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison”
6:17	vpr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸς & ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ	1	Here Mark implies that **Herod** sent his soldiers to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Herod himself, having sent his soldiers, had them seize John and bind him in prison”
6:17	wail		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & ὁ Ἡρῴδης	1	Mark uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that **Herod** was the one did these things. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “it was Herod who” or “indeed Herod”
6:17	gimy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν	1	Here Mark introduces **Herodias** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a woman named Herodias, who was the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her”
6:17	ywv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν	1	Here Matthew implies that Herod married Herodias after she divorced Philip, Herod’s brother. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whom he married after she divorced his brother Philip” or “who had been the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her after she divorced Philip”
6:17	sf6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	The word **Philip** is the name of a man. This is not the same Philip who was an evangelist in the book of Acts or the Philip who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples.
6:17	szok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	It is not certain whether **Philip** was older or younger than Herod, but it is slightly more likely that he was older. So, if you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **Philip** was older. Alternate translation: “his older brother”
6:18	a46w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Herod put John in prison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “He did that because”
6:18	e2ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Herod that it was not lawful for him to have the wife of his brother”
6:18	vl4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σοι & σου	1	Because John is speaking to Herod, the words **you** and **your** are singular.
6:18	psjw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	ἀδελφοῦ σου	1	See how you translated **brother** in [6:17](../06/17.md). Alternate translation: “of your older brother”
6:19-20	lj6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ἡ δὲ Ἡρῳδιὰς ἐνεῖχεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο & ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης ἐφοβεῖτο τὸν Ἰωάννην, εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον, καὶ συνετήρει αὐτόν; καὶ ἀκούσας αὐτοῦ, πολλὰ ἠπόρει, καὶ ἡδέως αὐτοῦ ἤκουεν	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:19](../06/19.md) and [6:20](../06/20.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reasons why Herodias **was not able** to kill John before stating that she was not able to kill him. Alternate translation: “But Herodias was angry with him and was wanting to kill him. But Herod was fearing John, knowing him {to be} a righteous and holy man, and he was keeping him safe, and having heard him, he was much perplexed, yet he was listening to him gladly. So, Herodias was not able to kill him”
6:19	x35v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι	1	Here Mark implies that Herodias wanted to send someone to **kill** John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “was wanting to have him killed” or “was wanting to have Herod’s soldiers kill him”
6:19	ujer		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	2	Here, the word **and** introduces Herodias could actually do in contrast with what she wanted to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
6:19	ft31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἠδύνατο	1	Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “she was not able to kill him”
6:20	lmbc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Herodias was not able to kill John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for something, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “which was because” or “since”
6:20	k13z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συνετήρει αὐτόν	1	Here Mark implies that Herod kept John **safe** while he was in jail. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he was keeping him safe in prison”
6:20	zcw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	πολλὰ ἠπόρει	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **he was much perplexed**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “he was doing many things.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
6:20	kciv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πολλὰ ἠπόρει	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what John said. Alternate translation: “what John said perplexed him much”
6:20	l3mo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	4	Here, the word **and** introduces how Herod listened to John in contrast with how he was **perplexed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “yet”
6:21	l96u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου	1	Here Mark implies that it was **an opportune day** for Herodias to convince Herod to have John executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a good opportunity for Herodias to kill John having come” or “a day having come when it was a good time for Herodias to have Herod execute John”
6:21	m54q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν	1	Here Mark implies that Herod had his servants make **a dinner**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had his servants make a dinner”
6:21	vg8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ	1	In some cultures, people celebrate a **birthday**, the day that someone was born. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of celebration, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “for his birthday celebration” or “for celebrations on the anniversary of his birth”
6:21	kxru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the phrase **his great ones** refers to the important people in Herod’s court. They were probably high-ranking officials who served under Herod. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his high-ranking courtiers” or “the important people in his court”
6:21	s0y7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς πρώτοις τῆς Γαλιλαίας	1	Here, Mark refers to important or respected people as if they were **first**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the respected of Galilee” or “the significant ones of Galilee”
6:21	eouo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πρώτοις	1	Mark is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean first people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the first people” or “for the people who were first”
6:22	mjaj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ εἰσελθούσης τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος, καὶ ὀρχησαμένης καὶ ἀρεσάσης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ καὶ τοῖς συνανακειμένοις & ὁ βασιλεὺς	1	Here Mark introduces Herod’s **daughter** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “a young woman entered. She was his daughter, of Herodias. She danced and pleased Herod and the ones reclining to eat with him, so the king”
6:22	qd9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος	1	Some ancient manuscripts read **his daughter, of Herodias**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the daughter of Herodias herself.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
6:22	a1d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος	1	The phrase translated **his daughter, of Herodias** could indicate that: (1) the young woman, who is not named, was the **daughter** of **Herodias** and so also Herod’s stepdaughter. Alternate translation: “the daughter of Herodias, Herod’s stepdaughter” (2) the young woman, named Herodias, was the **daughter** of Herod. She had the same name as the woman Herod had married. Alternate translation: “Herod’s daughter Herodias”
6:22	tni8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς συνανακειμένοις	1	In Herod’s culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, at a table when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “the ones sitting down to eat with him” or “the ones eating with him”
6:22	cxf5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν & τῷ κορασίῳ, αἴτησόν με ὃ ἐὰν θέλῃς, καὶ δώσω σοι	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “told the girl that she should him whatever she desired, and he would give it to her”
6:22	mpv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ κορασίῳ	1	Here, the word **girl** refers to a woman who has reached puberty but who is still young, probably between 12 and 20 years old. Use a word in your language that refers generally to a young woman who has reached puberty. Alternate translation: “to the young lady”
6:22	jmdl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	αἴτησόν & θέλῃς & σοι	1	Because Herod is speaking to the girl, the command **Ask** and the word **you** throughout this verse are singular.
6:23	tvwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτῇ, ὅτι ἐάν με αἰτήσῃς, δώσω σοι, ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “her that if she asked him, he would give it to her, up to half of his kingdom”
6:23	er6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	αἰτήσῃς & σοι	1	Because Herod is speaking to the girl, the word **you** is singular throughout this verse.
6:23	vwbx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου	1	Herod says **up to half of my kingdom** here as an overstatement for emphasis. He means that he will definitely give the young woman what she asks for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Herod is making an overstatement, or you could express the idea more generally. Alternate translation: “even if it were up to half of my kingdom” or “no matter how valuable” or “even if it is very difficult to give”
6:24	fn58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθοῦσα	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
6:24	b57y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς, τί αἰτήσωμαι? ἡ δὲ εἶπεν, τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος	1	It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “she asked her mother what she should ask. And her mother said that she should ask for the head of John the Baptist”
6:24	wlxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς	1	Here Mark implies that **her mother** is Herodias, Herod’s wife. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to Herodias, her mother”
6:24	skbr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος	1	The mother is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “You should ask for the head of John the Baptist”
6:24	v8ci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος	1	Here the mother is implying that the daughter should ask King Herod to behead **John the Baptist** and then present his severed **head** to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “The head of John Baptist after he has been beheaded” or “The head of John the Baptist severed from his body”
6:25	caz0			μετὰ σπουδῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **haste**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “quickly” or “hurriedly”
6:25	v2q6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγουσα	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and she said”
6:25	ap2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θέλω ἵνα ἐξαυτῆς δῷς μοι ἐπὶ πίνακι τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ	1	Here the woman implies that she wants Herod to have John killed by having his **head** cut off and brought to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I desire that you would have one of your soldiers at once behead John the Baptist and then give me his head here on a platter”
6:25	h3x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	δῷς	1	Because the girl is speaking to Herod, the word **you** is singular.
6:25	icqi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πίνακι	1	A **platter** is a large, flat serving dish. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of dish, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a tray” or “a large serving plate”
6:26	lh9k			περίλυπος γενόμενος	1	Alternate translation: “feeling very sorry”
6:26	c1gn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους	1	Here Mark indicates two reasons why Herod kept his word. First, he had made **oaths** that he did not want to break. Second, he had promised in front of **the ones reclining to eat with him**, and it would be embarrassing and shameful to break his promise when everyone had heard it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these reasons more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he had used oaths and because the ones reclining to eat with him had heard what he promised”
6:26	gtal		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς συνανακειμένους	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, at a table when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. See how you translated this phrase in [6:22](../06/22.md). Alternate translation: “the ones sitting down to eat with him” or “the ones eating with him”
6:26	mu7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἀθετῆσαι αὐτήν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **refuse**. Alternate translation: “had to allow it” or “was compelled to do what she asked”
6:27	xmyz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ἀποστείλας & σπεκουλάτορα, ἐπέταξεν ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause describes what the king **commanded** before he **sent** the executioner. Alternate translation: “having commanded an executioner to bring his head, sent him off”
6:27	kx53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σπεκουλάτορα	1	An **executioner** is a soldier who executes people for his commander. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of soldier, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “one of his soldiers”
6:27	k89i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that Herod commanded the executioner to cut off John’s **head** and then **bring** it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to behead John Baptist and then to bring his head” or “to bring the head of John the Baptist severed from his body”
6:28	jeax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πίνακι	1	See how you translated the word **platter** in [6:25](../06/25.md). Alternate translation: “a tray” or “a large serving plate”
6:28	a2bs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ κορασίῳ & τὸ κοράσιον	1	See how you translated **girl** in [6:22](../06/22.md). Alternate translation: “to the young lady … the young lady”
6:29	uzl4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦλθον	1	Here Mark implies that John’s disciples went to the jail where John had been imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came to the place where John had been imprisoned”
6:29	k77n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
6:30	u01i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. This event continues the story about how Jesus sent the twelve apostles out to drive out demons and to preach (see [6:7–13](../06/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Make sure that it is clear that Mark is continuing the story from earlier in the chapter. Alternate translation: “Now to return to the story,” or “Now”
6:30	cq4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνάγονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gather together” or “assemble”
6:30	v44x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησαν καὶ ὅσα ἐδίδαξαν	1	The expression **everything, as much as they did and as much as they taught** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “as much as they did and taught”
6:31	o97p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, δεῦτε ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ κατ’ ἰδίαν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, καὶ ἀναπαύσασθε ὀλίγον & ἦσαν γὰρ οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες πολλοί, καὶ οὐδὲ φαγεῖν εὐκαίρουν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “And the ones coming and the ones going were many, and they were not even having opportunity to eat. Therefore, he says to them, ‘You yourselves, come by yourselves to a desolate place and rest a little while.’”
6:31	bpmv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ	1	Jesus uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize that he wants the disciples to come with him. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “As for you”
6:31	vu17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες	1	Here Mark means that many people were visiting the place where Jesus and the disciples were. Many people were visiting and many others were leaving all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the people visiting that place and then leaving” or “the people who were there”
6:31	y7sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐδὲ φαγεῖν εὐκαίρουν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **opportunity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they could not even find time to eat” or “they were so busy that they could not eat”
6:32	dhhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀπῆλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “they came away”
6:32	exy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τῷ πλοίῳ	1	Here, the phrase **the boat** could refer to: (1) a boat, without specifying which one. Alternate translation: “a certain boat” (2) the same boat that Jesus and his disciples used in [5:21](../05/21.md). Alternate translation: “the same boat they had used earlier”
6:33	bi18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶδον αὐτοὺς ὑπάγοντας, καὶ ἐπέγνωσαν πολλοί	1	The word **many** could go with: (1) just **knew**. Alternate translation: “people saw them leaving, and many people knew” (2) both **saw** and **knew**. Alternate translation: “many saw them leaving and knew”
6:33	yq0y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶδον	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “some saw” or “people who were there saw”
6:33	b5hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοί	1	Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many people”
6:33	tekx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπέγνωσαν	1	Here Mark could be implying that they **knew**: (1) that Jesus and his disciples were the ones who were **leaving**. Alternate translation: “recognized them” (2) where Jesus and disciples were going. Alternate translation: “realized where they were going”
6:33	ec62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	πεζῇ & συνέδραμον ἐκεῖ	1	The expression **on foot** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “they ran there together”
6:33	lxrx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ πασῶν τῶν πόλεων	1	Here Matthew refers to the cities near where Jesus and the disciples had been. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from all the cities in that region” or “from all the nearby cities”
6:34	u25j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξελθὼν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus came out of the boat in which he and the disciples were sailing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having come out of the boat” or “having disembarked”
6:34	t449		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθὼν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
6:34	jdg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐσπλαγχνίσθη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὅτι ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because they were like sheep not having a shepherd, he had compassion on them”
6:34	sh2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐσπλαγχνίσθη ἐπ’	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he sympathized with”
6:34	j1td		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὅτι ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα	1	Here Mark compares the people who were there to **sheep** who do not have **a shepherd**. Just as **sheep** without **a shepherd** have no one to lead and take care of them, so the people have no one to lead and take care of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of the simile more explicitly. Alternate translation: “because, like sheep without a shepherd, they did not know what to do or where to go”
6:35	sei9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης & ἤδη ὥρα πολλή	1	When Mark says that an **hour** is **much**, he means that it is a time later in the day, probably soon before sunset. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the late afternoon having already arrived … the late afternoon is already here” or “the evening having almost come … the evening is almost here”
6:35	hz4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προσελθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
6:36	zrnd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀπόλυσον αὐτούς	1	Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the command **Send them away** is singular.
6:36	ruhn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀπόλυσον αὐτούς	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you send them away”
6:36	essv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	τοὺς κύκλῳ ἀγροὺς καὶ κώμας	1	Here, Mark is referring to that whole region by naming its two primary parts, the **countryside** and the **villages**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the whole surrounding area”
6:37	cxcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus says in a contrast with what the disciples asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
6:37	cts5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν?	1	The disciples are using the question form to show that Jesus’ command is absurd or impossible. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We cannot go away and buy loaves of 200 denarii and give them to them to eat.” or “We could not go away and buy enough loaves to give to them to eat even if we had 200 denarii!”
6:37	c65w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους	1	Here, the disciples are using the possessive form to describe **loaves** that are worth **200 denarii**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “loaves worth 200 denarii” or “loaves with 200 denarii”
6:37	hs21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	δηναρίων διακοσίων	1	The word **denarii** refers to silver coins, each equivalent to about one day’s wage for a hired worker. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “of 200 silver coins” or “of 200 days’ wages”
6:38	rw5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus says in a contrast with what the disciples just implied about how impossible it would be for them to feed everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
6:38	b90s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄρτους	1	The word **loaves** refers to loaves of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bread, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”
6:38	n83x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπάγετε, ἴδετε	1	Here Jesus commands to the disciples to **Go** to where they kept their food and **See** how much they have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Check your supplies and note what you have” or “Go to where you keep your food and see what is there”
6:38	ssyv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γνόντες	1	Here Mark implies that they knew how many loaves of bread they had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having known how many loaves they had”
6:38	d7u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πέντε καὶ δύο ἰχθύας	1	The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We have five loaves, and we also have two fish”
6:39	z5pu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπέταξεν αὐτοῖς ἀνακλῖναι πάντας	1	The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) **all** the people who were there. In this case, Jesus directly commanded the crowd **to recline**. Alternate translation: “he commanded the whole crowd to recline” (2) the disciples, who them told **all** the people who were there **to recline**. In this case, Jesus commands the disciples, who command the crowd. Alternate translation: “he commanded the disciples to have all the people recline”
6:39	dfv0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτοῖς ἀνακλῖναι πάντας, συμπόσια συμπόσια ἐπὶ τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them all, ‘Recline group by group on the green grass’”
6:39	cys0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνακλῖναι	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would usually **recline**, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “to sit down to eat” or “to get ready to eat”
6:39	rr46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	συμπόσια συμπόσια	1	Here, the phrase **group by group** indicates that the people were supposed to sit down in many smaller groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in many smaller groups” or “in separate groups”
6:39	xgb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ	1	Mark describes the **grass** as **green** because it was growing and healthy. If your readers would not be familiar with **green grass**, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the growing grass” or “the healthy grass”
6:40	g8dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνέπεσαν	1	See how you translated “recline” in [6:39](../06/39.md). Alternate translation: “they sat down to eat” or “they got ready to eat”
6:40	e4cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρασιαὶ πρασιαὶ, κατὰ ἑκατὸν καὶ κατὰ πεντήκοντα	1	The phrase **according to hundreds and according to fifties** refers to the number of people in each of the groups. In other words, some groups had a hundred people in them, and other groups had fifty people in them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in groups of 100 people and in groups of 50 people” or “group by group, some with 100 people and some with 50 people”
6:40	wls7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρασιαὶ πρασιαὶ	1	See how you translated **group by group** in [6:39](../06/39.md). Alternate translation: “in many smaller groups” or “in separate groups”
6:41	lydm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄρτους & τοὺς ἄρτους	1	See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread … the large chunks of bread”
6:41	l8q3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	In Jesus’ culture, most people thought that **heaven** was up above the earth. Looking up towards **heaven** was a common posture for someone who was praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a common posture for prayer in your culture, or you could explain the meaning of this posture. Alternate translation: “having raised his arms in prayer” or “having looked up to heaven to pray”
6:41	b1yq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐλόγησεν	1	Here Mark could be implying that Jesus **blessed**: (1) God for providing the food. Alternate translation: “he blessed God” or “he praised God” (2) the food. Alternate translation: “he blessed the food” or “he asked God to make the food holy”
6:41	yrv9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέκλασεν τοὺς ἄρτους	1	Here Mark means that Jesus **broke the loaves** of bread in **pieces** so that they could be served to the crowds. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “divided the loaves into servings” or “broke the loaves into smaller pieces”
6:41	uqzs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας ἐμέρισεν πᾶσιν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **divided the two fish** as he had divided the **loaves** among everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the same way he divided the two fish among all” or “he broke the two fish and gave them to his disciples so that they might set them also before all”
6:41	q3mn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πᾶσιν	1	Mark is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people who were there. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “among all of them”
6:42	szop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔφαγον πάντες	1	The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they all ate** refers to the crowds who were there. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the crowds all ate” or “all the groups of people ate”
6:42	wi2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages. Alternative translation: “until they were full”
6:43	rw83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κλάσματα δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἰχθύων	1	Here Mark means that they filled the baskets with the leftovers from the meal, including **broken pieces** of bread and pieces **from the fish**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the broken pieces of bread and parts of fish, the fillings of 12 baskets” or “the leftover pieces of bread and fish, the fillings of 12 baskets”
6:43	bsvq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα	1	Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe **fillings** that consisted of **baskets** that were stuffed with **broken pieces**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enough to fill 12 baskets” or “which filled up 12 baskets”
6:43	bjou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fillings**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “12 baskets full”
6:43	u5ha		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	δώδεκα κοφίνων	1	The word **baskets** refers to large circular containers that store food or other items. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “of 12 boxes” or “of 12 containers”
6:44	deov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ	1	Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that helps the readers understand how amazing what Jesus did was. The word does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “As for how many people were there,” or “In the end,”
6:44	v4m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τοὺς ἄρτους	1	See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “the large chunks of bread”
6:44	t68v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοὺς ἄρτους	1	Mark is using **loaves** to represent all the food that they ate, including the bread and the fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the food” or “the loaves and the fish”
6:44	u413		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦσαν & πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες	1	Here Mark indicates that **5,000 men** ate the food that Jesus provided. He does not state whether there were other people there. If possible, use a phrase that refers to **5,000 men** without implying whether other people were there. If you must imply or state whether other people were there, you could: (1) indicate that there were women and children there who were not counted. Alternate translation: “were 5,000 men, and there were women and children there too” (2) indicate that only these men ate the food. Alternate translation: “were the 5,000 men who were there”
6:45	s6yp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ εὐθὺς	1	Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,”
6:45	o3wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ πέραν	1	Here Mark implies that the disciples are sailing **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “across the sea to the opposite side”
6:45	y3ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βηθσαϊδάν	1	The word **Bethsaida** is the name of a town. It was located on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee.
6:46	hedu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the crowd that had eaten the bread and fish. Alternate translation: “to the crowd” (2) the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”
6:46	fovx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τὸ ὄρος	1	Mark does not clarify what **mountain** this is or how high up it is. If possible, use a general word for a hill or small mountain without indicating one particular place. Alternate translation: “a high place” or “a small mountain”
6:47	ff7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὀψίας γενομένης	1	Mark indicated that it was late in the day earlier in the story (see [6:35](../06/35.md)). Here, he uses a similar phrase but implies that it was later on in the evening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes a time later than the time described in [6:35](../06/35.md). Alternate translation: “when it was even later in the evening” or “further into the evening”
6:47	wczi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ πλοῖον	1	Here Mark implies that **the boat** has the disciples in it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the boat with the disciples inside”
6:48	a0u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	αὐτοὺς βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν, ἦν γὰρ ὁ ἄνεμος ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς; καὶ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “that the wind was against them and so they were being tormented as they rowed,”
6:48	bz2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτοὺς βασανιζομένους	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the wind. Alternate translation: “the wind tormenting them”
6:48	co87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βασανιζομένους	1	Here Mark refers to how hard the disciples were working to row the boat against the wind as if they were **being tormented**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “working very hard” or “making almost no progress”
6:48	cd73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν	1	When people row a boat, they stick long, flat pieces of wood, called oars, into the water and push or pull so that the boat moves. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of making a boat move, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “as they pushed the boat along with oars” or “as they worked to move the boat”
6:48	k087		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦν & ὁ ἄνεμος ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς	1	When**wind** is **against** people in a boat, that means that it is blowing directly opposite to the direction in which the boat is traveling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the wind was opposite to the direction they were sailing” or “the wind was blowing directly against them”
6:48	g7ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	περὶ τετάρτην φυλακὴν τῆς νυκτὸς	1	Here, the phrase **about the fourth watch of the night** refers to the period of time between 3:00 AM and 6:00 AM. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to this period of time. Alternate translation: “in the last part of the night” or “shortly before dawn”
6:48	nbw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes”
6:48	wpbk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης	1	Here Mark means that Jesus was miraculously **walking** on the surface of **the sea**. He did not sink into the water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “walking on the surface of the sea” or “miraculously walking on top of the sea”
6:48	b0vo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤθελεν παρελθεῖν αὐτούς	1	Here, the clause **he was wishing to pass by them** could indicate that: (1) Jesus intended to walk past them. Alternate translation: “he intended to pass them by” (2) it looked like Jesus was going to walk past them. Alternate translation: “he was about to pass by them” or “it looked like he was going to pass by them”
6:49-50	pi8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	οἱ, δὲ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης περιπατοῦντα, ἔδοξαν ὅτι φάντασμά ἐστιν, καὶ ἀνέκραξαν & πάντες γὰρ αὐτὸν εἶδον, καὶ ἐταράχθησαν & ὁ δὲ εὐθὺς ἐλάλησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, θαρσεῖτε, ἐγώ εἰμι; μὴ φοβεῖσθε	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:49](../06/49.md) and [6:50](../06/50.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to give all the reasons why the disciples **cried out** before stating that they **cried out**. Alternate translation: “But they, having seen him walking on the sea, thought that he is a ghost. In fact, they all saw him and were troubled. So, they cried out. But immediately he spoke with them and says to them, ‘Take courage! It is I! Do not be afraid!’”
6:49	go9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
6:49	ddd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης περιπατοῦντα	1	See how you translated this phrase in [6:48](../06/48.md). Alternate translation: “walking on the surface of the sea” or “miraculously walking on top of the sea”
6:49	xa2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔδοξαν ὅτι φάντασμά ἐστιν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “thought, ‘He is a ghost,’”
6:49	e4o8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	φάντασμά	1	Here, the word **ghost** refers to a spiritual or supernatural being that people see. In Jesus’ culture, when people saw a **ghost**, they usually assumed that something bad was going to happen. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of unusual experience, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “an apparition” or “some powerful and dangerous being”
6:50	lr8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the disciples cried out (see [6:49](../06/49.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for an action, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “because” or “which they did because”
6:50	xph7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐταράχθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were very nervous” or “were very anxious”
6:50	st68		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἐλάλησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς	1	The expression **spoke with them and says to them** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “says to them” or “spoke to them”
6:50	et5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θαρσεῖτε	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous”
6:51	vfo6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	λείαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξίσταντο	1	The expression **they were very amazed within themselves** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “they were very amazed”
6:51	s26w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λείαν & ἐξίσταντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they marveled very much”
6:52	etr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation about why the disciples reacted the way they did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “They were so amazed because” or “They responded like that since”
6:52	m53m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & συνῆκαν ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις	1	Here Mark implies that they **did not understand** what Jesus’ miracle with **the loaves** indicated about him. In other words, when Jesus fed many people with just five **loaves**, it meant that he was a very powerful, special person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what it meant when Jesus fed many people with the five loaves” or “they did not realize the significance of the miracle Jesus had performed with the loaves”
6:52	e5uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τοῖς ἄρτοις	1	See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”
6:52	ufmh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	τοῖς ἄρτοις ἀλλ’	1	Here, the word **but** introduces what was true about the disciples (they had hard hearts) in contrast with what they should have done (**understand about the loaves**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **but** untranslated. Alternate translation: “the loaves; instead,”
6:52	t1qb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη	1	Here, Mark is speaking of the disciples’ **heart** as if it **were having been hardened**. He means that the disciples were stubborn and refused to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were being stubborn” or “they were unwilling to pay attention”
6:52	lxd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that it was the disciples themselves. Alternate translation: “their hearts had become hard” or “they had hardened their hearts”
6:52	m7yv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “their hearts”
6:53	twem		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαπεράσαντες	1	Mark implies that they **crossed over** the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having crossed over the lake”
6:53	bxnf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went”
6:53	p316		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γεννησαρὲτ	1	The word **Gennesaret** could refer to: (1) a region on the northwest side of the Sea of Galilee. Alternate translation: “the area called Gennesaret” (2) a small town on the northwest side of the Sea of Galilee. Alternate translation: “the village of Gennesaret”
6:53	p79w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	προσωρμίσθησαν	1	When people anchor a boat, they fasten it securely to something solid so that it cannot float away. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of action, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “pulled the boat up on the shore” or “tied the boat to something on the shore” or “secured the boat there”
6:54	xlpe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντων	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
6:55	d9k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	περιέδραμον & ἤρξαντο & ἤκουον	1	Here, the pronoun **they** in the phrase **they ran** refers to the people who recognized Jesus. The pronoun **they** in the phrases **they began** and **they were hearing** refer to people who lived throughout **that whole region**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people there ran throughout … those who lived in that region began … they were hearing”
6:55	ufvx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τοῖς κραβάττοις	1	The word **mats** refers to portable beds that could also be used to transport a person. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bed, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. See how you translated this word in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “their stretchers”
6:55	rcq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπὶ τοῖς κραβάττοις τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας	1	The pronoun **their** refers to **the ones having sickness**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the ones having sickness on their mats”
6:55	svpg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sick people”
6:55	f5s2			ὅπου ἤκουον ὅτι ἐστίν	1	Alternate translation: “wherever they were hearing that Jesus had gone”
6:55	afpm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἤκουον ὅτι ἐστίν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were hearing, ‘He is there’”
6:56	bqzf			εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς	1	Alternate translation: “into little towns or into big towns or into rural areas”
6:56	gi6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐτίθεσαν	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “men and women were placing”
6:56	eh2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῖς ἀγοραῖς	1	The word **marketplaces** refers to large, open-air areas where people buy and sell goods. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of area, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the town squares” or “the parks”
6:56	y6hs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρεκάλουν & ἅψωνται	1	The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they might touch** refers to **the ones being sick**. The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they were begging** could refer to: (1) **the ones being sick**. Alternate translation: “these sick people were begging … they might touch” (2) the people who were **placing the ones being sick in the marketplaces**. Alternate translation: “the people who placed the sick people there were begging … the sick people might touch”
6:56	k4tq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτὸν ἵνα κἂν τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται; καὶ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please let us even touch the edge of your garment.’ And”
6:56	gsdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κἂν & ἅψωνται	1	Here, the word **even** indicates that these people think that, to be healed, they do not need to do anything more than touch Jesus’ garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all they might do is touch” or “they could only touch”
6:56	zo6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἂν ἥψαντο αὐτοῦ ἐσῴζοντο	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that was God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God was healing as many as touched it” or “Jesus was healing as many as touched it”
6:56	cir0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	2	Here, the word translated **it** could: (1) refer to a thing, in this case **the edge** of Jesus’ garment. Alternate translation: “the edge of his garment” (2) refer to a person, in this case Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “him”
7:intro	vq1j				0	# Mark 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Jesus expands his ministry and encounters opposition (6:7–8:21)\n      * Argument with the Pharisees and scribes about washing hands (7:1–13)\n      * Jesus teaches about what defiles people (7:14–23)\n      * Jesus meets a Canaanite woman (7:24–30)\n      * Jesus heals a man who is deaf and can barely speak (7:31–37)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [7:6–7](../07/06.md), which is a quote from [Isaiah 29:13](../isa/29/13.md).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### The “tradition of the elders”\n\nThe “tradition of the elders” included interpretations of Moses’ law that Jewish religious leaders had developed and passed down to their disciples, and they to their disciples. These interpretations explained what specific laws meant and how to obey them. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for specific interpretations of the law that he disagreed with. In this chapter, Jesus and the Pharisees argue about washing hands, honoring parents, and giving gifts to God. When you translate the phrase “tradition of the elders,” use a form that refers to teachings that teachers pass down to their students. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/tradition]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/elder]])\n\n### Washing hands before eating\n\nIn [7:5](../07/05.md), the scribes and Pharisees rebuke Jesus for failing to have his disciples wash their hands before eating. One of the traditions that the Pharisees followed was a requirement that people wash their hands before eating. They did this to make their hands ceremonially clean, not primarily to clean off dirt. Make sure that your translation indicates that Jesus and the Pharisees are debating about ceremonial or ritual washing, not washing off dirt.\n\n### The gift for God\n\nIn [7:10–13](../07/10.md), Jesus rebukes the Pharisees for allowing people to promise to give something to God instead of using it to help their parents. Jesus is not saying that giving things to God is wrong. Instead, he is saying that honoring one’s parents is one of the most important commandments that God gave, and no tradition should prevent people from honoring their parents. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Things that go in and out of people\n\nIn [7:14–23](../07/14.md), Jesus speaks about things that are outside people and that go into them, and he speaks about things that are inside people and come out of them. When he speaks about things that are outside people and go into them, he is referring more specifically to food and drink. He teaches that these things do not make people unclean. When he speaks about things that are inside people and go out of them, he is referring more specifically to people’s thoughts and desires that lead to actions. He teaches that these things do make people unclean. Since Jesus explains what he means when he refers to things going in and out of people, if possible preserve the movement and location language.\n\n### Feeding little dogs\n\nIn [7:27](../07/27.md), Jesus tells the Canaanite woman that it is not right to give food that is meant for children to little dogs. In [7:28](../07/28.md), the woman responds that little dogs eat the little bits of food that fall down from what the children are eating. The children represent Jews, and the little dogs represent non-Jews. The food represents things that Jesus does for people. What Jesus means is that he is supposed to do things for Jews first, before he does things for non-Jews. What the woman means is that what she is asking Jesus to do is unimportant enough that he can do it without taking away from what he does for Jews. If possible, do not directly express the meaning of what Jesus and the woman say about little dogs, but make sure that your translation can naturally imply this meaning.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 5, 18, 28, 32, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])\n\n### Verse 16\n\nSome of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for [7:16](../07/16.md). Some early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words: “If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear.” Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
7:1-2	wd6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων & καὶ ἰδόντες τινὰς τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ὅτι κοιναῖς χερσίν, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις, ἐσθίουσιν τοὺς ἄρτους	1	Here, verse 2 could: (1) begin a sentence that continues in verse 5, after being interrupted by explanatory information in verses 3–4. See the ULT. (2) end the sentence that began in verse 1. In this case, the explanatory information in verses 3–4 stands by itself, and a new sentence begins in verse 5. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to delete the dash at the end of verse 4 and start a new sentence at the beginning of verse 5. Alternate translation: “And the Pharisees and some of the scribes are being gathered to him, having come from Jerusalem and having seen some of his disciples, that they eat bread with defiled hands, that is, unwashed.” (3) be a sentence fragment that stands by itself, with the implication being that the Pharisees disapproved of what they saw. In this case, the explanatory information in verses 3–4 stands by itself, and a new sentence begins in verse 5. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to delete the dash at the end of verse 4 and start a new sentence at the beginning of verse 5. Alternate translation: “And the Pharisees and some of the scribes, having come from Jerusalem, are being gathered to him. And having seen some of his disciples, that they eat loaves with defiled hands, that is, unwashed, they disapproved of that.”
7:1	b9ul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”
7:1	e2ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων	1	Here Mark could be implying that: (1) both **the Pharisees** and **the scribes** came **from Jerusalem**. Alternate translation: “having come from Jerusalem, the Pharisees and some of the scribes are being gathered to him” (2) only **the scribes** came **from Jerusalem**. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees and some of the scribes who came from Jerusalem are being gathered to him”
7:1	j32n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
7:1	ye06		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνάγονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are gathering” or “are coming together”
7:2	ea9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἰδόντες τινὰς τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ὅτι & ἐσθίουσιν	1	Here, the phrase **that they eat** refers directly back to the phrase **some of his disciples**. Mark expresses the idea in this way to introduce whom the Pharisees and scribes saw and then explain what they saw them doing. If referring to who were seen and then referring back to them with the phrase **that they eat** would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “having seen some of his disciples eating”
7:2	a7xf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐσθίουσιν τοὺς ἄρτους	1	The Pharisees and scribes are using **loaves** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they eat their meals”
7:2	tmyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κοιναῖς χερσίν, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις	1	Here Mark explains that **defiled hands** are hands that are **unwashed**. Consider how you might include an explanation like this. Alternate translation: “with unwashed hands, which are defiled” or “with defiled—that is to say, unwashed—hands”
7:3	mj6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	γὰρ	1	Here Mark introduces background information that will help readers understand why the Pharisees and scribes are interested in whether Jesus’ disciples wash their hands. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “that was important to them because” or “now you should know that”
7:3	bj69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ & Φαρισαῖοι καὶ πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Here Mark mentions **the Pharisees** separately because they follow this **tradition** particularly strictly. He does not mean that **the Pharisees** are not **Jews**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees and all the rest of the Jews” or “especially the Pharisees, but also all the Jews,”
7:3	dvgu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Mark says **all** here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most of the Jews” or “very many Jews”
7:3	q9xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐὰν μὴ πυγμῇ νίψωνται τὰς χεῖρας οὐκ ἐσθίουσιν	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only eat if they have washed their hands with a fist”
7:3	hz8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πυγμῇ	1	Here, the phrase **with a fist** refers to a specific way of washing one’s hands. It could refer to the position of the hands during washing, how much of the hands were washed, or how much water was used. Since scholars are not sure exactly what the phrase indicates, you could use a general term that indicates that this was a special washing for ceremonial or ritual purposes. Alternate translation: “ceremonially” or “in the proper way”
7:3	x0b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	Here, the Pharisees and scribes are using the possessive form to describe a **tradition** that came from **the elders**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the tradition given to us by the elders” or “the tradition handed down to us by the elders”
7:3	lj2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tradition**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what the elders taught them”
7:3	ij02		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	Here, the word **elders** refers to respected ancestors whose teaching is trusted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the ancestral teachers” or “of our respected forefathers”
7:4	jspb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἀγορᾶς ἐὰν μὴ βαπτίσωνται οὐκ ἐσθίουσιν	1	Here Mark could be indicating that the Pharisees and other Jews: (1) **do not eat** anything unless they **baptize** themselves when they return home **from the marketplace**. Alternate translation: “returning from the marketplace, they do not eat unless they baptize themselves” (2) **do not eat** what they brought home **from the marketplace** unless they **baptize** it first. Alternate translation: “they do not eat anything from the marketplace unless they baptize it”
7:4	zieq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀγορᾶς	1	See how you translated **marketplace** in [6:56](../06/56.md). Alternate translation: “a town square” or “a park”
7:4	guwy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐὰν μὴ βαπτίσωνται οὐκ ἐσθίουσιν	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only eat if they have baptized”
7:4	sdg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄλλα πολλά ἐστιν ἃ παρέλαβον κρατεῖν	1	Here Mark is referring to **many other** traditions that the Pharisees and other Jews **received** from the elders and **hold to**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “there are many other traditions that they received from the elders and that they hold to”
7:4	d3qc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων	1	The terms **cups**, **pitchers**, and **copper vessels** all refer to containers that people would use for making, serving, and storing food. Mark is using the three terms together to refer to many different kinds of containers like these. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could refer to many different kinds of containers by using only one or two terms. Alternate translation: “of various dishes” or “of pots and pans”
7:4	qhd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ξεστῶν	1	A **pitcher** is a container for holding liquids. This specific type of container could hold about half a liter, or about one pint. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “jugs”
7:4	x44f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	χαλκίων	1	Here, the word translated as **copper vessels** refers to any household container made from **copper** or copper alloys such as brass or bronze. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “metal serving dishes” or “bronze pots”
7:4	wa3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	χαλκίων	1	Some ancient manuscripts do not include any other items after the **copper vessels**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add the phrase “and beds” after the words **copper vessels**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
7:5	tn2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ ἐπερωτῶσιν αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς	1	Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to express the relationship between this verse, the explanatory information in verses 3–4, and the statement in verse 2. See the note at the beginning of this chapter on verses 1–2.
7:5	et51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ κοιναῖς χερσὶν ἐσθίουσιν τὸν ἄρτον?	1	The Pharisees and the scribes are using the question form to rebuke Jesus for what his disciples are doing. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Your disciples should walk according to the tradition of the elders, and they should not eat bread with unwashed hands.” or “We are shocked that your disciples do not walk according to the tradition of the elders, instead eating bread with unwashed hands!”
7:5	hts4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	Here the Pharisees and the scribes speak of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do your disciples not behave according to the tradition of the elders” or “do your disciples not live according to the tradition of the elders”
7:5	wtli		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σου	1	Because the Pharisees and the scribes are talking to Jesus, the word **your** is singular.
7:5	g2ay		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	See how you translated this phrase in [7:3](../07/03.md). Alternate translation: “the tradition given to us by the ancestral teachers” or “what the respected forefathers taught us”
7:5	ugom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word **but** introduces what the disciples actually did in contrast with what the Pharisees and the scribes thought that they should have done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave but untranslated. Alternate translation: “but instead”
7:5	j7ht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐσθίουσιν τὸν ἄρτον	1	The Pharisees and scribes are using **bread** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they eat their meals”
7:6	ae1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
7:6	bf9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλῶς	1	Here, the word **well** indicates that what **Isaiah prophesied** accurately describes the scribes and the Pharisees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “accurately” or “truly”
7:6-7	oavh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὡς γέγραπται, ὅτι οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ & μάτην δὲ σέβονταί με, διδάσκοντες διδασκαλίας ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “As it is written, God said that this people honors him with their lips, but their heart is far away from him. But they worship him in vain, teaching as doctrines commandments of men.”
7:6	khhl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὡς γέγραπται	1	Here Jesus introduces a quotation from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Isaiah 29:13](../isa/29/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a quotation from an important text, and you could include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “He wrote in the book of Isaiah” or “As he said”
7:6	j26f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὗτος ὁ λαὸς	1	Here, the phrase **This people** refers to the Israelites about whom Isaiah was speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “The Israelites honor” or “These Jewish people”
7:6	czz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	με & ἐμοῦ	1	Here, both uses of the word **me** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to him more directly. Alternate translation: “me, their God, … me”
7:6	ep7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῖς χείλεσίν	1	Here, **lips** represent someone speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with their speech” or “with their words”
7:6	xtab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	Here Isaiah speaks as if the Israelites’ **heart** were **far away** from God. He means that they do not think about God or want to obey him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if their hearts were far away from me” or “they do not want to serve me”
7:6	zgt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “their hearts are far away”
7:6	vxlk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν	1	In the author’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “their mind” or “their thinking”
7:7	etib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next idea in the quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,”
7:7	e0s6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διδάσκοντες	1	Here, the word **teaching** introduces a reason why their worship is **in vain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “since they teach”
7:7	uc2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διδασκαλίας ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **doctrines** and **commandments**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as authoritative what men have commanded”
7:7	sfvq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, Isaiah is using the possessive form to describe **commandments** that are given by **men**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “things commanded by men”
7:7	pnq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Isaiah is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of people”
7:8	cusf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφέντες	1	Here Jesus speaks as if **the commandment of God** were a place that the scribes and Pharisees could leave. He means that they have stopped obeying **the commandment of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Having abandoned” or “Having stopped obeying”
7:8	bg0a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a **commandment** that came from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the commandment given by God” or “the commandment we received from God”
7:8	iltj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **commandment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded us”
7:8	wn0q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a **tradition** that came from **men**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the tradition handed down by men” or “the tradition you received from men”
7:8	hnw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tradition**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what men teach”
7:8	bw32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of people”
7:8	gxi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Some ancient manuscripts do not include any words in this verse after the phrase **of men**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add the words “washings of pitchers and cups and many other similar such things you do” after the words **of men**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
7:9	e3qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε	1	Here Jesus says that the scribes and Pharisees do something **well** when he thinks that they are actually doing something wrong. He speaks in this way in order to make a point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It is wrong for you reject the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition” or “you should not reject the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition”
7:9	jqnt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ & τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **commandment** and **tradition**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded us … what you were taught”
7:9	j9po		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a **commandment** that came from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the commandment given by God” or “the commandment we received from God”
7:9	t4hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τηρήσητε	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **you may keep**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “you may establish.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
7:10	p1q0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how the scribes and Pharisees reject God’s law. This explanation continues in [7:11–13](../07/11.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is how you do that:” or “What I mean is that”
7:10	ulzo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς & εἶπεν	1	Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures. The first quotation could be from [Exodus 20:12](../exo/20/12.md) or [Deuteronomy 5:16](../deu/05/16.md). The second quotation could be from [Exodus 21:17](../exo/21/17.md) or [Leviticus 20:9](../lev/20/09.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a quotation from an important text, and you could include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote in the law” or “as you can read in the Scriptures, Moses said”
7:10	d4sd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου; καί, ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that all people should honor their father and their mother and that everyone speaking evil of his father or mother should end in death.”
7:10	vdg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	τίμα & σου & σου	1	Since God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the command **Honor** and the words **your** and **your** are singular.
7:10	ogpv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one speaking evil of his father or mother, he should end in death” or “Anyone who speaks evil of his father or mother must end in death”
7:10	ypvx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ κακολογῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evil**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The one saying evil things about”
7:10	vcx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πατέρα ἢ μητέρα & τελευτάτω	1	Although the terms **his** and **him** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of one’s own father or mother, let that person end”
7:10	b9yn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	θανάτῳ τελευτάτω	1	Here, the phrase **end in death** means that the person is killed or executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him be put to death” or “let him be killed”
7:11-12	ras6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, ἐὰν εἴπῃ ἄνθρωπος τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί, κορβᾶν, (ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον), ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς & οὐκέτι ἀφίετε αὐτὸν οὐδὲν ποιῆσαι τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί	1	Here Jesus quotes the scribes and Pharisees using a hypothetical or imaginary situation to help explain what would happen **if a man says to his father or his mother** that anything he might have given them is **Corban**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing a hypothetical or imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “But you say, ‘Suppose that a man says to his father or his mother, “Whatever you might have benefited from me is Corban”’ (that is, a gift). In that case, you no longer permit him to do anything for his father or his mother”
7:11	sswz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, ἐὰν εἴπῃ ἄνθρωπος τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί, κορβᾶν, (ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον), ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς,	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within quotations. Alternate translation: “But you say that whoever says to his father or his mother that whatever they might have benefited from him is Corban (that is, a gift)”
7:11	ycru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what the scribes and Pharisees allow in contrast to what God commanded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “Despite that,”
7:11	nhii		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	εἴπῃ ἄνθρωπος τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί	1	Although the terms **man**, **his**, and **his** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “a person says to his or her father or mother”
7:11	ax49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς	1	Here, the phrase **Whatever you might have benefited from me** refers to money or goods that children might give to their parents when they need help. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Whatever I might have given to help you” or “Anything you might have received from me”
7:11	i49n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὠφεληθῇς	1	Because the man are talking to his father or his mother, the word **you** is singular.
7:11	cd57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	κορβᾶν	1	The word **Corban** is a Hebrew word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means at the end of the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.
7:11	ev2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κορβᾶν & ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον	1	Here Mark provides an explanation of what **Corban** means. Use a form that shows that Mark is explaining what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “is Corban’”—which means a gift—” or “is Corban’” (which can be translated as “gift”)”
7:11	nuk0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δῶρον	1	Here Mark implies that the person is giving something as a **gift** to God. Because of that, the person will not give it to his or her parents. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a gift for God” or “a gift to God only”
7:12	dyx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκέτι ἀφίετε αὐτὸν οὐδὲν ποιῆσαι	1	The words translated **no longer** and **anything** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “you permit him to do nothing any longer” or “you certainly do not permit him to do anything any longer”
7:12	o66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸν & τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί	1	Although the terms **him**, **his**, and **his** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “that person … for his or her father or mother”
7:13	kmww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀκυροῦντες	1	Here Jesus speaks as if **the word of God** were an object that people could set aside. He means that they are ignoring **the word of God** and treating it like it is not important. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nullifying” or “ignoring”
7:13	i349		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Jesus is using the term **word** to refer to the commands that God gave using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God said” or “God’s command”
7:13	ifh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ παραδόσει ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tradition**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by what you received”
7:13	fg2s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρεδώκατε	1	Here Jesus speaks as if **the tradition** were a physical object that the scribes and Pharisees had **handed down** to others. He means that they taught people to observe **the tradition**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you instructed” or “you told to other people”
7:15	gk5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδέν & ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς αὐτὸν	1	Here Jesus is referring to food and drink, which are **outside the man** and enter **into him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Since the disciples ask about the meaning of this saying in [7:17](../07/17.md), include as little implied information as possible. Alternate translation: “no food or drink, entering into him” or “nothing outside the man, being eaten by him”
7:15	y6ws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & αὐτὸν & αὐτόν & τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the terms **man** and **him** throughout the verse are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the person … him or her … him or her … the person … the person”
7:15	nneo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	The phrase **the man** throughout this verse represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a person … a person … that person”
7:15	ms5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά	1	Here Jesus is referring to words and deeds, which are what **come out from** people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Since the disciples ask about the meaning of this saying in [7:17](../07/17.md), include as little implied information as possible. Alternate translation: “the words and deeds that come out from the man” or “the things that the man says and does”
7:15	f380		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορευόμενά	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “that go out”
7:16	p6fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω	1	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The note below discusses translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it.
7:16	y48u			Εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω	1	See how you translated the similar sentence in [4:9](../04/09.md).
7:17	cfzl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εἰσῆλθεν	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, entered”
7:17	l7d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου	1	Here Mark implies that when Jesus **entered into a house**, he was avoiding or getting away from **the crowd**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “where they were not with the crowd” or “to avoid the crowd”
7:17	vkui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τὴν παραβολήν	1	Here the disciples ask Jesus to explain **the parable** about things that go into and out of a person (see [7:15](../07/15.md)). Alternate translation: “the parable about what goes into a person”
7:18	z8w1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples for how they still do not understand what he is saying. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I can tell that you also are without understanding.” or “I am amazed that you also do not understand!”
7:18-19	txj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, οὐ δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι & ὅτι οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἀλλ’ εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν, καὶ εἰς τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκπορεύεται?	1	Jesus is using the question form to remind his disciples about what happens to the food that people eat. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should already understand that everything that enters into the man from outside is not able to defile him, because it does not go into his heart, but into the stomach, and passes out into the latrine (making all foods clean).” or “You already know that everything that enters into the man from outside is not able to defile him, because it does not go into his heart, but into the stomach, and passes out into the latrine (making all foods clean)!”
7:18	yqve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	Here Jesus is referring to food and drink, which are **outside** a person and enter **into the man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar words in [7:15](../07/15.md). Alternate translation: “all food and drink, entering into him,” or “everything outside the man, being eaten by him,”
7:18	h4nr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἄνθρωπον & αὐτὸν	1	Although the terms **man** and **him** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the person … him or her”
7:18	wda0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	The phrase **the man** represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a person”
7:19	dtx7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, the word **because** introduces an explanation about why nothing from outside a person can defile that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **because** untranslated. Alternate translation: “for” or “and that is because”
7:19	e710		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **go**. Alternate translation: “it does not come”
7:19	h4sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἀλλ’ εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν	1	The phrases **his heart** and **the stomach** represent people’s hearts and stomachs in general, not one particular heart and stomach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “into a person’s heart but into a person’s stomach”
7:19	y2cr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὴν καρδίαν	1	In Jesus’ culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “into his head” or “into his mind”
7:19	kgu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ	1	Although the term **his** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her”
7:19	qlbz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	εἰς τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκπορεύεται	1	Jesus is referring to the process of expelling and removing feces and urine in a polite way by using the phrase **passes out into the latrine**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “is evacuated from the bowels” or “passes out of the body as waste”
7:19	ifcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα	1	A **latrine** is a place where people expel and remove feces and urine. If your readers would not be familiar with this word, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the bathroom” or “the water closet”
7:19	hm98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα & καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα	1	Here, the phrase **cleansing all foods** is Mark’s explanation of the implication of what Jesus has said. He means that Jesus’ teaching indicates that **all foods** are clean. If it would be helpful in your language, you make that idea more explicit. Make sure that you use a form that shows that this phrase is not part of what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “the latrine?’ So, Jesus cleansed all foods.” or “the latrine?’ Now that implies that all foods are clean.”
7:20	rihs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” or “After that,”
7:20	fvew		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον, ἐκεῖνο	1	Here, the word **that** refers directly back to **What is coming out from the man**. Jesus expresses the idea in this way to introduce the topic he is sepaking about and then explain what he wants to say about that topic. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the word **that** would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “What is coming out from the man”
7:20	r12p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον	1	Here Jesus is referring to words and deeds, which are what **is coming out from** people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar words in [7:15](../07/15.md). Alternate translation: “The words and deeds that come out from the man” or “The things that the man says and does”
7:20	zu40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορευόμενον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “is going out”
7:20	hesw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term **man** is masculine throughout this verse, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the person … the person”
7:20	r7yp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	The phrase **the man** throughout this verse represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a person … that person”
7:21	u74o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a basis for the claim that Jesus made in the previous verse about how what comes out from a person is what defiles that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “I say that because”
7:21	chkk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	In Jesus’ culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think, feel, and desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think, feel, and desire in your culture, or you could express the idea plainly. See how you translated **heart** in [7:19](../07/19.md). Alternate translation: “from the head of men” or “from the mind of men” or “from what men think and desire”
7:21	nwik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τῆς καρδίας	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the hearts”
7:21	pycp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans”
7:21	cb8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορεύονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go out”
7:21	wi9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκπορεύονται	1	Here Jesus speaks as if evil deeds and desires **go out** from the inside of a person. He means that these evil deeds and desires have their origin from the person, not from anything outside the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “spring” or “originate”
7:21-22	eey1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ & πορνεῖαι, κλοπαί, φόνοι & μοιχεῖαι, πλεονεξίαι, πονηρίαι, δόλος, ἀσέλγεια, ὀφθαλμὸς, πονηρός, βλασφημία, ὑπερηφανία, ἀφροσύνη	1	If your language does not use nouns for some or all of the ideas in this list, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things that people do, including evil thinking, acting in sexually immoral ways, stealing things, murdering, acting in adulterous ways, desiring what others have, doing what is wicked, deceiving people, acting in sensual ways, having an evil eye, blaspheming, being prideful, and being foolish”
7:22	ho3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀσέλγεια	1	The word **sensuality** describes behavior that is unrestrained and that is unacceptable according to common standards. Often, this word refers especially to the act of indulging in unacceptable sexual behavior. If your readers would not be familiar with this category, you could use the name of a similar category in your area, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “sexual self-indulgence” or “shameful sexual behavior”
7:22	g1el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὀφθαλμὸς, πονηρός	1	The phrase **an evil eye** describes someone who is jealous or envious. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “jealousy” or “envy”
7:23	l4by		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πάντα ταῦτα τὰ πονηρὰ ἔσωθεν ἐκπορεύεται	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evils**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “People do all these evil things because of what is within”
7:23	gq36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορεύεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go out”
7:23	nm4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκπορεύεται	1	Here Jesus speaks as if evil deeds and desires **go out** from **within** a person. He means that these evil deeds and desires have their origin from the person, not from anything outside the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [7:21](../07/21.md). Alternate translation: “spring” or “originate”
7:23	uwxa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἔσωθεν	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “from within a person”
7:23	a51m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the person”
7:23	q2c8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	The word the **man** represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a person”
7:24	k9bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
7:24	xyh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκεῖθεν	1	Here, the word **there** refers to the region of Gennesaret (see [6:53](../06/53.md)), which is where Jesus was teaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from where he was” or “from Gennesaret”
7:24	r0lf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπῆλθεν	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went away”
7:24	nm7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀπῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came away”
7:24	og69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **entered** this **house** as a guest who had been invited to stay there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having entered into a house as a guest” or “having been invited to stay at a house”
7:24	hcyu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γνῶναι	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus did not want people **to know** that he was staying in this specific **house**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to know that he was there”
7:25-26	ue8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ἀλλ’ εὐθὺς ἀκούσασα γυνὴ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἐλθοῦσα, προσέπεσεν πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ & ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει, καὶ ἠρώτα αὐτὸν ἵνα τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐκβάλῃ ἐκ τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [7:25](../07/25.md) and [7:26](../07/26.md) into a verse bridge in order to include all the information about the woman before narrating what the woman did. Alternate translation: “But immediately a woman heard about him. She was a Greek, a Syrophoenician by descent. Her little daughter had an unclean spirit. She, having come, fell down at his feet. She was asking him that he would cast out the demon from her daughter.”
7:25	wjgv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what **a woman** did in contrast to what Jesus wanted people to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead,”
7:25	p33v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	εὐθὺς ἀκούσασα γυνὴ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἐλθοῦσα, προσέπεσεν πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark introduces **a woman** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a woman heard about him. Her little daughter had an unclean spirit. Immediately, having come, she fell down at his feet”
7:25	eofq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐθὺς ἀκούσασα γυνὴ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἐλθοῦσα	1	Here, the word **immediately** could go with: (1) **having heard**. Alternate translation: “having heard about him immediately, a woman, of whom her little daughter had an unclean spirit, having come” (2) **having come**. Alternate translation: “having heard about him, a woman, of whom her little daughter had an unclean spirit, immediately having come”
7:25	fix3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθοῦσα	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
7:25	tdv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	In the woman’s culture, falling down at someone’s feet was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what falling down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated herself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect”
7:26	aik7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει, καὶ ἠρώτα	1	Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “By the way, the woman was a Greek, a Syrophoenician by descent. She was asking”
7:26	e39y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συροφοινίκισσα	1	The word **Syrophoenician** identifies the woman as someone who was native to the region of Syrophoenicia. This region was a smaller portion of Syria that was known as Phoenicia. Phoenicia was the area where the cities of Tyre and Sidon were. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some explanation of this word. Alternate translation: “from that region, called Syrophoenicia,” or “from the region of Phoenicia within the province of Syria”
7:26	w21g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἠρώτα αὐτὸν ἵνα τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐκβάλῃ ἐκ τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “she was asking him, ‘Please cast out the demon from my daughter’”
7:27	zpbr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “It is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs, so permit the children first to be fed”
7:27	gsj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν	1	To answer the woman, Jesus offers a story or illustration. In the story, the **children** represent the Jewish people, the **little dogs** represent non-Jewish people, and the **bread** represents the help that Jesus gives to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this is a story with a specific message, or you could explain what the parable means. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: Permit the children first to be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs” or “Permit the children first to be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs. That is why I am helping my fellow Jews before I help you”
7:27	o8nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἄφες	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the woman, the command **Permit** is singular.
7:27	r898		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “the children first to receive food” or “someone to feed the children first”
7:27	ghtr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **bread** that was prepared for **the children** to eat. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the food prepared for the children” or “the food that the children were going to eat”
7:27	k2wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸν ἄρτον	1	Jesus is using **bread** to represent food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the meals”
7:27	cjec		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν	1	Here, Jesus implies that the bread is thrown **to the little dogs** so that they can eat it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to throw it to the little dogs for them to eat”
7:27	p3e5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τοῖς κυναρίοις	1	Here, the phrase **little dogs** could describe: (1) domesticated animals that eat pests and can protect houses and families. You could use the name of a similar animal in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to the domesticated animals” or “to the guard animals” (2) scavenging animals that were generally considered unclean and dirty. You could use the name of a similar animal in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to the scavenging animals” or “to the dirty animals”
7:28	xgl7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what the woman says in contrast to what Jesus said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” or “Yet”
7:28	k43f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ναί	1	Here, the woman uses the word **Yes** to indicate that she understands and agrees with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Yes, I agree” or “Yes, that is true”
7:28	ddof		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	2	Here, the word **and** introduces the woman’s further explanation of what Jesus said about children and little dogs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **and** untranslated. Alternate translation: “but it is also true” or “yet even further,”
7:28	na7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	τὰ κυνάρια ὑποκάτω τῆς τραπέζης ἐσθίουσιν ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν παιδίων	1	To ask Jesus to help her, the woman offers a story or illustration based on the parable that Jesus told in [7:27](../07/27.md). In the story, the **little dogs** represent non-Jewish people, and the **crumbs** represent the help that Jesus gives to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this is a story with a specific message, or you could explain what the parable means. Alternate translation: “here is a similar story: the little dogs under the table eat from the crumbs of the children” or “the little dogs under the table eat from the crumbs of the children. That is what helping me would be like”
7:28	nlfk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὰ κυνάρια	1	See you how you translated this phrase in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “to the domesticated animals” or “to the scavenging animals”
7:28	u7ns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ κυνάρια ὑποκάτω τῆς τραπέζης	1	The woman means that **the little dogs** are where the **children** are eating the food. In her culture, they would lie **under the table** where the food was served. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the little dogs near the food” or “the little dogs that are nearby when the food is served”
7:28	y0hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῶν ψιχίων τῶν παιδίων	1	Here, the woman is using the possessive form to describe **crumbs** that fall from the food that the **children** are eating. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the crumbs from what the children are eating” or “crumbs that fall from the children’s meals”
7:29	vwsw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦτον τὸν λόγον	1	Jesus is using the term **word** to mean what the woman said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this answer” or “how you responded”
7:29	sa9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὕπαγε	1	When Jesus tells the woman to **go**, he implies that he will do what she asked. In other words, he sends her away because he wants her to see that he has cast out the demon. Alternate translation: “go, for I have done what you asked” or “I will help you. So go”
7:29	n2s0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὕπαγε & σου	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the woman, the command **go** and the word **your** are singular.
7:29	sbqp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου	1	Here Jesus implies that the **demon** left the **daughter** because Jesus himself commanded it to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I have caused the demon to go out from your daughter” or “The demon has gone out from your daughter as you requested”
7:29	p74n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελήλυθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “has come out”
7:30	xo9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ παιδίον βεβλημένον ἐπὶ τὴν κλίνην	1	Here Mark could be implying that **the child** was **having been put on the bed** because: (1) she had been healed and could sleep and rest normally. Alternate translation: “the child having been put on the bed, sleeping normally” or “the child lying peacefully on the bed” (2) the demon had exhausted her when it left her. Alternate translation: “the child having been thrown on the bed” or “the child lying exhausted on the bed”
7:30	y3x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ παιδίον βεβλημένον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the child lying” or “the child had lain down”
7:31	iif6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ πάλιν	1	Here, the phrase **And again** introduces the next major event in the story. The word **again** implies that Jesus has already **gone out** from a location recently (see [7:24](../07/24.md), where he left for Tyre and Sidon). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And again** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “Later on,”
7:31	gjcd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθὼν & ἦλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” and “came” instead of **gone** and **went**. Alternate translation: “having come out … he came”
7:31	yzf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἦλθεν	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went”
7:31	cxa8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δεκαπόλεως	1	The word **Decapolis** is a name for a region to the southeast of Galilee. The name means “the Ten Towns.” See how you translated this name in [5:20](../05/20.md).
7:32	v23f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	φέρουσιν αὐτῷ κωφὸν καὶ μογιλάλον	1	Here Mark introduces a man who is **deaf and barely able to speak** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man there who was deaf and barely able to speak. They bring him to Jesus” or “they bring to him a man. He was deaf and barely able to speak”
7:32	fa0c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	φέρουσιν & παρακαλοῦσιν	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “certain people bring … they beg”
7:32	m7xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please lay your hand on him’”
7:32	jlj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα	1	Here the people are implying that they want Jesus to **lay his hand on him** to heal the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he would lay his hand on him and heal” or “he, by laying his hand on him, would heal him”
7:33	jdfn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔβαλεν τοὺς δακτύλους αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰ ὦτα αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **put** one finger from one of his hands into one of the man’s **ears**, and he **put** one finger from the other hand into the man’s other ear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he put a finger in both of the man’s ears”
7:33	ld3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	πτύσας	1	Here Mark does not state where Jesus **spit**. He may have spit on the ground, on his own fingers, or on the man’s tongue. If possible, do not state where exactly Jesus spit. Alternate translation: “having spit saliva”
7:34	hu66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	In Jesus’ culture, most people thought that heaven was up above the earth. Looking up towards heaven was a common posture for someone who was praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a common posture for prayer in your culture, or you could explain the meaning of this posture. Alternate translation: “having raised his arms in prayer” or “having looked up to heaven to pray”
7:34	iyxe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἐστέναξεν	1	When Jesus **sighed**, it could indicate that he was praying deeply, that he felt compassion for the man, or that healing the man required much energy or power. If possible, use a general word or phrase that refers to someone breathing deeply in or out. Alternate translation: “he breathed deeply” or “he exhaled loudly”
7:34	xh89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφφαθά, ὅ ἐστιν, διανοίχθητι	1	Here Mark provides an explanation of what **Ephphatha** means. Use a form that shows that Mark is explaining what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “‘Ephphatha!’—that is, ‘Be opened.’” or “‘Ephphatha!’ That is translated, ‘Be opened!’”
7:34	lbw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ἐφφαθά	1	The word **Ephphatha** is an Aramaic word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means at the end of the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.
7:34	q6qk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διανοίχθητι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Open” or “Become open”
7:34	ihql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	διανοίχθητι	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the man, the command **Be opened** is singular.
7:35	yj4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί, καὶ ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “his ears opened, and the bond of his tongue loosened” or “Jesus opened his ears, and he loosed the bond of his tongue”
7:35	yg15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί	1	Here Mark speaks as if the man could not hear because something was blocking his ears. When Jesus healed him, it was as if **his ears were opened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his ears were repaired” or “his ears began to work properly”
7:35	gssm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark speaks as if the man’s inability to speak clearly was because of a **bond** that restricted or restrained **his tongue**. When Jesus healed the man, it was as if that **bond** was **loosed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his mouth was repaired” or “what kept him from speaking clearly was removed”
7:35	yusk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ	1	Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a **bond** that binds or restricts the man’s **tongue**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the bond that held his tongue” or “the bond that restrained his tongue”
7:36	oo1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & λέγωσιν & αὐτοῖς & αὐτοὶ	1	The pronouns **them** and **they** throughout this refer to the people who saw that Jesus had healed the man. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who saw what he had done … they would tell it … them … they” or “those who knew about the healing … they would tell it … them … they”
7:36	u56m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Tell it to no one’”
7:36	eb2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **ordered** them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he ordered them to tell it to no one”
7:37	lg0r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπέρπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο λέγοντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus and what he had done. Alternate translation: “what he had done extremely astonished them, and they said” or “this story about Jesus astonished them extremely, and they said”
7:37	hwj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὑπέρπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο	1	The pronoun **they** refers to everyone who witnessed or heard about how Jesus healed the man. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “everyone who knew about what Jesus had done was extremely astonished” or “all the people were extremely astonished”
7:37	a8dx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
7:37	qmx0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλῶς πάντα πεποίηκεν	1	Here the people are referring to **all things** that Jesus had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Everything that he has done, he has done well” or “He has done all his deeds well”
7:37	dh17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς κωφοὺς & ἀλάλους	1	Mark is using the adjectives **deaf** and **mute** as nouns to mean people who are deaf and mute. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people”
8:intro	ry56				0	# Mark 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Jesus expands his ministry and encounters opposition (6:7–8:21)\n      * Jesus feeds 4,000 people (8:1–10)\n      * The Pharisees test Jesus (8:11–13)\n      * The yeast of the Pharisees and Herod (8:14–21)\n5. Jesus instructs his disciples and journeys toward Jerusalem (8:22–10:52)\n      * Jesus heals a blind man (8:22–26)\n      * Who Jesus really is (8:27–30)\n      * What Jesus and his disciples must do (8:31–9:1)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### The miracle of multiplying food\n\nIn [8:1–10](../08/01.md), Mark tells a story in which Jesus provides 4,000 people with food. All these people were in a place where no people lived, and all the food that Jesus and his disciples had were seven loaves of bread and a few fish. Despite that, Jesus used the seven loaves of bread and the few fish to feed everyone who was there. Mark does not tell us exactly how Jesus did this, but he does say that there were more leftovers than what they started with. Your translation should not explain how Jesus multiplied the food, but it should be clear that he did a miracle. Mark told a similar story about how Jesus fed 5,000 men in [6:30–44](../06/30.md), so see how you expressed the ideas there.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### The yeast of the Pharisees and the yeast of Herod\n\nIn [8:14–21](../08/14.md), Jesus tells his disciples to watch out for the “yeast” of the Pharisees and the “yeast” of Herod. The disciples misunderstand him and think that he is saying something about bread, which they forgot to bring with them. In response, Jesus reminds them that he is not talking about lack of bread, since he has proved twice that he can multiply food. He implies that “yeast” refers to what the Pharisees and Herod teach and do. Since the disciples misunderstanding “yeast” is an important part of this passage, and since Jesus never directly explains what “yeast” means, if possible you should avoid making that idea more explicit. If you do explain what “yeast” means, if possible only do so after Jesus has made it clear that he is not speaking about literal yeast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to his disciples. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29, and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
8:1	rmd8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	Here, the phrase **In those days** introduces the next major event in the story. It does not indicate how soon after the previous event this new event occurred. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Later during those days” or “During one of those days”
8:1	sn4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	Here, Mark uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that identifies a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “During that time”
8:1	m327		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	The phrase **those days** refers to the time period when Jesus in the region of the Decapolis, on the southeastern side of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was in the region of the Decapolis”
8:2	gsez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	σπλαγχνίζομαι ἐπὶ τὸν ὄχλον, ὅτι ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τι φάγωσιν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “The crowd is remaining with me already three days and does not have anything that they might eat, so I have compassion on them”
8:2	drmz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σπλαγχνίζομαι ἐπὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I sympathize with”
8:3	u3mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ	1	Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if he sent the people **away to their home hungry**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine that I were to send them away to their home hungry. In that case, they would faint on the way”
8:3	fyjo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	οἶκον αὐτῶν	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **home**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “their homes”
8:3	yvak			ἐκλυθήσονται	1	Alternate translation: “they will become weary” or “they will lose their strength”
8:3	v5m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ	1	Here, Jesus implies that the people would be walking **on the way** to their homes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the way to their homes” or “while they going home”
8:3	o0zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καί τινες αὐτῶν	1	Here, the word **and** introduces something that makes the situation even more difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that intensifies the situation. Alternate translation: “and even worse, some of them” or “and that is especially true for those who”
8:4	jdk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας?	1	The disciples are using the question form to tell Jesus that they will not be able to find enough food for the crowd. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for anyone here in a desolate place to satisfy these people with loaves.” or “There is certainly nowhere here in this desolate place where anyone is able to get enough loaves to satisfy these people!”
8:4	zma4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἄρτων	1	The disciples are using **loaves** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with food”
8:5	lcov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἠρώτα αὐτούς, πόσους ἔχετε ἄρτους? οἱ δὲ εἶπαν, ἑπτά	1	It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “he asked them how many loaves they had. And they said that they had seven”
8:5	qm6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄρτους	1	See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”
8:5	p7k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἑπτά	1	The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We have seven loaves”
8:6	x2jr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would usually **recline**, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “to get ready to eat on the ground”
8:6	iwre		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄρτους	1	See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”
8:6	sygx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου	1	Here Mark means that Jesus **broke** the loaves of bread in pieces so that they could be served to the crowds. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar words in [6:41](../06/41.md). Alternate translation: “he divided the loaves into servings and was giving them” or “he broke the loaves into smaller pieces and was giving the pieces”
8:6	p17m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν, καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ	1	The clauses **so that they might set {them} before {them}, and they set {them} before the crowd** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “so that they set them before the crowd” or “and they were setting them before crowd”
8:7	bio6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν καὶ ταῦτα παρατιθέναι	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he said, ‘Set these also before them’”
8:8	wrye		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔφαγον & ἦραν	1	The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they ate** refers to the crowds. The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they took up** refers to the disciples. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the crowds ate … the disciples took up”
8:8	ehu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages. Alternative translation: “until they were full”
8:8	v5zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	περισσεύματα κλασμάτων	1	Here, the phrase **the remaining** refers to what was left after everyone ate. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leftovers” or “what was left of the broken pieces”
8:8	bcjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας	1	Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “seven baskets full” or “filling up seven baskets”
8:8	k95y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σπυρίδας	1	The word **baskets** refers to large circular containers that store food or other items. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers”
8:9	m81z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that helps the readers understand how amazing what Jesus did was. The word does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “As for how many people were there,” or “In the end,”
8:9	d2xg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τετρακισχίλιοι	1	Mark is using the number **4,000** as a noun to mean 4,000 people. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “4,000 individuals”
8:10	qnt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ εὐθὺς ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά	1	Here Mark concludes the story about how Jesus fed 4,000 people. He concludes the story by indicating that Jesus left the area. Use the natural form in your language for expressing this conclusion. Alternate translation: “The, after feeding all those people, Jesus immediately got into the boat with his disciples and left. He went into the regions of Dalmanutha”
8:10	syq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸ πλοῖον	1	Here, the phrase **the boat** could refer to: (1) a boat, without specifying which one. Alternate translation: “a certain boat” (2) the same boat that Jesus and his disciples used earlier. Alternate translation: “the same boat they had used earlier”
8:10	y8u3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came”
8:10	x33a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δαλμανουθά	1	The word **Dalmanutha** is the name of an area. Its location is unknown, but it may have been on the northwestern side of the Sea of Galilee.
8:11	kbik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “While he was there,”
8:11	ztj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξῆλθον	1	Here Mark implies that the Pharisees **came out** from wherever they were and went to where Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “departed to Jesus” or “left where they were and went to where Jesus was”
8:11	m1xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went out”
8:11	u4pl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ζητοῦντες παρ’ αὐτοῦ σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, πειράζοντες αὐτόν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “asking him, ‘Give us a sign from heaven,’ testing him”
8:11	zi91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	The implication is that the Pharisees wanted Jesus to do a miracle to prove that his authority came from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a sign from heaven that proved that his authority was from God”
8:11	beh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	Here, the phrase **from heaven** indicates that the **sign** originates in heaven, where God rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from heaven, where God rules” or “that comes from the place where God is”
8:11	hb7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	πειράζοντες αὐτόν	1	Here, the word **testing** introduces the purpose for which the Pharisees came to Jesus and were seeking a sign from heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to him”
8:12	sn5a			ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	When Jesus **sighed greatly**, it indicated that he was sad and upset about what the Pharisees had asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to how people in your culture express sadness or frustration nonverbally, or you could explain the meaning of what Jesus did. Alternate translation: “having breathed out loudly” or “having shown that he was upset by sighing greatly”
8:12	s8xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the word **spirit** refers to the nonphysical part of people. Mark means that Jesus **sighed** inwardly, to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in his heart” or “within himself”
8:12	plu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον? ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον	1	Jesus is speaking about his audience in the third person instead of directly addressing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person here instead. Alternate translation: “Why do you who are of this generation seek a sign? Truly I say to you, if a sign will be given to you who are of this generation …”
8:12	g4lz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Pharisees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “This generation has no reason to seek a sign.” or “I am surprised that this generation seeks a sign!”
8:12	l335		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ & τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ	1	Here, **generation** represents the people who are part of the **generation**, which means that they are adults who are currently alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do today’s people seek … to today’s people” or “do the people of this generation seek … to the people of this generation”
8:12	swpm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σημεῖον	-1	Here, just as in [8:11](../08/11.md), the implication is that the **sign** is a miracle that proves that Jesus’ authority comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a sign that shows that my authority is from God … such a sign”
8:12	cnz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον	1	Here Jesus uses the word **if** to introduce a statement that he knows will not be true. What the form means is that **a sign** will definitely not **be given to this generation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “A sign will never be given to this generation!”
8:12	q4wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula	εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον	1	The phrase **if a sign will be given to this generation** is an oath formula. This kind of oath does not complete the condition, but it implies that something bad will happen to the speaker if the condition actually happens. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “I will be accursed if a sign will be given to this generation!” or “I swear that a sign will not be given to this generation!”
8:12	a2x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δοθήσεται & σημεῖον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it could be: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “I will give a sign” (2) God the Father. Alternate translation: “God will give a sign”
8:13	i2se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπῆλθεν	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went away”
8:13	cmz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀπῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came away”
8:13	u1qk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ πέραν	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus went away **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee”
8:14	qxvz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ	1	Here Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. The word does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “As for the disciples,” or “As it happened,”
8:14	ldif		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἄρτους	1	Mark is using **loaves** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “anything to eat”
8:14	gtg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον οὐκ εἶχον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only had one loaf with them in the boat”
8:14	knfj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄρτον	1	See how you translated this word in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunk of bread”
8:15	oqwl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
8:15	bd2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε ἀπὸ	1	The terms **See** and **watch out for** similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Carefully watch out for” or “Keep away from”
8:15	lt70		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε	1	Here, the word **See** means that the disciples need to make sure that something happens or does not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Make sure that you watch out”
8:15	mspe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **yeast** that the **Pharisees** and **Herod** have or use. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the yeast that the Pharisees and Sadducees have”
8:15	nszl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου	1	Here, **yeast** is a metaphor that refers to what the **Pharisees** and **Herod** teach and do. However, the disciples did not immediately understand that Jesus was using a metaphor; instead, Jesus has to explain it to them in the following verses. So, you should preserve the metaphor here without explaining its meaning, since Jesus provides an explanation in the following verses.
8:16	fjt6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀλλήλους, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “each other, ‘We have no loaves’”
8:16	uqra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτι	1	Here, the word translated **that** could introduce: (1) what the disciples **were reasoning**. Alternate translation: “and saying that” (2) what the disciples think might be the reason for why Jesus said what he did about yeast. Alternate translation: “that Jesus had said that because”
8:16	kh1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἄρτους οὐκ	1	See how you translated **loaves** in [8:14](../08/14.md). Alternate translation: “nothing to eat”
8:16	zfw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἄρτους οὐκ	1	Mark says **no** here as an overstatement for emphasis. The disciples do have one loaf of bread (see [8:14](../08/14.md)) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “almost no loaves” or “only one loaf of bread”
8:17	hnh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε? οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “It is wrong for you to be reasoning that you do not have loaves. You do not yet perceive nor understand. Your hearts have become hardened.” or “Do not reason that you do not have loaves! I am disappointed that you do not yet perceive nor understand! Your hearts have become hardened!”
8:17	dmt2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε	1	The terms **perceive** and **understand** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet know” or “Do you not yet perceive”
8:17	wf6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε?	1	Here Jesus is implying that the disciples do not **perceive** or **understand** who Jesus is and what he can do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet perceive who I am, nor understand what I can do”
8:17	rq8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	Here, Jesus is speaking of the disciples’ **heart** as if it had **become hardened**. He means that the disciples are stubborn and refuse to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Have you become stubborn” or “Have you become unwilling to pay attention”
8:17	yd7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that it was the disciples themselves. Alternate translation: “Has your heart become hard” or “Have you hardened your heart”
8:17	mihv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “Have your hearts”
8:17	fn31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?	1	In Jesus’ culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “your head” or “your mind”
8:18	u1gh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε? καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Having eyes, you do not see. And having ears, you do not hear. And you do not remember.” or “Surely you have eyes, yet you do not see! Surely you have ears, yet you do not hear! And you certainly do not remember!”
8:18	qt58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε	1	These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the sentences with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second sentence is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two sentences. Alternate translation: “Having eyes, do you not see? Indeed, having ears, do you not hear” or “Having eyes and ears, do you not see and hear”
8:18	jirs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε	1	Here Jesus is implying that the disciples have **eyes** to look at things and **ears** to hear things, but they do not really pay attention to what they **see** and **hear**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Having eyes, do you fail to pay attention to what you see? And having ears, do you fail to pay attention to what you see” or “Having eyes to see with, do you not see properly? And having ears to hear with, do you not hear properly”
8:18-19	w1s9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε & ὅτε τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους ἔκλασα εἰς τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους, πόσους κοφίνους κλασμάτων πλήρεις ἤρατε	1	Here, the clause **And do you not remember** could: (1) stand alone as a question. See the ULT. (2) begin the question that is found in verse 19. Alternate translation: “And do you not remember, when I broke the five loaves among the 5,000, how many baskets full of broken pieces did you take up” or “And do you not remember when I broke the five loaves among the 5,000? How many baskets full of broken pieces did you take up”
8:18	vz05		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ μνημονεύετε	1	Here Jesus implies that the disciples should **remember** what it is that he has done. As the next verses will show, Jesus is thinking specifically of how he has fed 5,000 and 4,000 people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “do you not remember my miracles”
8:19	qgpd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους ἔκλασα	1	Here Jesus refers to how he **broke** the **loaves** of bread in pieces so that they could be served to the crowds. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [6:41](../06/41.md). Alternate translation: “I divided the five loaves into servings” or “I broke the five loaves into smaller pieces”
8:19	e90h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄρτους	1	See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”
8:19	t7ig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους	1	Jesus is using the number **5,000** as a noun to mean 5,000 people. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 5,000 men”
8:19	xppw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κοφίνους κλασμάτων πλήρεις ἤρατε	1	Here Jesus means that the disciples filled the **baskets** with the leftovers from the meal, including **broken pieces** of bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “baskets full of broken pieces of bread did you collect” or “baskets full of leftover pieces of bread did you take up”
8:19	v6lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κοφίνους	1	See how you translated **baskets** in [6:43](../06/43.md). Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers”
8:19	y0h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	δώδεκα	1	The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We took up 12 baskets full”
8:20	ji16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτε καὶ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus is speaking again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Then he said, ‘And when”
8:20	gxwi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τοὺς ἑπτὰ εἰς τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I broke the seven for the 4,000”
8:20	h45u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἑπτὰ	1	Jesus is using the number **seven** as a noun to mean seven loaves. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the seven loaves”
8:20	lip5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους	1	Jesus is using the number **4,000** as a noun to mean 4,000 people. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 4,000 individuals”
8:20	hzgx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα κλασμάτων	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **fillings** that consisted of **baskets** that were stuffed with **broken pieces**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many baskets containing broken pieces” or “how many baskets, each one filled with broken pieces,”
8:20	q3f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fillings**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many baskets full”
8:20	wvmn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σπυρίδων	1	See how you translated **baskets** in [8:8](../08/08.md). Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers”
8:20	tdnl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κλασμάτων	1	Here Jesus is referring to **broken pieces** of bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of broken pieces of bread” or “of broken pieces of leftover bread”
8:20	jfbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἑπτά	1	The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We took up seven baskets full”
8:21	kh42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς οὔπω συνίετε?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. See how you expressed the similar rhetorical question in [8:17](../08/17.md). Alternate translation: “You should understand by now.” or “I am disappointed that you do not yet understand!”
8:21	kmt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πῶς οὔπω συνίετε?	1	Here Jesus is implying that the disciples do not **understand** who Jesus is and what he can do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar idea in [8:17](../08/17.md). Alternate translation: “How do you not yet understand who I am and what I can do”
8:22	q45u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
8:22	c92c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
8:22	mul4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βηθσαϊδάν	1	The word **Bethsaida** is the name of a town. It was located on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. See how you referred to this town in [6:45](../06/45.md).
8:22	t5ho		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	φέρουσιν	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “certain people bring” or “some people bring”
8:22	n503		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ φέρουσιν αὐτῷ τυφλὸν, καὶ παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν	1	Here Mark introduces a man who is **blind** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “and there was a blind man there. People bring him to Jesus and beg him”
8:22	mj78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτὸν ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please touch him’”
8:22	mx9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτοῦ ἅψηται	1	Here the people are implying that they want Jesus to **touch** the man to heal him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he would touch him and heal him” or “he, by touching him, would heal him”
8:23	bnry		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ	1	As [8:25](../08/25.md) makes clear, Jesus **laid his hands** on the man’s eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that more explicit here. Alternate translation: “having laid his hands on the man’s eyes”
8:23	s7in		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπηρώτα αὐτόν, εἴ τι βλέπεις	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was asking him if he saw anything.”
8:23	dbjs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	βλέπεις	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the blind man, the word **you** is singular.
8:24	raqh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναβλέψας	1	Here, the word translated **having looked up** could mean that: (1) the man raised his head and looked around him. Alternate translation: “having looked at what was around him” (2) the man began to be able to see again. Alternate translation: “having begun to see again”
8:24	j47q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀνθρώπους	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, the man is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans”
8:24	slxx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, the word **for** could introduce: (1) a further explanation of what the man saw. Alternate translation: “and more specifically,” or “and in fact” (2) a reason why the man knew that he was seeing **men**. Alternate translation: “since” or “which I know because”
8:24	r6tk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας	1	The man is saying that the people he sees look like **trees**. This means that he cannot see them clearly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I see them walking, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees”
8:25	nfod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη καὶ ἐνέβλεπεν τηλαυγῶς ἅπαντα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange these clauses so that when the man looks and what the man sees are more closely connected. Alternate translation: “he was restored, and he looked intently, and he was seeing everything clearly” or “he looked intently and was seeing everything clearly, and he was restored”
8:25	td9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπεκατέστη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus had restored him” or “became healthy”
8:26	uf6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	καὶ ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν εἰς οἶκον αὐτοῦ λέγων, μηδὲ εἰς τὴν κώμην εἰσέλθῃς	1	It may be more natural in your language to make everything that Jesus commands in this verse a direct quotation or an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told him, ‘Go to your home. You may not even enter into the town’” or “And he sent him away to his home, telling him that he might not even enter into the town”
8:26	gpqt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
8:26	cuu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	μηδὲ & εἰσέλθῃς	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the man who was blind, the word **You** is singular.
8:26	w303		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	εἰς τὴν κώμην	1	Many ancient manuscripts do not include any words in this verse after the phrase **into the town**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “nor speak to anyone in the town” after the phrase **into the town**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
8:27	dojr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”
8:27	e4l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came out”
8:27	utrs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰς κώμας Καισαρείας τῆς Φιλίππου	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **villages** that are near the larger city of **Caesarea Philippi**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the villages that belonged to Caesarea Philippi” or “the villages that surrounded Caesarea Philippi”
8:27	qfyu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων αὐτοῖς	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said to them” or “and he asked them”
8:27	djp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ ἄνθρωποι	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “men and women”
8:28	lqfg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
8:28	xmty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they answered”
8:28	nn1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅτι Ἰωάννην τὸν Βαπτιστήν, καὶ ἄλλοι Ἠλείαν, ἄλλοι δὲ ὅτι εἷς τῶν προφητῶν	1	The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Some say John the Baptist; and others say Elijah; but others say one of the prophets”
8:28	chn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰωάννην τὸν Βαπτιστήν, καὶ ἄλλοι Ἠλείαν, ἄλλοι δὲ ὅτι εἷς τῶν προφητῶν	1	Since all these people and prophets had died before the disciples answered this question, the disciples are implying that people think that Jesus is one of these people who has come back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist come back to life; and others, Elijah come back to life; but others, one of the prophets come back to life”
8:28	v870		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλοι	-1	The disciples are using the adjectives **others** and **others** as nouns to mean various groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “others among the people … others among the people”
8:28	vpwv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἷς τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here the disciples are not excluding **John the Baptist** or **Elijah** from the group of the prophets. Instead, they are referring to the many other prophets that God had sent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “another one of the prophets”
8:29	czb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς & σὺ	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word **you** in the phrase **who do you say** is plural. Because Peter is speaking to Jesus, the word **You** in the clause **You are the Christ** is singular.
8:30	rgy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he strongly warned them, ‘Tell no one about me’”
8:30	tcdq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus warned the disciples to **tell no one about** who he really was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that he was the Christ” or “about his true identity”
8:31	lvfh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτοὺς ὅτι δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν, καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘It is necessary for the Son of Man to suffer many things and to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes and to be killed and to rise up after three days’”
8:31	d4dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Jesus is referring to himself as **the Son of Man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “him, who is the Son of Man,”
8:31	m32p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to experience rejection from the elders and the chief priests and the scribes”
8:31	rn9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποκτανθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “to die” or “to allow someone to kill him”
8:31	h9t2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστῆναι	1	Here, the phrase **rise up** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be restored to life” or “to resurrect”
8:31	gjg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας	1	Here, the phrase **after three days** refers to the day after tomorrow. People in Jesus’ culture counted the current day as day one, tomorrow as day two, and the day after tomorrow as day three. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the day after tomorrow. Alternate translation: “on the day after the next day” or “two days from now”
8:32	q8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here, **word** represents what Jesus said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he had just said” or “that teaching”
8:32	cuac		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παρρησίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **openness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “openly”
8:33	ri3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus did in contrast to what Peter wanted him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
8:33	ddeh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus **looked at** all the other **disciples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the rest of his disciples”
8:33	bski		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐπετίμησεν Πέτρῳ καὶ λέγει	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **says** indicates how Jesus **rebuked Peter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “rebuked Peter by saying”
8:33	z6f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ, ὅτι οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “You are not considering the things of God, but the things of men. So, get behind me, Satan!”
8:33	nu32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου	1	Here Jesus speaks as if he wants Peter to **Get behind** him. He means that Peter should not rebuke him but should instead accept what Jesus says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not stand in my way” or “Do not rebuke me”
8:33	ltyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὕπαγε & οὐ φρονεῖς	1	Because Jesus is speaking to Peter, the command **Get** and the word **you** are singular.
8:33	kbb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Σατανᾶ	1	Here Jesus calls Peter **Satan** because Peter is asking like **Satan** by tempting Jesus to disobey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or explain the metaphor. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like Satan” or “for you are tempting me as Satan does”
8:33	r9gy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “you are considering the things of men, not the things of God”
8:33	clxo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὰ	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but you are considering the things”
8:33	t6jv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of human beings” or “of people”
8:34	j3zt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις θέλει	1	Here Jesus uses the conditional form to refer to **anyone** who **wants** to follow after him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever form naturally introduces anyone who wants to follow Jesus. Alternate translation: “Anyone who wants” or “When someone wants”
8:34	m732		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν & ἀκολουθείτω μοι	1	Here, the phrases **follow after me** and **follow me** refer to traveling with Jesus and being his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be my disciples … be my disciple” or “to travel with me as my students … travel with me as my student”
8:34	mdgh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν, καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι	1	If your language does not use third-person imperatives in this way, you could state these in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he should deny himself and take up his cross and follow me”
8:34	j3kh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν & αὐτοῦ	1	Although the terms **him**, **himself**, and **his** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “let that person deny himself or herself … his or her”
8:34	yxe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν	1	Here, the phrase **deny himself** refers to a person choosing not to do what they would naturally do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him exercise self-control” or “let him choose not to do what he naturally desires”
8:34	dulq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus assumes that the disciples will know that the Romans executed some criminals by nailing them to a wooden beam with crossbar that was set upright so that the criminals would slowly suffocate. Jesus also assumes that the disciples will know that the Romans made these criminals carry these wooden crosses through the streets to the place where they were going to be executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make some of this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “take up the wooden cross on which he will be executed”
8:34	c6ll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus speaks of taking up a **cross** in order to describe people who are ready and willing to suffer and even die because they follow Jesus. Because this figure of speech is connected to how Jesus himself died on a cross, if possible you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “be ready to suffer, which is like taking up his cross,” or “take up his cross, ready to suffer or die,”
8:35	opx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a basis for what Jesus said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “I say that because” or “In fact,”
8:35	d5rj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃς & ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν, ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὐτήν	1	Here Jesus speaks of how people’s attitudes toward their current lives affects their eternal lives after they resurrect. He means that those who want **to save** their current lives will **lose** their eternal, resurrection lives, and that those who have lost their current lives will **save** their eternal, resurrection lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whoever wants to save his current life will lose it forever, but whoever loses his current life for the sake of me and of the gospel will save it forever”
8:35	nn0a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν	1	Here Jesus speaks of trying to preserve one’s **life** as if it were saving it. He speaks of dying as if it were losing one’s **life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wants to preserve his life will die”
8:35	ppsi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ	-1	Although the term **his** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her”
8:35	p8hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὐτήν	1	Here Jesus speaks of dying or being willing to die as losing one’s **life**. He speaks of experiencing eternal life as if it were saving one’s **life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but whoever has died for the sake of me and of the gospel will have eternal life”
8:35	ypth		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	When Jesus says **for the sake of me and of the gospel**, he means that some people will lose their lives because they are his disciples and because they believe the gospel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he is my disciple and believes the gospel” or “because he believes in me and in the gospel”
8:36	nux8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces another basis for what Jesus said in [8:34](../08/34.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Another reason I say that is because” or “Even further,”
8:36	ua46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ?	1	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “a man benefits nothing if he gains the whole world and forfeits his life.” or “a man never benefits anything if he gains the whole world and forfeits his life!”
8:36	qfk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	τί & ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to show that forfeiting one’s **life** is bad enough that gaining anything else cannot make up for it. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “image a man who gained the whole world but forfeited his life. What does that man benefit”
8:36	mxuj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον & αὐτοῦ	1	Although the terms **man** and **his** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “a person … his or her”
8:36	ps8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **and** introduces something bad that happens in contrast to gaining **the whole world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
8:36	jde6			τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “his soul”
8:37	u1bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Jesus said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Even further,”
8:37	wua4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ?	1	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “a man can give nothing in exchange for his life.” or “a man cannot give anything in exchange for his life!”
8:37	d0c8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος & αὐτοῦ	1	Although the terms **man** and **his** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “a person … his or her”
8:37	x78o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus could be implying: (1) that there is nothing that is worth as much as a person’s **life**. Alternate translation: “that is as worth as much as his life” (2) that there is nothing that is valuable enough to redeem one’s **life** when it has been forfeited. Alternate translation: “that can buy back his life”
8:37	ofje			τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “his soul”
8:38	ysvi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a basis for what Jesus has said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. More specifically, the word **For** could introduce the basis for: (1) what Jesus has said in [8:34–37](../08/34.md). Alternate translation: “I have said all those things because” (2) Jesus’ command to follow him in [8:34](../08/34.md). Alternate translation: “You should follow me as I have commanded because”
8:38	zcdn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς & ἐὰν ἐπαισχυνθῇ με καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whoever finds me and my words shameful” or “whoever worries that I and my words will shame them”
8:38	ji2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους	1	Jesus is using the term **words** to describe the things he teaches by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of my teaching”
8:38	ov1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ	1	Here, **generation** represents the people who are part of the **generation**, which means that they are adults who are currently alive. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “among today’s people, who are adulterous and sinful” or “among the adulterous and sinful people of this generation”
8:38	c53y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μοιχαλίδι	1	Here Jesus speaks of people who do not fully trust and obey God as if they were **adulterous**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unfaithful” or “disobedient”
8:38	b5dl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐπαισχυνθήσεται αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man will also find him shameful” or “the Son of Man knows that such a person will also shame him”
8:38	hvx0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & ἔλθῃ & αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, … I come … my”
8:38	fo9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅταν ἔλθῃ	1	Here Jesus implies that he, **the Son of Man**, will come back to this world at some point in the future. He is also implying that he will leave this world before he comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make some or all of those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he comes back to this world” or “when, after leaving this world, he comes back”
8:38	hpc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ, μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν ἁγίων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with the holy angels in a way that his Father has made glorious” or “with the holy angels as one who is as great as his Father”
8:38	s5tm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	**Father** is an important title that describe the relationship between God the **Father** and Jesus his Son.
9:intro	n92j				0	# Mark 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. Jesus instructs his disciples and journeys toward Jerusalem (8:22–10:52)\n      * What Jesus and his disciples must do (8:31–9:1)\n      * Jesus is transfigured (9:2–8)\n      * Jesus and the disciples discuss Elijah (9:9–13)\n      * Jesus heals a demon-possessed boy (9:14–29)\n      * Jesus predicts his suffering and death (9:30–32)\n      * Jesus teaches about how his disciples should behave (9:33–50)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### “transfigured”\n\nIn [9:1–8](../09/01.md), Mark describes how Jesus was “transfigured.” This word indicates that Jesus looked very different to the disciples. Mark does not tell us all the ways in which Jesus looked different, but he does say that Jesus’ clothes became extremely white. What this means is that the disciples were able to see some of the glory and majesty that Jesus has as God’s Son. Make sure that your translation shows that Jesus looked great and glorious.\n\n### Elijah\n\nWhen Jesus was transfigured, the disciples saw Moses and Elijah talking with him. Later, they ask Jesus about Elijah. They refer specifically to what the scribes say about a prophecy in [Malachi 4:5–6](../mal/04/05.md), which indicates that God will send “Elijah” to prepare the way before God comes to judge his enemies and reward his people. Malachi is referring to a prophet who lived even earlier. This prophet, named Elijah, performed many miracles and spoke messages from God (see [1 Kings 17–19](../1ki/17/01.md) and [2 Kings 2:1–17](../2ki/02/01.md)). The disciples ask about whether this Elijah is supposed to come before the Messiah does. Jesus says that this is true, and he talks about this “Elijah” in a way that shows the disciples that John the Baptist was “Elijah.” He means that John fulfills the prophecy in Malachi that someone like the prophet Elijah will prepare the way before God comes to judge and reward people. If your readers would not know the prophecy in Malachi or the stories about the prophet Elijah, you may need to include some of this information in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Hyperbole\n\nIn [9:43–48](../09/43.md), Jesus commands his disciples to cut off or throw out body parts that cause them to sin. He uses this extreme example of resisting sin in order to show his disciples how serious sin really is. He does not mean that believers should always cut off body parts when they sin. Jesus intends his commands to be shocking, however, so you should preserve the extreme language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Jesus’ commands are extreme language.\n\n### Stumbling\n\nIn [9:42–47](../09/42.md), Jesus discusses people and things that cause “stumbling”. He uses this term to refer to sinning. See the notes on these verses for translation options.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMost of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in conversations, and many of the conversations are with one person. Because of this, the majority of the forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. So, you should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 5, 19, and 35. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])\n\n### The allusion to Isaiah 66:24 in verse 48\n\nIn verse 48, Jesus uses words that are very similar to words in [Isaiah 66:24](../isa/66/24.md). However, Jesus does not introduce his words as a quotation. So, Jesus is not directly quoting from Isaiah, but he intended his audience to think of [Isaiah 66:24](../isa/66/24.md) when they heard what he said. If your readers would not think of [Isaiah 66:24](../isa/66/24.md), you could refer to it in a footnote.\n\n### Verses 44 and 46\n\nSome of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for [9:44](../09/44.md) and [9:46](../09/46.md). Some early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words in each verse: “where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched.” Since these words also appear in all of the manuscripts in [9:48](../09/48.md), it is likely that people who copied the manuscripts accidentally or intentionally added these words earlier as verses 44 and 46. Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
9:1	q4b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state who **he** refers to in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying to them”
9:1	lsa2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to everyone who was there, the word **you** here is plural.
9:1	kg4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου	1	The phrase **taste death** is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not experience death”
9:1	qloy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die”
9:1	f95z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”
9:1	yjf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν	1	Here Jesus speaks as if **the kingdom of God** were a person who could **come**. He means that God will establish or begin his **kingdom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God having been inaugurated” or “the kingdom of God having begun”
9:1	ymou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν δυνάμει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a powerful way”
9:2	t08m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ μετὰ ἡμέρας ἓξ	1	Here, the phrase **And after six days** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Then, after six days had passed” or “Six days after those things happened”
9:2	uf5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους	1	The terms **by themselves** and **alone** mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “completely alone” or “totally by themselves”
9:2	krt6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μετεμορφώθη	1	The word **transfigured** means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “his appearance was changed” or “he began to look different”
9:2	b3bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μετεμορφώθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Mark could be implying that: (1) Jesus did the action. Alternate translation: “he transfigured himself” (2) God did the action. Alternate translation: “God transfigured him”
9:2	jjlt			ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν	1	Alternate translation: “in front of them” or “as they watched”
9:3	gp48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι	1	The word **launderer** refers to a person who worked with cloth to clean and bleach cloth and clothing. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of the word **launderer**, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who washed cloth could make them”
9:4	f2d6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὤφθη αὐτοῖς Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they saw Elijah with Moses”
9:4	r3uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the word **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “by Peter, James, and John”
9:4	pj3i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες	1	Here, the word **they** refers to Elijah and Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “Elijah and Moses were talking with”
9:5	w6vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποκριθεὶς	1	Here, the word **answering** indicates that Peter was responding to what he saw. He was not answering a question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response to seeing those things”
9:5	iqc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	By **us**, Peter could mean: (1) everyone who was there, including himself, the other two disciples, Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “for us all” (2) just himself and the other two disciples. Alternate translation: “for us disciples”
9:5	i0iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ποιήσωμεν	1	By **us**, Peter here means himself and the other two disciples, not Jesus, Elijah, and Moses. So, use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
9:5	k3y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σκηνάς	1	The term **tents** means simple, temporary places in which to sit or sleep. Peter probably had in mind that they would build them from the materials available on the mountain such as tree branches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of temporary shelter. Alternate translation: “booths”
9:6	r3bn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο	1	This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now as a matter of fact, he did not know what he should answer, for they were terrified”
9:6	w4qz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐ & ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because they were terrified, he did not know what he should answer”
9:6	f8hn			ἔκφοβοι & ἐγένοντο	1	Alternate translation: “they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid”
9:7	e3id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπισκιάζουσα	1	Here Mark could be implying that: (1) the cloud enveloped or surrounded them. Alternate translation: “enveloping” or “surrounding” (2) the cloud cast a shadow on them. Alternate translation: “casting a shadow on”
9:7	jukl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the three disciples, Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “them all” (2) just Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Moses, and Elijah”
9:7	x4mv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐγένετο φωνὴ	1	Mark is using **voice** to represent the person who is speaking, which is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person was speaking” or “God the Father spoke”
9:7	ybu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός	1	The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God.
9:7	ql9p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my Son, whom I love”
9:7	o80a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀκούετε	1	Because the voice is speaking to the three disciples, the command **Listen** is plural.
9:8	c4dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐξάπινα περιβλεψάμενοι, οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον	1	Here, the word **suddenly** could go with: (1) **saw**. Alternate translation: “having looked around, suddenly they no longer saw anyone” (2) **having looked around**. Alternate translation: “having suddenly looked around, they no longer saw anyone”
9:8	hq73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Ἰησοῦν μόνον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	If it would in appear your language that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only saw Jesus with them any longer”
9:9	q2qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	The first occurrence of the word **they** in this verse refers to Jesus and Peter and James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Peter, James, and John”
9:9	wter		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	καταβαινόντων	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “going down”
9:9	pdmm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται, εἰ μὴ ὅταν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Relate to no one what you have seen, until the Son of Man has risen from the dead’”
9:9	w1nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται	1	Here, the pronoun **them** and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **they** all refer to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen”
9:9	zttm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Jesus is referring to himself as **the Son of Man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he, who was the Son of Man,”
9:9	w98g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ	1	Here, the phrase **risen from the dead** refers to people who had died then coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “had been restored to life” or “had resurrected”
9:9	t07p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses”
9:10	gxwy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς, συνζητοῦντες	1	Here Mark could mean that: (1) the disciples **kept the word to themselves**, which means they kept it secret (see the following note). Further, they were **discussing together** what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “they kept the word to themselves, and they were discussing together” (2) the disciples **kept the word**, which means that they did what Jesus said. Further, they were **discussing** among **themselves** what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “they kept the word, discussing among themselves” or “they obeyed what Jesus said, discussing with each other” (3) the disciples **kept the word**, which means that they focused on it. Further, they were **discussing** among **themselves** what **the word** meant. Alternate translation: “they seized on the word, discussing among themselves”
9:10	edv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς	1	When people have **kept** something **to themselves**, it means that they have not talked about it with anyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they kept the word secret” or “they did not speak to anyone else about the word”
9:10	to7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here, **word** represents an event that could be narrated using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the event” or “the things that they had seen”
9:10	o87r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	συνζητοῦντες τί ἐστιν τὸ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “discussing together, ‘What is it “to rise from the dead”?’”
9:10	z9rq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί ἐστιν τὸ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι	1	Here Mark implies that the disciples are **discussing together** what Jesus said about rising from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what Jesus meant when he said, ‘rise from the dead’”
9:10	wfu9			ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι	1	See how you translated the phrase “risen from the dead” in [9:9](../09/09.md).
9:11	s9zn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπηρώτων	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning”
9:11	je29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they asked”
9:11	s1cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἠλείαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν	1	Here the disciples are referring to a prophecy in [Malachi 4:5–6](../mal/04/05.md). This prophecy states that God will send **Elijah** before the day of the Lord arrives, and he will prepare people. Elijah was a prophet who did many powerful things a long time before Malachi wrote down this prophecy. The **scribes** teach that this means that **Elijah** must come before the Messiah does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for Elijah, who was a prophet long ago, to come” or “the Scriptures indicate that it is necessary for Elijah the prophet to come”
9:11	t8hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐλθεῖν	1	Here, the word **come** refers to Elijah appearing in the world and doing what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to appear” or “to do what he is predicted to do”
9:11	fly4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρῶτον	1	Here the disciples imply that Elijah comes **first** because he comes before the Messiah does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “first, before the Messiah comes”
9:12	p09o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
9:12	o8hf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	Ἠλείας μὲν ἐλθὼν πρῶτον ἀποκατιστάνει πάντα	1	Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe something that is generally true. He does not necessarily mean that **Elijah** is currently doing these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever form is natural for stating a general truth. Alternate translation: “Elijah, having come first, will restore all things”
9:12	pjbg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλθὼν πρῶτον	1	See how you translated “come first” in [9:11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “having appeared first, before the Messiah does”
9:12	qno2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces something further that Jesus wants the disciples to think about. What he asks about at first appears to contrast with what he has said about Elijah. However, in the following verse Jesus will show how these things actually go together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further, potentially contrasting idea. Alternate translation: “Beyond that, though,” or “And yet,”
9:12	s3q3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ?	1	Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the **Son of Man** must suffer and be despised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be despised.”
9:12	toik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through prophets. Alternate translation: “did the prophets say” or “did God have the prophets write”
9:12	ldt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα & πάθῃ	1	Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “me, who am the Son of Man, that I would suffer”
9:12	i3j7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξουδενηθῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that many would despise him” or “that they would despise him”
9:13	myp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces more information about Elijah that contrasts with what Jesus said in the previous verse about Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “And yet” or “Now”
9:13	yvjt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the three disciples, the word **you** here is plural.
9:13	k6b2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλήλυθεν	1	See how you translated **come** in [9:11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “has appeared” or “has done what he was predicted to do”
9:13	yixs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐποίησαν & ἤθελον	1	The pronouns **they** and **they** could refer to: (1) people in general who mistreated Elijah. Alternate translation: “certain ones did … they were wanting” (2) the Jewish religious leaders. Alternate translation: “the religious leaders did … they were wanting”
9:13	k3kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσα ἤθελον	1	Here Jesus implies that **whatever they wanted** was to mistreat and harm this **Elijah**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whatever harmful things they were wanting to do” or “any evil things they were wanting to do”
9:13	st2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through prophets. Alternate translation: “the prophets said” or “God had the prophets write”
9:14	lsk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
9:14	n8fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the rest of **the disciples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the rest of the disciples who had not gone with them up the mountain”
9:14	dgk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
9:14	qsp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς & αὐτούς	1	Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **them** refer to the other disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain with Jesus, Peter, James, and John.
9:15	k82v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐξεθαμβήθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd saw him, which amazed them”
9:15	qhc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & προστρέχοντες & αὐτόν	1	All three occurrences of the pronoun **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus … running to him … him”
9:16	ju59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτούς, τί συνζητεῖτε πρὸς αὑτούς	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “them what they were arguing with them about.”
9:16	w679		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτούς & πρὸς αὑτούς	1	Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun **them** refers to the scribes. Alternate translation: “his disciples … with the scribes” (2) the scribes. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “the scribes … with my disciples” (3) the people in the crowd. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd … with my disciples”
9:16	mk3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	συνζητεῖτε πρὸς αὑτούς	1	Because Jesus is speaking to a group of people (see the previous note), the word **you** here is plural.
9:17	a2j6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤνεγκα τὸν υἱόν μου πρὸς σέ, ἔχοντα πνεῦμα ἄλαλον	1	Here the man implies that he **brought** his **son** so that Jesus would cast out the demon and heal his son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I brought my son to you, having a mute spirit, so that you could cast the spirit out”
9:17	eluu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔχοντα πνεῦμα ἄλαλον	1	Here the man mean that his son was possessed or controlled by a **mute spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being possessed by a mute spirit” or “because a mute spirit possesses him”
9:17	eb86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πνεῦμα ἄλαλον	1	Here the man implies that the **spirit** makes his son **mute**, that is, unable to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a spirit that makes him mute”
9:18	n09m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ	1	Here, the phrase **seize him** refers to when the demon forces a person to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it might begin to control him” or “it might force him to do something”
9:18	s5gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀφρίζει	1	When people are having convulsions, they can have trouble breathing or swallowing. This causes white foam to form around their mouths. If your readers would not be familiar with this symptom, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “foam comes out of his mouth” or “he cannot swallow properly”
9:18	h98h			ξηραίνεται	1	Alternate translation: “his body stiffens up” or “he cannot move”
9:18	iu9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπα τοῖς μαθηταῖς σου, ἵνα αὐτὸ ἐκβάλωσιν, καὶ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “I asked your disciples, ‘Please cast it out,’ and”
9:18	x7vx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	6	Here, the word **and** introduces what the disciples were not able to do in contrast to what the man wanted them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
9:18	zre6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἴσχυσαν	1	The man is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they were not able to cast it out”
9:19	pc2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
9:19	tb67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the pronoun **them** is plural, so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly to whom **them** refers. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here, **them** probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “answering all of them” or “addressing them all” or “addressing everyone present”
9:19	feix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν?	1	Jesus is speaking to something that he knows cannot hear him. He is addressing the entire **generation** of people who were living at that time, and they are not all present to hear him. He is doing this to show in a very strong way how he feels about this **generation**. He is actually speaking to the people who were there and who could hear him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to the people who were there, since they are included in the generation that Jesus is addressing. Alternate translation: “You who are part of this unbelieving generation, until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you?”
9:19	nbw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος	1	Here, **generation** represents the people who are part of the **generation**, which means that they are adults who are currently alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “O today’s people who are unbelieving” or “O unbelieving people of this generation”
9:19	c88a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were there and to show how frustrated he is by them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “I do not want to be with you for long. I do not want to bear with you for long.” or “I want to leave you! I want to stop bearing with you!”
9:19	azc9			ἕως πότε	-1	Alternate translation: “how long … How long”
9:19	n4dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν?	1	The question **until when will I be with you** and the question **Until when will I bear with you** have very similar meanings. Jesus uses these two similar questions together in order to emphasize his frustration and disappointment. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “until when will I be with you and endure your unbelief”
9:19	nfqn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς & ὑμῶν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the people who are part of the **generation**, the words **you** and **you** here are plural.
9:19	b7u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν	1	Here, the phrase bear with refers to being charitable or kind to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “will I be charitable to you” or “will I act kindly with you”
9:19	a61k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	φέρετε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to some people who were there, the command **Bring** is plural.
9:19	nrya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun **him** refers to the man’s son. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to him more directly. Alternate translation: “the man’s son” or “the one who has the mute spirit”
9:20	l4r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν & καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν	1	In this verse the first and fourth occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to the man’s “son”, who was possessed by a mute **spirit** and was mentioned in [Mark 9:17](../mrk/09/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen him, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions”
9:20	vdj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν & καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν	1	In this verse, the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen Jesus, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions”
9:20	bw3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν	1	Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “caused him to have a seizure”
9:20	ssax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀφρίζων	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [9:18](../09/18.md). Alternate translation: “foam coming out of his mouth” or “not being able to swallow properly”
9:21	f5zm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ, πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ? ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ἐκ παιδιόθεν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “he asked his father how much time it was while this had been happening to him. And he said that it was from childhood.”
9:21	bu6m			πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “For how much time has this been happening to him” or “This has been happening to him for how long of a time”
9:21	n215		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐκ παιδιόθεν	1	The father is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “This has been happening to him from childhood”
9:21	x33v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ παιδιόθεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **childhood**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Since he was very young”
9:22	kqal		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	Here, the word **but** introduces what the man wants Jesus to do in contrast with what his son is experiencing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **but** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and so”
9:22	f5yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since Jesus would have **compassion** on them before he would **help** them. Alternate translation: “having compassion on us, help us”
9:22	vwcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	βοήθησον ἡμῖν	1	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “I ask that you help us”
9:22	y1qc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς	1	By **us**, the man means himself and his son but not Jesus, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
9:22	fbup		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σπλαγχνισθεὶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sympathizing with”
9:23	hhgl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “In response,”
9:23	vh6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ δύνῃ	1	With the phrase **If you are able**, Jesus is repeating back to the man what the man had just said to Jesus. Jesus does this in order to rebuke the man’s doubt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Why did you say, ‘If you are able’” or “For what reason did you use the words, ‘If you are able’”
9:23	gc6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὸ εἰ δύνῃ?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the man. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have said, ‘If you are able.’” or “Do not say, ‘If you are able’!”
9:23	zt0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	τὸ εἰ δύνῃ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Did you speak about whether I was able”
9:23	kp1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	Here Jesus could be stating that **All things**: (1) can can be done for **the one believing**. Alternate translation: “All things can be done for the one believing” (2) can be done by **the one believing**. Alternate translation: “All things can be done by the one believing”
9:23	e5kk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	Here Jesus could be implying that: (1) God can do anything for **the one believing** in him. Alternate translation: “are possible for God to do for the one believing in him” (2) Jesus can do anything for **the one believing** in him. Alternate translation: “are possible for me to do for the one believing in me”
9:24	nik2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πιστεύω	1	Here the man could be implying that he believes: (1) in God and that God will help him and his son. Alternate translation: “I believe in God” or “I believe that God will help us” (2) in Jesus and that Jesus will help him and his son. Alternate translation: “I believe in you” or “I believe that you will help us”
9:24	h4y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	Here the man implies that he wants Jesus to **Help** him overcome or remove his **unbelief**. In other words, while the man does believe, he also has **unbelief**, and he wants Jesus to help him get rid of that **unbelief**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Help me overcome the unbelief I still have” or “Assist me in removing my unbelief” or “Help me so that I always believe”
9:24	wssi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unbelief**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “me with how I do not believe” or “me whenever I fail to believe”
9:25	qaw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος	1	The phrase **a crowd is running to {them}** means that more people were **running** toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them”
9:25	b54j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων αὐτῷ	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he told it”
9:25	ul8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν πνεῦμα	1	Here the Jesus implies that **the spirit** makes the boy **mute and deaf**, that is, unable to speak or hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Spirit that makes the boy mute and deaf”
9:25	m3ca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ μηκέτι εἰσέλθῃς εἰς αὐτόν	1	Here Jesus is commanding the demon to stop possessing or controlling the boy and to never start possessing or controlling him again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “cease controlling him, and never start controlling him again” or “cease possessing him, and never possess him again”
9:25	zd5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔξελθε	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go out”
9:26	adb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλὰ σπαράξας, αὐτόν	1	Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [9:20](../09/20.md). Alternate translation: “having caused him to have a powerful seizure”
9:26	s78v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξῆλθεν	1	Here Mark means that the demon stopped possessing or controlling the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it no longer controlled him” or “it ceased possessing him”
9:26	i8dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “it went out”
9:26	n7h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ νεκρὸς	1	Mark is saying that the boy was like **a dead {person}** because he was lying so still and quietly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he became so quiet and still that he was like a dead person” or “he lay completely still on the ground, like a dead person”
9:26	ns4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πολλοὺς	1	Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many of the people there”
9:26	hjf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγειν ὅτι ἀπέθανεν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “said that he had died”
9:28	zwjp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who went with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, going”
9:28	f0x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	εἰσελθόντος	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come”
9:28	sd45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	κατ’ ἰδίαν ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν, ὅτι ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν ἐκβαλεῖν αὐτό?	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked him privately why they were not able to cast it out.”
9:28	y9av		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	By **we**, the speaker means himself and the rest of the disciples but not Jesus, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
9:28	a1m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτό	1	The pronoun **it** refers to the demon which Jesus cast out of the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the demon more directly. Alternate translation: “the demon”
9:29	v2s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτο τὸ γένος	1	Here Jesus implies that he is speaking about a **kind** of demon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This kind of demon”
9:29	pdk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “is able to come out only by prayer and fasting”
9:29	kh4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθεῖν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “to go out”
9:29	rdkq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **prayer and fasting**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “prayer.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
9:30	kyue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
9:30	vrbm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γνοῖ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus did not want anyone to **know** that he was passing through Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “would know that he was there”
9:31	vpj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται & αὐτόν & ἀναστήσεται	1	Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, am being handed over … me … I will rise up”
9:31	w75k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Someone is handing the Son of Man over”
9:31	z8ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας	1	The term **hands** represents power and control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the power” or “into the control”
9:31	y5cw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, the word **men** refers to people who have authority and who want to get rid of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of powerful people” or “of people who hate him”
9:31	s1n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποκτανθεὶς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after they have killed him”
9:31	op9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστήσεται	1	Here, the phrase **rise up** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will be restored to life” or “he will resurrect”
9:31	whyw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας	1	Here, the phrase **after three days** refers to the day after tomorrow. People in Jesus’ culture counted the current day as day one, tomorrow as day two, and the day after tomorrow as day three. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the day after tomorrow. See how you expressed this phrase in [8:31](../08/31.md). Alternate translation: “on the day after the next day” or “two days from then”
9:32	kmc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ῥῆμα	1	Here, **word** represents what Jesus said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he had just said” or “that teaching”
9:33	xv94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went”
9:33	l2kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ	1	Here Mark is referring to **the house** where Jesus and his disciples were staying in Capernaum. It may have been Peter’s house (see [1:29](../01/29.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into the house in which they were going to live”
9:33	irb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτούς, τί ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ διελογίζεσθε	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “them what they had been discussing on the way.”
9:33	ew7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	διελογίζεσθε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word **you** here is plural.
9:34	rlot		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οἱ & ἐσιώπων, πρὸς ἀλλήλους γὰρ διελέχθησαν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, τίς μείζων	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “they had been arguing with one another on the way about who was greatest, so they were silent”
9:34	gdg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τίς μείζων	1	Here, **greatest** refers to who was the **greatest** among the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who was the greatest among them”
9:35	nw8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθίσας	1	In Jesus’ culture, teachers usually sat down when they were going to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having sat down to instruct them” or “having sat down as a teacher does”
9:35	z754		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”
9:35	jzl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1	Being **first** refers to people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being **last** refers to people who are not esteemed by others, because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be respected, he will be the least respected of all” or “If anyone wants to be significant, he will be the least significant of all”
9:35	um58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	πρῶτος	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “number one”
9:35	fkf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1	Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must act like the last of all and a servant of all”
9:35	t526		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων & πάντων	1	Jesus is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”
9:36	l62w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸ	-1	Here, the word translated **him** refers to the child without identifying whether the child was male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “this child … this child”
9:36	qqcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples”
9:37	uo2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς ἂν ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων δέξηται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐμὲ δέχεται	1	Here Jesus speaks as if people who receive **one of these little children** were actually receiving him. He means that these people, by receiving the **little children**, show that they would receive Jesus too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever receives one of these little children in my name, it is as if he or she received me” or “whoever receives one of these little children in my name proves that he or she would receive me”
9:37	h242		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων	1	Here Jesus is referring to **little children** like the little child whom he set in their midst (see [9:36](../09/36.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “any little child like the one standing here” or “any little child, like this one here,”
9:37	ul12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Here, the phrase **in my name** could mean that: (1) the person receives a little child because the person follows Jesus. Alternate translation: “because that person is acting as my disciple” (2) the person receives the little child because the little child follows Jesus. Alternate translation: “because the child is my disciple”
9:37	zs6o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς ἂν ἐμὲ δέχηται, οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	Here Jesus speaks as if people who receive him were actually receiving God, who sent him. He means that these people, by receiving him, show that they would receive God too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever receives me, it is as if he or she did not receive me but the one having sent me” or “the one receiving me proves that he or she would not only receive me but also the one having sent me”
9:37	uik3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	Jesus says **does not receive me** here as an overstatement for emphasis. He means that the people who receive him are not just receiving him but are also receiving God, who sent him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “receives not just me but also the one having sent me” or “does not receive me only but also the one having sent me”
9:37	y24n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με	1	Here Jesus implies that **the one having sent** him is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God, the one who sent me”
9:38	a3d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εἴδομέν & ἐκωλύομεν & ἡμῖν	1	When John says **we** and **us**, he is speaking of himself and the other disciples, so **we** and **us** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction.
9:38	dxq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου	1	Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. The expression **in your name** means that the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority”
9:38	rmm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου & καὶ ἐκωλύομεν αὐτόν	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **in your name, and we were preventing him**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “in your name who does not follow us, and we were preventing him.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
9:38	vpiz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐκωλύομεν αὐτόν, ὅτι οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because he was not following with us, we were preventing him”
9:38	k2i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν	1	Here, **following** does not seem to mean “to be one of Jesus’ disciples”, since this man was claiming to act in Jesus’ **name**. Here, **following with us** means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was not traveling with us in our group” or “he was not part of our group”
9:39-40	xrm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν, μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν; οὐδεὶς γάρ ἐστιν ὃς ποιήσει δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, καὶ δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί με & ὃς γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [9:39](../09/39.md) and [9:40](../09/40.md) into a verse bridge in order to include the reasons for Jesus’ command not to **prevent** the man before including the command. Alternate translation: “But Jesus said, ‘Whoever is not against us is for us. In fact, there is no one who will do a mighty work in my name and will be able soon afterwards to speak evil about me. Therefore, do not prevent him”
9:39	hbu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν; οὐδεὶς γάρ ἐστιν ὃς ποιήσει δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, καὶ δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί με	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “There is no one who will do a mighty work in my name and will be able soon afterwards to speak evil about me, so do not prevent him”
9:39	oynl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **prevent**. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue”
9:39	ouab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	μὴ κωλύετε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the command **Do not prevent** is plural.
9:39	wyk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	ποιήσει & δυνήσεται	1	Here Jesus uses the future tense to describe something that is generally true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever form is natural for stating a general truth. Alternate translation: “does … is able”
9:39	yw2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	See how you translated **name** in [9:38](../09/38.md). Alternate translation: “on my behalf” or “as my representative” or “by my authority”
9:39	h7ez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κακολογῆσαί	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evil**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to say evil things about”
9:40	ozrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason for what Jesus has just told his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a statement, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “Here is why:”
9:40	tma4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν	1	Here, the phrase **against us** describes people who attack or hate Jesus and his disciples. The phrase **for us** describes people who support or are friendly to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable phrases or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is not our enemy is our friend” or “is not attacking us is helping us”
9:40	hp68		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	-1	By **us**, Jesus means himself and his disciples, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
9:41	gzql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces an example that explains what Jesus has just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “Here is what I mean:”
9:41	lz5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃς & ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος	1	Jesus speaks about giving someone **a cup of water** to drink as an example of one small way in which a person can help another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this is an example, or you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “whoever, for example, gives you a cup of water” or “whoever helps you in any way”
9:41	nmx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς & ἐστε & ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is talking to his disciples, the word **you** throughout this verse is plural.
9:41	m0d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι	1	Here, the phrase **in the name that** introduces the reason or basis for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground that” or “since”
9:41	ypgl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	Χριστοῦ ἐστε	1	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first-person form. Alternate translation: “you belong to me, Christ”
9:41	bgq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ	1	Jesus is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **certainly not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **lose**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “he will most certainly receive”
9:41	jjq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Although the pronouns **he** and **his** are masculine, they are being used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person will certainly not lose his or her reward”
9:41	wnb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”
9:42	nhbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces a situation that contrasts with the situation that Jesus described in the previous verse. In this verse, people are harming instead of helping Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “However,”
9:42	v8qw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκανδαλίσῃ ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς ἐμέ	1	Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes one of these little ones who believe in me to sin”
9:42	cj0l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς ἐμέ	1	The phrase **these little ones** could refer: (1) to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “one of these unimportant people who believe in me” (2) to children who love Jesus and who are physically **little** compared to adults. Alternate translation: “one of these children who believe in me” (3) to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “one of these people who recently believed in me”
9:42	gef5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ	1	Here Jesus implies that what he is about to describe is **better** than being punished by God for causing one of these little ones to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “rather than being punished by God for doing that, it is better for him if”
9:42	t9fo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & βέβληται	1	Although the terms **him**, **his**, and **he** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “for that person … his or her … he or she has been thrown”
9:42	bami		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	περίκειται μύλος ὀνικὸς περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ, καὶ βέβληται εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that people might put a millstone of a donkey around his neck and throw him into the sea”
9:42	z6k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μύλος ὀνικὸς	1	A **millstone** was a round stone used for grinding grain into flour. The phrase **of a donkey** indicates that this kind of **millstone** was heavy enough that it took a **donkey** to turn it. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of stone, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a very large rock” or “a very heavy object”
9:42	bx6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περίκειται & περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ	1	The implication is that someone would tie the **millstone** around the person’s neck. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “is attached to his neck”
9:43	ifcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου	1	Jesus is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that the disciples might experience their **hand** causing them **to stumble**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “consider this situation: your hand causes you to stumble. If that were to happen”
9:43	g8dv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου	1	Here, Jesus speaks of **your foot** as if they were a person who could cause **you to stumble**. He means that the **hand** is the part of the body that is involved in the stumbling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is your hand’s fault that you stumble” or “you stumble with your hand”
9:43	m3k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σκανδαλίσῃ σε & σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν & σε	1	Even though Jesus is speaking to many disciples, he is addressing an individual situation, so **your** and **you** throughout this verse as well as the command **cut it off** are singular. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who is speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. If you do so, you may also need to make some other words plural.
9:43	gxu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκανδαλίσῃ σε	1	Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes you to sin”
9:43	qo45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν	1	Here Jesus provides the most extreme response to sinning. He does not mean that this should be the normal way to deal with sin. You should preserve the extreme language Jesus uses, but you could use a form that indicates that this is the most extreme example. Alternate translation: “if necessary you should even cut it off!”
9:43	wd7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν	1	Here Jesus speaks as if **life** were a house into which someone could **enter**. He is referring to experiencing or receiving **life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience life” or “to receive life”
9:43	l5bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be able to live”
9:43	h9lh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ζωὴν	1	Here Jesus implies that this **life** is everlasting or undying life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “true life” or “everlasting life”
9:43	wlu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν Γέενναν	1	Here Jesus uses the name **Gehenna** to refer to hell. The valley named **Gehenna** was outside the city of Jerusalem and was a place where people threw out and burned garbage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley”
9:43	ttl7			εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον	1	Here, the phrase **the unquenchable fire** refers to **Gehenna**, or hell, and describes it as a very unpleasant place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which is as hot as unquenchable fire” or “a terrible place”
9:44	f0g0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται	1	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The notes below discuss translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it.
9:44	yh4o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται	1	Here the author describes hell as if it were a place where there were worms and fire. He means that it is a very unpleasant place where people experience punishment and pain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “where it is as if their worm does not end, and it is as if the fire is not quenched” or “which is like a place where their worm does not end and the fire is not quenched”
9:44	vpk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun **their** refers to people who are in Gehenna. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the worm of the people there”
9:44	urrn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν	1	Here, the author is using the possessive form to describe a **worm** that devours them. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worm that devours them”
9:44	kj46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ σκώληξ & οὐ τελευτᾷ	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people were being devoured by only one **worm**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “worms do not end”
9:44	m6z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	οὐ τελευτᾷ	1	The author is referring to death in a polite way by using the word **end**. He means that **the worm** continues to devour the people there because it never dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “does not pass away” or “does not die” or “never ceases to devour”
9:44	lm09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people do not quench the fire”
9:44	s37j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ πῦρ	1	Here the author implies that **the fire** burns the people who are in Gehenna. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the fire that burns them”
9:45	lx2b			ἐὰν ὁ πούς σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἀπόκοψον αὐτόν; καλόν ἐστίν σε εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλὸν, ἢ τοὺς δύο πόδας ἔχοντα	1	Here Jesus repeats what he said in [9:43](../09/43.md) except he refers to a **foot** and being **lame** rather than a “hand” and being “crippled.” Express the idea as you did there, making the necessary changes to refer to a **foot**.
9:45	vj49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βληθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you”
9:45	hbt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν Γέενναν	1	See how you translated **Gehenna** in [9:43](../09/43.md). Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley”
9:45	zhf0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τὴν Γέενναν	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **Gehenna**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add the words “into the unquenchable fire” after **Gehenna**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
9:46	c8fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται	1	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. Since this verse is identical to [9:44](../09/44.md), those who decide to include it should express the idea as they did there.
9:47	p0ot		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε	1	Jesus is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that the disciples might experience their **eye** causing them to stumble. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “consider this situation: your eye causes you to stumble. If that were to happen”
9:47	okc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε	1	Here, Jesus speaks of **your eye** as if it were a person who could cause **you to stumble**. He means that the **eye** is the part of the body that is involved in the stumbling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is your eye’s fault that you stumble” or “you stumble with your eye”
9:47	lcbs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν & σέ	1	Even though Jesus is speaking to many disciples, he is addressing an individual situation, so **your** and **you** throughout this verse as well as the command **throw it out** are singular. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who is speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. If you do so, you may also need to make some other words plural.
9:47	j65u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκανδαλίζῃ σε	1	Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes you to sin”
9:47	t7uv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἔκβαλε αὐτόν	1	Here Jesus provides the most extreme response to sinning. He does not mean that this should be the normal way to deal with sin. You should preserve the extreme language Jesus uses, but you could use a form that indicates that this is the most extreme example. Alternate translation: “if necessary you should even throw it out!”
9:47	qy91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βληθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you”
9:47	r2gn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν Γέενναν	1	See how you translated **Gehenna** in [9:43](../09/43.md). Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley”
9:48	sss2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ, καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται	1	Here Jesus describes hell as if it were a place where there were worms and fire. He means that it is a very unpleasant place where people experience punishment and pain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “where it is as if their worm does not end, and it is as if the fire is not quenched” or “which is like a place where their worm does not end and the fire is not quenched”
9:48	sss3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun **their** refers to people who are in Gehenna. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the worm of the people there”
9:48	sss4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a **worm** that devours them. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worm that devours them”
9:48	sss5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ σκώληξ & οὐ τελευτᾷ	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people were being devoured by only one **worm**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “worms do not end”
9:48	sss6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	οὐ τελευτᾷ	1	Jesus is referring to death in a polite way by using the word **end**. He means that **the worm** continues to devour the people there because it never dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “does not pass away” or “does not die” or “never ceases to devour”
9:48	sss7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people do not quench the fire”
9:48	sss8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ πῦρ	1	Here Jesus implies that **the fire** burns the people who are in Gehenna. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the fire that burns them”
9:49	k379		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation related to what Jesus has just said about using extreme means to make sure that one does not sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As a matter of fact,”
9:49	mr5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς & ἁλισθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone”
9:49	ma3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται	1	Here Jesus speaks as if people were food or sacrifices that **will be salted with fire**. In Jesus’ culture, people would put salt on their food and on sacrifices that they offered to God. The salt preserved the food and made it taste better. When someone is salted **with fire**, it most likely refers to that person experiencing difficult or painful situations that eventually help and sanctify that person. However, Jesus does not explain the metaphor, and Christians disagree on what it means. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. If necessary, you could state more explicitly that Jesus is referring to some form of suffering and its effects on people. Alternate translation: “will experience something like being salted with fire” or “will suffer as if they were being burned, and that will help them as if they were being salted”
9:49	mlnp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	πυρὶ	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **with fire**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “and every sacrifice will be salted with salt” after **with fire**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
9:50	qt9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	καλὸν τὸ ἅλας	1	To teach the disciples, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: Salt is good”
9:50	oaep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν & τὸ ἅλας ἄναλον γένηται, ἐν τίνι	1	Jesus means that it is possible for **salt** to become **unsalty**, and he is speaking about what can or cannot happen after **salt** has become **unsalty**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “suppose that the salt becomes unsalty. With what”
9:50	rb7r			ἄναλον γένηται	1	Alternate translation: “loses its salty taste”
9:50	fqb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε?	1	Jesus is using the question form to show that no one can make ruined salt salty again. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you cannot season it with anything!” or “you are not able to season it.”
9:50	t76n			αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε	1	Alternate translation: “will you make it taste salty again”
9:50	gims		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀρτύσετε & ἔχετε & εἰρηνεύετε	1	Because Jesus is talking to his disciples, the word **you** and the commands **Have** and **be at peace** are plural.
9:50	f34y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα	1	Here Jesus commands his disciples to have **salt** in themselves. Just as salt makes food better in many ways, so Jesus’ disciples can make the world better in many ways. If possible, preserve the figure of speech or use simile form since it refers back to the illustration Jesus just gave. Alternate translation: “Be like food that has salt in it” or “Help others as if you had salt in yourselves”
9:50	syc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρηνεύετε	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “act peaceably”
10:intro	bq25				0	# Mark 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. Jesus instructs his disciples and journeys toward Jerusalem (8:22–10:52)\n      * Jesus teaches about marriage and divorce (10:1–12)\n      * Jesus blesses little children (10:13–16)\n      * Jesus talks with a rich man (10:17–22)\n      * Jesus teaches about wealth, possessions, and the kingdom (10:23–31)\n      * Jesus predicts his death and resurrection (10:32–34)\n      * Jesus and the disciples speak about who will be great (10:35–45)\n      * Jesus heals blind Bartimaeus (10:46–52)\n\nSome translations set quotations farther to the right than the rest of the text to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations in [10:6–8](../10/06.md), which are from [Genesis 1:27](../gen/01/27.md) and [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Divorce\n\nIn [10:2](../10/02.md), the Pharisees test Jesus by asking him about an issue that was controversial among Jewish religious leaders: divorce. More specifically, the religious leaders argued about whether men could divorce their wives and about what were valid grounds for divorce. So, they ask Jesus about this. When Jesus asks what Moses wrote in the Law, the Pharisees refer to [Deuteronomy 24:1–4](../deu/24/01.md), which assumes that men do divorce their wives. Jesus responds that this section of the Law exists only because the Israelites were stubborn. He means that God knew that the Israelite men would sometimes divorce their wives, so he included a law about how to do it. Then Jesus argues that divorce is never what God wants, and he quotes from Genesis 1 and 2 to prove this. He further says that any divorced person who marries again is involved in adultery. Make sure that it is clear that both Jesus and the Pharisees are making arguments based on the Scriptures.\n\n### Rich people and the kingdom of God\n\nIn Jesus’ culture, many people thought that rich people had been specifically blessed by God. When Jesus said that it was extremely difficult for rich people to enter God’s kingdom (see [10:23–25](../10/23.md)), the disciples were shocked. They thought that if it was hard for rich people to enter the kingdom, it would be impossible for everyone else. That is why they ask the question, “And who is able to be saved?” ([10:26](../10/26.md)). If your readers might not understand why the disciples respond in this way, you may need to include a footnote that explains some of this information.\n\n### Sitting at Jesus’ right and left hand\n\nIn [10:37](../10/37.md) and [10:40](../10/40.md), Jesus and James and John refer to sitting at Jesus’ right hand and at his left hand. They are referring to the places of honor at the right and left side of a king or ruler. The people who sit in these places have authority and are respected the most after the king or ruler. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation. See the notes on these two verses for translation options.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Drinking the cup\n\nIn [10:38–39](../10/38.md), Jesus refers to a “cup” from which he is going to drink. He is using a figure of speech from the Old Testament that refers to experiencing suffering and pain (for example, see [Psalm 75:8](../psa/75/08.md) and [Isaiah 51:17](../isa/51/17.md)). He means that he will experience suffering, and his disciples must be ready to experience it as well. Since this figure of speech is from the Old Testament, if possible you should preserve it or express the idea in simile form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Being baptized with a baptism\n\nIn [10:38–39](../10/38.md), Jesus refers to a “baptism” with which he and his disciples will be “baptized.” He means that, just as people who are baptized are covered with water, he and his disciples will be overwhelmed by suffering and difficult circumstances. Since baptism is an important concept in the Bible, if possible you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea in simile form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMost of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in conversations, and many of the conversations are with one person. Because of this, the majority of the forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. So, you should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 5, 19, and 35. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
10:1	r6rf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”
10:1	qq93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἔρχεται	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, goes”
10:1	goki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “comes” instead of **goes**. Alternate translation: “he comes”
10:1	av2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκεῖθεν	1	Here, the phrase **that place** refers to Capernaum (see [9:33](../09/33.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from Capernaum”
10:1	j5wa			πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου	1	Here, the phrase **beyond the Jordan** refers to regions to the east of the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the areas on the east side of the Jordan River”
10:1	s6fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	συνπορεύονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go together”
10:1	vzb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰώθει	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was his custom” or “he generally did”
10:2	koh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὐτὸν, εἰ ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γυναῖκα ἀπολῦσαι? πειράζοντες αὐτόν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Is it lawful for a husband to divorce his wife?’ testing him”
10:2	ox9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	πειράζοντες αὐτόν	1	Here, the word **testing** introduces the purpose for which the Pharisees asked Jesus this question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “which they asked to test him” or “with the goal of testing him”
10:3	m4pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
10:3	m7ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, τί ὑμῖν ἐνετείλατο Μωϋσῆς?	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked them what Moses commanded them.”
10:3	l74d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί ὑμῖν ἐνετείλατο Μωϋσῆς	1	Here Jesus is referring to what the Law that God gave the Israelites through **Moses** includes about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What laws about divorce did God give you through Moses” or “What did Moses write for you in the Law about divorce”
10:3	j89n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the word **you** here is plural.
10:4	qyht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπέτρεψεν Μωϋσῆς βιβλίον ἀποστασίου γράψαι καὶ ἀπολῦσαι	1	Here the Pharisees are referring to a specific section in the law that God gave to Moses (see [Deuteronomy 24:1–4](../deu/24/01.md)). This passage discusses divorce and remarriage, and it mentions the use of **a certificate of divorce**. The Pharisees interpreted this passage to mean that men could divorce their wives, but they had to use **a certificate of divorce**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some of this information in your translation or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “In the Law, Moses permitted a husband to write a certificate of divorce and then to divorce his wife”
10:4	vpgb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βιβλίον ἀποστασίου γράψαι	1	Here the Pharisees imply that the husband must also give the **certificate of divorce** to his wife. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to write a certificate of divorce, to give it to her,”
10:4	qlql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	βιβλίον ἀποστασίου	1	A **certificate of divorce** is a written document that makes the divorce official. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of document, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a paper that testifies to the divorce”
10:5	m73x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
10:5	xqzb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν	1	Here, the phrase **your hardness of heart** refers to obstinacy or unwillingness to listen and obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Because you are hardheaded” or “Because you are so stubborn”
10:5	slxl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hardness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Because your hearts are hard”
10:5	y613		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the words **your** and **you** here are plural.
10:6-8	jz57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς & ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα & καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν; ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But from the beginning of creation, as the Scriptures say, God made them male and female. The Scriptures say further that, because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesh. So then, I tell you that they are no longer two, but one flesh”
10:6	nk5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ & ἀρχῆς κτίσεως	1	Here, the phrase **from the beginning of creation** refers to when God created everything that exists. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the beginning of the world” or “at the time when God made the creation”
10:6	m6lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς	1	Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Genesis 1:27](../gen/01/27.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format or introduce these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “in the words of the Scriptures, ‘He made them male and female’” or “as the Scriptures say, ‘He made them male and female’”
10:7-8	f8s2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα & καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν	1	Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format or introduce these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Further, again in the words of the Scriptures, ‘Because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesh’” or “The Scriptures also say, ‘Because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesh’”
10:7	sdzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕνεκεν τούτου	1	The pronoun this refers to what the previous verse includes about how God created people male and female (see [10:6](../10/06.md)). If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to those ideas more directly. Alternate translation: “Because God created people that way”
10:7	lfzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα	1	The word **man** represents men in general in general, not one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “men will leave their fathers and mothers” or “men will leave their parents”
10:7	lnz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος	1	Here the author of the quotation implies that this happens when the **man** gets married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he gets married, a man will leave”
10:7	m39v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	καταλείψει	1	Here Jesus uses the future tense to speak about something that is generally true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense is most naturally for expressing a general truth. Alternate translation: “leaves”
10:7	vdbn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	καὶ τὴν μητέρα	1	Many ancient manuscripts do not include any words after **and mother**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “and will be joined to his wife” after **and mother**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
10:8	rd63		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν	1	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if **the two** are **one flesh**. He means that a husband and wife are so closely joined that it is as if they had **one flesh** or one body between them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the two will be like one flesh” or “the two will be as closely united as possible”
10:8	zu9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ δύο	1	Jesus is using the number **two** as a noun to refer to a husband and a wife together. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this number with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the two of them” or “the two spouses”
10:8	zszz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Here, the phrase **So then** introduces a conclusion or inference based on the words Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “As you can see”
10:8	p7yc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ	1	Here Jesus repeats in different form the words from the figure of speech at the end of the quotation earlier in this verse. He means that a husband and wife are so closely joined that it is as if they had **one flesh** or one body between them. Express the idea as you did earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “it is as if they are no longer two, but they are like one flesh” or “they are no longer two separate people, but are as closely united as possible”
10:9	o491		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference based on what Jesus has said about marriage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So then”
10:9	ty4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ & ὁ Θεὸς συνέζευξεν	1	The phrase **what God joined together** refers to any married couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those whom God has joined together as husband and wife” or “couples whom God has joined together”
10:9	hshl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “man should not separate”
10:9	pty4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1	Here, although the term **man** is masculine, it is used in a generic sense to refer to any person, male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person” or “humans”
10:10	cn28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν πάλιν, οἱ μαθηταὶ περὶ τούτου ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν	1	Here, the word **again** could go with: (1) **in the house**. Alternate translation: “again in the house, the disciples were asking him about this” (2) **asked**. Alternate translation: “in the house, the disciples were asking him again about this”
10:10	a1fz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν	1	Here, the phrase **the house** refers to the place where Jesus and his disciples were staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the house in which they were living”
10:10	l8fu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτου	1	The word **this** refers to the conversation that Jesus just had with the Pharisees about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the conversation he had just had with the Pharisees”
10:11	i5kp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλην	1	Jesus is using the adjective **another** as a noun to mean another woman. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “another person”
10:11	cosl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μοιχᾶται ἐπ’ αὐτήν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adultery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “becomes an adulterer against her” or “does what is adulterous against her”
10:12	mn0j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὴ	1	The pronoun **she** refers to any married woman. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to married women more directly. Alternate translation: “a wife”
10:12	ghs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλον	1	Jesus is using the adjective **another** as a noun to mean another man. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “another person”
10:12	sn1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μοιχᾶται	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adultery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “she becomes an adulteress” or “she does what is adulterous”
10:13	zx1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And it happened that” or “After this,”
10:13	nmw7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	προσέφερον	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “other people were bringing”
10:13	pk8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	αὐτῶν ἅψηται	1	In Mark’s culture, when Jesus would**touch** the little children, that would express God’s love for them and convey God’s blessing to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what laying his hands on them means. Alternate translation: “he might stretch out his hands toward them” or “he might touch them to bless them”
10:13	jk69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the people who were bringing the little children. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who were bringing the little children”
10:14	mao6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the disciples were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,”
10:14	q9c8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά; τῶν γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first two clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Of the ones such as these is the kingdom of God, so permit the little children to come to me, and do not forbid them”
10:14	yi5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά	1	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses. Alternate translation: “Permit the little children to come to me; yes, do not forbid them” or “Permit the little children to come to me”
10:14	a4wj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἄφετε & μὴ κωλύετε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the commands **Permit** and **do not forbid** are plural.
10:14	qj7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεσθαι	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “to go”
10:14	zlqb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῶν & τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe people who belong in **the kingdom of God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God belongs to the ones such as these” or “the ones such as these belong in the kingdom of God”
10:14	jq4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῶν & τοιούτων	1	The pronoun **these** refers to the little children. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to the little children more directly. Alternate translation: “of the ones such as these little children”
10:14	gq3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	τῶν & τοιούτων	1	Jesus is referring to **the little children** and to people who are like them. He does not indicate exactly how these people are like **the little children**, so if possible express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “of people who are like these”
10:15	e08x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word **you** here is plural.
10:15	y3a2			ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in positive form. Alternate translation: “only whoever receives the kingdom of God as a little child will enter into it”
10:15	a1e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς παιδίον	1	Jesus is saying that his disciples should be like **a little child** because little children are humble and thankfully receive gifts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a little child receives things” or “with humility like that of a little child”
10:15	q3ck		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”
10:16	jq4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτά	1	In Mark’s culture, when Jesus placed his hands on the little children, that expressed God’s love for them and conveyed God’s blessing to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what having laid his hands on them means. See how you translated “touch them” in [10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “stretching out his hands toward them” or “which he did by placing his hands on them”
10:17	d0iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”
10:17	si2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	αὐτοῦ	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples,”
10:17	nffm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορευομένου	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming out”
10:17	tayx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	προσδραμὼν εἷς καὶ γονυπετήσας αὐτὸν, ἐπηρώτα αὐτόν	1	Here Mark introduces a man as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a man ran up to him. He knelt before him and was asking him”
10:17	oh92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	γονυπετήσας αὐτὸν	1	In this man’s culture, kneeling down before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what kneeling down means. Alternate translation: “having prostrated himself before him” or “having bowed down to him in respect”
10:17	fpp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω	1	Here the man speaks as if he were a child who would receive property from a relative. He speaks in this way to indicate that he wants to receive **eternal life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I might receive eternal life” or “I might be given eternal life”
10:17	h45i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I might be able to live eternally”
10:18	kjkd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
10:18	uwro		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “No one is good except one—God. So, why are you calling me good?”
10:18	lw1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the man for calling another human **good** without thinking carefully about it. Jesus is not denying that he is **good**, but he wants the man to think about it more carefully. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are calling me good without thinking carefully.” or “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good!”
10:18	gyod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Only one is good—God” or “No person is good—only God is good”
10:19	qs3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα	1	Here Jesus quotes commands from the law that God gave to Moses. The first four commands and the sixth command come from either [Exodus 20:12–16](../exo/20/12.md) or [Deuteronomy 5:16–20](../deu/05/16.md). The fifth command is not directly quoted from the law that God gave Moses, but it may be a summary of the command found in [Exodus 20:17](../exo/20/17.md) or [Deuteronomy 5:21](../deu/05/21.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “You know the commandments—as you can read in the Scriptures, ‘Do not kill, do not commit adultery, do not steal, do not testify falsely, do not defraud, honor your father and your mother’”
10:19	vxpo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα	1	Since in these commands God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the commands are singular.
10:19	hj3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ μοιχεύσῃς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adultery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “do not be an adulterer or adulteress” or “do not do what is adulterous”
10:20	qlbg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
10:20	bd3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ νεότητός μου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **youth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “since the time when I was a young man” or “from when I was a child”
10:21	ocri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
10:21	syq1			ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ	1	Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done”
10:21	rd85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	Here Jesus implies that the man should **give** the money the man would receive from selling his possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “give what you earn to the poor”
10:21	ux1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	Jesus is using the adjective poor as a noun to mean poor people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor”
10:21	a0hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	3	Here, the word and introduces the result that will follow if the man does **sell** what he owns and **give to the poor**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and as a result”
10:21	iij4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δεῦρο, ἀκολούθει μοι	1	Here, the clause **come, follow me** is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “come with me as my student”
10:21	z24n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἀκολούθει μοι	1	Many ancient manuscripts do not include any words after **follow me**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “having taken up the cross” after the words **follow me**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
10:22	dxbx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces how the man reacted in contrast to what Jesus said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “But then”
10:22	rg43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὁ & στυγνάσας ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ, ἀπῆλθεν λυπούμενος; ἦν γὰρ ἔχων κτήματα πολλά	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the third clause gives the reason for the result that the first two clauses describe. Alternate translation: “because he was having many possessions, having become downcast at this word, he went away being grieved”
10:22	i5v3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	στυγνάσας	1	Here, the phrase **having become downcast** indicates that the man became sad and mournful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his face falling” or “having become mournful”
10:22	afu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ λόγῳ	1	Here, **word** represents what Jesus just said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ statement” or “the words that Jesus said”
10:22	rczv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λυπούμενος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “being very sorrowful”
10:22	v58f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦν & ἔχων κτήματα πολλά	1	Here Mark implies that the young man did not want to sell these **possessions**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he was having many possessions that he did not want to sell”
10:23	fi28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	πῶς δυσκόλως οἱ τὰ χρήματα ἔχοντες, εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελεύσονται	1	This is an exclamation that is emphasizing how difficult it is for rich people to **enter into the kingdom of God**. Use an exclamation that would communicate that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “You see that the ones having riches very difficultly enter into the kingdom of God!” or “Only with difficulty do the ones having riches enter into the kingdom of God!”
10:24	zqje		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & μαθηταὶ ἐθαμβοῦντο ἐπὶ τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus’ **words**. Alternate translation: “his words astonished the disciples”
10:24	z9z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποκριθεὶς	1	Here, the word **answering** indicates that Jesus is responding to how the disciples reacted to what he had said. He is not responding to something that they said to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “responding to their astonishment” or “in response”
10:24	fh1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1	Here Jesus calls his disciples **Children** to indicate that they are under his spiritual care and that he cares for them. The disciples were not actually Jesus’ children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that a teacher or leader would use for the people whom that person teaches or leads. Alternate translation: “My dear disciples” or “Young men”
10:24	izt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἐστιν & εἰσελθεῖν	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **it is to enter**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “it is for the ones trusting in riches to enter.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
10:25	f15k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν	1	Here Jesus compares **a rich {person}** entering **the kingdom of God** with something that is impossible: **a camel** passing through **an eye of a needle**. Jesus does this to emphasize how hard it is for **a rich {person} to enter into the kingdom of God**. As [10:27](../10/27.md) shows, Jesus does not think that this is completely impossible, however. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea here in such a way that it does not sound as if it is totally impossible for **a rich {person} to enter into the kingdom of God**. Alternate translation: “Consider how difficult it is for a camel to pass through an eye of a needle. That illustrates how difficult it is for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God”
10:25	t4y8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος	1	The phrase **an eye of a needle** refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing needle through which the thread passes. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of tool or the hole in it, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term for a small opening. Alternate translation: “the small hole at the end of a needle” or “a very small hole”
10:26	vo65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & περισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο, λέγοντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “what the disciples heard astonished them greatly, and they said”
10:26	mba6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Some ancient manuscripts read **to him**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “to themselves.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
10:26	fjex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι?	1	The disciples are using the question form to express their astonishment. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So it seems that no one is able to be saved.” or “So no one is able to be saved!”
10:26	fn25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τίς δύναται σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation: “who can receive salvation” or “whom will God save”
10:27	xo97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	παρὰ ἀνθρώποις ἀδύνατον, ἀλλ’ οὐ παρὰ Θεῷ; πάντα γὰρ δυνατὰ παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “All things are possible with God. Because of that, with men it is impossible, but not with God”
10:27	fhsq			παρὰ ἀνθρώποις & παρὰ Θεῷ & παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ.	1	Alternate translation: “For men … for God … for God”
10:27	vfyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans”
10:27	jg4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀδύνατον	1	Here Jesus is referring back to what the disciples asked about whether anyone can be saved (see [10:26](../10/26.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “being saved is impossible”
10:27	lpja		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ οὐ παρὰ Θεῷ	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but it is not impossible with God”
10:28	hcv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word **Behold** is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the person to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Excuse me” or “Listen”
10:28	anas		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	By **we**, Peter means himself and the disciples but not Jesus, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
10:28	ua78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠκολουθήκαμέν σοι	1	Here, the phrase **have followed you** indicates that the disciples traveled with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have become your disciples” or “have traveled with you as your students”
10:29-30	mvyg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς & ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **no one** and the negative phrase **who will not receive**. Alternate translation: “everyone who … will receive”
10:29	px2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word **you** here is plural.
10:29	qibm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	When Jesus says **for the sake of me and of the gospel**, he means that some people have **left** all these things because they are his disciples and because they believe the gospel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he is my disciple and believes the gospel” or “because he believes in me and in the gospel”
10:30	sjhg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἑκατονταπλασίονα	1	Here Jesus is using a round number (**100**) indicates a large number of **times**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression for a large number or state more explicitly that 100 is a round number. Alternate translation: “very many times as much” or “something like 100 times as much”
10:30	heb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	νῦν ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ & ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ	1	Here, the phrase **this time** refers to the time before God judges everyone and renews the world, and the phrase **the age that is coming** refers to the time after God judges everyone and renews the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable phrases or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “now in this life … in the life that is coming” or “now before God judges everyone … after God judges everyone” or “right now … later”
10:30	k1sk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἀγροὺς, μετὰ διωγμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **persecutions**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and lands, although that person will be persecuted” or “and lands, along with being persecuted”
10:30	dlki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that person will live eternally”
10:31	k9su		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next thing, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Yes,” or “Indeed,”
10:31	ym7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πολλοὶ & ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	Here, Jesus is speaking of important or respected people as if they were **first** and of unimportant or non-respected people as if they were **last**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many respected will be non-respected, and non-respected, respected” or “many significant will be insignificant, and insignificant, significant”
10:31	y2lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πρῶτοι & καὶ ἔσχατοι	1	Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns to mean first and last people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “first people … and last people” or “people who are first … and people who are last”
10:31	e3ai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and many last will be first”
10:32	sywf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later on,” or “After that,”
10:32	ttz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀναβαίνοντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming up”
10:32	ebss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐθαμβοῦντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was how **Jesus was going ahead of them**. Alternate translation: “how he was going ahead amazed the disciples”
10:32	hq7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ & ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	Some people were walking **behind** Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” or “the other people who were traveling with them”
10:32	k1nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had chosen to be apostles”
10:33-34	l3e8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & ἀποκτενοῦσιν & ἀναστήσεται	1	Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, … me … me … me … me … me … kill me … I rise”
10:33	pv4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention:” or “Listen”
10:33	qkq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀναβαίνομεν	1	When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form.
10:33	s1hp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀναβαίνομεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “we are coming up”
10:33	ha2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone will hand the Son of Man over”
10:33	ohsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θανάτῳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to die”
10:33	ils2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	Here Jesus is speaking specifically of **Gentiles** who rule or control the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Gentiles who rule” or “to the Gentiles who are in charge”
10:34	t0lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐμπτύσουσιν αὐτῷ	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would **spit on** someone to insult that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “spit on him to dishonor him”
10:34	ccd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας	1	Here, the phrase **after three days** refers to the day after tomorrow. People in Jesus’ culture counted the current day as day one, tomorrow as day two, and the day after tomorrow as day three. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the day after tomorrow. See how you expressed this phrase in [8:31](../08/31.md). Alternate translation: “on the day after the next day” or “two days from then”
10:34	xv2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστήσεται	1	Here, the word **rise** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will be restored to life” or “he will resurrect”
10:35	wxn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. It happened sometime soon after Jesus spoke the words recorded in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,” or “After Jesus said those things,”
10:35	ch2r			θέλομεν ἵνα ὃ ἐὰν αἰτήσωμέν σε, ποιήσῃς ἡμῖν	1	Alternate translation: “if we ask you to do something for us, will you do it?” or “Please do for us whatever we ask you to do.”
10:35	li9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	θέλομεν & αἰτήσωμέν & ἡμῖν	1	Here, the pronouns **we** and **us** refer only to James and John, and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.
10:36	he8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to James and John”
10:36	lyue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	θέλετε & ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the word **you** is plural throughout this verse.
10:37	xwf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	The pronoun **they** refers to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John”
10:37	n1fv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δὸς ἡμῖν & καθίσωμεν	1	Here, the pronouns **us** and **we** refer only to James and John, so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.
10:37	mci1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	δὸς ἡμῖν	1	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you grant to us”
10:37	bho1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	εἷς σου ἐκ δεξιῶν, καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου καθίσωμεν ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1	When someone sits at the **right hand** or at the **left hand** of a ruler, this symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “we might in your glory sit down to rule, one at your right hand and one at your left hand” or “we might in your glory take the places of honor and authority, one at your right hand and one at your left hand”
10:37	bb98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1	The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “with you when you rule gloriously” or “with you when you become a great ruler”
10:37	kyg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with you when you are glorified” or “by you when you are glorious”
10:37	d5h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἷς σου ἐκ δεξιῶν, καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου	1	Here, the phrases **at your right hand** and **at your left hand** refer to the places next to Jesus’ right and left hands, which would be the right side and the left side. In the Jesus’ culture, these sides were associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side” and “left side.” Make sure that your readers understand that these sides indicate that the two sons of Zebedee would have honor and authority when they sit there. Alternate translation: “one next to you on the right and one next to you on the left” or “one in the honorable place at your right and one in the honorable place at your left”
10:38	otfd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what James and John asked for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
10:38	j8md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οὐκ οἴδατε & αἰτεῖσθε & δύνασθε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the words **You** and **you** are plural throughout this verse.
10:38	v1bf			οὐκ οἴδατε	1	Alternate translation: “You do not understand”
10:38	yvu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω	1	Here Jesus speaks of experiencing pain and suffering as if it were drinking from a **cup**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to drink the cup of suffering which I drink” or “to experience the pain that I am about to experience”
10:38	nesy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ποτήριον	1	Here, cup represents the drink inside the cup, which in Jesus’ culture would probably have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the drink” or “the wine in the cup”
10:38	pax6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι	1	Here Jesus speaks of being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances and pain as if it were **being baptized**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be baptized in the painful circumstances in which I am about to be baptized” or “to be overwhelmed by difficult things like I am about to be overwhelmed”
10:38	osye		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ & βαπτισθῆναι	1	The expression **with the baptism with which** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “to be baptized as”
10:38	hlue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “to have someone baptize you … someone will baptize me”
10:39	r3pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the pronouns **they** and **them** refer to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John”
10:39	vwd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	δυνάμεθα	1	The James and John are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We are able to drink that cup and be baptized with that baptism” or “We are able to undergo those things”
10:39	qb9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	2	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
10:39	hc1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε	1	Here Jesus continues to speak of experiencing pain and suffering as if it were drinking from a **cup**. See how you translated this figure of speech in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “The cup of suffering that I drink, you will drink” or “The pain that I am about to experience, you will experience”
10:39	ensf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ποτήριον	1	Here, **cup** represents the drink inside the cup, which in Jesus’ culture would probably have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the idea in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “the drink” or “the wine in the cup”
10:39	rdbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	πίεσθε & βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the word **you** is plural throughout this verse.
10:39	c15v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	Here Jesus continues to speak of being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances and pain as if it were **being baptized**. See how you translated this figure of speech in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “in the painful circumstances in which I am about to be baptized, you will be baptized” or “by the difficult things that I am about to be overwhelmed by, you will be overwhelmed”
10:39	xc19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι	1	The expression **with the baptism with which** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. See how you expressed the idea in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “as I am being baptized”
10:39	humc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. See how you expressed the idea in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “someone is baptizing me, someone will baptize you”
10:40	uoq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τὸ & καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων	1	When someone sits at the **right hand** or at the **left hand** of a ruler, this symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. See how you translated the similar phrases in [10:37](../10/37.md). Alternate translation: “to sit down to rule at my right hand and at my left hand” or “to take the places of honor and authority at my right hand and at my left hand”
10:40	sk68		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων	1	Here, the phrases **at my right hand** and **at my left hand** refer to the places next to Jesus’ right and left hands, which would be the right side and the left side. In the Jesus’ culture, these sides were associated with honor or authority. See how you expressed the idea in [10:37](../10/37.md). Alternate translation: “next to me on the right or next to me on the left” or “in the honorable places at my right or at my left”
10:40	a4g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ οἷς	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but it will be given to the ones for whom”
10:40	pdc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡτοίμασται	1	Here, the word **it** refers to sitting in the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to sit in those places has been prepared” or “it has been prepared to do that”
10:40	eu9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡτοίμασται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it”
10:41	ad19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκούσαντες	1	Here Mark implies that the **ten** disciples **heard** about what James and John had asked Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having heard that James and John had asked to sit at Jesus’ right hand and left hand”
10:41	i48d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ δέκα	1	Mark is using the number **ten** as a noun to refer to the other ten disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this number with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other ten disciples” or “the rest of the disciples”
10:42	itdt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οἴδατε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word **You** here is plural.
10:42	sbk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν κατακυριεύουσιν αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ μεγάλοι αὐτῶν κατεξουσιάζουσιν αὐτῶν	1	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than and in order to show that the second clause is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses Alternate translation: “the ones considered rulers of the Gentiles lord it over them; indeed, their great ones exercise authority over them” or “the ones considered rulers of the Gentiles and their great ones lord it over them”
10:42	ru5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Gentiles consider to be their rulers”
10:42	u9gu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατακυριεύουσιν & κατεξουσιάζουσιν	1	The words translated **lord it over** and **exercise authority over** refer to using power to control and dominate others. The words do not indicate whether the rulers and the great ones are doing good or bad things with their power. If possible, use words or phrases that refer to total control and domination but that do not imply good or bad use of that control and domination. Alternate translation: “reign absolutely over … have complete authority over”
10:42	zfr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατεξουσιάζουσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “rule over” or “control”
10:43	zfz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	οὐχ οὕτως & ἐστιν	1	Here Jesus could be using the present tense to: (1) give a command or instruction. Alternate translation: “It should not be this way” or “Let it not be this way” (2) state how things work differently among his disciples. Alternate translation: “That is not how it is”
10:43	zyzc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν & ὑμῖν & ὑμῶν	1	Because is talking to the disciples, the words **you**, **you**, and **your** are plural.
10:43-44	rt9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ὃς ἂν θέλῃ μέγας γενέσθαι ἐν ὑμῖν, ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος & καὶ ὃς ἂν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι πρῶτος, ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος	1	These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the sentences with a word other than and in order to show that the second sentence is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two sentences Alternate translation: “whoever desires to become great among you will be your servant; indeed, whoever desires to be first among you will be your slave” or “whoever desires to become first or great among will you be your servant or slave”
10:43	fc3m			μέγας γενέσθαι	1	Alternate translation: “to be highly respected” or “to be greatly respected”
10:43	gfun		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἔσται	1	Jesus is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. See how you translated the similar form in [9:35](../09/35.md). Alternate translation: “should be” or “has to be”
10:44	bhbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word **you** here is plural.
10:44	e7sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρῶτος	1	Here, Jesus is speaking of being important or respected as if it were being **first**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated this word in [9:35](../09/35.md). Alternate translation: “respected” or “significant”
10:44	qzo8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἔσται	1	Jesus is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. See how you translated the similar form in [9:35](../09/35.md). Alternate translation: “should be” or “has to be”
10:44	u5yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος	1	Jesus speaks of being **a slave** to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. Alternate translation: “will dedicate himself or herself to serve all” or “will work hard at helping all”
10:44	mn3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων	1	Jesus is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the other disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all the other disciples” or “the rest of the disciples”
10:45	pnmd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the disciples should act like servants and slaves for other disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for commands, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “I command that because”
10:45	ctta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, … my”
10:45	h0j5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἦλθεν διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι, καὶ δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “came to serve and to give his life as a ransom in exchange for many, not to be served”
10:45	pmk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἦλθεν	1	Here, the word **come** refers to the Son of Man entering this world as a human to do what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did not come to this world” or “is not acting”
10:45	a3fr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διακονηθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “for people to serve him” or “to have people serve him”
10:45	rik1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but he came to serve”
10:45	d9jd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν	1	Here Jesus speaks as if his **life** were a price or **ransom** he would **give** to free **many** from someone or something that owned or controlled them. He means that he will obtain forgiveness for his people’s sins and will keep those sins from controlling them. This is an important biblical image, so if possible preserve the figure of speech or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “to offer his life as if it were a ransom to set many free from sin”
10:45	c46w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to allow himself to die”
10:45	xuny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλῶν	1	Jesus is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”
10:46	thxd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,”
10:46	n4i3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
10:46	bq3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming out”
10:46	z3mo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης, ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	Here Mark introduces **Bartimaeus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man sitting beside the road. His name was Bartimaeus, son of Timaeus. He was a blind beggar”
10:46	iosi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης	1	Here, the phrase **son of Timaeus** could: (1) identify the father of **Bartimaeus**. Alternate translation: “Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, whose father was Timaeus” (2) explain what the name **Bartimaeus** means. Alternate translation: “Bartimaeus, which means ‘son of Timaeus,’ a blind beggar”
10:46	hzis		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος	1	The words **Bartimaeus** and **Timaeus** are the names of men.
10:47	ow3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀκούσας ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζαρηνός ἐστιν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘It is Jesus the Nazarene,’”
10:47	ynr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ	1	Here, the word **Son** means a male descendant. It does not mean that Jesus was the direct son of David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” or “You who are descended from David”
10:47	vwz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ	1	**David** was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title **Son of David** implicitly meant “Messiah.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Messiah”
10:47	s2dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἐλέησόν με	1	The phrase **have mercy** is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add a word such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “I ask that you have mercy on me”
10:47	ylls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλέησόν με	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “be merciful to me”
10:47	tvkh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλέησόν με	1	The Bartimaeus assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “have mercy on me and heal me” or “be merciful to me by healing me”
10:48	ca5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ	1	Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men”
10:48	m32u			πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν	1	The phrase **was crying out much more** could mean: (1) that the blind man shouted even louder to Jesus. Alternate translation: “was crying out even louder” (2) that the blind man called out even more frequently or persistently. Alternate translation: “was crying out even more often” or “was crying out even more persistently”
10:48	l86a			Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με	1	Here Bartimaeus says the same thing he said in [10:47](../10/47.md) except he does not include the name Jesus. Express the idea as you did there. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David, I ask that you be merciful to me” or “You who are descended from David, please have mercy on me and heal me”
10:49	pgfm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν, φωνήσατε αὐτόν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “said to call him”
10:49	po5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	φωνήσατε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to some of the people in the crowd, the command **Call** is plural.
10:49	ac7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	φωνοῦσι	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “some people in the crowd called” or “some people in the front of the crowd called”
10:49	n6xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάρσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous”
10:49	py8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔγειρε	1	Here the people who are speaking to Bartimaeus imply that he should walk to where Jesus was after getting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Get up and walk over to him” or “Get up and go to where he is”
10:50	rhrr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποβαλὼν τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ	1	Bartimaeus’ **coat** would have been an outer garment that people could ordinarily take off in public. Bartimaeus probably took it off so that it would be easier for him to hurry to where Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make some or all of that information more explicit. Alternate translation: “having thrown aside his jacket” or “having thrown aside his coat so that he could move faster”
10:50	bf2a			ἀναπηδήσας	1	Alternate translation: “having quickly gotten to his feet” or “having immediately stood up”
10:50	jc66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
10:51	qm1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν, τί σοι θέλεις ποιήσω?	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked him what he desired him to do for him”
10:51	fcin		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Ραββουνεί, ἵνα	1	Bartimaeus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, I desire that”
10:51	ish0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναβλέψω	1	Here, Bartimaeus could be implying: (1) that he once could see, and he wants to be able to see once more. Alternate translation: “I might regain my sight” (2) that he wants to be able to see for the first time. Alternate translation: “I might gain my sight” or “I might be able to see”
10:52	bjuw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You believed, and that has caused you to be saved”
10:52	s5d2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε	1	Jesus speaks of Bartimaeus’ faith as if it had actively saved him. He means that his faith was the necessary condition for the healing that he received from God. Alternate translation: “Because of your faith, you have been saved”
10:52	omxe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνέβλεψεν	1	Here, much as in [10:51](../10/51.md), Mark could be implying: (1) that Bartimaeus once could see, and now he can see once more. Alternate translation: “he regained his sight” (2) that Bartimaeus could see for the first time. Alternate translation: “he gained his sight” or “he was able to see”
10:52	co2v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ	1	Here, the clause **he was following him on the road** could indicate that: (1) Bartimaeus walked with Jesus on the road. Alternate translation: “he walked with him on the road” or “he went with him on the road” (2) Bartimaeus traveled with Jesus and was his disciple. Alternate translation: “he became his disciple” or “he traveled with him on the road as his student”
11:intro	xg3t				0	# Mark 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n6. Jesus in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)\n      * Jesus enters Jerusalem (11:1–11)\n      * Jesus curses a fig tree, part one (11:12–14)\n      * Jesus drives people out of the temple (11:15–19)\n      * Jesus curses a fig tree, part two (11:20–26)\n      * Jesus debates with the Jewish leaders about authority (11:27–33)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [11:9–10](../mrk/11/09.md), which includes a quotation from [Psalm 118:26](../psa/118/26.md).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### The young donkey\n\nIn [11:1–11](../11/01.md), Mark narrates how Jesus rode on a colt, or young donkey, when he entered into Jerusalem. Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all write about this event. Mark and Luke write that the disciples brought Jesus a colt. John writes that Jesus found a donkey. Matthew writes that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey and a colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1–7](../mat/21/01.md), [Mark 11:1–7](../mrk/11/01.md), [Luke 19:29–36](../luk/19/29.md), and [John 12:14–15](../jhn/12/14.md))\n\n### Hosanna\n\nThe word “Hosanna” is a Hebrew word spelled out how it sounds in Mark’s language. The word means “save us, please.” By the time of Jesus, however, people would use the word to praise or honor God and others. Consider whether to spell the word out as it sounds or state its meaning. See the notes on [11:9](../11/09.md) and [11:10](../11/10.md) for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n### Disrupting activity in the temple area\n\nIn [11:15–17](../11/15.md), Jesus disrupts normal activity in the temple by driving out some people and by overturning the chairs and tables of others. Jesus performed this symbolic action to express a specific message. However, Christians debate exactly what the symbolic action means. Jesus could have been protesting against people who were buying and selling dishonestly. He could have been protesting against all buying and selling in the temple area. He could have been indicating that the temple would be destroyed. Your translation should state what Jesus did while allowing for all of these possible interpretations.\n\n### The baptism of John\n\nIn [11:29–33](../11/29.md), Jesus and the chief priests, scribes, and elders discuss “the baptism of John.” Here they are referring to how John baptized people for repentance. Jesus asks them whether they think that John’s baptism came from heaven or from people, which means that he performed baptisms by God’s authority or by human authority. The Jewish leaders decide not to answer the question. See the notes on these verses for ways to refer to John’s baptism and to the authority behind it.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMost of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 4, 7, 15, 21, 22, 27, and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])\n\n### Verse 26\n\nMany of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for [11:26](../11/26.md). A few early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words: “But if you do not forgive, neither will your Father in the heavens forgive your trespasses.” Since a similar sentence appears in [Matthew 6:15](../mat/06/15.md), it is likely that people who copied the manuscripts accidentally or intentionally added these words here in Mark. Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
11:1	djir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ὅτε	1	Here, the phrase **And when** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Then”
11:1	ch4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐγγίζουσιν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go near”
11:1	g1fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βηθφαγὴ	1	The word **Bethphage** is the name of a village that was near Jerusalem.
11:1	so0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν	1	Here Matthew implies that **Bethphage** and **Bethany** are near **the Mount of Olives**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “near the Mount of Olives” or “which are at the Mount of Olives”
11:2	bi22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὑπάγετε	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “Come” instead of **Go**. Alternate translation: “Come”
11:2	ahrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν κώμην τὴν κατέναντι ὑμῶν	1	Here, a **village** that is **opposite** someone means that it is directly in front of them. Jesus could be referring to Bethany, Bethphage, or some other village. However, it is most likely that he is referring to the village of Bethphage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the village directly in front of you” or “the village of Bethphage, which is before you”
11:2	si41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ὑμῶν & εὑρήσετε	1	Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples in both of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.
11:2	g1qx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πῶλον δεδεμένον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “a colt that a person has tied up”
11:2	r41g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πῶλον	1	A **colt** is a young donkey that is no longer a baby but is not yet full grown. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of animal, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a donkey that is not yet fully grown” or “a young riding animal”
11:2	mwwv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δεδεμένον	1	Here Jesus implies that someone has used a rope or tether to secure the donkey so that it cannot wander away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “secured with a tether”
11:2	yw78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense, that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “no human” or “no one person”
11:2	zloo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὔπω ἐκάθισεν	1	Jesus is using the term **sat** to refer to riding on an animal by association with the way people sit on an animal they are riding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “has yet mounted” or “has yet used as a mount”
11:3	aw3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? εἴπατε, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And if anyone asks you why you are doing this, say that the Lord has need of it and that immediately he sends it back here.”
11:3	q446		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ποιεῖτε	1	The person would be speaking to the two disciples, so **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.
11:3	xw55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο?	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase **doing this** refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt”
11:3	j1w3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε.	1	Here, the clause **and immediately he sends it back here** could be: (1) part of what Jesus wants the disciples to say. Alternate translation: “The Lord has need of it, and immediately the Lord sends it back here to you” (2) what Jesus predicts the person asking the question **Why are you doing this?** will do. Alternate translation: “The Lord has need of it,’ and immediately that person again sends it here”
11:3	k7fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **need**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requires it”
11:3	yj5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	ἀποστέλλει	1	Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe a future action that will happen very soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense is natural in your language for referring to an event in the near future. Alternate translation: “he will send”
11:3	ehde		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	πάλιν	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **back**. The ULT follows that reading. In this case, it is more likely that the phrase **and immediately he sends it** is part of what Jesus wanted the disciples to say (see previous note on this whole sentence). Other ancient manuscripts do not include the word **back**. In this case, it is more likely that the phrase **and immediately he sends it** is what Jesus predicts that the people who asked the question will do (see previous note on this whole sentence). If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
11:4	y381		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀπῆλθον	1	Here, **they** refers to the two disciples mentioned in [11:1](../11/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “those two disciples went away”
11:4	f6hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πῶλον	1	See how you translated **colt** in [11:2](../11/02.md). Alternate translation: “a donkey that was not yet fully grown” or “a young riding animal”
11:4	g6th		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that a person had tied up”
11:4	vmm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δεδεμένον	1	Here Jesus implies that someone has used a rope or tether to secure the donkey so that it cannot wander away. See how you translated the similar phrase in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “having been secured with a tether”
11:4	owzs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἔξω ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀμφόδου	1	Here Mark means that the **colt** was standing **outside on the street**, but it was secured to a **door**, probably the door into a house or shop. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to someone’s door. It was standing outside on the street” or “near a door and standing in the street outside the door”
11:5	psls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον αὐτοῖς, τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες τὸν πῶλον	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “were asking them what they were doing by untying the colt.”
11:5	wwup		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες	1	Here the people asking the question are asking the two disciples to provide a good reason for why they are **untying the colt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “For what reason are you untying” or “Do you have permission to untie”
11:5	krqb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν πῶλον	1	See how you translated **colt** in [11:2](../11/02.md). Alternate translation: “this donkey that is not yet fully grown” or “the young riding animal”
11:6	t9dx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀφῆκαν αὐτούς	1	Here Mark implies that the people **let them** take the young donkey away with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they let them untie the young donkey and lead it away” or “they let them go away with the young donkey”
11:7	evws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν πῶλον	1	See how you translated **colt** in [11:2](../11/02.md). Alternate translation: “the donkey that was not yet fully grown” or “the young riding animal”
11:7	sbqy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν	1	The disciples did this to show that the person riding the colt was special and important. In this culture, animals that important people rode were draped with rich fabrics. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “drape the colt with their cloaks as a sign of honor” or “throw their cloaks upon it to give him glory”
11:7	k9g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὰ ἱμάτια	1	The word **cloaks** refers to outer garments. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “jackets” or “outer garments”
11:8	jk2o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ & ἄλλοι	1	Mark is using the adjectives **many** and **others** as nouns to mean many people and other people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “many men and women … different men and women”
11:8	t8hy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν	1	The people did these things to give Jesus honor and glory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the meaning of these actions. Alternate translation: “spread their cloaks on the road to give him honor, and others, branches, having cut them from the field, to give him glory”
11:8	fwl0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἱμάτια	1	See how you translated the word **cloaks** in [11:7](../11/07.md). Alternate translation: “jackets” or “outer garments”
11:8	r2im		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄλλοι & στιβάδας	1	Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “others spread branches”
11:9	npry		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προάγοντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming before”
11:9	d8se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ὡσαννά	1	The word **Hosanna** is a Hebrew word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Hosanna had an original meaning of “save now,” but by the time of this event it had become a way of praising God. In your translation you can spell **Hosanna** the way it sounds in your language, or you could translate it according to how the word was used. In this context, the people could be praising: (1) God. Alternate translation: “Glory to God” or “May God be honored” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Glory to this man” or “May this man be honored”
11:9	qnjy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου!	1	Here the crowds are quoting from [Psalm 118:26](../psa/118/26.md). Since they do not introduce the words as a quotation from an important text, you also should not introduce them as anything more than what the crowds said. However, if it would be helpful for your readers, you could include this information in a footnote.
11:9	suib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	The phrase **Blessed is the one** could be: (1) a request for God to bless Jesus. Alternate translation: “Let the one coming in the name of the Lord be blessed” (2) stating that God had already blessed Jesus. Alternate translation: “The one coming in the name of the Lord is blessed”
11:9	ye41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὐλογημένος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “Let God bless”
11:9	e2p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου	1	Here, the word **name** refers primarily to the person who has that name, and it focuses especially on that person’s authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Lord”
11:10	a6b4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	The phrase **Blessed is the coming kingdom** could be: (1) a request for God to bless the kingdom. Alternate translation: “Let the coming kingdom of our father David be blessed” (2) stating that God had already blessed the kingdom. Alternate translation: “The coming kingdom of our father David is blessed”
11:10	kkfo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὐλογημένη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “Let God bless”
11:10	ioov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	Here, the people are using the possessive form to describe a **kingdom** that is like the one that **David** ruled. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the coming kingdom that is like our father David’s kingdom” or “the coming kingdom that once belonged to our father David”
11:10	v5n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	Here, the word **coming** indicates that these people have been waiting for and expecting this **kingdom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of our father David that we have been waiting for” or “the long-expected kingdom of our father David”
11:10	yuap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ	1	Here the people refer to **David** as if he were their **father**. They mean that **David** was an important ancestor of many Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our important ancestor, David” or “of David, from whom many of us are descended”
11:10	b1si		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ὡσαννὰ	1	See how you translated the word **Hosanna** in [11:9](../11/09.md). Here, the people could be using the word to praise: (1) God, who sent Jesus. Alternate translation: “Hosanna to God” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Hosanna to this one”
11:10	vqm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ὑψίστοις	1	The people are using the adjective **highest** as a noun to mean the highest heavens, where God dwells. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the highest heavens”
11:11	h2du		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱερόν	1	Here Mark means that Jesus entered into the **temple** area. He does not mean that Jesus went into the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “temple courtyard”
11:11	zu91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας	1	Here, the phrase **the hour already being late** indicates that it was evening, and the sun was about to set. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “since it was late in the day” or “the sun being about to set”
11:11	t5nv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out”
11:11	rvd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”
11:12	tecd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,”
11:12	zr8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθόντων	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
11:13	y447		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came”
11:13	egn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ ἄρα τι εὑρήσει ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus wanted to **find** some figs on the tree that he could eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “hoping to find some figs on it” or “wanting to find some fruit on it to eat”
11:13	wf0c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	2	Here, the word **And** introduces what Jesus actually found on the tree in contrast to what Jesus wanted to find on the tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But”
11:13	nnwi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν, οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα; ὁ γὰρ καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first two clauses describe. Alternate translation: “because it was not the season of figs, having come to it, he found nothing except leaves”
11:13	yg5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone to it”
11:13	j6cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα	1	If it would in appear your language that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves”
11:13	g76z			ὁ & καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων	1	Alternate translation: “the time of year to pick figs had not yet arrived”
11:14	zc7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποκριθεὶς	1	Here, the word **answering** indicates that Jesus was responding to what he saw. He was not answering a question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response” or “when he saw that”
11:14	ly4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe	μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	Jesus is speaking to the fig tree that he knows cannot hear him. He is doing this to communicate to the people listening to him what he is going to do the tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words as if he were speaking about the fig tree. Alternate translation: “May no one any longer eat fruit from this tree to eternity” or “As for this tree, may no one any longer eat fruit from it to eternity”
11:14	wguh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι	1	Here Jesus implies that the fig tree will stop producing **fruit**, and that is why no one will **eat fruit** from the tree ever again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “May you no longer produce fruit that people will eat to eternity”
11:14	ij5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι & μηδεὶς & φάγοι	1	The words translated **No one** and **any longer** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “May people no longer eat” or “No longer may there be anyone who will eat”
11:14	gkor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	καρπὸν	1	In this verse, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to any fruits that the tree might produce as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fruits”
11:14	h0ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σοῦ	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the fig tree, the word **you** here is singular.
11:14	b362		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	Here, the phrase to eternity means that something lasts forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “forever” or “again”
11:15	hj7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
11:15	c2wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱερὸν	1	Here Mark means that Jesus entered into the **temple** area. He does not mean that Jesus went into the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in [11:11](../11/11.md). Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”
11:15	hoym			ἐκβάλλειν	1	Alternate translation: “to throw out” or “to force out” or “to drive out”
11:15	s4m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Mark implies that merchants were **selling** animals and other items so that travelers could buy them and offer the proper sacrifices at the temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the ones selling and buying things in the temple for the sacrifices”
11:15	ve56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς τραπέζας τῶν κολλυβιστῶν	1	Here Mark is referring to people who exchanged the commonly used Greek and Roman money for special money that could be used at the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the tables of the people who exchanged money” or “the tables of the people who exchanged the temple currency”
11:15	xnpk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς καθέδρας τῶν πωλούντων τὰς περιστερὰς	1	Here Mark refers to people who sold **doves**, which the poorest people would offer as sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the seats of the ones selling the doves to be sacrificed”
11:16	zqa2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σκεῦος	1	Here, the word translated **container** refers to any object that people use for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “any object” or “anything”
11:16	ohxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	Here Mark is referring to the **temple** area. He does not mean that people were passing through the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in [11:11](../11/11.md). Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”
11:17	ce1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the people who were buying, selling, and exchanging things in the temple area. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who were buying and selling, and he was saying”
11:17	dxwe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Has it not been written that God’s house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations? But you have made it, as it has been written, into a den of robbers.”
11:17	xrz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people in the temple. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should have paid closer attention to what has been written: ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations.’” or “It has certainly been written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’!”
11:17	le3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	οὐ γέγραπται	1	In Jesus’ culture, **Has it not been written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the book of Isaiah (see [Isaiah 56:7](../isa/56/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Can you not read in the Scriptures” or “Does it not say in the book of Isaiah”
11:17	t9x9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through the prophet Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Has the prophet Isaiah not said” or “Has God not had a prophet write”
11:17	npdf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἶκός μου & κληθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “They will call my house”
11:17	qeix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἶκός μου	1	God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as **My house** because his presence is there. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My temple”
11:17	t1ho		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οἶκος προσευχῆς & πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	Here God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, is using the possessive form to describe **a house** that is a place where people perform **prayer**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a house where all the nations offer prayer” or “a place where there is prayer from all the nations”
11:17	qvxz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὑμεῖς & ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Jeremiah 7:11](../jer/07/11.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format or introduce these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “you have made it a ‘den of robbers,’ in the words of the Scriptures” or “you have made it, as the Scriptures say, ‘a den of robbers’”
11:17	dpt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1	Here God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers to the temple as a **den** where **robbers** hide and plot their crimes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “a place where robbers live” or “like a cave where robbers hide”
11:18	badg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐζήτουν πῶς αὐτὸν ἀπολέσωσιν; ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ αὐτόν, πᾶς γὰρ ὁ ὄχλος ἐξεπλήσσετο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the second clause describes, which in turn gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because all the crowd were being amazed at this teaching, they were fearing him, and so they were seeking how they might destroy him”
11:18	k6dv			ἐζήτουν πῶς	1	Alternate translation: “they were looking for a way by which”
11:18	wwiv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς & ὁ ὄχλος ἐξεπλήσσετο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “his teaching was astonishing all the crowd”
11:18	aw8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶς & ὁ ὄχλος	1	Mark says **all** here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most people in the crowd” or “most of the crowd”
11:19	h4hg			ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο	1	Alternate translation: “in the evening”
11:19	i5yk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξεπορεύοντο	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “they were coming out”
11:19	ldtl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔξω τῆς πόλεως	1	Here Mark implies that they went **outside the city** of Jerusalem to spend the night in the village of Bethany, as they did the previous night (see [11:11](../11/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “outside Jerusalem to Bethany” or “outside the city of Jerusalem, and they slept in the village of Bethany”
11:20	pi9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παραπορευόμενοι	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus and his disciples were **passing by** the same route that they had traveled the previous morning, which means that they went past the same **fig tree** that they had gone past the previous morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “passing by on the same path” or “going by the same route”
11:20	s8ki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν	1	The phrase **the fig tree having withered from the roots** means that the **fig tree** had completely shriveled up and dried out, including its **roots**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the entire fig tree having withered and having died” or “that the fig tree, including its roots, had dried up and died”
11:21	jt3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναμνησθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what **reminded** Peter, it is clear from the context that it was seeing the fig tree. Alternate translation: “seeing the fig tree reminded Peter, and he” or “when he saw the fig tree, it reminded Peter, who”
11:21	rffd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἴδε	1	Here, the word **behold** is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks a person to look or to pay attention. Alternate translation: “see” or “look at that”
11:21	orq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	κατηράσω	1	Because Peter is speaking to Jesus, the word **you** here is singular.
11:21	na1k			ἐξήρανται	1	Alternate translation: “has shriveled up” or “has dried up”
11:22	x8k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχετε πίστιν Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Believe”
11:23	mred		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ ὅτι ὃ λαλεῖ γίνεται, ἔσται αὐτῷ	1	Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to show that a person who has faith can do amazing things, like casting a **mountain** into the **sea**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “Truly I say this to you: imagine that someone says to this mountain, ‘Be taken up and be thrown into the sea.’ If that person does not doubt in his heart, but believes that what he says is happening, it will be for him.”
11:23	a01g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ μὴ διακριθῇ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whoever tells this mountain to be taken up and to be thrown into the sea, and does not doubt”
11:23	c3cj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ὄρει τούτῳ	1	Here, the phrase **this mountain** could refer to: (1) the Mount of Olives, which Jesus and his disciples were near. Alternate translation: “to the Mount of Olives” or “to the mountain we are near” (2) any mountain. Alternate translation: “to a mountain”
11:23	k3z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation: “May God take you up and throw you into the sea”
11:23	jh1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι	1	Since someone is talking to a mountain, the commands here are singular.
11:23	dwsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ ὅτι ὃ λαλεῖ γίνεται	1	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **but** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two phrases and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “believes that what he says is happening without doubting in his heart” or “truly believes in his heart that what he says is happening”
11:23	y76p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	In Jesus’ culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “when he thinks about it”
11:23	doeg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ & λαλεῖ & αὐτῷ	1	Although the terms **his**, **he**, and **him** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her … he or she says … for that person”
11:23	rhhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	γίνεται	1	Here Jesus uses the present tense to refer to something that would happen in the near future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense would be natural to refer to an event that will soon happen. Alternate translation: “will happen”
11:23	fzp5			ἔσται αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “God will make it happen”
11:24	pn9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	Here, the phrase **Because of this** introduces a result or inference based on what Jesus has just said about faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a result or inference. Alternate translation: “So then” or “For that reason”
11:24	c61c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	πάντα ὅσα προσεύχεσθε	1	The expression **everything, as much as you pray** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “everything that you pray”
11:24	hunm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	προσεύχεσθε καὶ αἰτεῖσθε	1	The two words **pray** and **request** express a single idea. The word **pray** tells how the disciples are making their requests. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a different way. Alternate translation: “you request in prayer” or “you request while praying”
11:24	abke		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	ἐλάβετε	1	Here Jesus uses the past tense to refer to something in the future. He does this to indicate that the disciples should **believe** so strongly that they will receive what they ask for that it is as if they had already **received** it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the present or future tense and indicate the certainty in other way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly receive it” or “you are certain to receive it”
11:24	tu5z			ἔσται ὑμῖν	1	Alternate translation: “God will make it happen”
11:25	m7xi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι	1	In Jesus’ culture, people often would **stand** when **praying** to God. Jesus assumes that his readers would be familiar with this practice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the posture that people assume in your culture when praying, or you could simply refer to praying. Alternate translation: “when you kneel in prayer” or “when you pray”
11:25	f6ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τι ἔχετε κατά τινος	1	Here, the phrase **you have something against anyone** indicates that **you** have been offended or injured by **anyone**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are upset with anyone” or “you have been offended by anyone”
11:25	jjs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Jesus says to **forgive** with the goal that **your Father who {is} in the heavens may also forgive you your trespasses.** Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
11:25	m2aw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ Πατὴρ ὑμῶν	1	Jesus speaks of his disciples as if God were their physical father. He means that they have a father-son relationship with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your spiritual Father” or “God, who is like a Father to you,”
11:25	ttxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	Here, the phrase **in the heavens** identifies the location in which God the Father is specially present and from which he rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “who is in the heavens”
11:25	omze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespasses**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when you trespass”
11:26	wlvn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε οὐδὲ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ἀφήσει τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν	1	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The notes below discuss translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it.
11:26	q3gu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἀφίετε	1	Here Jesus implies that they might **not forgive** other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “do not forgive fellow humans” or “do not forgive people who have sinned against you”
11:26	alh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν	1	See how you translated the phrase **your Father** in the previous verse ([11:25](../11/25.md)). Alternate translation: “your spiritual Father” or “God, who is like a Father to you,”
11:26	cdvq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	See how you translated the phrase **in the heavens** in the previous verse ([11:25](../11/25.md)). Alternate translation: “who is in the heavens”
11:26	o02f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespasses**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you when you trespass”
11:27	m0bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	-1	In contexts such as these, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go … go”
11:27	alh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Here Mark means that Jesus was walking in the **temple** area. He does not mean that Jesus was in the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in [11:11](../11/11.md). Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard”
11:28	se9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς	1	The question **By what authority do you do these things** and the question **who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things** could: (1) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, or who is the one who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things” (2) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If you choose this option, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who was it who gave you the authority to do these things?”
11:28	ooxp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “How are you empowered to do these things, and who empowered you in this way”
11:28	h8gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ποιεῖς & σοι & ποιῇς	1	Because the Jewish leaders are speaking to Jesus, the word **you** throughout this verse is singular.
11:28	uggx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα ποιεῖς & ταῦτα ποιῇς	1	In both places, the phrase **these things** refers to what Jesus has done since he arrived in Jerusalem, including driving people out of the temple, healing people, and teaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “do you teach, heal, and drive people out of the temple … you teach, heal, and drive people out of the temple”
11:28	fs6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Here, the word **or** introduces another similar question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related question, or you could leave **or** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and” or “or again,”
11:29	w96w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the Jewish leaders asked him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
11:29	aak2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἕνα λόγον	1	Jesus is using the term **word** to refer to what he will ask. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one thing”
11:29	jyq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἀποκρίθητέ μοι, καὶ ἐρῶ ὑμῖν	1	Here Jesus implies that he will only **tell** them **by what authority** he acts if they **answer** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in conditional form or in some other way that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “and if you answer me, then I will tell you” or “and as long as you answer me, I will tell you”
11:29	erqp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you expressed the idea in [11:28](../11/28.md). Alternate translation: “how I am empowered to do these things”
11:29	ywus		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα ποιῶ	1	Here, the phrase **these things** refers to what Jesus has done since he arrived in Jerusalem, including driving people out of the temple, healing people, and teaching. See how you translated the similar phrase in [11:28](../11/28.md). Alternate translation: “I teach, heal, and drive people out of the temple”
11:30	jj91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου & ἦν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **baptism**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “When John baptized people, was it”
11:30	vpgv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a kind of **baptism** that was performed by **John**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed”
11:30	sh7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	Here, **heaven** represents God because it is where he dwells. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from God”
11:30	i5is		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans”
11:30	fr1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ & ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	Here Jesus is asking about where John’s authority came from. He indicates that it could be from God in **heaven** or from **men** on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “authorized by God from heaven or by men on earth”
11:31	ycxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς	1	Here, the phrase **with each other** could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders **were reasoning** with one another. Alternate translation: “with one another” (2) that the Jewish leaders were thinking this without saying it. Alternate translation: “within themselves”
11:31	pm87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
11:31	e7j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that it was from heaven, then he will ask us for what reason we did not believe him.”
11:31	s9vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1	Here the Jewish leaders use an imaginary situation to help them decide how to answer the question. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “Imagine that we say, ‘From heaven.’ In that case, he will say to us, ‘For what reason then did you not believe him?’”
11:31	xrmk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “John’s baptism was from heaven” or “It was from heaven”
11:31	nu1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From God”
11:31	cx93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ?	1	The Jewish leaders expect that Jesus would use the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you should have believed him.” or “You certainly should have believed him, then!”
11:32	tdgh			ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	Here the Jewish leaders could be: (1) asking a rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “But can we really say, ‘From men’?” (2) using a conditional form that implies the result. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men.’”
11:32	tczm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	The Jewish leaders are using the question form to indicate that they think it is a bad idea to give the answer **From men**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “But it is not possible for us to say, ‘From men.’” or “But we cannot say, ‘From men’!”
11:32	mnoz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “should we say that it was from men”
11:32	aus1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “John’s baptism was from men” or “It was from men”
11:32	v2gs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From humans”
11:32	z998		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν	1	Mark provides this background information to help readers understand why the Jewish leaders said what they did. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for they all held that John really had been a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men, because all the crowd held that John really was a prophet, and they were afraid of the crowd”
11:32	pong		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “The crowd held that John really was a prophet, so they were afraid of them all”
11:32	dqlt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ὄχλον	1	Here Mark implies that the Jewish leaders feared what the crowd would do if they answered in this way. The crowd might have rioted or attacked them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of what the crowd would do” or “that the crowd might riot”
11:32	x4bo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἅπαντες & εἶχον	1	Here, the word **all** refers to the people in the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for everyone in the crowd held” or “for all those who were in the crowd held”
11:32	k4hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἅπαντες & εἶχον	1	Mark says **all** here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most of them held”
11:33	rmbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces what the chief priests and scribes did as a result of what they said to each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result of an action. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,”
11:33	us4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ οἴδαμεν	1	The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John was from”
11:33	av5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν	1	With the words **Nor do I tell you**, Jesus is indicating that this is the result of what the Jewish leaders told him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “Then I will not tell you” or “Well then, neither do I tell you”
11:33	arpm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you expressed the idea in [11:28](../11/28.md). Alternate translation: “how I am empowered to do these things”
11:33	vox9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα ποιῶ	1	Here, the phrase **these things** refers to what Jesus has done since he arrived in Jerusalem, including driving people out of the temple, healing people, and teaching. See how you translated the similar phrase in [11:28](../11/28.md). Alternate translation: “I teach, heal, and drive people out of the temple”
12:intro	ne55				0	# Mark 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n6. Jesus in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)\n      * The parable of the vineyard (12:1–12)\n      * Jesus interacts with the religious leaders (12:13–37)\n        * Jesus debates with the Pharisees and Herodians about taxes (12:13–17)\n        * Jesus debates with the Sadducees about the resurrection (12:18–27)\n        * Jesus speaks with a scribe about the greatest commandment (12:28–34)\n        * Jesus teaches about the Christ (12:35–37)\n      * Jesus warns against the scribe (12:38–40)\n      * Jesus teaches about a widow who gave her little money to God (12:41–44)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [12:10–11](../12/10.md), which is a quotation from [Psalm 118:22–23](../psa/118/22.md), and the poetry in [12:36](../12/36.md), which is a quotation from [Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Renting out a vineyard\n\nIn [12:1–12](../12/01.md), Jesus tells a story about a man who built a vineyard and then rented it out to farmers. Jesus is referring to a common arrangement in which a wealthy person who owned property would have poorer people use that property for farming or tending grapes. These poorer people would do the work and then sell the produce, and they would give the person who owned the property a portion of what they made. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of arrangement, make sure that your translation is clear about what is happening in the story.\n\n### The poll tax\n\nThe word translated “poll tax” refers to a specific amount of money that each adult person had to pay to the government. In Jesus’ time period, the Roman government required Jewish adults to pay a high tax. The Pharisees ask whether this tax that the Roman government required contradicted the law that God gave Moses. Make sure that your readers understand that the Pharisees are asking about a tax that the Roman government required each adult Jewish person to pay.\n\n### A man marrying his brother’s widow\n\nIn [12:19–23](../12/19.md), the Sadducees question Jesus in regard to a hypothetical situation in which a woman marries seven brothers in succession. This situation is based on a command in the Jewish law that can be found in [Deuteronomy 25:5–6](../deu/25/05.md). The law requires a woman who is widowed without children to marry a brother of her late husband. The first child that they have together will be considered the child of the dead man. In this way, that man’s family line would continue. The Sadducees present an extreme application of this law, with seven brothers successively marrying the same woman and dying without having children. They use this example to try to make the idea of resurrection look strange or silly. Make sure that your readers understand the example that the Sadducees present.\n\n### The great commandment\n\nJewish teachers sometimes debated which specific commandment was the greatest or most important one. This was important because, if commandments seemed to contradict each other in a specific situation, the greater one would be the correct one to obey. When the scribe asks Jesus about “the first commandment” in [12:28](../12/28.md), he wants Jesus to offer an opinion about this debate. Make sure that your readers understand that this is what the scribe is asking about.\n\n### King David and the Christ\n\nIn [12:35–37](../12/35.md), Jesus asks the people he is teaching about whether the Christ can be a descendant of David if David himself calls the Messiah “Lord” in [Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md). Since people in David’s culture called older and more important people “lord,” it does not make sense for David to call his own descendant “Lord.” When Jesus asks and teaches about this, he implies that the Christ is indeed King David’s descendant, but he is also more than that. Make sure that this teaching about calling the Christ “Lord” is clear to your readers.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### The parable of the vineyard\n\nIn [12:1–12](../12/01.md), Jesus tells a story about a man who planted a vineyard and rented it out to farmers. When the man sends servants to collect the rent, the farmers refuse and injure or kill the servants. When the man sends his own son, the farmers kill him as well. So, man came and destroyed the farmers and rented the vineyard to other people. When he tells this story, Jesus implies that the Jewish religious leaders are like those farmers who will be destroyed. Jesus also implies that the vineyard represents the people of Israel, the servants represent God’s messengers, the son represents Jesus himself, and the man who owned the vineyard represents God. While you should not explain the meaning more than Jesus does, make sure that your translation fits with what Jesus is illustrating. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])\n\n### The stone\n\nIn [12:10–11](../12/10.md), Jesus quotes from [Psalm 118:22–23](../psa/118/22.md), which refers to a specific “stone.” In the Psalm, this stone most likely represents the king of Israel, or it perhaps represents the Israelite people in general. When Jesus quotes this passage, he is implicitly identifying himself with the stone. Since the stone language comes from a quotation from the Psalms, you should preserve it in some form in your translation. Also, since Jesus does not explicitly claim to be the stone, you should keep that implicit in your translation. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in questions that people ask of Jesus or in speeches that Jesus directs to individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 13, 14, 16, 18, and 41. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
12:1	w2hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν	1	To teach the Jewish leaders, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story: A man planted a vineyard”
12:1	qa93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν	1	Jesus uses the phrase **A man planted a vineyard** to introduce the main character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing the main character in a story. Alternate translation: “There once was a man who planted a vineyard”
12:1	nyij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	φραγμὸν	1	A **hedge** is a thick wall made from bushy plants that were planted close together. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of wall, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a wall made of bushes” or “wall of plants”
12:1	l2i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς	1	As the rest of the story shows, the man rented the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use his vineyard in exchange for a share of the crop”
12:1	fd71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γεωργοῖς	1	While **farmers** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”
12:2	s83v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ καιρῷ	1	Here Jesus refers to **the time** of year when the grape vines produced grapes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when it was almost harvest time,” or “when the grapes were almost ripe,”
12:2	su2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γεωργοὺς & γεωργῶν	1	See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “vine dressers … vine dressers” or “grape farmers … grape farmers”
12:2	q54w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρὰ τῶν γεωργῶν λάβῃ ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος	1	Here the man wants to receive the share of the **fruits** that the farmers agreed to pay him when he rented the vineyard to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he might receive from the farmers his portion of the fruits of the vineyard” or “he might receive from the farmers the fruits of the vineyard that they agreed to pay him”
12:2	oxoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν καρπῶν τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος	1	Here, the word **fruits** could refer: (1) directly to the grapes that the vineyard produced. Alternate translation: “the grapes from the vineyard” (2) figuratively to what the farmers made when they sold the grapes. Alternate translation: “the money from what the vineyard produced”
12:3	vcp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces what the farmers actually did in contrast to what the man who owned the vineyard wanted them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “But”
12:3	ifje		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαβόντες αὐτὸν	1	Here Jesus implies that the farmers did this once the servant arrived at the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “after the servant arrived, having seized him”
12:3	c321		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κενόν	1	Jesus speaks of this servant as if he were a container that was **empty**. He means that the farmers did not give him any of the fruit from the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “empty-handed” or “without any grapes”
12:4	rwwo			ἐκεφαλίωσαν	1	Alternate translation: “they hit in the head” or “they repeatedly struck on the head”
12:4	jhi3			ἠτίμασαν	1	Alternate translation: “humiliated” or “dishonored”
12:5	f0lz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλον & πολλοὺς ἄλλους	1	Jesus is using the adjectives **another** and **others** as nouns to mean another servant and other servants. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “another one of his servants … many more of his servants”
12:5	q1ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ πολλοὺς ἄλλους	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Jesus could be implying that **many others**: (1) were sent by the man. Alternate translation: “and he sent many others” (2) were harmed by the farmers. Alternate translation: “and they harmed many others”
12:5	azdw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὓς μὲν δέροντες, οὓς δὲ ἀποκτέννοντες	1	Here Jesus implies that the farmers were **beating** some servants and were **killing** other servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “but the farmers beat some and killed others”
12:6	eoae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔτι ἕνα εἶχεν	1	Here Jesus implies that the man has **one more** person whom he could send to the farmers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Having one more person he could send” or “Having one more messenger”
12:6	o09r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	υἱὸν ἀγαπητόν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a son whom he loved”
12:6	u0m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν ἔσχατον πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγων, ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these two clauses. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘They will respect my son,’ he sent his son to them last”
12:6	z5hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that they would respect his son”
12:6	ejmv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and he thought”
12:6	s7nv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου	1	Here, the man implies that respecting his son would also mean giving him the portion of the fruits that he and the farmers had agreed upon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “They will respect my son and give him my portion of the fruits”
12:7	m63e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνοι δὲ οἱ γεωργοὶ πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν	1	Here Jesus implies that **those farmers** said this when they saw that the man’s son had arrived at the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “But when the son arrived, those farmers said to each other” or “But those farmers, when they saw the man’s son, said to each other”
12:7	kefz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γεωργοὶ	1	See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”
12:7	f8xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ κληρονόμος; δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, καὶ ἡμῶν ἔσται ἡ κληρονομία	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said to each other that this man was the heir and that they should come and kill him so that the inheritance would be theirs”
12:7	sidm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δεῦτε	1	Here, the word **Come** is an exhortation to do something together with the speaker. The word does not necessarily mean that the people must travel somewhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that exhorts people to work together. Alternate translation: “Working together” or “Acting with one another”
12:7	h5vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	καὶ	1	Here, the word **and** introduces the purpose for which the farmers plan to **kill** the son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “and that way”
12:7	s5dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ κληρονομία	1	Here the farmers are referring primarily to the vineyard, which would be the son’s **inheritance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the inheritance, this vineyard,”
12:7	ay11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κληρονομία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **inheritance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what he would inherit”
12:8	gx6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces what the farmers did as a result of what they said to each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result of an action. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,”
12:8	zuwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸν	1	Here Jesus implies that they **threw** his dead body **out of the vineyard**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his dead body”
12:9	r4md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος?	1	Jesus is using the question form to introduce what **the lord of the vineyard** will do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do:” or “Let me tell you what the lord of the vineyard will do!”
12:9	rhrm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, the word **then** introduces a rhetorical question that Jesus asks based on the story that he has told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of question. Alternate translation: “In light of that story, what” or “Given all that, what”
12:9	kdyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a **lord** who owns **the vineyard**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the lord who owned the vineyard” or “the man whose vineyard it is”
12:9	qh8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλεύσεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “He will go”
12:9	zscw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλεύσεται	1	Here, the phrase **He will come** indicates that **the lord of the vineyard** will return to the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “He will return” or “He will visit them”
12:9	tlji			γεωργούς	1	See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”
12:9	g4ce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις	1	Here Jesus refers to the same kind of arrangement that he referred to in [12:1](../12/01.md). Express the idea as you did there. Alternate translation: “will allow other farmers to use it”
12:9	mc5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄλλοις	1	The word **others** refers to other vine dressers who will care for the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to other farmers who will care for it”
12:10	xj9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε:	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke and teach the Jewish leaders. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you have read this scripture:” or “Surely you have read this scripture!”
12:10	v6ta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε	1	Here Jesus introduces a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book of Psalms (see [Psalm 118:22–23](../psa/118/22.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And have you not read this in the book of Psalms” or “And have you never read what someone wrote in our Scriptures”
12:10	qqpu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οὐδὲ & ἀνέγνωτε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Jewish leaders, the word **you** here is singular.
12:10	mzr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	Here the author of the quotation speaks of a person whom others reject as if he were a **stone** that **builders rejected**. He speaks of this person gaining power and respect as if he became **the head of the corner**. Jesus is applying this quotation to himself, identifying himself with the **stone**. However, if possible, preserve the metaphor in your translation, or if that is not possible, express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “A person who is like a stone that the builders rejected, that person has become like the head of the corner”
12:10	kv7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες	1	Here the author of the quotation is referring to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. In this case, the people do not want to use the **stone** for building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “A stone that the builders thought was not good enough to use for building”
12:10	l5ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	The phrase **the head of the corner** refers to a specific stone that is especially key or important for a structure. It could be a stone at the corner of a wall, a stone at the top of an arch, or another important stone. You could use a term for one of these kinds of stones, or you could refer generally to an important or essential stone. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the capstone” or “the most important stone”
12:11	r8z8			παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη	1	Alternate translation: “The Lord has caused this”
12:11	k5w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν	1	Here, **eyes** represent a person’s judgement or evaluation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in our opinion” or “from our perspective”
12:12	v9wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον; ἔγνωσαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν & καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the reason why the Jewish leaders **were seeking to seize** Jesus was that **they knew that he spoke the parable against them**. Also, the reason why they **left** Jesus without arresting him was because **they feared the crowd**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the reasons before their results. Alternate translation: “And they knew that he spoke the parable against them, so they were seeking to seize him. However, they feared the crowd, so having left him, they went away”
12:12	b1vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐζήτουν	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were seeking”
12:12	v5wv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	2	Here, Mark uses the word **and** to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders wanted to do and the reason why they were not able to do so. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “yet” or “but”
12:12	lx62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ὄχλον	1	Here Mark implies that the chief priests and the Pharisees feared what the **crowd** would do if they seized Jesus. They might have rioted or attacked them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what the crowd would do” or “that the crowd might riot”
12:12	ql29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον	1	Here Mark implies that the Jewish leaders did not **seize** Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “And they did not seize him, but instead, having left him, they went away”
12:12	gsh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀπῆλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “they came away”
12:13	eq4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
12:13	z2sf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀποστέλλουσιν	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders send”
12:13	pj3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν	1	The **Herodians** were a group of people who supported the ruler Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a short phrase to describe them. Alternate translation: “people who wanted King Herod to continue to rule”
12:13	kuy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν	1	Mark is speaking as if **the Pharisees and the Herodians** intended to catch Jesus in a trap. He means that they wanted to get Jesus to say something that would allow them to accuse him of doing wrong. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “catch him” or “cause him to make an error”
12:13	s1hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	Here, **word** represents something said in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in speech”
12:13	b141		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λόγῳ	1	Here, the phrase **with a word** could refer to things spoken by: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “in his words” (2) the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “with their words”
12:14	dh3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
12:14	awv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν & δῶμεν & δῶμεν	1	The spies are speaking only of themselves, so **we** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction.
12:14	xhl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός; οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “since you do not look at the face of men, it is not a concern to you about anyone”
12:14	cp3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός	1	The Herodians and the Pharisees use this clause to say that Jesus does not care what others think and say about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not concern yourself with the opinions of others” or “you are not influenced by what others think of you”
12:14	r2f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός	1	The words translated **not** and **anyone** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “it is a concern to you about no one”
12:14	no9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ μέλει σοι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of concern, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “nothing concerns you”
12:14	xptc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, to **look at the face of men** refers to making decisions about how to treat people based on how they appear. People who **look at the face of men** treat wealthy and important people differently than they treat poor and unimportant people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for you do not judge men by appearances” or “for you do not treat people based on what they look like”
12:14	brm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, the Herodians and the Pharisees are using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans”
12:14	weaf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the Herodians and the Pharisees are using the possessive form to describe a **way** that **God** desires or approves of. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way that pleases God”
12:14	yfnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the Pharisees and Herodians use the word **way** to refer to behavior in life. More specifically, they mean that this behavior pleases God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “behavior that pleases God”
12:14	ap2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπ’ ἀληθείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “based on what is true”
12:14	k0tw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔξεστιν	1	Here, the word **lawful** could be referring to: (1) whether something is permitted by the Jewish law that God gave to Moses. Alternate translation: “Does the law that God gave to Moses permit us” (2) whether something is generally right or wrong. Alternate translation: “Is it right” or “Is it appropriate”
12:14	gtsk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Καίσαρι	1	Here, **Caesar** represents the Roman leaders and government in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the Roman leaders” or “to the Roman empire”
12:14	puhe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὔ	1	The Herodians and the Pharisees are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “is it not lawful to do so”
12:14	y8lv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δῶμεν ἢ μὴ δῶμεν	1	Here the Pharisees and the Herodians are asking about whether they should **give** or **not give** poll taxes **to Caesar**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Should we give the poll tax, or should we not give it”
12:15	g48w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that they were acting hypocritically” or “that they were being hypocritical”
12:15	c7nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με πειράζετε?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Herodians and the Pharisees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you are testing me.” or “Stop testing me!”
12:15	kgyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	πειράζετε? φέρετέ	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees and the Herodians, the word **you** and the command **Bring** are plural.
12:15	wl34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	δηνάριον	1	A **denarius** was a silver coin equivalent to about one day’s wage for a hired worker. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “a silver coin” or “a coin worth one day’s wage”
12:16	ev6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	The pronoun **they** refers to the people who were there, more specifically the Herodians and the disciples of the Pharisees. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the disciples of the Pharisees and the Herodians” or “the people there”
12:16	ljeo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ εἰκὼν αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφή	1	In Jesus’ culture, when governments made coins, they would usually put the face of the king or leader on one side, and they would usually have writing on the coin that honored that king or leader. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this practice more explicit. Alternate translation: “face and words of honor did the Roman government stamp on this coin”
12:16	l2tc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἡ ἐπιγραφή	1	Here, the word **inscription** refers to a few words carved or pressed into a hard surface. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of writing, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “writing” or “written message”
12:16	gi96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Καίσαρος	1	The Herodians and the Pharisees are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “The image and inscription are Caesar’s”
12:16	z45k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Καίσαρος	1	Here the fact that the image and inscription on the coin are **Caesar’s** implies that they were created by the empire that Caesar ruled, the Roman empire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “They are of Caesar, the man who rules the Roman empire”
12:17	fl4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι	1	Here, **Caesar** represents the Roman leaders and government in general. See how you translated this word in [12:14](../12/14.md), but make sure that the connection to the answer “Caesar’s” in [12:16](../12/16.md) is clear. Alternate translation: “The things of the Roman leaders, give back to the Roman leaders” or “The things of the Roman empire, give back to the Roman empire”
12:17	fcho		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀπόδοτε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees and the Herodians, the command **give back** is plural.
12:17	la16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things that belong to God”
12:18	y8yo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι; καὶ ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες	1	Mark is here introducing the **Sadducees** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And some people approached him. They were Sadducees, who are a group who say that there is no resurrection. They were questioning him, saying”
12:18	edcn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	Here Mark provides background information about the **Sadducees** that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the Sadducees teach that there is no resurrection. Some of them come to him”
12:18	yx13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
12:18	ss09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	Σαδδουκαῖοι & οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	This phrase is identifying the **Sadducees** as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes that more explicit. Alternate translation: “Sadducees, men who believe that no one will rise from the dead”
12:18	rdl7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people do not resurrect”
12:18	i14a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go”
12:18	ax25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
12:19	e8x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν	1	Here, the Sadducees introduce a summary of a section of an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book of Deuteronomy (see [Deuteronomy 25:5–6](../deu/25/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that the Sadducees are summarizing an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote to us in the book of Deuteronomy” or “Moses declared to us in the Law”
12:19	hhmi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα καὶ μὴ ἀφῇ τέκνον, ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα, καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “wrote to us, ‘If someone’s brother dies and leaves behind a wife but does not leave a child, his brother should take the wife and raise up seed for his brother’”
12:19	m8fh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν	1	Here, the word **us** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. The Sadducees mean “us Jews,” and they are speaking to Jesus, who is also a Jew.
12:19	csxe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα καὶ μὴ ἀφῇ τέκνον, ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ	1	Here Moses uses an imaginary situation to show what should happen when that kind of situation actually happens. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “to suppose that someone’s brother dies and leaves behind a wife but does not leave a child. In that situation, his brother should take”
12:19	w3ev			τινος ἀδελφὸς	1	Alternate translation: “someone with a brother”
12:19	kgws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα, καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Moses required that, when a man’s brother died without having any children even though he was married, the man had to marry his brother’s widow. The first child that they had would be considered offspring of the man’s deceased brother. That way, the deceased brother’s family line could continue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit in your translation, or you could include some of this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “his brother should marry the widow and raise up seed with her. The first child will continue the dead man’s family line”
12:19	g49e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα	1	Here, the phrase **take the wife** means that the man should marry his brother’s widow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that man should marry his brother’s widow” or “he should marry his dead brother’s wife”
12:19	m2um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα	1	Here, the author of the quotation is speaking of having a child as if it were raising up **seed**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “produce offspring”
12:20	wz27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν; καὶ ὁ πρῶτος	1	Here the Sadducees use an imaginary situation to set up a question they want to ask Jesus. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “Now imagine a family with seven brothers. The first”
12:20	pj71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ πρῶτος	1	The Sadducees are using the number **first** as a noun to mean the first brother. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first brother” or “the oldest brother”
12:20	pj2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὁ πρῶτος	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number one”
12:20	vaga		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα	1	Here, the phrase **took a wife** indicates that the man got married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “got married” or “married someone”
12:20	af1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	Here, the Sadducees are speaking of offspring as if they were **seed**. See how you translated the similar use of this word in [12:19](../12/19.md). Alternate translation: “offspring”
12:21	d61g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ δεύτερος	1	The Sadducees are using the number **second** as a noun to mean the second brother. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the next brother” or “the second oldest brother”
12:21	na6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὁ δεύτερος	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number two”
12:21	uef6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔλαβεν αὐτήν	1	Here, the phrase **took her** indicates that the man married his brother’s widow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “got married to her” or “married her”
12:21	cgzm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	Here, the Sadducees are speaking of offspring as if they were **seed**. See how you translated the similar use of this word in [12:19](../12/19.md). Alternate translation: “offspring”
12:21	tbzw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως	1	The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the third likewise took her and died, not having left seed” or “and the third likewise experienced the same things”
12:21	l1ds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ τρίτος	1	The Sadducees are using the number **third** as a noun to mean the third brother. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the next brother” or “the third oldest brother”
12:21	hx1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὁ τρίτος	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three”
12:22	wjq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ ἑπτὰ	1	The Sadducees are using the number **seven** as a noun to mean the seven brothers. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers”
12:22	g9az		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἀφῆκαν σπέρμα	1	Here the Sadducees imply that all seven brothers married the woman and died without leaving **seed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all married her, one by one, and all of them died, not leaving seed”
12:22	l3dg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	Here, the Sadducees are speaking of offspring as if they were **seed**. See how you translated the similar use of this word in [12:19](../12/19.md). Alternate translation: “offspring”
12:22	e7th		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων	1	The Sadducees are using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people they have mentioned. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all those people”
12:23	yidn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει, ὅταν ἀναστῶσιν	1	The terms **resurrection** and **rise again** mean similar things. The Sadducees are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “When they rise again” or “In the resurrection”
12:23	w4wu			ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει	1	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a **resurrection**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In the supposed resurrection” or “If there is a resurrection”
12:23	qtp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “When people resurrect”
12:23	wl8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστῶσιν	1	Here, the phrase **rise again** refers to people who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will be restored to life” or “they will resurrect”
12:23	sv6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀναστῶσιν	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “men and women rise again”
12:23	tytk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Sadducees ask their question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a question, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “We ask this question because” or “This is a problem, since”
12:23	c4p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ & ἑπτὰ	1	The Sadducees are using the number **seven** as a noun to mean the seven brothers. See how you expressed the idea in [12:22](../12/22.md). Alternate translation: “all seven of the brothers”
12:24	zp2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Sadducees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are most certainly being led astray because of this, not knowing the Scriptures nor the power of God!” or “I tell you that you are being led astray because of this, not knowing the Scriptures nor the power of God.”
12:24	gjy0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Is it not because you do not know the Scriptures nor the power of God that you are being led astray”
12:24	sie3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ & πλανᾶσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is they themselves. Alternate translation: “Are you not going astray” or “Are you not leading yourselves astray”
12:24	wb1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οὐ & πλανᾶσθε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Sadducees, the word **you** here is plural.
12:24	tpkq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	διὰ τοῦτο & μὴ εἰδότες	1	Here, the word **this** refers directly ahead to the phrase **not knowing the Scriptures nor the power of God**. Jesus expresses the idea in this way because it was powerful in his language. If using the word **this** to refer to what someone is about to say would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information and make the expression powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “because you do not know”
12:24	i8il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the powerful things that God can do”
12:25	eqwu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation related to how the Sadducees have been “led astray” (see [12:24](../12/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “What you should know is that”
12:25	nvh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀναστῶσιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν & εἰσὶν	1	Both uses of the pronoun **they** refer to men and women in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “when men and women rise … they neither marry … they are”
12:25	s99l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστῶσιν	1	Here, the word **rise** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they are restored to life”
12:25	ox82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people” or “from the corpses”
12:25	ensg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται	1	In Jesus’ culture, it was customary to talk about men marrying and women being **given in marriage**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “men do not marry and women are not given in marriage” or “men and women do not get married”
12:25	y8vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γαμίζονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Jesus implies that it is the people’s parents. Alternate translation: “do their parents give them in marriage”
12:25	pi8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to what is currently the case on earth. Jesus is using this contrast to show the Sadducees that they were mistaken to think that the existence of men and women in heaven would follow the same pattern or order of things as had their former lives on earth. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather”
12:25	asw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ἀλλ’ εἰσὶν ὡς ἄγγελοι ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	Jesus is saying that when people rise from the dead, they are **like angels** because neither of them marry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they are like angels in the heavens, since they too do not marry”
12:26	it73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	περὶ δὲ τῶν νεκρῶν, ὅτι ἐγείρονται, οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε	1	Here, the phrase **But concerning** introduces the next topic that Jesus wants to talk about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next topic. Alternate translation: “Next, I will talk about the dead, that they are raised. Did you not read”
12:26	mffe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν νεκρῶν	1	Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. See how you expressed the idea in [12:25](../12/25.md). Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses”
12:26	o34p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγείρονται	1	Here, the word **raised** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they are restored to life”
12:26	z36n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγείρονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God raises them”
12:26	eod4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου, πῶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Θεὸς λέγων, ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke and teach the Sadducees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you have read in the book of Moses, at the bush, how God spoke to him, saying, ‘I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob.’” or “Surely you have read in the book of Moses, at the bush, how God spoke to him, saying, ‘I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob’!”
12:26	jgdt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Sadducees, the word **you** here is plural.
12:26	jc5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **the book** that **Moses** wrote and authorized, the Pentateuch (the first five books of the Old Testament). Jesus is not using the possessive form to indicate a book that Moses owned. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another. Alternate translation: “the book that Moses authorized” or “the books that come from Moses”
12:26	w2lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου	1	Here Jesus is referring to the passage in **the book of Moses** where God appears to Moses in a **bush** that is on fire but that does not burn up. This passage can be found in [Exodus 3:2–6](../exo/03/02.md), and the quotation that follows is more specifically from [Exodus 3:6](../exo/03/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the passage about the bush” or “in the place in the book of Exodus where Moses encountered God in a bush”
12:26	nh43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he is the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob?”
12:26	y35v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
12:26	re82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ	1	Here, the author of the quotation is using the possessive form to describe the **God** whom **Abraham**, **Isaac**, and **Jacob** worship. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the God that Abraham honors, and the God that Isaac honors, and the God that Jacob honors”
12:27	afit		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἔστιν Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “God is not a God of the dead, but he is a God of the living”
12:27	tgjk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων	1	Here Jesus implies that, although Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob had already died by the time God spoke these words, God still called himself their God. Since God is not **a God of the dead, but of the living**, this means that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob must be alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God is not of the dead, but of the living, so Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob must live again after they died”
12:27	s1u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐκ & Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων	1	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two phrases here. Alternate translation: “a God of the living, not of the dead”
12:27	ehs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the God whom the living, not the dead, worship. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “honored by the dead, but by the living”
12:27	dgc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν & ζώντων	1	Jesus is using the adjectives **dead** and **living** as nouns to mean people who are dead and living. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of dead people … of living people”
12:27	v7ui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πολὺ πλανᾶσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is they themselves. Alternate translation: “You are misunderstanding much” or “You are deceiving yourselves much”
12:27	kd8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	πολὺ πλανᾶσθε	1	Because Jesus is speaking to the Sadducees, the word **You** here is plural.
12:28	w5ph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
12:28	zqy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	προσελθὼν εἷς τῶν γραμματέων, ἀκούσας αὐτῶν συνζητούντων, ἰδὼν ὅτι καλῶς ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς, ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτόν	1	Here Mark introduces **one of the scribes** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there a scribe there. When he came up, he heard them discussing this together. He saw that Jesus answered them well, and he questioned him”
12:28	z4hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προσελθὼν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone up”
12:28	nxcc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτῶν συνζητούντων	1	Here Mark implies that the scribe heard Jesus and the Sadducees **discussing** whether people rise from the dead and what happens to them then. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “them discussing the resurrection of the dead together”
12:28	b3yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἰδὼν	1	Here, Mark is using the word **seen** to mean “observed” or “knew.” He is describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with their eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “having understood” or “having observed”
12:28	q1u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1	Here, the scribe is using the word **first** to refer to what is most important. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Which is the most significant commandment of all” or “Which commandment is the greatest of all”
12:28	kftz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “commandment number one”
12:28	delv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων	1	The scribe is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the commandments. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all the commandments”
12:29	ztyh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρώτη	1	Here, the Jesus is using the word **first** to refer to what is most important. See how you translated the word **first** in [12:28](../12/28.md). Alternate translation: “The most significant” or “The greatest”
12:29	euim		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πρώτη	1	Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean the first commandment. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “The first commandment”
12:29	n74y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	πρώτη	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Number one”
12:29-30	yo1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἐστίν, ἄκουε, Ἰσραήλ, Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν & καὶ ἀγαπήσεις Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου, ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου	1	Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Deuteronomy 6:4–5](../deu/06/04.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “is this commandment from the book of Deuteronomy: ‘Hear, Israel, the Lord our God is one Lord. And you will love the Lord your God from your whole heart, and from your whole soul, and from your whole mind, and from your whole strength.’”
12:29-30	yop8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐστίν, ἄκουε, Ἰσραήλ, Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν & καὶ ἀγαπήσεις Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου, ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “is that Israel should hear that the Lord their God is one Lord and that they should love the Lord their God from their whole heart, and from their whole soul, and from their whole mind, and from their whole strength.”
12:29	l4h7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἄκουε	1	Here, the word **Hear** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Hear** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention”
12:29	mq92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰσραήλ	1	Here, the word **Israel** refers to the people who are descended from a man named **Israel**. This man’s other name was Jacob. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Israelites” or “descendants of Israel”
12:29	kspb			Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν	1	Alternate translation: “the Lord our God, the Lord is one” or “the Lord is our God, the Lord is one”
12:29	mmtb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν	1	The phrase **the Lord our God is one Lord** could be: (1) an affirmation that **the Lord our God** is the only one whom the Israelites honored and worshiped as **Lord** and God. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God is our only Lord” or “the only Lord is the Lord our God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of **the Lord our God**. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God is a unique Lord”
12:30	vllb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀγαπήσεις & σου & σου & σου & σου & σου	1	Since in this command God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the words **you** and **your** are singular throughout this verse.
12:30	thj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1	The author of the quotation is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. Alternate translation: “you should love” or “you must love”
12:30	anuk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου	1	Here, the author of the quotation is using the possessive form to describe the **God** whom the people of Israel worship. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Lord God whom you honor”
12:30	xjng		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου	1	Here, the author of the quotation is referring to all of a human being by naming multiple parts of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with all of who you are” or “with your entire being”
12:30	q49v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου	1	In Mark’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “from all your desires” or “with all your feelings”
12:30	m8hi			ἐξ & ἐξ & ἐξ & ἐξ	1	Alternate translation: “with … with … with … with”
12:30	x3n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου	1	Here, **soul** represents a person’s life with special focus on that person’s identity and actions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with everything you are” or “from all your inclinations”
12:30	mii2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strength**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how strong you are” or “with everything that you are able to do”
12:31	fz8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δευτέρα	1	Here, the scribe is using the word **second** to refer to what is the second most important thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The next most significant” or “The second greatest”
12:31	eu8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	δευτέρα	1	Jesus is using the adjective **second** as a noun to mean the second commandment. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “The second commandment”
12:31	oegh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	δευτέρα	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Number two”
12:31	gpjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	αὕτη, ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Leviticus 19:18](../lev/19/18.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “is this commandment from the book of Leviticus: ‘You will love your neighbor as yourself.’”
12:31	xoom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	αὕτη, ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “is that one should love one’s neighbor as oneself.”
12:31	k0l4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀγαπήσεις & σου & σεαυτόν	1	Since in this command God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the words **You**, **your**, and **yourself** are singular.
12:31	tp6p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1	The author of the quotation is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. Alternate translation: “You should love” or “You must love”
12:31	np4y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς σεαυτόν	1	The author of the quotation is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “as you love yourself”
12:31	c3gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς σεαυτόν	1	The author of the quotation assumes that people love themselves, so he wants these people to love their neighbors just as much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as deeply as yourself”
12:31	p1ec			μείζων τούτων ἄλλη ἐντολὴ οὐκ ἔστιν	1	Alternate translation: “All other commandments are less important than these”
12:31	gvrv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄλλη ἐντολὴ οὐκ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **commandment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “nothing that God commanded us that is”
12:31	pyc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τούτων	1	Here, the word **these** refers to the two commandments that Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “those two commandments”
12:32	uhgy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλῶς	1	Here the scribe implies that he thinks that Jesus answered the question **Well**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “You have answered well”
12:32	qqm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπ’ ἀληθείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Based on what is true” or “You have spoken what is true when”
12:32	iysp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	εἷς ἐστιν, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος πλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “he is one, that is, there is no other besides him” or “he is one; indeed, there is no other besides him”
12:32	awe3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἷς ἐστιν	1	Here, just as in [12:29](../12/29.md), the phrase **he is one** could be: (1) an affirmation that God is the only one whom the Israelites honored and worshiped as God. Alternate translation: “he is our only God” or “he alone is God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of God. Alternate translation: “he is unique”
12:32	oxtp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐστιν & αὐτοῦ	1	The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to God. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to him more directly. Alternate translation: “God is … God”
12:32	as2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλος	1	The scribe is using the adjective **other** as a noun to mean another god. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “other god”
12:33	ddr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς συνέσεως, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος	1	Here, the scribe is referring to all of a human being by naming multiple parts of it. See how you expressed the similar idea in [12:30](../12/30.md). Alternate translation: “with all of who one is” or “with the entire being”
12:33	v8yn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [12:30](../12/30.md). Alternate translation: “from all the desires” or “with all one’s feelings”
12:33	vxeh			ἐξ	-1	Alternate translation: “with … with … with”
12:33	xnq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς συνέσεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **understanding**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from everything that one understands” or “with the whole mind”
12:33	k42a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in [12:30](../12/30.md). Alternate translation: “from how strong one is” or “with everything that one is able to do”
12:33	ekfy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἑαυτὸν	1	The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you expressed the similar idea in [12:31](../12/31.md). Alternate translation: “as one love oneself”
12:33	mje6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς ἑαυτὸν	1	See how you expressed this idea in [12:31](../12/31.md). Alternate translation: “as deeply as oneself”
12:33	ll9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περισσότερόν ἐστιν	1	Here the scribe means that keeping these two commandments is **more** important or significant than offering **burnt offerings and sacrifices**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “is even more important than” or “is more significant than”
12:33	sgbu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	πάντων τῶν ὁλοκαυτωμάτων καὶ θυσιῶν	1	The terms **whole burnt offerings** and **sacrifices** mean similar things. The scribe is using the two terms together to include **all** the different kinds of sacrifices and offerings in his claim. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “all the various offerings” or “all sacrifices that anyone might offer”
12:34	hkf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἰδὼν αὐτὸν ὅτι	1	Here, Mark is using the word **seen** to mean “observed” or “knew.” He is describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with their eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “having understood that” or “having observed that”
12:34	is4c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, Jesus speaks as if the man was physically **not far from the kingdom of God**. He means that the man is almost part of God’s kingdom. Jesus is speaking of **the kingdom of God** as if it were a physical place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are almost in the kingdom of God” or “You almost belong to the kingdom of God”
12:34	b144		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μακρὰν & ἀπὸ	1	Jesus is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **far**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “very close to”
12:34	rgh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα	1	The words translated **no one** and **any longer** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “people no longer were daring”
12:35	ifdj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “Sometime later,”
12:35	ikub		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποκριθεὶς	1	Here, the word **answering** indicates that Jesus asked this question in response to how the Jewish leaders had been trying to trick and trap him with their questions. Jesus was not directly responding to anyone’s question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response to how the Jewish leaders had been testing him” or “after the Jewish leaders had tested him”
12:35	ptc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱερῷ	1	Here Mark means that Jesus was teaching in the **temple** area. He does not mean that Jesus was in the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in [11:11](../11/11.md). Alternate translation: “temple courtyard”
12:35	q6e4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν?	1	This is not a rhetorical question. Rather, Jesus’ listeners had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement.
12:35	i6a4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱὸς Δαυείδ	1	Here, the word **son** refers to a male descendant. It does not mean that **the Christ** is the direct son of David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “descended from David” or “in the lineage of David”
12:36	e1zq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ	1	Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that it was **David**, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who wrote the words in the quotation that follows. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom they call the father of the Christ”
12:36	ejy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ	1	Here, the phrase **in the Holy Spirit** indicates that David wrote the words that follow as **the Holy Spirit** inspired him. In other words, the **Holy Spirit** prompted David to write this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “by the inspiration of the Spirit” or “prompted by the Spirit”
12:36	jlbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν & εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right hand until he puts his enemies under his feet”
12:36	xdd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	εἶπεν	1	Here Jesus introduces a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book of Psalms (see [Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md)). This Psalm was written by David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “said in the book of Psalms” or “wrote in Scriptures”
12:36	dv7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	Here, the term Lord does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance refers to God. The second instance refers to a person whom David respectfully calls “lord.” The ULT and UST capitalize this second instance of the word because it refers to the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord, said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord”
12:36	v53p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	When someone sits at God’s **right hand**, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Sit to rule at my right hand” or “Take the place of honor and authority at my right hand”
12:36	k2j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Here, the phrase **at my right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that the Lord has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at my right side” or “at the honorable place next to me”
12:36	rfy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	In the author’s culture, to **put** people under a person’s **feet** indicates that those people have been conquered and are powerless and shamed. So, this means that God will conquer and shame all the enemies of the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “until I make your enemies kneel before you” or “until I conquer and shame your enemies”
12:36	tt1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **under your feet**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “as a footstool of your feet.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
12:37	qpdy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον, καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν?	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would not call any of their descendants **Lord**, since this title was used for people who were more important or older. Jesus’ question assumes this practice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “David himself calls him ‘Lord,’ and no one calls his own son ‘Lord.’ So, how can he be his son”
12:37	j7wn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David himself calls the Messiah his Lord”
12:37	ssq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ	1	See how you translated the phrase **David himself** in [12:36](../12/36.md), where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom they call the father of the Christ,”
12:37	rh2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν	1	Like the question in [12:35](../12/35.md), this is a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones the Jewish leaders asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “so in what way can he be his son”
12:37	qucc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Here, the word **and** introduces a question that is based on the previous statement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “so”
12:37	tjp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱός αὐτοῦ	1	Here, the word **son** refers to a male descendant. It does not mean that the Christ is the direct son of David. See how you expressed the idea in [12:35](../12/35.md). Alternate translation: “descended from him” or “in his lineage”
12:38	bh8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	Mark uses the word **And** to indicate that Jesus is still in the temple area talking to the people there, as he was in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes that more explicit. Alternate translation: “Then” or “At that time”
12:38	yhfv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων	1	Here Jesus means that people need to **Watch out** that they do not act like **the scribes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you are not like the scribes” or “Watch out that you do not behave like the scribes do”
12:38	s30c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	βλέπετε	1	Because Jesus is teaching many people, the command **Watch out** is plural.
12:38	nxy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν	1	In this culture, **long robes** were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in **long robes** was to assert one’s right to high status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what it means to behave in this way. Alternate translation: “to walk around looking important in their long robes”
12:38	mu5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀσπασμοὺς	1	The implication is that these would be respectful **greetings** in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “respectful greetings”
12:38	akkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ταῖς ἀγοραῖς	1	The word **marketplaces** refers to large, open-air areas where people buy and sell goods. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of area, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the town squares” or “the parks”
12:39	mwmf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρωτοκαθεδρίας & πρωτοκλισίας	1	Here Jesus speaks of the **seats** and **places** for the most important people as if they were **first** in a sequence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “important seats … important places”
12:39	x6ct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	πρωτοκαθεδρίας & πρωτοκλισίας	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use cardinal numbers here or equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “the number one seats … the number one places”
12:40	j27b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	Here Jesus speaks as if the scribes were **devouring** or eating **the houses of widows**. He means that they are taking **the houses** away from **the widows**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones taking the houses of widows” or “the ones defrauding widows of their houses”
12:40	jtw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν	1	Jesus speaks of **the houses of widows** to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their **houses**. If it would be helpful in your language, you state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that widows own”
12:40	r3ht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προφάσει	1	Here, the phrase **as a pretext** could mean: (1) that the scribes and Pharisees are using **long prayers** to try to look godly. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly” (2) that the scribes are Pharisees are using their **long prayers** to hide or cover up how they devour the houses of widows. Alternate translation: “to cover that up” or “to disguise what they do”
12:40	d0ua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **condemnation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will be condemned more severely”
12:40	h36x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περισσότερον κρίμα	1	Here Jesus implies that these scribes will receive **greater condemnation** than they would have if they had not pretended to be godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “greater condemnation than people who did not pretend to be godly”
12:40	qm52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κρίμα	1	Jesus is using the word **condemnation** to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned for doing something wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “punishment”
12:41	r69x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “After that,”
12:41	cx75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέναντι τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου	1	Here, a place **opposite the treasury** is directly in front of **the treasury**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the treasury in front of him” or “with the treasury before him”
12:41	p2kp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου & τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον	1	A **treasury** is a box or receptacle in which people can put and store money. More specifically, this word refers to the receptacles in the temple courtyard into which people could drop money that would be used to keep the temple operating. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of receptacle, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the temple money box … the temple money box” or “the chest for the gifts for the temple … the chest for the gifts for the temple”
12:41	jgkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πλούσιοι	1	Mark is using the adjective **rich** as a noun to mean rich people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “rich people”
12:41	rl1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλά	1	Mark is using the adjective **much** as a noun to mean much money. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “much money”
12:42	zl5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἐλθοῦσα μία χήρα πτωχὴ ἔβαλεν	1	Here Mark introduces **one poor widow** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a woman arrived. She was a widow, and she was poor. She put in”
12:42	b3ol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθοῦσα	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
12:42	g6ry		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	λεπτὰ δύο	1	The word **lepta** is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value”
12:42	n29e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	A **quadrans** was one of the smallest and least valuable coins in circulation in this place and time. It was equivalent to about an eighth of an hour’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of one of the least valuable coins in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “which is a nickel” or “which is not even an hour’s wage”
12:43-44	ipl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ, πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν τῶν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον & πάντες γὰρ ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον, αὕτη δὲ, ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [12:43](../12/43.md) and [12:44](../12/44.md) into a verse bridge in order to include the reason for Jesus’ declaration before including his declaration. Alternate translation: “All put in from the things abounding to them, but this poor widow, from her poverty, put in everything, as much as she had, her whole life. Therefore, truly I say to you that she put in more than all the ones putting into the treasury”
12:43	ehlb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word **you** here is singular.
12:43	ih0m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ, πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν	1	Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put **more** money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus’ words directly and not express them as if they were figurative.
12:43	n8z5			πάντων & τῶν βαλλόντων	1	Alternate translation: “everyone else who put money”
12:43	n7su		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον	1	See how you translated **treasury** in [12:41](../12/41.md). Alternate translation: “the temple money box” or “the chest for the gifts for the temple”
12:44	c7jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces the basis or reason for the claim that Jesus made in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “I say that because” or “Here is why:”
12:44	n9ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Jesus is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people who were putting money into the treasury. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all these people” or “all those who have given money”
12:44	ihuq			ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον	1	Alternate translation: “put in only some of the many things that they had”
12:44	ui9a			αὕτη & ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν	1	Alternate translation: “she put in all of the few things that she had”
12:44	qnzq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **poverty**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “although she was poor”
12:44	l4tp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν	1	The expression **everything, as much as she had** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “everything that she had”
12:44	p3as		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	Here Jesus speaks as if the woman had put in **her whole life**. He means that she put in all the money that she had to buy what she needed to live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all she had to live on” or “so that she had nothing left to buy even the necessities”
12:44	qrz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that kept her alive”
13:intro	ti7d				0	# Mark 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n6. Jesus in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)\n      * The disciples ask Jesus about the destruction of the temple (13:1–4)\n      * Jesus teaches about the destruction of the temple (24:5–31)\n        * Things that will happen in the time before the destruction of the temple (13:5–13)\n        * Things that will happen immediately before the destruction of the temple (13:14–23)\n        * The coming of the Son of Man (13:24–27)\n        * When these things will happen (13:28–31)\n      * Jesus teaches about his second coming (13:32–37)\n\n### When Jesus speaks about which topics\n\nWhen the disciples speak to Jesus in [13:4](../13/04.md), they ask about two things: first, they want to know when the temple will be destroyed, and second, they want to know what the sign will be that shows that the temple is about to be destroyed. Most Christians agree that Jesus answered these two questions but also included information about his second coming. However, Christians disagree about when Jesus is speaking about which topic. He could:\n\n1. finish speaking about the destruction of the temple in [13:31](../13/31.md) and then go on to speak about his second coming (the outline above follows this view)\n2. finish speaking about the destruction of the temple (perhaps as a foreshadowing of the final tribulation) in [13:23](../13/23.md) and then go on to speak about his second coming\n3. speak about the destruction of the temple (perhaps as a foreshadowing of the final tribulation) in [13:5–23](../13/05.md) and [13:28–31](../13/28.md) and about his second coming in [13:24–27](../13/24.md) and [13:32–37](../13/32.md)\n\nSince Christians disagree over when Jesus is speaking about which topic, if possible format your translation so that several interpretations are possible.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### The destruction of the temple\n\nThe temple in Jerusalem was a very impressive, large building. Despite that, Jesus predicted that it would be destroyed within the lifetime of those who heard him. In fact, about 40 years later, a Roman army conquered Jerusalem and destroyed the temple.\n\n### The Son of Man coming on the clouds of heaven\n\nIn [13:26](../13/26.md), Jesus indicates that he, the Son of Man, will “come” in clouds. However, he does not indicate the location to which he will “come.” Christians debate whether Jesus is describing his return to earth or his enthronement in heaven. If possible, your translation should allow for both possibilities. See the notes on this verse for translation options.\n\n### “This generation” in [13:30](../13/30.md)\n\nIn [13:30](../13/30.md), Jesus says that what he has described will happen before “this generation” passes away. Many interpretations have been proposed for the group of people to which “this generation” refers:\n\n1. The people who were alive while Jesus was speaking these words\n2. The people who would be alive when the signs of the end began\n3. Christians throughout history\n4. Jewish people in general throughout history\n5. Humans in general\n\nSince the word that Jesus uses primarily refers to people who are alive at the same time, if possible use a word or phrase that refers to such a group of people. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include some interpretations of the word in a footnote.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMost of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is teaching four of his disciples. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verse 13. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
13:1	cb77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	αὐτοῦ	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples,”
13:1	ltyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐκπορευομένου	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming out”
13:1	rrv1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἱεροῦ	1	Here Mark means that Jesus left the **temple** area. He does not mean that Jesus was in the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in [11:11](../11/11.md). Alternate translation: “temple courtyard”
13:1	rmlx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἴδε	1	Here, the word **look** is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks a person to look or to pay attention. Alternate translation: “see” or “look at that”
13:1	hnpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί!	1	This is an exclamation that is emphasizing that the **stones** and **buildings** are large and impressive. Use an exclamation that would communicate that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “What impressive stones! What impressive buildings!” or “How impressive these stones and buildings are!”
13:1	ql81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ποταποὶ λίθοι	1	Here, **stones** refers to the very large stones with which the temple walls were built. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What manner of stones in the walls” or “What manner of building stones”
13:2	rez6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς?	1	Jesus is using the question form to draw the attention of the disciples to the **buildings**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Consider these great buildings.” or “See these great buildings!”
13:2	aza6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	βλέπεις	1	Because Jesus is speaking to one of his disciples, the word **you** here is singular.
13:2	ov2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ	1	Jesus says that every **stone** will be **torn down** as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “Almost every stone upon a stone will not be left here, and almost none of them will not be torn down”
13:2	xdhj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be invading enemies. Alternate translation: “An invading army will certainly not leave a stone upon a stone here, which they will not tear down”
13:2	jo8i			οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in positive form. Alternate translation: “Every stone will be toppled off the stone it is on, and each one will be torn down”
13:2	xqsn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	-1	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means … by no means”
13:3	izt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	αὐτοῦ	1	Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples,”
13:3	u7ju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	Here, a place **opposite the temple** is directly in front of the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the temple in front of him” or “with the temple before him”
13:4	pqa9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	εἰπὸν	1	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you tell”
13:4	ekxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	εἰπὸν	1	Because the four disciples are speaking with Jesus, the command **Tell** is singular.
13:4	uf37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	Here, the phrase these things refers to the events that Jesus described in [13:2](../13/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the events you have spoken about” or “that destruction”
13:4	ibsl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα	1	Here, the phrase **all these things** could refer to: (1) the events that Jesus described in [13:2](../13/02.md). Alternate translation: “all the events you have spoken about are about to be completed” (2) the end of the age, or the time when Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “this age is about to be completed” or “all things are about to end”
13:4	lw1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μέλλῃ & συντελεῖσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are about to take place” or “are about to occur”
13:5	fe42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
13:5	qekc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ	1	Jesus is speaking as if the disciples could literally be led **astray**, that is, led down the wrong path. He means that they could be deceived. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes you to believe what is wrong”
13:6	pbz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ & πολλοὺς	1	In both places, Jesus is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “Many men and women … many men and women”
13:6	sxl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλεύσονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “will go”
13:6	z63u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Here, the word **name** refers primarily to the person who has that name, and it focuses especially on that person’s authority. More specifically, Jesus could mean that: (1) these people claim to have the authority that Jesus properly has. Alternate translation: “in my authority” or “claiming to have the authority I have” (2) these people claim to represent Jesus. Alternate translation: “claiming to be my representatives” or “as if they were my representatives”
13:6	cee7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι, καὶ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that they are him, and”
13:6	wv12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	The implication is that these people are claiming to be the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am the Christ”
13:6	h7fs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [13:5](../13/05.md). Alternate translation: “they will cause many to believe what is wrong”
13:7	fl5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων	1	The phrase **wars and rumors of wars** could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. Alternate translation: “of wars that are happening and rumors about wars that might happen” (2) reports of wars that are already taking place nearby and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away”
13:7	eujo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ θροεῖσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the **wars** and **rumors of wars**. Alternate translation: “do not let those things trouble you”
13:7	xp8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δεῖ γενέσθαι	1	Here Jesus means that God has planned these things, and they will not change. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God has chosen that these things will happen”
13:7	d1k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὔπω τὸ τέλος	1	Here Jesus could be speaking about: (1) the **end** of the temple, which Jesus had predicted in [13:2](../13/02.md). Alternate translation: “the end of the temple is not yet” or “what I have predicted will not yet happen” (2) the **end** of the age, which he will say more about later in his teaching. Alternate translation: “the end of the world is not yet” or “it is not yet the moment in the future when the current way of doing things will cease”
13:8	a4rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what is going to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Even more,”
13:8	ydrb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “nation will rise against nation, yes, kingdom against kingdom” or “nation and kingdom rise against nation and kingdom”
13:8	rlxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	The words **nation** and **kingdom** represents nations and kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom and nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “some nations will rise against other nations, and some kingdoms against other kingdoms”
13:8	oyrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	Here, the words **nation** and **kingdom** represent the people who live in them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of a nation will rise up against the people of another nation, and the people of a kingdom against the people of another kingdom”
13:8	xln4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθήσεται & ἐπ’	1	The phrase **rise against** referring to attacking someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will fight against”
13:8	e2ln		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “kingdom will rise against kingdom”
13:8	npua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	λιμοί	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **famines**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “famines and troubles.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
13:8	pcyi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	Here, **These things** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “The things that I have just described are”
13:8	dz8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων	1	Here Jesus speaks of the events that he has described as if they were **the beginning of birth pains**. He means that, just like birth pains, they are difficult and painful things that eventually lead to a happy and wonderful result. If possible, you should maintain the figure of speech or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “like the beginning of birth pains”
13:9	c2cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ ὑμεῖς	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that Jesus will speak about, which is **you**, the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As for you”
13:9	nuti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέπετε & ἑαυτούς	1	Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. He means that they need to make sure that they are ready for what is going to happen to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “prepare yourselves” or “pay attention to yourselves”
13:9	tswy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς	1	Here, the phrase **hand you over** refers to putting someone under the authority and control of other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand before” or “they will bring you before”
13:9	mbr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς	1	The pronoun **They** refers to people in general who will persecute Jesus’ followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “People will hand you over”
13:9	voih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δαρήσεσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people will beat you”
13:9	gbb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σταθήσεσθε	1	Here, the phrase **you will be made to stand before** refers to being arrested and accused before someone in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you will be seized and put on trial”
13:9	zdp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σταθήσεσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand”
13:9	ht5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ	1	Here Jesus means that these things will happen because the disciples are connected with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you follow me”
13:9	qq6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς μαρτύριον	1	Here, the phrase **for a testimony** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which God allows the disciples to **be made to stand before governors and kings**. Alternate translation: “and that way you can give testimony” (2) the result of the disciples being **made to stand before governors and kings**. Alternate translation: “and as a result you will give testimony”
13:9	v23p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μαρτύριον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you could express the same idea in another way. Make sure that your translation matches the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “which will happen so that you can testify” or “and as a result you will testify”
13:9	y6p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the **governors** and **kings** mentioned in this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those governors and kings”
13:10	e6ad		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρῶτον	1	Here Jesus implies that what he describes in this verse will happen before the “end” he referred to in [13:7](../13/07.md). As in [13:7](../13/07.md), here Jesus could be referring to: (1) the end of the temple, which Jesus had predicted in [13:2](../13/02.md). Alternate translation: “before the end of the temple” or “before what I have predicted about the temple happens” (2) the end of the age, which he will say more about later in his teaching. Alternate translation: “before the end of the world” or “before the current way of doing things ceases”
13:10	ruk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	πρῶτον	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Make sure that your translation fits with the interpretation you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “prior to what I have predicted” or “prior to the end”
13:10	sfjc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that believers will be the ones who proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “believers to proclaim the gospel” or “people to proclaim the gospel”
13:11	k924		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἄγωσιν ὑμᾶς	1	Here, the pronoun **they** refers to any person who leads the disciples away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “somebody leads you away” or “anyone leads you away”
13:11	uy91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παραδιδόντες	1	Here, the phrase **handing {you} over** refers to putting someone under the authority and control of other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “seizing you” or “bringing you before the authorities”
13:11	l4fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαλήσητε	1	Here Jesus implies that the disciples will be required to speak in their defense after people hand them over. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you will say when they accuse you” or “you will say in your defense”
13:11	n447		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀλλ’ ὃ ἐὰν δοθῇ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ, τοῦτο λαλεῖτε; οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clause, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Since you are not the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit, whatever is given to you in that hour, speak that”
13:11	p9pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ὃ ἐὰν δοθῇ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ, τοῦτο λαλεῖτε	1	Here, the word **that** refers directly back to **whatever is given to you in that hour**. Jesus expresses the idea in this way to introduce **whatever is given to you** and then explain what they should do with it. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the word **that** would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “speak whatever is given to you in that hour”
13:11	m0xq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δοθῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God, and more specifically the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit gives”
13:11	nr2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	Here, the phrase **in that hour** refers to the time when they have been handed over and need to say something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at that moment”
13:11	q2o3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	Here Jesus means that they will not say whatever they think but will instead say what **the Holy Spirit** reveals to them. He does not mean that the Holy Spirit will use their bodies to project his voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you are not speaking your own words, but the words you speak come from the Holy Spirit”
13:11	a9b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit is the one speaking through you”
13:12	toqp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1	Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “unbelieving brother will hand over believing brother to death, and an unbelieving father, his believing child, and unbelieving children will rise up against believing parents and put them to death”
13:12	py9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παραδώσει & ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον	1	Here, the phrase **hand over** refers to putting someone under the authority and control of other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will seize brother to cause his death” or “will bring brother before the authorities to cause his death”
13:12	m6iq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν	1	Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sibling will hand over sibling”
13:12	utyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς θάνατον & θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be killed … cause them to die”
13:12	b9ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πατὴρ τέκνον	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “a father will hand over his child to death”
13:12	hrhw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πατὴρ τέκνον	1	Although the term **father** is masculine, Jesus is probably using the word here in a generic sense that includes both fathers and mothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “parents, their children” or “a father or mother, his or her child”
13:12	vjcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπαναστήσονται	1	Here, the phrase **rise up against** refers to rebelling against an authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will defy”
13:12	r66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1	Here Jesus implies that the **children** will have someone else put their parents to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “have them put to death”
13:13	pk3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all will hate you”
13:13	paf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων	1	Jesus is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all people” or “everyone”
13:13	w8pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντων	1	Jesus says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most people”
13:13	jhp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	Here, **name** represents the person whose name it is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of me”
13:13	gbjh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται	1	Here, the phrase **this one** refers directly back to **the one having endured to the end**. Jesus expresses the idea in this way to introduce people who endure **to the end** and then explain what happens to them. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the phrase **this one** would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “the one having endured to the end will be saved”
13:13	c33n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὁ & ὑπομείνας	1	Jesus is speaking of anyone who endures, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who endures”
13:13	vcz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τέλος	1	Here, the phrase **the end** could refer to: (1) the time when the persecution of the person who is enduring ceases. Alternate translation: “to the end of the persecution” (2) the person’s death. Alternate translation: “until he or she dies” (3) the time when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “until when I return”
13:13	w28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος σωθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God will save this one”
13:14	d4nw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως	1	The phrase **the abomination of desolation** is found in [Daniel 9:27](../dan/09/27.md), [Daniel 11:31](../dan/11/31.md), and [Daniel 12:11](../dan/12/11.md). Jesus’ audience would have been familiar with these passages, which prophesy about **the abomination** entering the temple and defiling it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the temple”
13:14	v73e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe an **abomination** that causes **desolation**. If that is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the abomination that causes desolation” or “the abomination that leads to desolation”
13:14	ev0a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abomination** and **desolation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the abominable thing that desolates”
13:14	hefe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ	1	Here, the word translated **standing** is masculine, which is why the ULT uses the word **he** in this sentence. By using this form, Mark could be indicating that: (1) **the abomination** is a thing that is identified with a man. In this case, it could be a statue of a man or something that a man sets up or creates. You could express the idea by referring to **the abomination** with the pronoun **it**. Alternate translation: “standing it should not be” (2) **the abomination** is a man who can also be described as an **abomination**. You could express the idea by referring to **the abomination** with the pronoun **he** or by using some other form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “standing where that man of abomination should not be”
13:14	vx3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅπου οὐ δεῖ	1	Jesus’ audience would have known that the phrase **where he should not be** implicitly refers to the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where he should not be”
13:14	ck7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ δεῖ, ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω, τότε	1	Here, clause **let the one reading understand** could be: (1) written by Mark to anyone who reads this story. Use a form that clearly indicates that Mark is writing this, not reporting what Jesus spoke. Alternate translation: “he should not be” (and I, Mark, add: let the one who reads this story understand), “then” (2) spoken by Jesus to anyone who reads what Daniel wrote about **the abomination of desolation**. Alternate translation: “he should not be—let the one who has read the book of Daniel understand—then”
13:14	sq7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω	1	Here, the phrase **let the one reading understand** could indicate that **the one reading**: (1) should be able to **understand** what **the abomination of desolation** is. In this case, Mark could be implying that **the one reading** needs to read the passages in the book of Daniel where this **abomination** is mentioned. Alternate translation: “you know what I mean” or “the one reading should understand from the book of Daniel” (2) should try to **understand** what **the abomination of desolation** is. Alternate translation: “let the one reading try to understand” or “reader, pay attention”
13:14	buns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one reading must understand”
13:14	polt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ, φευγέτωσαν	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones in Judea must flee”
13:14	d8fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὰ ὄρη	1	Here Jesus implies that people will be safer in **the mountains** than in **Judea**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the mountains where they will be safer”
13:15	u0pe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **but** introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave **but** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and”
13:15	dv7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus gives a command to one person, but he implies that it applies to any of his disciples who are in the situation that he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “let the ones on the housetops not go down nor go in to take anything from their houses”
13:15	m1hq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ	1	Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat. People would eat and do other activities on top of their houses. Jesus assumes that his hearers know this and that they know that the roofs were accessed by an exterior staircase at the back of the house, distant from the entry at the front. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “let the one who is on top of his roof escape immediately by the back stairway and not descend in order to go into his house to take anything”
13:15	of80		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with **nor**. The phrase **go down** tells how the person is able to **go in**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **nor**. Alternate translation: “let the one on the housetop not go down to enter in order” or “let the one on the housetop not, after going down, go in”
13:15	zfta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω	1	If your language does not use third-person imperatives in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one on the housetop must not go down nor go in”
13:15	xetk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **go**. Alternate translation: “let the one on the housetop not come down nor come in”
13:15	vxmy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ	1	Although the term **his** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her”
13:16	iav2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, ἆραι τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus gives a command to one person, but he implies that it applies to any of his disciples who are in the situation that he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “let the ones in the fields not turn back to the things behind to get their cloaks”
13:16	n44r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, ἆραι τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ	1	People in Jesus’ time often walked from their towns to the **field** that they worked in during the day. Jesus is saying that, when they see the abomination of desolation, they should not return to their town to get their cloaks. Instead, they should flee directly from the field that they are working in. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “let the one working the field not return to his town or house to get his cloak”
13:16	wcdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one in the field must not turn back”
13:16	at4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	αὐτοῦ	1	Although the term **his** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her”
13:16	y1e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ ἱμάτιον	1	The word **cloak** refers to an outer garment. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “jacket” or “outer garment”
13:17	wf32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now”
13:17	bi8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις	1	Here, the phrase **having in the womb** refers to being pregnant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the ones who are with child” or “to the ones who are pregnant”
13:17	bv9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῖς θηλαζούσαις	1	This does not mean babies who are nursing but women who are nursing babies (providing their milk for them). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to mothers who are nursing their babies”
13:17	u8kk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	Here, the phrase **those days** refers to the time period that Jesus has been describing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at that time” or “during that time period”
13:18-19	et3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ γένηται χειμῶνος & ἔσονται γὰρ αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι θλῖψις, οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη, ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἣν ἔκτισεν ὁ Θεὸς, ἕως τοῦ νῦν, καὶ οὐ μὴ γένηται	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [13:18](../13/18.md) and [13:19](../13/19.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to give the reason for Jesus’ exhortation before including the exhortation. Alternate translation: “But there will be in those days tribulation—such as this kind has not happened from the beginning of creation which God created until now and will certainly not happen. Therefore, pray that it might not happen in winter”
13:18	nnvt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now”
13:18	gshm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένηται	1	Here Jesus could be referring to: (1) the things he has predicted, including the appearance of the abomination and the destruction of the temple. Alternate translation: “these events might not happen” (2) how his disciples need to flee to the hills (see [13:14](../13/14.md)). Alternate translation: “your escape might not happen” or “that you do not need to flee”
13:18	w91r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	χειμῶνος	1	In the location to which Jesus is referring, **winter** is the time of year when it is cold and travel is difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a term for a season in which it would be difficult to travel, or you could translate **winter** with a general expression. Alternate translation: “in the rainy season” or “in the cold season”
13:19	ltzv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the disciples should pray that they these things would not happen in winter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a command, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “You should pray that because” or “That is because”
13:19	l5u9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔσονται & αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι θλῖψις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in those days people will be greatly hurt” or “in those days people will be greatly afflicted”
13:19	zs4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι	1	Here, the phrase **those days** refers to the time period that Jesus has been describing. See how you expressed the idea in [13:17](../13/17.md). Alternate translation: “at that time” or “during that time period”
13:19	e98e			οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη	1	Alternate translation: “of a kind that has not yet happened” or “which will be worse than any type of tribulation that has happened”
13:19	r1ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἣν ἔκτισεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	The expression **the beginning of creation which God created** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “the beginning of what God created” or “the beginning of God’s creation”
13:19	c5sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ μὴ γένηται	1	Here Jesus means that **tribulation** of **this kind** will **not happen** again after these events occur. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “will certainly not happen again after that”
13:19	fqx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”
13:20	ocw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν Κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Lord really has shortened **the days**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “were the Lord not to shorten the days, no flesh would be saved” or “imagine that the Lord did not shorten the days. Then, no flesh would be saved”
13:20	aggr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν Κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1	Jesus is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this because he knows that God has already decided to **shorten the days**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense, or you could refer to God’s decision. Alternate translation: “the Lord were not going to shorten the days, no flesh would be saved” or “the Lord had not already made the decision to shorten those days, no flesh would have been saved”
13:20	el7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας & τὰς ἡμέρας	1	Here, the phrase **the days** refers to the time period that Jesus has been describing. See how you expressed the idea in [13:17](../13/17.md). Alternate translation: “that time … that time” or “that time period … that time period”
13:20	dosx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no flesh would remain” or “no flesh would continue to live”
13:20	kda6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σάρξ	1	Jesus is using **flesh** to represent humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “humans”
13:20	fz5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέξατο	1	The expression **the elect whom he chose** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “those whom he chose” or “his elect”
13:20	af7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς	1	Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun to mean elect people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the elect people”
13:21-22	d9gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	καὶ τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε & ἐγερθήσονται γὰρ ψευδόχριστοι καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται, καὶ δώσουσιν σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα, πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [13:21](../13/21.md) and [13:22](../13/22.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason for Jesus’ command before the command itself. Alternate translation: “And then false Christs and false prophets will be raised up and will give signs and wonders, to lead astray, if possible, the elect. So, if anyone says to you, ‘Behold, here is the Christ! Behold, there!’ do not believe it.”
13:21	xpd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ	1	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it will happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Then, although some people will say to you”
13:21	qsfu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “says to you that you should look because the Christ is here or that you should look because he is there, do not not believe it”
13:21	ynm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ	1	Here Jesus is implying that these two statements are two examples of what people might say to the disciples. Jesus is not implying that the same person says these two sentences during the same conversation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes that idea moreexplicit. Alternate translation: “‘Behold, here is the Christ!’ or if anyone says to you, ‘Behold, there!’”
13:21	pctq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἴδε	-1	In both places, the word **Behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to look at something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks the audience to look, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Look … Look” or “Pay attention … Pay attention”
13:21	yfd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἴδε, ἐκεῖ	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Behold, there is the Christ”
13:22	x8d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a basis for the command that Jesus gave in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a command, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “I say that since” or “That is because”
13:22	yw81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγερθήσονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be the false Christs and false prophets themselves. Alternate translation: “will rise up”
13:22	n39a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθήσονται	1	Here, the phrase **will be raised up** refers to people beginning to do some task publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appear” or “will begin to lead”
13:22	w3mf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “amazing signs” or “impressive deeds”
13:22	vh4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς	1	Jesus is speaking as if the false Christs and prophets could literally **lead** people **astray**. He means that they deceive others. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar expression in [13:5](../13/05.md). Alternate translation: “to cause, if possible, the elect to believe what is wrong”
13:22	hqcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ δυνατὸν	1	Here, the phrase **if possible** could mean: (1) that it is not actually **possible** to lead astray the elect. Alternate translation: “if it were possible” (2) that the false Christs and false prophets will try everything they can to lead astray the elect. Alternate translation: “if they can” or “by all possible means”
13:22	n81i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς	1	Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun to mean elect people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this word in [13:20](../13/20.md). Alternate translation: “the elect people” or “the people whom God has elected”
13:23	z378		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὑμεῖς δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that Jesus will speak about, which is **you**, the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “As for you”
13:23	jq8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέπετε	1	Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. He means that they need to make sure that they are ready for what is going to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar idea in [13:9](../13/09.md). Alternate translation: “be prepared” or “pay attention”
13:23	r4yr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word **Behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Pay attention”
13:23	va6h			προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα	1	Alternate translation: “I have told you all these things ahead of time” or “I have told you all these things before they occur”
13:24	is3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word **But** indicates that Jesus will now start speaking about new events. These events may contrast with the events that Jesus has previously described. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next thing that a speaker wants to describe. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “Further,”
13:24	vmna		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	Here, the phrase **those days** refers to the time period that Jesus has been describing. See how you expressed the idea in [13:17](../13/17.md). Alternate translation: “at that time” or “during that time period”
13:24	n2rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	μετὰ	1	Here, the word **after** indicates that the events Jesus will describe in [13:24–27](../013/24.md) will come after the **tribulation** that Jesus mentioned in [13:19](../13/19.md). The word **after** does not indicate how long it will be between the **tribulation** and the events that Jesus describes in [13:24–27](../013/24.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates sequence without indicating how close the events are to each other. Alternate translation: “following” or “sometime subsequent to”
13:24	mfy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν θλῖψιν ἐκείνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people are greatly hurt in those ways” or “people are greatly afflicted as I have foretold”
13:24	zy2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἥλιος σκοτισθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “God will darken the sun”
13:24	a3qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς	1	Here, Jesus speaks as if **the moon** were a person who could give something to someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the moon will become dark”
13:25	au6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “God will shake the powers of the heavens”
13:25	hge7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	Here, the phrase **the powers in the heavens** could refer to: (1) powerful spiritual beings that dwell **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “the powerful beings in the heavens” (2) the heavenly bodies, including the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the sun, moon, and stars”
13:26	kl95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὄψονται	1	The pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “men and women will see”
13:26-27	a130		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & ἀποστελεῖ & ἐπισυνάξει & αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, who am the Son of Man, … I will send … I will gather together my”
13:26	nlo7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἐρχόμενον	1	Christians debate exactly what it means in this verse for the Son of Man to be **coming**. Some think he is **coming** to God’s heavenly throne room. Others think he is **coming** back to earth. If possible, use a form that does not explicitly state where he is coming. Alternate translation: “traveling” or “going”
13:26	h4z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **power** and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as someone who is very powerful and glorious” or “very powerfully and gloriously”
13:27	nsyo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπισυνάξει	1	Here Jesus implies that the Son of Man will cause the angels to **gather together** his elect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he will have them gather together” or “he will command them to gather together”
13:27	a1z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun to mean elect people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this word in [13:20](../13/20.md). Alternate translation: “his elect people” or “the people whom he has elected”
13:27	u1vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων, ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ	1	These two phrases mean similar things. The phrase **from the four winds** indicates that the elect are gathered from every direction. The phrase **from the end of the earth to the end of heaven** indicates that they are gathered from the farthest places. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the two phrases and emphasize in another way the complete range of this gathering. Alternate translation: “from even the farthest points in every direction”
13:27	vpb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων	1	The phrase **the four winds** refers to the four primary directions: north, south, east, and west, and so includes every place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the north, south, east, and west” or “from every place”
13:27	aqk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ	1	Here, the phrase **the end of the earth to the end of heaven** refers to the parts of the world that are the farthest away. Jesus means that the elect will be gathered from every place, no matter how far away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the nearest to the farthest places” or “from even the farthest places”
13:28	rt1o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to speak about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,”
13:28	c99s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ἀπὸ & τῆς συκῆς, μάθετε τὴν παραβολήν	1	To teach the disciples, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “learn from this illustration concerning the fig tree”
13:28	u8ha		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τῆς συκῆς & ἤδη ὁ κλάδος αὐτῆς ἁπαλὸς γένηται, καὶ ἐκφύῃ τὰ φύλλα	1	The phrase **fig tree** represents fig trees in general, not one particular fig tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “fig trees … their branches already become tender, and they put out leaves”
13:28	ti6e			ἤδη ὁ κλάδος αὐτῆς ἁπαλὸς γένηται	1	Here, the clause **its branch already becomes tender** means that **the fig tree** has begun to grow new branches, which are **tender** when they are new. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it grows new twigs” or “it sprouts fresh branches”
13:28	z417		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ θέρος	1	In the location to which Jesus is referring, **summer** is the time of year when trees and plants grow and produce fruit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a term for a season in which plants and trees grow. Alternate translation: “the time for things to grow” or “the hot season”
13:29	q53b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	Here, the phrase all these things refers back to what Jesus has described in [13:5–23](../13/05.md) or perhaps [13:5–27](../13/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the things I have told you about”
13:29	w1k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγγύς ἐστιν	1	Here, the word translated **it** could: (1) refer to the coming of the Son of Man and the gathering of the elect, as described in [13:26–27](../13/26.md). Alternate translation: “his coming is near” or (if you expressed Son of Man in the first person) “my coming is near” (2) be translated as “he” and refer to the Son of Man. Alternate translation: “he is near” or (if you expressed Son of Man in the first person) “I am near”
13:29	z2pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπὶ θύραις	1	The phrase **at the doors** indicates that something or someone is very near and ready to enter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “ready to enter” or “about to arrive”
13:30	m7ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη	1	Here, **generation** represents the people who are part of the generation, which means that they are adults who are alive at the same time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of this generation”
13:30	tg35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη	1	Christians debate whom Jesus was referring to with the phrase **this generation**. See the chapter introduction for more information. Two possibilities are most likely. Jesus could be referring to: (1) the people who were alive while he was saying these words. Alternate translation: “people who are alive right now” (2) the people who will be alive when the things that he has described begin to happen. Alternate translation: “people who will be alive then”
13:30	h72r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ	1	Jesus is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase **pass away**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not die”
13:30	h7dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **certainly not** and the negative verb **pass away**. Alternate translation: “will certainly remain”
13:30	elbx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”
13:30	t66q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα πάντα	1	Here, as in [13:29](../13/29.md), the phrase all these things refers back to what Jesus has described in [13:5–23](../13/05.md) or perhaps [13:5–27](../13/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all the things I have told you about”
13:31	k4zb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ	1	Here Jesus refers two main components of creation, **heaven** and **earth**, to refer to all of creation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All creation” or “The universe”
13:31	ah6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ & λόγοι μου	1	Here, the phrase **my words** represents what Jesus has said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things I have spoken”
13:31	cq65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **certainly not** and the negative verb **pass away**. Alternate translation: “will always remain” or “will always be true”
13:31	gf5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”
13:32	orjh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	περὶ δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας	1	Here, the phrase **But concerning** introduces the next topic that Jesus wants to talk about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next topic. Alternate translation: “Next, I will talk about that day or the hour. About them”
13:32	ap3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας	1	The terms **day** and **hour** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “that specific time”
13:32	km5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας	1	Here Jesus is referring to the exact moment when he will return to this world, which will also be the end of the current time period. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the day or hour when I will return” or “the timing of my second coming”
13:32	go3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδεὶς οἶδεν; οὐδὲ οἱ ἄγγελοι ἐν οὐρανῷ, οὐδὲ ὁ Υἱός, εἰ μὴ ὁ Πατήρ	1	If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only the Father knows and no one else, neither the angels in heaven, nor the Son”
13:32	z3q9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ὁ Υἱός & ὁ Πατήρ	1	**Son** and **Father** are important titles that describes the relationship between Jesus the **Son** and God the **Father**. Be sure to retain these titles in your translation.
13:32	c1b2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱός	1	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son”
13:33	zqyv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	βλέπετε, ἀγρυπνεῖτε, καὶ προσεύχεσθε, οὐκ οἴδατε γὰρ πότε ὁ καιρός ἐστιν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Because you do not know when the time is, be alert! Stay awake and pray”
13:33	ovuh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέπετε	1	Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. He means that they need to make sure that they are ready for what is going to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar idea in [13:9](../13/09.md). Alternate translation: “Be prepared” or “Pay attention”
13:33	kdjn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἀγρυπνεῖτε, καὶ προσεύχεσθε	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **Stay awake and pray**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “Stay awake.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
13:33	pj0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀγρυπνεῖτε	1	Here Jesus speaks of being alert and watchful as if it were staying **awake**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be watchful” or “Remain vigilant”
13:33	i43k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ καιρός ἐστιν	1	Here Jesus is referring to the exact moment when he will return to this world, which will also be the end of the current time period. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I will come back” or “my second coming will be”
13:34	ygl0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables	ὡς ἄνθρωπος ἀπόδημος	1	To teach the disciples, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: It is as a man on journey”
13:34	iwt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς	1	Here Jesus implies that what he has said about the need to be watchful and alert is like the parable he is about to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What I have told you is like this:” or “Your situation can be illustrated in this way:”
13:34	w4dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοὺς τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having empowered his servants, each to do his work”
13:34	huof		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ	1	Here Jesus implies that the man gave his servants **authority** to do the specific tasks or **work** that he told **each** of them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to each servant authority over his own work”
13:34	xp0s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	τῷ θυρωρῷ & ἵνα γρηγορῇ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “the doorkeeper, ‘Stay alert;’”
13:34	cuz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ θυρωρῷ	1	A **doorkeeper** is a person who guards an entrance into a building and makes sure that only certain people can enter. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of guard, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the servant who guarded the door”
13:34	g7j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γρηγορῇ	1	Here Jesus implies that the man who owned the house **commanded the doorkeeper** to **stay alert** in general but especially to be ready for when he returned and wanted to enter into his house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he should stay alert for him to come back” or “he should stay alert for his return home”
13:35	z7wi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, the word **therefore** indicates that Jesus is about to tell his disciples how to apply the story he told in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing an application. Alternate translation: “as a result” of “and so”
13:35	c96l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γρηγορεῖτε & οὐκ οἴδατε γὰρ, πότε ὁ κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρχεται, ἢ ὀψὲ, ἢ μεσονύκτιον, ἢ ἀλεκτοροφωνίας, ἢ πρωΐ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clauses give the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you do not know when the lord of the house is coming—whether evening or midnight or at rooster crowing or at morning—stay alert”
13:35-36	gx23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρχεται & εὕρῃ	1	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first-person form. Alternate translation: “I, the lord of the house, am coming … I might find”
13:35	k2yy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρχεται	1	Here Jesus identifies himself with the man from the parable he just told. This man owned the **house** and left on a journey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am coming, just as the servants did not know when the lord of the house was coming”
13:35	s8j9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀλεκτοροφωνίας	1	A **rooster** is a large bird, a male chicken, which often calls out with a loud sound around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “when the birds begin to sing”
13:35	v6it		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀλεκτοροφωνίας	1	In Jesus’ culture, people referred to the period of the night soon before the sun rose as the time of **rooster crowing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that refers to the hours before dawn. Alternate translation: “before dawn” or “in the hours before the sunrise”
13:36	wd97			εὕρῃ	1	Alternate translation: “unexpectedly”
13:36	mh8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καθεύδοντας	1	Here Jesus speaks of people who are not ready for his return as if they were **sleeping**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “like someone who is asleep” or “unprepared for his return” or “not being watchful”
13:37	wmic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces a further development of what Jesus has been saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development in what someone is saying, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,”
13:37	rbkd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πᾶσιν	1	Jesus is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to every person” or “all men and women”
14:intro	uk36				0	# Mark 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Jesus’ last days and death (14:1–15:47)\n      * The chief priests and scribes plan to kill Jesus (14:1–2)\n      * A woman anoints Jesus (14:3–9)\n      * Judas agrees to hand Jesus over (14:10–11)\n      * Jesus’ last meal with his disciples (14:12–25)\n      * Jesus predicts that his disciples will deny him (14:26–31)\n      * Jesus prays in Gethsemane (14:32–42)\n      * Judas hands Jesus over, and the disciples flee (26:43–52)\n      * Jesus’ trial before the Jewish council (14:53–65)\n      * Peter denies Jesus three times (14:66–72)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [14:27](../14/27.md), which is a quote from [Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Perfumed oil\n\nIn [14:3–9](../14/03.md), a woman anoints Jesus with perfumed oil. The kind that the woman uses was very expensive. People would use these oils to make themselves look and smell good. Also, they used oils to anoint corpses before they buried them, possibly to keep them from smelling. In this story, the woman uses the oil to honor Jesus, and Jesus also interprets it as a preparation for his burial. Make sure that your readers understand what anointing with this kind of oil means. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/oil]])\n\n### Denying Jesus\n\nThroughout this chapter, Jesus and his disciples speak about “denying” Jesus. If a disciple denies Jesus, the disciple claims to have no connection with Jesus, neither knowing nor following him. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language.\n\n### Jesus’ trial before the Jewish council\n\nIn [14:53–65](../14/53.md), Mark narrates Jesus’ trial before the Jewish council. Since Jerusalem was governed by the Roman empire, the Roman governor, Pilate, was the only one who could actually have someone executed. So, the Jewish council needed to find evidence against Jesus that proved that he did something for which the Roman governor would execute him. This trial, then, was a preliminary step. They first needed to find good evidence to condemn Jesus, and then they needed to present evidence to the Roman governor that would lead to him executing Jesus. While you should not explain all these details in your translation, make sure that your translation does fit with this general idea.\n\n### The Son of Man coming on the clouds of heaven\n\nIn [14:62](../14/62.md), Jesus indicates that he, the Son of Man, will “come” on the clouds of heaven. However, he does not indicate the location to which he will “come.” Christians debate whether Jesus is describing his return to earth or his enthronement in heaven. If possible, your translation should allow for both possibilities. See the notes on this verse for translation options.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Body and bread, blood and cup\n\nIn [14:22–25](../14/22.md), Jesus identifies bread as “my body” and wine in a cup as “my blood of the covenant.” These statements can be understood in at least three primary ways: (1) the bread and wine somehow become Jesus’ body and blood; (2) Jesus’ body and blood are present, physically or spiritually, in the bread and wine; or (3) the bread and wine memorialize or symbolize Jesus’ body and blood. Christians are divided on this question, and statements that link body and blood to bread and wine are very significant in the Bible and in Christian teaching. For these reasons, it is best to preserve these statements without expressing them as similes or in another nonfigurative way. If you must express them in another way, see the notes on [14:22–25](../14/22.md) for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 13, 17, 27, 30, 32, 33, 34, 37, 41, 43, 45, 51, 53, 61, 63, 66, 67. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])\n\n### Abba, Father\n\nIn [14:36](../14/36.md), Mark indicates that Jesus says “Abba, Father” when he prays. “Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds. The word that follows, which is the word for “father” in Greek, could be Mark’s explanation of what “Abba” means. On the other hand, Jesus might have used this Greek word in his prayer. If possible, spell out “Abba” as it sounds in your language and then use the word you use to translate “Father” when it refers to God. See the notes on this verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n### Judas’ kiss for Jesus\n\nIn [14:44–45](../14/44.md), Mark describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. In this culture, when men greeted other men who were family or friends, they would kiss them, probably on one cheek or on both cheeks. If men would not greet each other with a kiss in your culture, you could explain the purpose of the kiss, or you could translate the expression in a more general way. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/kiss]])
14:1	hwb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,”
14:1	xa8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ Πάσχα καὶ τὰ Ἄζυμα	1	Here Mark’s readers would have known that **the Passover** was a festival that took place on the first day of the week-long celebration named **the Festival of Unleavened Bread**, so Mark speaks of the two as one event. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread, the Passover,” or “the Passover, the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread,”
14:1	ve8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν δόλῳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **deceit**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “deceitfully” or “cleverly”
14:1	qtym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποκτείνωσιν	1	Here Mark implies that the chief priests and elders would have other people **kill** Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might have him killed”
14:2	d5oz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the chief priests and scribes wanted to seize Jesus “by deceit.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for something, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “They were seeking a way to do this by deceit because” or “Here is why they needed to be deceptive:”
14:2	w7g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον & μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, μήποτε ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that they would not do it during the festival, so that there would not be a riot of the people”
14:2	em4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔλεγον	1	The pronoun **they** refers to “the chief priests and the scribes” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the chief priests and the scribes were saying”
14:2	fk19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ	1	The phrase **Not during the festival** refers to not arresting Jesus during the festival. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We must not arrest him during the festival”
14:2	fsxr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ἑορτῇ	1	Here, the **festival** refers to the Passover and the Festival of Unleavened Bread, as indicated in [14:1](../14/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the festival of Passover and Unleavened Bread” or “the Festival of Unleavened Bread, including the Passover”
14:2	dzh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ λαοῦ	1	This means specifically the great crowds of **people** who were in the city of Jerusalem and who liked Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the people who listen to Jesus” or “of the people who are here who follow Jesus”
14:3	zuhe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. This event most likely happened about the same time as the chief priests and scribes were planning how to kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,”
14:3	owfp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἐν Βηθανίᾳ, ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ	1	Both uses of the pronoun **he** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “And Jesus being in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, Jesus reclining to eat”
14:3	hh81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ	1	Here Mark could be implying that: (1) **Simon** had once been a **leper** but had been healed. Alternate translation: “of Simon, who had been healed of leprosy” (2) the house was owned by **Simon**, who was a **leper**, but he did not live there. Alternate translation: “owned by Simon the leper” (3) **the leper** was a nickname for **Simon**, who did not actually have leprosy. Alternate translation: “of Simon, who was nicknamed ‘the leper’”
14:3	bf84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σίμωνος	1	The word **Simon** is the name of a man. This is a different man than Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot.
14:3	sh4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “he sitting down to eat” or “he eating”
14:3	s5v0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἦλθεν γυνὴ ἔχουσα ἀλάβαστρον μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς	1	Here Mark introduces a woman into the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman who had an alabaster jar of very precious perfumed oil of pure nard. She came to Jesus”
14:3	pkwr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀλάβαστρον μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς	1	Mark is using the possessive form to describe **an alabaster jar** that is filled with **very precious perfumed oil**, which he identifies as **pure nard**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “an alabaster jar full of very precious perfumed oil, specifically nard”
14:3	nl8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀλάβαστρον	1	The word **alabaster** is the name of a soft, white stone. People stored precious and valuable items in jars made from alabaster. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of stone, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a white stone jar”
14:3	hk2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μύρου & πολυτελοῦς	1	This **oil** had fragrant additives. To make themselves have a nice smell, people would rub the oil on themselves or sprinkle their clothing with it. Mark indicates that this was particularly **precious** oil. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of oil, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “of very precious oil with perfume in it”
14:3	yb3w			πολυτελοῦς	1	Alternate translation: “very expensive”
14:3	fqa9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	νάρδου πιστικῆς	1	Here Mark indicates that the **oil** was made from the roots of a **nard** plant, which is sometimes called “spikenard.” If your readers would not be familiar with **nard** plants, you could use a descriptive phrase or a more general expression. Alternate translation: “of pure extract from spikenard roots” or “made only from plant roots”
14:4	cuof		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
14:4	attu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀγανακτοῦντες πρὸς ἑαυτούς	1	Here Mark could be implying that: (1) the people spoke the following words to each other. Alternate translation: “being very angry and saying to one another” (2) the people thought the following words without saying them. Alternate translation: “being very angry and thinking”
14:4-5	y4z3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	πρὸς ἑαυτούς, εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν? & ἠδύνατο γὰρ τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι ἐπάνω δηναρίων τριακοσίων, καὶ δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς & καὶ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asking for what the waste of the perfumed oil had happened and saying that the perfumed oil was able to have been sold for more than 300 denarii and given to the poor. And”
14:4	v57p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν?	1	The people there are using the question form to show that they think the woman wasted the perfume. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is no reason for this waste of the perfumed oil.” or “What a waste of the perfumed oil!”
14:4	g9qw			εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν	1	Alternate translation: “What is the purpose for this waste of the perfumed oil”
14:4	glel		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **waste**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is she wasting this perfumed oil”
14:4	gjmg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μύρου	1	See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [14:3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “of the oil with perfume in it”
14:5	qeip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why these people say that the woman wasted the perfume. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “We say that because” or “As a matter of fact,”
14:5	y113		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠδύνατο & τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι ἐπάνω δηναρίων τριακοσίων, καὶ δοθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would have done the action, it is clear from the context that would have been the woman. Alternate translation: “she was able to sell this perfumed oil for more than 300 denarii and give it”
14:5	xfzs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ μύρον	1	See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [14:3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “oil with perfume in it”
14:5	t4p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	ἐπάνω δηναρίων τριακοσίων	1	The word **denarii** refers to silver coins, each equivalent to about one day’s wage for a hired worker. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. See how you translated **denarii** in [6:37](../06/37.md). Alternate translation: “for more than 300 silver coins” or “more than 300 days’ wages”
14:5	k83q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπάνω δηναρίων τριακοσίων, καὶ δοθῆναι	1	Here these people imply that the perfumed oil could have been sold for **more than 300 denarii**, and this money is what would been **given to the poor**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for more than 300 denarii, which could have been given”
14:5	h62k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πτωχοῖς	1	These people are using the adjective **poor** as a noun to mean poor people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor”
14:5	kmpd			καὶ ἐνεβριμῶντο αὐτῇ	1	Alternate translation: “And they were criticizing her harshly because of what she had done”
14:6	gz8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces how Jesus responded in contrast to how the other people there responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast,”
14:6	cz95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄφετε αὐτήν	1	Here, the command **Leave her alone** means that these people should stop rebuking and criticizing the woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Stop scolding her” or “Do not criticize her”
14:6	r9wt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke these people for saying what they did about how the woman acted. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not cause trouble for her.” or “Stop causing trouble for her!”
14:6	f4yj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε? καλὸν ἔργον	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **trouble** and **work**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “are you troubling her … something good”
14:6	oewt			ἐν ἐμοί	1	Alternate translation: “to me”
14:7	rjyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Jesus rebukes these people for saying that the woman should have given money to the poor instead of pouring the perfume on Jesus’ head. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a rebuke, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “I am rebuking you because” or “Here is why I say that:”
14:7	tc3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πτωχοὺς	1	Jesus is using the adjective **poor** as a noun to mean poor people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor”
14:7	vs5f			αὐτοῖς εὖ ποιῆσαι	1	Alternate translation: “to give money to them”
14:8	z479		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ ἔσχεν ἐποίησεν	1	Here Jesus implies that the woman did what she was able to do to serve and help Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “She did what she was able to do” or “What she could do, she did”
14:8	q5i1			προέλαβεν	1	Alternate translation: “She acted beforehand”
14:8	al01		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὸν ἐνταφιασμόν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **burial**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for when I am buried”
14:9	ysc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον & καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the actions, you could use indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “people preach the gospel … they will also speak what she did”
14:9	u2ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μνημόσυνον αὐτῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **remembrance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that she is remembered” or “as a way to remember her”
14:10	npzw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
14:10	tq5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “of the 12 apostles” or “of the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”
14:10	br8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀπῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came away”
14:10	z71f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς	1	**Judas** did not hand Jesus over to the **chief priests** yet. Rather, he went to make arrangements with them about doing that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that he might arrange with them how he would hand him over to them” or “so that he might offer to hand him over to them”
14:11	kzk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκούσαντες	1	Here Mark implies that the chief priests **heard** that Judas wanted to hand Jesus over. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having heard that Judas Iscariot wanted to betray Jesus to them”
14:11	f7ek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπηγγείλαντο αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι	1	Here Mark implies that the chief priests **promised to give him silver** if he handed Jesus over to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “promised to give him silver if he handed Jesus over to them”
14:11	m4il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀργύριον	1	Here, **silver** represents coins made from silver. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “silver coins”
14:12	uhvr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
14:12	dby4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τῇ πρώτῃ	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day one”
14:12	r9my		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔθυον	1	The pronoun **they** refers to Jewish people in general. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a word or phrase that refers to Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “Jewish people were sacrificing”
14:12	vxax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1	Here Mark uses the name of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the lamb that God had commanded Jews to kill and eat for their celebration meal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lambs for their Passover meals”
14:12	yqex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	θέλεις & φάγῃς	1	Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the word **you** throughout this verse is singular.
14:12	vok1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀπελθόντες	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come away”
14:12	k4fk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φάγῃς	1	Here the disciples imply that will **eat the Passover** with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we may eat”
14:12	bel5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	2	Jesus’ disciples are using the name of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”
14:13	suny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς & ὑμῖν	1	Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** would both be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural.
14:13	cijy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὑπάγετε	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “Come” instead of **Go**. Alternate translation: “Come”
14:13	a7xg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κεράμιον ὕδατος	1	Here, the phrase **pitcher** refers to a large earthen jug, which the man would likely be carrying on his shoulder. This large jug was full of **water**. If your language has its own term for a large container that people use to transport water, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “a jug full of water”
14:14	i344		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἴπατε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅτι ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within quotations. Alternate translation: “tell the master of that house that the Teacher wants to know where his guest room is, where he can eat the Passover meal with his disciples”
14:14	imqg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ	1	The **master of that house** is the man who owns the house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the man whose house it is”
14:14	z6lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω?	1	Jesus instructs the two disciples to ask about **Where** the **guest room** is, but this question always implies that the disciples are asking for permission to use the **guest room**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Also, you could express the idea as a request rather than as a question. Alternate translation: “Will you allow me to use my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples?” or “Please allow me to use my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples.”
14:14	yhtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ κατάλυμά μου	1	Here, Jesus is instructing the disciples to use the possessive form to describe a **guest room** that has been reserved for Jesus. Jesus does not own this guest room. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the guest reserved for me” or “the guest room prepared for me”
14:14	q3pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1	Jesus instructs his disciples to use the name of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar idea in [14:13](../14/13.md). Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”
14:15	z0xb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ὑμῖν	1	Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.
14:15	jlci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀνάγαιον μέγα	1	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space that people could use for a celebration meal. Alternate translation: “a big hall” or “a large dining room”
14:15	x3zk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that the man who owned the house did it. Alternate translation: “one that he has furnished and made ready”
14:15	ujqy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον	1	The terms **furnished** and **ready** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “ready for us to use” or “furnished with everything we need”
14:15	k4t7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here, when Jesus says **us**, he is referring to himself and his disciples, including the two he is addressing here, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.
14:16	sb35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came”
14:16	ozjd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὗρον καθὼς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς	1	Here Mark means that what Jesus **said to them** is exactly what happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what he said to them is what occurred” or “it happened just as he said to them”
14:16	wkh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ Πάσχα	1	Jesus instructs his disciples to use the name of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar idea in [14:13](../14/13.md). Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”
14:17	i1q1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus and **the Twelve** came to the room in the house in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he comes with the Twelve to the house”
14:17	t0q5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes”
14:17	bheu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had chosen to be apostles”
14:18	cwl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνακειμένων	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture. Since Mark clarifies that they are **eating**, you do not need to explain the meaning of the action. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [14:3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “sitting down”
14:18	dg95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὁ ἐσθίων μετ’ ἐμοῦ	1	Here Jesus further describes the **one** who will hand him over as someone who is **eating with** him. Since all the disciples were eating with him, Jesus is not making distinctions between disciples. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “you who are eating with me”
14:19	layt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤρξαντο λυπεῖσθαι, καὶ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “What Jesus said began to grieve them, and they began”
14:19	v3a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἷς κατὰ εἷς	1	The phrase **one by one** indicates that each of the disciples spoke to Jesus in sequence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one at a time”
14:19	f13p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι ἐγώ?	1	Here the disciples could be using the question form: (1) to tell Jesus that they would never hand him over. In this case, you could express the idea as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “I am not the one!” (2) to ask a hesitant question. In this case, they are unsure whether they would hand Jesus over. Alternate translation: “Can it really be me?”
14:19	cy1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μήτι ἐγώ	1	The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Surely it is not I who will hand you over”
14:20	a0c1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the disciples were asking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
14:20	n1tv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “of the 12 apostles” or “of the 12 men whom I have chosen to be apostles”
14:20	htn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὁ ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον	1	Here Jesus describes one specific way of eating food in his culture to refer to eating in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one taking food from the same plate with me” or “the one participating in this meal with me”
14:20	fory		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὁ ἐμβαπτόμενος	1	Here Jesus is further describing the **one of the Twelve** who will hand him over. He is not identifying which one of **the Twelve** it will be. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “one of you who are dipping”
14:21	m02t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation about what Jesus has said about one of the Twelve betraying him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Yes,”
14:21	cif4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ; οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, depart just as it has been written about me. But woe to that man through whom I am handed over”
14:21	h35q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	ὑπάγει	1	Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe a future event. He does this to emphasize that the future event is sure to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense here and express the certainty in another way. Alternate translation: “will surely depart”
14:21	q5l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ὑπάγει	1	Here, **departs** is a polite way to refer to dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable polite way to refer to dying, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “passes away” or “dies”
14:21	hl6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Jesus implies that what has been written can be found in the Old Testament Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written in the Scriptures”
14:21	b13q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who wrote the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote” or “the Scriptures testify”
14:21	f51n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who hands over the Son of Man”
14:21	ct78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγεννήθη ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the man’s mother. Alternate translation: “that man’s mother had not given birth to him”
14:22	ne53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄρτον	1	The term **bread** refers to a loaf of bread, which is a lump of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. The **bread** referred to here was a flat loaf of unleavened **bread** that was eaten as part of the Passover meal. Alternate translation: “a loaf of unleavened bread”
14:22	oqv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐλογήσας	1	Here Mark could be implying that Jesus **blessed**: (1) God for providing the food. Alternate translation: “having blessed God” or “having praised God” (2) the food. Alternate translation: “having blessed it” or “having asked God to make it holy”
14:22	ula2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔκλασεν	1	Here Matthew means that Jesus broke the bread in pieces so that it could be served to the disciples. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he divided the bread into servings” or “he broke the bread into smaller pieces”
14:22	ukuc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	λάβετε	1	Here Jesus implies that he wants the disciples to **Take** the pieces of bread that he gave to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Take these pieces of bread”
14:22	qqcd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λάβετε	1	Here Jesus implies that the disciples should eat the pieces of bread after they **Take** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Take and eat”
14:22	adb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου	1	Here Jesus identifies the bread as his **body**. This figure of speech has been interpreted in a number of ways. The bread could somehow become Jesus’ **body**, or Jesus’ **body** could be present in some way when people eat the bread, or the bread could represent or memorialize Jesus’ **body**. Because of the variety of interpretations and the significance of this metaphor, you should preserve the metaphor if there is any way to do so. If you must express the metaphor in a different way, use a form that could fit with as many of the listed interpretations as possible. Alternate translation: “This functions as my body”
14:23	u6rc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ποτήριον	1	Here Mark uses the word **cup** to refer both to it and to the drink inside the cup, which in Jesus’ culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a cup full of wine” or “some wine”
14:23	whqj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔπιον ἐξ αὐτοῦ πάντες	1	Here Mark implies that the disciples took turns drinking from the cup until they had all had a drink. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “each of them drank from it” or “one by one they all drank from it”
14:24	hs24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης	1	Here Jesus identifies the cup of wine as his **blood of the covenant**. This figure of speech has been interpreted in a number of ways. The wine could somehow become Jesus’ **blood**, or Jesus’ **blood** could be present in some way when people drink the wine, or the wine could represent or memorialize Jesus’ **blood**. Because of the variety of interpretations and the significance of this metaphor, you should preserve the metaphor if there is any way to do so. If you must express the metaphor in a different way, use a form that could fit with as many of the listed interpretations as possible. Alternate translation: “This functions as my blood of the covenant”
14:24	cdol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτό	1	Here, the pronoun **This** refers to the wine in the cup that Mark mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the wine more directly. Alternate translation: “The wine in this cup”
14:24	nj85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης	1	Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe how his **blood** inaugurates or initiates **the covenant**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “my blood that initiates the covenant”
14:24	m329		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τῆς διαθήκης	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **of the covenant**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “of the new covenant.” The word “new” may have been accidentally added here because it appears in the parallel story in Luke (see [Luke 22:20](../luk/22/20.md)). If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
14:24	q5hn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον	1	Here Jesus means that he will die and his blood will be **poured out** of his body. He is using words that people would use to describe how animals would be offered to God: these animals would be killed and then their blood would be **poured out** on or near the altar. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which, when I die, is being poured out” or “which is being shed”
14:24	pt5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκχυννόμενον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, Jesus implies that he himself does it when he dies. Alternate translation: “I am pouring out”
14:24	p5vr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλῶν	1	Jesus is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”
14:25	mxwn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ πίω	1	The words translated **certainly not any longer** are three negative words. In this construction, the second and third negatives do not cancel the first. Instead, they give greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use three negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a triple negative here. If your language does not use three negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “I will by no means any longer drink” or “I will certainly no longer drink”
14:25	t7ai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου	1	Here, the phrase **fruit of the vine** refers to wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “alcohol made from grapes” or “wine”
14:25	qyf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης	1	Here Jesus uses the term **day** to refer to a particular moment in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that hour” or “the moment”
14:25	y1pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸ πίνω καινὸν	1	Here, the word **new** could go with: (1) **drink**. In this case, Jesus means that he will drink the wine in a **new** way. Alternate translation: “I drink it in a new way” or “I drink it anew” (2) the wine. In this case, Jesus means that he will drink new wine. Alternate translation: “I drink new wine”
14:26	b994		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
14:26	l996		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὑμνήσαντες	1	A **hymn** is a song or poem that is sung to praise God. The Jews would traditionally sing a psalm from Psalms 113–118 at the end of the Passover meal, so the **hymn** that Jesus and his disciples sang was likely one of these psalms. If your readers would not be familiar with a **hymn**, you could use the name for religious songs in your culture, if you have them, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “having sung a psalm” or “having sung a song of praise to God”
14:27	pu4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε, ὅτι γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clauses gives the basis for the claim that the first clause makes. Alternate translation: “It is written, ‘I will strike the shepherd and the sheep will be scattered.’ Therefore, you all will be caused to stumble”
14:27	lty4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε	1	Here Jesus speaks as if his disciples were going to **stumble**. He means that they will reject and desert him because of what will happen to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You all will desert me” or “You all will run away from me”
14:27	zaxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You all will stumble”
14:27	gkb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1	Here, Jesus uses the phrase **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament passage of Scripture, ([Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “you can read in the Scriptures” or “it says in the book of Zechariah”
14:27	jp51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through Zechariah. Alternate translation: “Zechariah wrote” or “God spoke through Zechariah”
14:27	qzzv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written that God will strike the shepherd and the sheep will be scattered”
14:27	cv7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if the Messiah were a **shepherd** and as if his people were **sheep**. He means that the Messiah is the leader, and his people are like helpless sheep without him. Since Jesus is quoting these words from the Old Testament, if possible preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “I will strike the person who is like a shepherd and those who are like sheep will be scattered”
14:27	ui7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πατάξω	1	In this quotation, God is the one speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I, God, will strike”
14:27	jjqt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πατάξω	1	Here, the word **strike** means to hit someone hard enough to kill that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I will fatally strike” or “I will strike down”
14:27	w2az		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the sheep will scatter”
14:28	dm1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθῆναί με	1	Here, the phrase **raised up** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am restored to life”
14:28	qi4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, Jesus could be implying that: (1) God will do it. Alternate translation: “God raises me up” (2) Jesus himself will do it. Alternate translation: “I raise myself up”
14:28	ghds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προάξω ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν	1	Here Jesus implies that once he is in **Galilee**, his disciples will meet him there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I will go before you into Galilee, where you will be with me again”
14:28	p4lk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προάξω	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **go**. Alternate translation: “I will come before”
14:29	u6sb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what Peter said in contrast to what Jesus said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
14:29	op1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ καὶ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται	1	Peter is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that **all** might be **caused to stumble**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “Even were all to be caused to stumble”
14:29	j961		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκανδαλισθήσονται	1	Here Peter speaks as if all the disciples were going to **stumble**. He means that they will reject and desert Jesus because of what will happen to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [14:27](../14/27.md). Alternate translation: “will desert you” or “will run away from you”
14:29	amz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σκανδαλισθήσονται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will stumble”
14:29	div5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐγώ	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not be caused to stumble”
14:30	fyuv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σοι & σὺ	1	Because Jesus is speaking to Peter, the word **you** is singular throughout this verse.
14:30	z2q9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σήμερον, ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ	1	Here, the word **today** refers to a period of 24 hours. In Jesus’ culture, people usually considered sunset to be the start of the next day. So, Jesus is indicating that Peter will deny him that night, before the sun rises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different phrase that refers to this period of time. Alternate translation: “during this very night,” or “before the sun rises again,”
14:30	i4g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι	1	A **rooster** is a large bird, a male chicken, which often calls out with a loud sound around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. See how you translated this word in [13:35](../13/35.md). Alternate translation: “a bird sings”
14:30	egi5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ	1	Here Jesus implies that Peter **will deny** that he knows Jesus and is his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you will deny three times that you know me” or “you will deny three times that you are my disciple”
14:31	s9dj			ἐκπερισσῶς	1	Alternate translation: “insistently” or “forcefully”
14:31	dfpl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν δέῃ με συναποθανεῖν σοι	1	Peter is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that it might be **necessary** to **die with** Jesus. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “Even were it necessary for me to die with you”
14:31	w3bw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐὰν δέῃ με συναποθανεῖν σοι	1	Here Peter means that if it were **necessary** for him **to die** if he remained faithful to Jesus, he would rather do that than **deny** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Even if it were necessary for me, to keep from denying you, to die with you” or “Even if I would have to die with you if I stayed with you”
14:31	t33b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σοι & σε	1	Because Peter is speaking to Jesus, the word **you** throughout this verse is singular.
14:31	kk3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ μή σε ἀπαρνήσομαι	1	Here Peter implies that he **will certainly not deny** that he knows Jesus and is his disciple. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [14:30](../14/30.md). Alternate translation: “I will certainly not deny that I know you” or “I will certainly not deny that I am your disciple”
14:31	w9zk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μή	1	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”
14:31	z9le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡσαύτως & καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον	1	The phrase **they all also were speaking in the same manner** means that all of the disciples were saying the same thing that Peter said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they all also were saying the same kind of thing” or “they all also were declaring that they would not deny Jesus”
14:32	ni66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
14:32	x67u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, καθίσατε ὧδε, ἕως προσεύξωμαι	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “tells his disciples to sit there while he prayed”
14:33	i7a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παραλαμβάνει τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην, μετ’ αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἤρξατο ἐκθαμβεῖσθαι καὶ ἀδημονεῖν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was something that Jesus was thinking about. Alternate translation: “he takes along Peter and James and John with him. And something began to distress and greatly trouble him” or “as he takes along Peter and James and John, what he was thinking began to distress and greatly trouble him”
14:33	o38r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐκθαμβεῖσθαι καὶ ἀδημονεῖν	1	The terms **distressed** and **greatly troubled** mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to be extremely distressed” or “to be very troubled”
14:34	krj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	περίλυπός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was something that Jesus was thinking about. Alternate translation: “Something grieves my soul very much” or “What I am thinking grieves my soul very much”
14:34	eyw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου	1	Here, **soul** refers to the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It is I who am”
14:34	ic1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἕως θανάτου	1	Jesus is using the phrase **to death** to describe the extent of his grief. He uses this overstatement in order to show how very **grieved** he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “so much so that I cannot stand it much longer” or “as if I were about to die”
14:35	fq5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προελθὼν μικρὸν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come a little father”
14:35	i78e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔπιπτεν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	In Mark’s culture, falling **to the ground** refers to kneeling down and putting one’s face close to the ground. This was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he bowed down” or “he lay down to show respect”
14:35	lsf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	προσηύχετο ἵνα, εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν, παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “was praying, ‘If it is possible, let the hour pass from me’”
14:35	gj74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα	1	Here, when Jesus prays that he **the hour might pass from him**, he is praying that he would not experience **the hour**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the hour might not happen to him” or “he might not have to endure the hour”
14:35	wc6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ ὥρα	1	Here, **hour** represents events that will take place during a specific period of time, described generally as an **hour**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the coming events” or “the things that would happen soon”
14:36	k3ci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ	1	Here Mark uses an Aramaic word for Father (**Abba**) and then the normal word for **Father** in his language. He could be: (1) including the word that Jesus used (**Abba**) and then translating it for his readers. If possible, simply include both words in your translation. If it is necessary, you could use a form that indicates that Mark is translating the word that Jesus used. Alternate translation: “Abba—that is, Father—” (2) indicating that Jesus used both of these words in his prayer. Alternate translation: “Abba, my Father”
14:36	c11w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἀββά	1	The word **Abba** is an Aramaic word meaning **Father**. Jewish people used this word to address their fathers. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since the Aramaic word **Abba** is followed by the Greek word **Father**, it is best to transliterate **Abba** and then give its meaning in your language as Mark does.
14:36	t9r2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	**Father** is an important title that describe the relationship between God the **Father** and Jesus his Son.
14:36	heiq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σοι & παρένεγκε & σύ	1	Because Jesus is speaking to God the Father, the word **you** throughout this verse and the command **Remove** are singular.
14:36	s1r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	παρένεγκε	1	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “I ask that you remove”
14:36	jk6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο	1	Jesus is referring to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a **cup** of bitter-tasting liquid that he would have to drink. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this suffering that is like a cup full of poison” or “this suffering”
14:36	qeu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ τί ἐγὼ θέλω, ἀλλὰ τί σύ	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not do what I will, but do what you will”
14:37	dina		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes”
14:37	ja6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John”
14:37	nwu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λέγει τῷ Πέτρῳ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus woke up **Peter** before speaking to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he wakes up Peter to say to him”
14:37	kp33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Σίμων, καθεύδεις? οὐκ ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke Peter. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “Simon, I see that you were sleeping. You were not able to be alert for one hour.” or “Simon, you were sleeping! You surely should have been able to be alert for one hour!”
14:37	nhqh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	καθεύδεις? οὐκ ἴσχυσας	1	Because Jesus is speaking to Peter, the word **you** throughout this verse is singular.
14:38	k8gj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα	1	Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which the disciples should **pray**. Alternate translation: “in order that” (2) what the disciples should **pray**. Alternate translation: “that”
14:38	qzqe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν	1	Here Jesus speaks as if **temptation** were a location that someone could **enter into**. He is referring to experiencing **temptation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not experience temptation” or “you are kept away from temptation”
14:38	hi36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **temptation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you are not tempted”
14:38	zrp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής	1	The words **spirit** and **flesh** represent people’s spirits and flesh in general, not one particular spirit and flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “People’s spirits indeed are willing, but their flesh is weak”
14:38	c1je		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον	1	Here, **spirit** represents a person’s desires and will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The will indeed wants to do it” or “Inside, you indeed are willing”
14:38	djxc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρόθυμον	1	Here Jesus implies that **the spirit** is **willing** to do what is right, and more specifically what Jesus has asked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what I ask”
14:38	b909		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ & σὰρξ ἀσθενής	1	Here, **flesh** represents a person’s body and actions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the body is weak” or “when you act you are weak”
14:39	utqo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀπελθὼν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come away”
14:39	l9nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον	1	Here, **word** represents what Jesus prayed using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the same things he had prayed the first time” or “the same prayer as earlier”
14:40	zkb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ πάλιν ἐλθὼν, εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the third clause gives the reason for the result that the second clause describes. Alternate translation: “And since their eyes were weighed down, when he came again, he found them sleeping”
14:40	ybmy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθὼν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
14:40	bgyj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	Here, the pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John”
14:40	ht2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1	Here, the clause **their eyes were weighed down** indicates that the three disciples were very tired and sleepy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were exhausted” or “they were very tired”
14:40	hayg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “their eyes were heavy” or “sleepiness weighed their eyes down”
14:40	q1pq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ᾔδεισαν τί ἀποκριθῶσιν αὐτῷ	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus woke the disciples up, and then **they did not know what they might answer him** when he spoke to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he awakened them and spoke to them, they did not know what they might answer him”
14:41	wn89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἔρχεται τὸ τρίτον	1	Here Mark implies that Jesus went away and prayed and then returned to the disciples **the third time**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus again prayed some distance away, and then he comes the third time”
14:41	x7qd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τὸ τρίτον	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “time number three” or “yet again”
14:41	jo0t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to Peter, James, and John”
14:41	cgjm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε	1	This sentence could be: (1) a rhetorical question that Jesus uses to rebuke the disciples. In this case, Jesus is disappointed that the disciples continue to sleep. Alternate translation: “Do you continue to sleep and rest?” (2) a command to continue to sleep and rest. In this case, Jesus means that the time when they were supposed to be alert is over, and they might as well sleep and rest now. Alternate translation: “Go ahead and continue to sleep and rest!” or “You can continue to sleep and rest.”
14:41	lw7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke Peter, James, and John. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is sad that you are still sleeping and resting.” or “You should not still be sleeping and resting!”
14:41	ufrq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε	1	The terms **sleeping** and **resting** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Are you still taking your rest” or “Are you still sleeping soundly”
14:41	wxmq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέχει	1	Here Jesus implies that the disciples have slept **enough**, and they should wake up and be ready to act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “It is enough sleep”
14:41	ae53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡ ὥρα	1	Here, the word **hour** refers to a specific moment in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the moment”
14:41	m72l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ ὥρα	1	Here, Jesus implies that **the hour** is the time when he will suffer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the hour of my suffering”
14:41	msb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word **Behold** draws the attention of the disciples and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks someone to listen, or you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Pay attention:”
14:41	h5u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, am handed over”
14:41	eg9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone hands the Son of Man over”
14:41	uyzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	παραδίδοται	1	Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe a future event that he knows will surely happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense and indicate the certainty in another way. Alternate translation: “will certainly be handed over”
14:41	mcns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς χεῖρας	1	The term **hands** represents power and control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how expressed the similar idea in [9:31](../09/31.md). Alternate translation: “into the power” or “into the control”
14:42	qmm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐγείρεσθε, ἄγωμεν; ἰδοὺ, ὁ παραδιδούς με ἤγγικεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences. Alternate translation: “Behold, the one handing me over has come near. Get up, let us go”
14:42	ruj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Here, the word **Behold** draws the attention of the disciples and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks someone to listen, or you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Pay attention:”
14:43	ytk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ εὐθὺς	1	Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that”
14:43	nz4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν δώδεκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “of the 12 apostles” or “of the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”
14:43	q47k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μετ’ αὐτοῦ ὄχλος	1	Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “a large crowd arrived with him”
14:43	fikk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ξύλων	1	A “club” is a hard piece of wood that a person uses to hit people. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of weapon, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “sticks for hitting people”
14:44	r9cp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δεδώκει δὲ ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν σύσσημον αὐτοῖς λέγων, ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, αὐτός ἐστιν; κρατήσατε αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀπάγετε ἀσφαλῶς	1	To help his readers understand what happens next, Mark provides this background information about how Judas had arranged his betrayal of Jesus with the Jewish leaders. Here Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce the background information which he gives in the rest of this verse. Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Earlier, Judas, who was going to hand him over, had given them a signal. He had said, ‘Whomever I kiss is he. Seize him and lead him away securely’”
14:44	bzj2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σύσσημον	1	Here Mark is referring to an action by which one person communicates to others. More specifically, Judas arranged with the crowd an action that would communicate to them which person was Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a signal to point out Jesus” or “a cue that would indicate whom to seize”
14:44	bgnj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγων, ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, αὐτός ἐστιν; κρατήσατε αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀπάγετε ἀσφαλῶς	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying that whomever he kissed was he, and that they should seize him and lead him away securely”
14:44	bvwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
14:44	w9x9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ὃν ἂν φιλήσω	1	In Jesus’ culture, close friends would greet each other with a kiss. In some cultures, a kiss as a greeting is appropriate, but in other cultures it is not appropriate. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what the kiss means, or you could refer to how close friends would greet each other in your culture. Alternate translation: “Whomever I greet with a kiss” or “Whomever I hug”
14:44	lsh3			αὐτός	1	Alternate translation: “the one you are seeking”
14:44	p6n7			ἀσφαλῶς	1	Alternate translation: “under guard”
14:45	tpd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθὼν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
14:45	zno3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ῥαββεί	1	Judas says **Rabbi** to greet Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Greetings, Rabbi”
14:45	mimr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν	1	In Jesus’ culture, close friends would greet each other with a kiss. See how you expressed the idea in [14:44](../14/44.md). Alternate translation: “he greeted him with a kiss” or “he hugged him”
14:46	y5qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οἱ & ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν	1	The clauses **they laid their hands on {him}** and **seized him** mean similar things. Mark is using the two clauses together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single clause. Alternate translation: “they seized him” or “they took hold of him to arrest him”
14:46	gszh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν	1	Here, **they laid their hands on {him}** means that they grabbed and restrained Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they took hold of him” or “they grabbed him”
14:47	msfy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
14:47	m6b9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	εἷς & τις τῶν παρεστηκότων	1	Mark uses this phrase to bring one of the characters in the story into the center of the action, but he does not identify the person by name. John indicates in his Gospel that it was Peter, but since Mark does not name him here, it would not be appropriate to use his name in your translation. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain man who was standing nearby came forward and”
14:48	gv6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποκριθεὶς	1	Here, the word **answering** indicates that Jesus was responding to what had happened. He was not answering a question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response to what had happened”
14:48	eq25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων συνλαβεῖν με?	1	Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were arresting him for how they were acting. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It was not necessary for you to come out as against a robber, bringing swords and clubs to seize me.” or “There was no reason for you to come out with swords and clubs to seize me, as if I were a robber!”
14:48	umtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν	1	Jesus is saying that the crowds are acting like he is a dangerous **robber** because they have come to arrest him with many weapons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As you arm yourselves to seize a robber,” or “As if I were a bandit who needed to be subdued with force”
14:48	djp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξήλθατε	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “have you gone out”
14:48	gb9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ξύλων	1	See how you translated clubs in [14:43](../14/43.md). Alternate translation: “sticks for hitting people”
14:49	my05		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Here Mark means that Jesus was teaching in the **temple** area. He does not mean that Jesus was in the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”
14:49	t9d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἵνα	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “But all these events have happened so that” or “But what you have done has happened so that”
14:49	t42y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1	Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) a result from what has happened. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (2) a purpose for what has happened. Alternate translation: “in order that”
14:49	d8wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαί	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it might fulfill the Scriptures”
14:50	gqz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἔφυγον πάντες	1	Mark is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all of the disciples fled”
14:51	dd3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	νεανίσκος τις συνηκολούθει αὐτῷ, περιβεβλημένος σινδόνα ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ	1	Here Mark introduces **a certain young man** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain young man was there with Jesus. He was wearing a linen garment over his naked body”
14:51	y5yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σινδόνα	1	The term **linen** refers to a high-quality cloth made from the fibers of the flax plant. If your readers would be unfamiliar with **linen**, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a garment made of fine cloth”
14:51	glq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ	1	Here Mark implies that the young man was not wearing anything except for the **linen garment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and nothing else”
14:51	nag4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κρατοῦσιν αὐτόν	1	Here Mark implies that the men who arrested Jesus seized this young man by his **garment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the men seize him by his garment”
14:52	c4vt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καταλιπὼν τὴν σινδόνα	1	Here Mark implies that the young man, when the crowd seized his garment to arrest him, slipped out of it and left it behind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “letting go of his linen garment and leaving it behind”
14:52	s13h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὴν σινδόνα	1	See how you translated this phrase in [14:51](../14/51.md). Alternate translation: “the garment made of fine cloth”
14:53	bmrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν ἀρχιερέα	1	Here, **the high priest** represents the house where **the high priest** lived. This is clear from the next verse, which refers to “the courtyard of the high priest.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the house of the high priest”
14:54	bzg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces something that was happening at the same time as what Mark narrated in the previous verse (Jesus being led to the house of the high priest). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a simultaneous action, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “While that was happening,”
14:54	l5gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Πέτρος ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ, ἕως	1	Here Mark implies that **Peter** followed **from a distance** because he did not want anyone to see him and arrest him too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Peter, because he did not want to be seen and arrested, was following him from a distance. He went as far as”
14:54	odms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῶν ὑπηρετῶν	1	Here, the word **officers** refers to servants and attendants in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that generally refers to servants and any others who do what they are told. Alternate translation: “the attendants” or “those who served there”
14:55	w23n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” or “Next,”
14:55	wlp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐζήτουν κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ μαρτυρίαν	1	Here Mark means that the **chief priests** and the **Sanhedrin** were trying find evidence against Jesus. In other words, they needed to find people who were willing to say that Jesus had done something very wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “were seeking evidence against Jesus” or “were seeking proof that Jesus had done something wrong”
14:55	xp1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μαρτυρίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “someone to testify”
14:55	yew5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that they could have him killed”
14:55	gpgj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν	1	Here Matthew implies that the chief priests and the Sanhedrin want to convince the Roman authorities to kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “have the Romans put him to death”
14:56	cz91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation about how the Sanhedrin could not find any testimony against Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As a matter of fact,”
14:56	wwph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ	1	Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many witnesses” or “many men”
14:56	az3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, the word **and** introduces something that contrasts with how **many** people were **testifying falsely** against Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “yet” or “but”
14:56	quw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αἱ μαρτυρίαι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimonies**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the things they testified to”
14:56	pswb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἴσαι & οὐκ ἦσαν	1	Here Mark implies that, because what the people were testifying about was **not the same**, the Jewish leaders could use the testimony as evidence to convict Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “were not same, and so they could not convict Jesus” or “were not the same, so they could not be used to accuse Jesus”
14:57	ucdw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναστάντες	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would stand up when they were about to give official testimony. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having presented themselves to the Sanhedrin” or “having stood up before the court”
14:57	vulz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγοντες	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
14:58	nbvu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος, ὅτι ἐγὼ καταλύσω τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, τὸν χειροποίητον, καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “We heard him saying that he will destroy this temple made with hands and that in three days he will build another made without hands”
14:58	f82e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	The pronoun **We** refers to the people who falsely testified against Jesus. It does not include the people to whom they are speaking. If your language requires you to mark such forms, **We** would be exclusive here.
14:58	e94y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸν χειροποίητον & ἀχειροποίητον	1	Here, the word **hands** refers to main part of the body that people use to make things. So the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “made by humans … made without humans” or “made by people … made without people”
14:58	wzag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν χειροποίητον & ἀχειροποίητον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that hands made … that hands did not make”
14:58	b49a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν	1	Here, the phrase **in three days** refers to a time period made up of three days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “during a period of three days”
14:58	hm5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλον	1	The witnesses are using the adjective **another** as a noun to mean another temple. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “a different temple”
14:58	qqfd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀχειροποίητον	1	Here, the phrase **made without hands** implies that God, not humans, will make this temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “made by God, not by human hands”
14:59	pbj6			καὶ οὐδὲ οὕτως	1	Alternate translation: “Yet not even in this case”
14:59	atbz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ μαρτυρία αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated the word **testimony** in [14:55](../14/55.md). Alternate translation: “what they testified to”
14:59	c0g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἴση	1	Here, just as in [14:56](../14/56.md), Mark implies that, because what the people were testifying about was not the same, the Jewish leaders could use the testimony as evidence to convict Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the same, and so they could not convict Jesus” or “the same, so it could not be used to accuse Jesus”
14:60	d7i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναστὰς & εἰς μέσον	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would stand up when they were about to make an official statement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of the Sanhedrin to say something” or “having stood up in the midst of the court”
14:60	pgaq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
14:60	utl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? τί οὗτοί σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν?	1	Here the high priest could be asking: (1) two questions. See the ULT and UST. (2) one question. Alternate translation: “Do you not answer anything to what these are testifying against you”
14:60	rlee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν	1	The words translated **not** and **anything** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “Do you answer nothing”
14:60	a359			οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν	1	Alternate translation: “Do you have no answer”
14:60	ot8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ & σου	1	Because the high priest is speaking to Peter, the word **you** throughout this verse is singular.
14:60	ztt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί οὗτοί σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν	1	Here the high priest is asking Jesus how he will defend himself against the people who have accused him of saying and doing wrong things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What is your defense against these testifying against you”
14:61	p8b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὁ & ἐσιώπα, καὶ οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο οὐδέν	1	The phrases **was silent** and **did not answer anything** mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he did not reply to anything that was said against him!” or “he remained completely silent”
14:61	ypcx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο οὐδέν	1	The words translated **not** and **anything** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. See how you expressed the similar form in [14:60](../14/60.md). Alternate translation: “answered nothing”
14:61	t77i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σὺ	1	Because the high priest is speaking to Jesus, the word **you** is singular.
14:61	o27t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ	1	Here, the title **the Blessed One** is a polite way of referring to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that **the Blessed One** is God. Alternate translation: “the Son of the Blessed God” or “the Son of God, the Blessed One”
14:61	pib6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς	1	The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God.
14:61	c17d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, the high priest implies that he and other Jews do it. Alternate translation: “of the One whom we bless”
14:62	c212		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I am that person” or “I am the Christ, the Son of the Blessed One”
14:62	yhhk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “me, who am the Son of Man,”
14:62	d5qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον	1	When someone sits at the right hand, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sitting to rule at the right hand” or “taking the place of honor and authority at the right hand”
14:62	a2il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ δεξιῶν & τῆς δυνάμεως	1	Here, the phrase **at the right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s right hand, which would be the “right side.” In the Jesus’ culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of power” or “at the honorable place of power”
14:62	e1xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν & τῆς δυνάμεως	1	Here, the word **power** could refer to: (1) the **power** that a person sitting **at the right hand** has. In this case, Jesus implies that the **right hand** is God’s. Alternate translation: “at the right hand with power” or “at the right hand of God, the place of power,” (2) God the Father by reference to the **power** that he has. Alternate translation: “at the right hand of the powerful God” or “at the right hand of the Almighty”
14:62	iiog		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ δεξιῶν & τῆς δυνάμεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of power, and if you do not translate the word as a title for God, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “at the right hand, which is a powerful place,” or “powerfully at the right hand”
14:62	ca5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἐρχόμενον	1	Christians debate exactly what it means in this verse for the Son of Man to be **coming**. Some think he is **coming** to God’s heavenly throne room. Others think he is **coming** back to earth. If possible, use a form that does not explicitly state where he is **coming**. Alternate translation: “traveling” or “going”
14:62	usr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	The expression **of heaven** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “the clouds”
14:63	f851		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
14:63	jz48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	διαρρήξας τοὺς χιτῶνας αὐτοῦ	1	In Jesus’ culture the act of tearing one’s clothing was a symbolic act done to show outrage or grief. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “having torn his tunics in outrage”
14:63	afd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων?	1	The high priest is using the question form to emphatically state that he thinks that they do not need more witnesses. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We do not still have need of witnesses.” or “We certainly do not still have need of witnesses!”
14:63	n7xn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μαρτύρων	1	Here the high priest implies that they do not need more **witnesses** to prove that Jesus had done something wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of witnesses to prove that he is guilty”
14:64	zwf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς βλασφημίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blasphemy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “him blaspheme” or “the blasphemous things he says”
14:64	zc7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί ὑμῖν φαίνεται	1	Here the high priest is asking the rest of the Jewish council to state whether they think Jesus is guilty or innocent and what they should do with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What is your verdict” or “What do you think we should do”
14:64	fu4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔνοχον εἶναι θανάτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as someone who deserved to die”
14:65	y1s4			τινες	1	Alternate translation: “some of those present” or “some of the people there”
14:65	se1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐμπτύειν αὐτῷ	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would **spit on** someone to insult that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “to spit on him, dishonoring him,”
14:65	d56t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	περικαλύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ πρόσωπον	1	To **blindfold** someone means to tie a thick cloth around the middle of a person’s head to cover the eyes and prevent that person from seeing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “to cover his face so that he could not see”
14:65	dg7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	προφήτευσον	1	The guards did not believe that Jesus was a real prophet and could **Prophesy**. When they demanded that Jesus should **Prophesy**, they were challenging him to do something they believed he could not do. They were only asking Jesus to **Prophesy** in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Show us that you can prophesy” or “Prophesy to us if you really can”
14:65	gvq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προφήτευσον	1	Here the people telling Jesus to **Prophesy** are implying that they want him to identify who it was who had just hit him. Since he was blindfolded, this would be prophesying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Prophesy! Tell us who hit you.” or “Declare who struck you!”
14:65	svkg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	προφήτευσον	1	Because these people are speaking to Jesus, the command **Prophesy** is singular.
14:65	vwyz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	οἱ ὑπηρέται	1	Here, the word **officers** refers to servants and attendants in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that generally refers to servants and any others who do what they are told. See how you translated this word in [14:54](../14/54.md). Alternate translation: “the attendants” or “those who served there”
14:65	q6qw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸν ἔλαβον	1	Here Mark implies that the **officers** took charge of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “took charge of him” or “took him away”
14:66	rlmb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces something that was happening at the same time as what Mark narrated in [14:55–65](../14/55.md) (Jesus’ trial). This story continues the narrative about Peter that Mark began in [14:54](../14/54.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a simultaneous event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “During those events,” or “While that was happening,”
14:66	bqyz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κάτω ἐν τῇ αὐλῇ	1	Here Mark implies that the room where the Sanhedrin was meeting was above the ground. The room could have been raised slightly above the ground above another room. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the courtyard below the room where Jesus was” or “in the courtyard, which was lower than the house”
14:66	crfm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “goes”
14:67	rtos		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θερμαινόμενον	1	Here Mark implies that Peter was still **warming himself** by the fire in the courtyard of the high priest’s house (see [14:54](../14/54.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “warming himself by the fire”
14:67	eiqo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ σὺ μετὰ τοῦ Ναζαρηνοῦ ἦσθα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the servant girl means that Peter was a disciple of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “You also were a disciple of the Nazarene, Jesus”
14:67	mzhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σὺ	1	Because the servant girl is speaking to Peter, the word **You** is singular.
14:68	es9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ἠρνήσατο	1	Here Mark implies that Peter **denied** that he was with Jesus as his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he denied that he was with Jesus”
14:68	bkdw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he declared”
14:68	y3ju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὔτε οἶδα, οὔτε ἐπίσταμαι σὺ τί λέγεις	1	Here Peter means that servant girl’s words do not apply to him. He does not mean that he was unable to know or **understand** what the servant girl said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “You are saying things that I neither know nor understand anything about” or “I have nothing to do with what you are talking about!”
14:68	l5i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὔτε οἶδα, οὔτε ἐπίσταμαι σὺ τί λέγεις	1	The phrase **Neither have I known** and the phrase **nor do I understand** mean basically the same thing. Peter is using the repetition for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “I surely do not know what you are saying” or “I have no idea what you are talking about”
14:68	yxsk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σὺ	1	Because Peter is speaking to the servant girl, the word **you** is singular.
14:68	q6m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out”
14:68	r148		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ προαύλιον	1	A **forecourt** is an open area that leads into another open area (the “court”), which is more closely connected to the house. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of open area, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the outer court” or “the open area further away from the house”
14:68	liv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τὸ προαύλιον	1	Many ancient manuscripts do not include any more words in this verse after the phrase **the forecourt**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “and a rooster crowed” after **the forecourt**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
14:69	bnzo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	τοῖς παρεστῶσιν, ὅτι οὗτος ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐστιν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “to the ones standing around that he was from them.”
14:69	xv3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐστιν	1	Here the servant girl means that Peter was one of the people who traveled with Jesus and were part of his group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is one of them” or “is a follower of Jesus”
14:69	v5kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun **them** refers to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples”
14:70	jrw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν ἠρνεῖτο	1	Here Mark implies that Peter **was denying** that he was with Jesus as his disciple. See how you expressed the similar idea in [14:68](../14/68.md). Alternate translation: “was denying again that he was with Jesus”
14:70	kxvw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀληθῶς ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ, καὶ γὰρ Γαλιλαῖος εἶ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “You also are a Galilean, so truly you are from them”
14:70	blut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ	1	Here the people mean that Peter was one of the people who traveled with Jesus and were part of his group. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [14:69](../14/69.md). Alternate translation: “you are one of them” or “you are a follower of Jesus”
14:70	x04u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	εἶ	-1	Because these people are speaking to Peter, the word **you** throughout this verse is singular.
14:70	qjgs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun **them** refers to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples”
14:70	pjm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ γὰρ Γαλιλαῖος εἶ	1	Here the people **standing around** imply that, since Peter was **a Galilean**, he must have been with Jesus, who also was a Galilean. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for you, like Jesus, are a Galilean” or “for Jesus is a Galilean, and you are one also”
14:71	zsq0			ὁ & ἤρξατο ἀναθεματίζειν καὶ ὀμνύειν, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα	1	Alternate translation: “he began to say, ‘I call a curse down on myself and swear that I do not know”
14:71	ce6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναθεματίζειν	1	Here, the phrase **to curse** could mean that: (1) Peter asks God to curse him if he is lying. Alternate translation: “to ask God to curse him if he was speaking falsely” or “to invoke a curse on himself” (2) Peter curses Jesus. Alternate translation: “to curse Jesus”
14:71	vihe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ὀμνύειν, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον, ὃν λέγετε	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “to swear that he did not know the man whom they were talking about”
14:72	i7u2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν	1	See how you translated **rooster** and “crow” in [13:30](../13/30.md). Alternate translation: “a bird sang”
14:72	ja3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ἐκ δευτέρου	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “time number two”
14:72	cfno		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ῥῆμα	1	Here, **word** represents what Jesus just said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “statement” or “words”
14:72	xb2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν αὐτῷ & ὅτι πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι δὶς, τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ; καὶ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “said to him, that before a rooster crowed twice, he would deny him three times, and”
14:72	trxc			πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι δὶς, τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ	1	This clause is basically identical to what Jesus said in [14:30](../14/30.md), so express the idea as you did there.
14:72	ocer		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀπαρνήσῃ	1	Because Jesus spoke these words to Peter, the word **you** is singular.
14:72	zr4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπιβαλὼν, ἔκλαιεν	1	The word translated as **having broken down** could indicate that: (1) Peter became overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. Alternate translation: “having become overwhelmed with grief, he was weeping” or “having lost control of his emotions, he was weeping” (2) Peter was thinking about what had happened. Alternate translation: “having reflected on what had happened, he was weeping” or “having thought about what he had just done, he was weeping” (3) Peter fell down on the ground because of how upset he was. Alternate translation: “having cast himself on the ground, he was weeping” or “having fallen down, he was weeping” (4) Peter began to weep. Alternate translation: “he began weeping”
15:intro	d823				0	# Mark 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Jesus’ last days and death (14:1–15:47)\n      * Jesus’ trial before Pilate (15:1–15)\n      * Jesus is crucified (15:16–41)\n        * The soldiers mock Jesus (15:16–20)\n        * Jesus is crucified, and people mock him (15:21–32)\n        * Jesus dies (15:33–41)\n      * Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus’ body (15:42–47)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Golgotha\n\nAs Mark indicates in [15:22](../15/22.md), “Golgotha” means “Place of a Skull.” The reason why this place was called Place of a Skull is not known. It could have been named this because the appearance of this place resembled a skull. Or, it could have been named this because it was the site of so many executions, in which case the word “Skull” is being used as metonymy to refer to death. Because the reason that this location was called Place of a Skull is unknown, you should translate this phrase in a way that allows for either meaning, as modeled by the ULT and UST.\n\n### The drinks that people offered to Jesus\n\nIn [15:23](../15/23.md), some people offer Jesus “wine having been mixed with myrrh.” In [15:36](../15/36.md), someone offers Jesus “vinegar.” In both cases, scholars debate whether people offered these drinks to help Jesus by easing the pain or quenching his thirst or whether they offered these drinks to torment Jesus by giving him a bad-tasting drink or to mock him. Since it is not obvious what the purpose of the drinks was, if possible express the idea in such a way that your readers could draw either conclusion. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include some extra information in a footnote. See the notes on these verses for translation options.\n\n### Calling Elijah\n\nIn [15:34](../15/34.md), Jesus calls out “Eloi, Eloi,” which is how Jesus said “My God, my God” in his language. Some of the people standing there misheard him and thought that he was calling out to “Elijah,” a prophet with a name that sounds like “Eloi.” There is a story about this Elijah in [2 Kings 2:11–12](../2ki/02/11.md), where God takes him into heaven. So, some people believed that Elijah did not die and would someday return. The people who thought Jesus was calling to Elijah thought that he was asking Elijah to return and rescue him. If your readers would not understand why the people standing near Jesus speak about Elijah, you could include some extra information in your translation or include this information in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])\n\n### The curtain of the temple tearing from top to bottom\n\nThe “curtain” to which Mark refers in [15:38](../15/38.md) could be either the curtain that separated the Most Holy Place from the rest of the temple, or it could be the curtain that separated the Holy Place from the rest of the temple area. Mark indicates that this curtain tore from the top to the bottom, which means that a person did not do it. Christians debate what the tearing of this curtain might have symbolized. There are at least three major options:\n\n1. the tearing of the curtain could indicate that access to God is now available to everyone.\n2. the tearing of the curtain could indicate that God is going to destroy the temple.\n3. the tearing of the curtain could indicate that God is revealing something.\n\nSince Mark does not explain what the tearing of the curtain means, you should not explain it in your translation. However, if it would be helpful for your readers, you could include what it might mean in a footnote.\n\n### The tomb\n\nThe tomb in which Jesus was buried ([15:46](../15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was a large hole or room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Sarcasm\n\nIn this chapter, people mock Jesus several times. First, in [15:16–19](../15/16.md), the soldiers pretend like Jesus is a king. They give him a purple robe, a crown of thorns, and they pretend to greet him and honor him as a king. They do not actually believe that Jesus is a king, so they are doing these things sarcastically to make fun of Jesus. Second, in [15:29–32](../15/29.md), people walking by and the Jewish leaders tell Jesus to save himself and to come down from the cross. They do not actually believe that he can do these things, so they are speaking sarcastically to make fun of Jesus. Make sure that it is clear in your translation that these are sarcastic actions done to make fun of Jesus. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMost of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when people are speaking to Jesus. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 16, 17, 20, 21, 22, and 27. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])\n\n### Eloi, Eloi, lema sabachthani?\n\nIn [15:34](../15/34.md), Mark spells out the sounds of the words that Jesus spoke in his own language, which in this case could have been Aramaic or Hebrew. Either way, Mark translates the words later on in the verse as “My God, my God, why did you forsake me?” You can express the idea as Mark did by spelling out how the words sound and then translating their meaning in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n###  “My God, my God, why did you forsake me?”\n\nIn [15:28](../15/28.md) Jesus intentionally used the words of Psalm 22 to describe his own sufferings. When he cried out, “My God, my God, why did you forsake me?” he was referring to all of Psalm 22 by quoting its first line. (This was how the Jews of his time identified individual psalms). The people present at the crucifixion, and the people who read Mark’s Gospel who were familiar with the Old Testament, would have realized that these words of Jesus were a reference to Psalm 22. If you have translated Psalm 22 already you should translate the words “My God, my God, why did you forsake me?” exactly as you did there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Verse 28\n\nMany of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for [15:28](../15/28.md). A few early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words: “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘And he was counted with lawless ones.’” Since a similar sentence appears in [Luke 22:37](../luk/22/37.md), it is likely that people who copied the manuscripts accidentally or intentionally added these words here in Mark. Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
15:1	yacz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ εὐθὺς	1	Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark means that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,”
15:1	pqnv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	συμβούλιον ποιήσαντες	1	Here, the phrase **having made counsel** indicates that the Jewish leaders were working together to figure something out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made plans” or “having come up with an idea”
15:1	bhdq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ὅλον τὸ Συνέδριον	1	Here Mark is referring to the rest of the **Sanhedrin**. He does not mean that the **chief priests**, **elders**, and **scribes** whom he has previously mentioned were not part of the **Sanhedrin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and the rest of the entire Sanhedrin” or “all the other members of the Sanhedrin”
15:1	xz7c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Here Mark implies that the Jewish council commanded guards to bind Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having commanded the guards to bind Jesus”
15:1	y550		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπήνεγκαν	1	Here Mark implies that the Jewish council **led** Jesus **away** from the high priest’s house and to the place where **Pilate** was staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they led him away from the high priest’s house”
15:1	v2yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ	1	Here Mark implies that the Jewish leaders brought Jesus to Pilate because they wanted Pilate to judge him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “handed him over to Pilate to be judged by him”
15:2	kn7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ λέγει	1	Together the two words **answering** and **says** mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “But he responded to him” or “But he said to him”
15:2	dh6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σὺ λέγεις	1	Here, the phrase **You say {it}** indicates that the speaker acknowledges the truth of what the other person said. Jesus uses this phrase to indirectly indicate that Pilate is right to suggest that Jesus is **the King of the Jews**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that gives an indirect positive response to a request. If necessary, you could express the idea more directly, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “That is what you say” or “Your words show what is true”
15:3	ue18			κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ & πολλά	1	Alternate translation: “were saying that Jesus had done many wrong things” or “were telling Pilate that Jesus had frequently done what was wrong”
15:3	bkoe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλά	1	Here, the word translated **of many things** could: (1) indicate that the chief priests accused Jesus of doing **many** different things. Alternate translation: “of many crimes” (2) indicate that the chief priests accused Jesus **many** times. Alternate translation: “repeatedly” or “again and again”
15:4	dliw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
15:4	xcz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he asked”
15:4	x1dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? ἴδε, πόσα σου κατηγοροῦσιν!	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the question in the first sentence. Alternate translation: “See how many things they are accusing you! Do you not answer anything?”
15:4	q7m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν	1	The words translated **not** and **anything** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “Do you answer nothing”
15:4	s2as			οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν?	1	Alternate translation: “Do you have no answer”
15:4	bzlp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἴδε	1	Here Pilate uses the word **See** to refer to hearing or paying attention to something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Hear” or “Consider”
15:5	uqca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ὁ & Ἰησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη	1	The words translated **no longer** and **anything** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “Jesus answered nothing at all”
15:5	way9			ὁ & Ἰησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη	1	Alternate translation: “But Jesus gave no more answers”
15:5	camx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε θαυμάζειν	1	Here, the phrase **so as to** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “so that he amazed”
15:6	ul19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Here Mark provides background information about something that Pilate, the governor, normally did. This background information will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Here is some important information:”
15:6	v8sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑορτὴν	1	Here, the phrase **the festival** refers to the Passover and the Festival of Unleavened Bread, as indicated in [14:1](../14/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed **festival** in [14:2](../14/02.md). Alternate translation: “the festival of Passover and Unleavened Bread” or “the Festival of Unleavened Bread, including the Passover”
15:6	cgjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέλυεν	1	Here Mark implies that Pilate normally or customarily did this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he customarily released” or “it was his custom to release”
15:6	cz7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & παρῃτοῦντο	1	The pronouns **them** and **they** refer to the people who were in Jerusalem at during **the festival**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “to the people … they were requesting” or “to the people there … those people were requesting”
15:7	pdy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** marks a continuation of the break in the main story line which began in the preceding verse. Mark is introducing more background information, this time about **Barabbas**, to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “And” or “Here is some more important information:”
15:7	vwjg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἦν & ὁ λεγόμενος Βαραββᾶς, μετὰ τῶν στασιαστῶν δεδεμένος	1	Here Mark introduces **Barabbas** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man called Barabbas. He had been bound with the rebels”
15:7	lx8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λεγόμενος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called”
15:7	wvzq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Roman authorities. Alternate translation: “whom the Roman soldiers had bound” or “whom the Roman authorities had bound”
15:7	iofn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	φόνον πεποιήκεισαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **murder**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “had murdered others”
15:7	ygwg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ στάσει	1	Here Mark refers to an **insurrection** that his readers were familiar with. Most likely, this **insurrection** occurred soon before this story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the recent insurrection” or “in the insurrection that had just happened”
15:7	sp58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ στάσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **insurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while they were revolting”
15:8	zc0w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναβὰς	1	Here Mark indicates that the crowd walked **up** to where Pilate was. Most likely, this place was on top of a hill in the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having come up to the place where Pilate was” or “having walked up a hill to Pilate”
15:8	a4xb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀναβὰς	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone up”
15:8	wt1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἀναβὰς	1	Some ancient manuscripts read **having come up**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “having cried out.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
15:8	h6w3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἰτεῖσθαι καθὼς	1	Here Mark implies that the crowd asked Pilate to release a prisoner, **just as** he usually did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to request that he release a prisoner, just as”
15:8	ahal		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐποίει	1	Here Mark refers to what Pilate normally or customarily did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he customarily did” or “it was his custom to do”
15:9	o3j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
15:9	a0tb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	θέλετε & ὑμῖν	1	Because Pilate is speaking to the crowd in Jerusalem, the word **you** throughout this verse is plural.
15:9	s9qj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Βασιλέα τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here Pilate uses the same title for Jesus that he used in [15:2](../15/02.md). He does not indicate whether he thinks that Jesus really is **the King of the Jews**, but he uses the title because Jesus apparently accepted it in [15:2](../15/02.md). Alternate translation: “the one who is called the King of the Jews”
15:10	i4ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Pilate asked the question that he just asked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a question, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Pilate did that because”
15:10	u647		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ φθόνον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **envy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they envied him” or “they were upset that everyone liked him”
15:11	vcom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces how the chief priests and elders were trying to have Jesus executed in contrast to Pilate, who wanted to release Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,”
15:11	y5w3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνέσεισαν	1	Mark speaks of the **chief priests** as if they had **stirred** a pot and put into motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. Mark means that the **chief priests** encouraged the crowd to ask Pilate to release Barabbas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “influenced” or “incited”
15:11	pvu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα & ἀπολύσῃ	1	Here Mark implies that **the crowd** would ask or demand that Pilate **release** Barabbas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that they would demand that he release”
15:11	xxyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μᾶλλον	1	Here Mark implies that they asked for Barabbas **instead** of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “instead of releasing Jesus”
15:12	keq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	Together the two terms **answering** and **was saying** mean that Pilate was responding to what the crowd asked for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent phrase or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Pilate responded to them” or “Pilate said to them”
15:12	p94y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν	1	Mark uses the word **again** here because Pilate had already spoken to them regarding this matter in [15:9](../15/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second time” or “once more”
15:12	vlm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τί οὖν	1	Here, the word **therefore** indicates that Pilate asks this question in response to the crowd, who were asking that he release Barabbas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Once I release Barabbas, what”
15:12	r1ln		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	λέγετε	1	Because Pilate is speaking to the crowd in Jerusalem, the word **you** is plural.
15:12	eky3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	λέγετε	1	Many ancient manuscripts read **{with the one} you call**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “{with}.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
15:13	dgzm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
15:13	v6rj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν ἔκραξαν	1	Here, the word **again** could indicate: (1) that the crowd had already cried out for Pilate to release Barabbas, as Mark implies in [15:11](../15/11.md). In this case, you could make the idea more explicit or leave **again** untranslated. Alternate translation: “cried out a second time” (2) that the crowd is replying to what Pilate said. Alternate translation: “yelled back” or “shouted back at Pilate”
15:13	n6jb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σταύρωσον αὐτόν	1	Here the crowd means that they want Pilate to command his soldiers to **Crucify him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Command some soldiers to crucify him”
15:13	nwms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	σταύρωσον αὐτόν	1	This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a request or a demand rather than as a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that would express a demand or request. Alternate translation: “We want you to crucify him”
15:14	efgv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	-1	In both places, the word **But** introduces what Pilate or the crowds say in contrast to what the other person or people said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In response, … In response,” or “However, … Yet”
15:14	fb4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ κακόν ἐποίησεν?	1	Pilate is using the question form to emphasize that he thinks that Jesus has not done any **evil**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Despite what you say, he did not do evil.” or “Yet he has certainly not done evil!”
15:14	iee4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** indicates that Pilate is asking for a reason why the crowd wants him to crucify Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a question is asking for a reason for something. Alternate translation: “Why? What” or “What is your reason for that? What”
15:14	x3si		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	κακόν	1	Pilate is using the adjective **evil** as a noun to mean an evil thing. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “evil thing”
15:14	e55i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σταύρωσον αὐτόν	1	See how you translated the phrase **Crucify him** in [15:13](../15/13.md). Alternate translation: “We ask that you command some soldiers to crucify him”
15:15	dq7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
15:15	qt8y			τῷ ὄχλῳ τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιῆσαι	1	Alternate translation: “to make the crowd happy by doing what they wanted him to do”
15:15	vqiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρέδωκεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Here Mark implies that Pilate **handed Jesus over** to his soldiers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he handed Jesus over to his soldiers”
15:15	fwg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φραγελλώσας	1	Here Mark implies that Pilate had his soldiers flog Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having commanded his soldiers to flog him”
15:15	yzn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	φραγελλώσας	1	Flogging was a Roman penalty in which soldiers whipped a person with a whip to which were attached pieces of bone and metal to increase the whip’s capacity to do harm to the person being flogged. If your readers would not be familiar with this form of punishment, you could explain explicitly what flogging was. Alternate translation: “having whipped him with a whip to which were attached pieces of bone and metal”
15:15	w1sl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose for which Pilate **handed Jesus over**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
15:15	r9id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σταυρωθῇ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Pilate’s soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers might crucify him”
15:16	exdu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
15:16	eg6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς αὐλῆς, ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον, καὶ	1	Here Mark provides an explanation of what this specific **courtyard** was. Use a form that shows that Mark is giving more information about the **courtyard**. Alternate translation: “the courtyard—that is, the Praetorium—and” or “the courtyard. This courtyard was part of the Praetorium. They”
15:16	abe0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς αὐλῆς	1	Here, the word translated **courtyard** could refer to: (1) the open area that was part of the **Praetorium**. Alternate translation: “the open area that belonged to the Roman soldiers” (2) Pilate’s palace or residence. Alternate translation: “the palace”
15:16	lb2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πραιτώριον	1	The **Praetorium** was where the Roman governor stayed when he was in Jerusalem and where the soldiers in Jerusalem lived. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of structure, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the government building” or “the governor’s residence”
15:16	b5gs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅλην τὴν σπεῖραν	1	The word **cohort** is a military term. Each **cohort** is a group of about 600 soldiers, which is a tenth of a legion. Most likely, Mark is referring to all the soldiers who were stationed in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable military term in your language or a more general term. Alternate translation: “the whole company” or “all the soldiers stationed there”
15:17	tn33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐνδιδύσκουσιν αὐτὸν πορφύραν, καὶ περιτιθέασιν αὐτῷ πλέξαντες ἀκάνθινον στέφανον	1	In Roman culture, a **purple robe** was like the expensive clothing worn by kings, and in that culture a king usually wore a **crown**. The soldiers put a **purple robe** and a **crown of thorns** on Jesus to pretend that he was a king, even though they did not think that he really was a king. They did this to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “put on him a purple robe in mockery and place on him, having woven it together, a crown of thorns as if he were a king” or “put on him a purple robe and place on him, having woven it together, a crown of thorns. They did these things in order to mock him by pretending that they believed he really was a king”
15:17	ilug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐνδιδύσκουσιν αὐτὸν	1	As [15:20](../15/20.md) indicates, the soldiers took Jesus’ own clothes off before putting the **purple robe** on him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that more explicitly here. Alternate translation: “and, having taken off his garments, put on him”
15:17	ly5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πορφύραν	1	The word **purple** refers to a color that is a combination of blue and red. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the color **purple**, you could refer to a similar color. Alternate translation: “a lavender robe” or “a reddish-blue robe”
15:17	isxw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀκάνθινον στέφανον	1	Mark is using the possessive form to describe a **crown** that is made from branches with **thorns** on them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a crown made from thorns”
15:17	xfk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκάνθινον	1	Mark uses the word **thorns** to refer to small branches with **thorns** on them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of thorny branches”
15:18	ft1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	Χαῖρε, Βασιλεῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here the soldiers mock Jesus by greeting him as if he were **King of the Jews** when they do not believe that he actually is. They actually meant to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that this is irony. Alternate translation: “Rejoice, you so-called King of the Jews”
15:18	c4ae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Χαῖρε	1	In Jesus’ culture, people commonly greeted each other with the word **Rejoice**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that people use to greet each other. Alternate translation: “Hello”
15:19	muvw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐνέπτυον αὐτῷ	1	In Jesus’ culture, people would spit on someone to insult that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “spitting on him to dishonor him”
15:19	a8a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα, προσεκύνουν αὐτῷ	1	In Jesus’ culture, **bending the knee** and **bowing** before someone was a way to respect a greater person, especially when asking the greater person to do a favor. Here, the soldiers perform this action to mock Jesus by pretending that he is a king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what kneeling means. Alternate translation: “they were prostrating themselves before him” or “they were kneeling down before him as if he were a king”
15:19	dd05		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα, προσεκύνουν αὐτῷ	1	The phrases **bending the knee** and **bowing down** mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “they were bowing down low to him” or “they were formally bending the knee to him”
15:20	styv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	πορφύραν	1	See how you translated the phrase **purple robe** in [15:17](../15/17.md). Alternate translation: “lavender robe” or “reddish-blue robe”
15:20	dp33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξάγουσιν αὐτὸν	1	Here Mark implies that the soldiers **led** Jesus **out** from the Praetorium. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “led him out of the Praetorium”
15:20	euk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus was **led** out, namely that **they might crucify him**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
15:21	zo0f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	καὶ ἀγγαρεύουσιν, παράγοντά τινα Σίμωνα Κυρηναῖον, ἐρχόμενον ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ, τὸν πατέρα Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥούφου, ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark introduces **Simon** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And a certain man was passing by, Simon, a Cyrenean (the father of Alexander and Rufus). He was coming from the country. They pressed him into service so that he might carry his cross”
15:21	cj4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀγγαρεύουσιν	1	According to Roman law, Roman soldiers could press someone **into service**, which means that they could force a person to carry a load for them or work for them. In this case, they forced **Simon** to carry Jesus’ cross. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of forced service, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “they conscripted” or “they compelled to work for them”
15:21	i242		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγγαρεύουσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **service**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they forced to serve them”
15:21	rtz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σίμωνα & Ἀλεξάνδρου & Ῥούφου	1	The words **Simon**, **Alexander**, and **Rufus** are the names of men.
15:21	cyn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Κυρηναῖον & τὸν πατέρα Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥούφου	1	The phrases **a Cyrenean** and **the father of Alexander and Rufus** include background information about the man whom the soldiers forced to carry Jesus’ cross. Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “who was a Cyrenean and who was the father of Alexander and Rufus”
15:21	s4j3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐρχόμενον ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ	1	Here Mark implies that **Simon** was **coming** from the farmlands outside Jerusalem and going toward Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “coming into Jerusalem from outside the city”
15:21	n1oz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐρχόμενον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “going”
15:21	d3i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which **they pressed** Simon **into service**, namely **so that** they could require him to **carry** Jesus’ **cross**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
15:22	w6c7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Γολγοθᾶν	1	The word **Golgotha** is an Aramaic word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means later in the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.
15:22	m1dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which one can translate as”
15:23	x6d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐδίδουν	1	Here, the pronoun **they** could refer: (1) the soldiers. Alternate translation: “some of the soldiers were giving” (2) to some people who were nearby. Alternate translation: “some people there were giving”
15:23	e9xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἐσμυρνισμένον οἶνον	1	Scholars do not agree on why **myrrh** would be mixed with wine for Jesus to drink. It could be to make the wine smell or taste special, in which case the soldiers are continuing to mock Jesus as a king. It could be that people thought that the **myrrh** would lessen the pain that Jesus was going to experience. If possible, refer to the **myrrh** without explaining why it would be **mixed** in. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include some of this information in a footnote.
15:23	qyt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐσμυρνισμένον	1	The word **myrrh** refers to a fragrant resin or gum that is collected from trees. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of resin or gum, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “having been mixed with a fragrant gum” or “having been mixed with myrrh, a sweet-smelling resin”
15:23	ld7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσμυρνισμένον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who offered the wine to Jesus. Alternate translation: “that people had mixed with myrrh”
15:24	f6qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ διαμερίζονται τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ, βάλλοντες κλῆρον ἐπ’ αὐτὰ, τίς τί ἄρῃ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange these clauses so that the events they describe are in sequence. Alternate translation: “also they cast a lot for his garments, who would take what, and then they divided his garments”
15:24	t99r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαμερίζονται τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ	1	Here Mark means that the soldiers took the clothes that Jesus had been wearing and divided them up by giving each piece of clothing to a soldier. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they take his clothes and distribute them among them”
15:24	s5m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	βάλλοντες κλῆρον ἐπ’ αὐτὰ	1	The term **lot** refers to an object with different markings on various sides that was used to decide randomly among several possibilities. It would be tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with **a lot**, you could refer to a similar practice in your culture, or you could use a more general expression for gambling. Alternate translation: “rolling dice for them” or “deciding randomly about them”
15:24	mn6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὰ, τίς τί ἄρῃ	1	Here Mark implies that this is the purpose for which they were **casting a lot**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “them to decide who would take what” or “them in order to choose which soldier would take which piece of clothing”
15:25	dzbr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦν δὲ	1	Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce background information, which is the time of day when Jesus was crucified. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “This all happened during” or “As for the time, it was”
15:25	japr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὥρα τρίτη	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. So, **the third hour** would be around nine o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “9:00 AM”
15:25	q1ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὥρα τρίτη	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “hour three”
15:26	b84a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἐπιγραφὴ τῆς αἰτίας αὐτοῦ	1	Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe an **inscription** that states the **charge** that was made against Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the inscription that stated the charge against him”
15:26	k1ku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐπιγραφὴ	1	Here, the word **inscription** refers to a few words written to identify something. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of writing, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “written description” or “identification”
15:26	cbx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπιγεγραμμένη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “which one of the soldiers had written”
15:26	c0zf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here the soldiers continue mock Jesus by referring to him as if he were **King of the Jews** when they do not believe that he actually is. They actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that this is irony. See how you expressed the similar idea in [15:18](../15/18.md). Alternate translation: “The so-called King of the Jews”
15:27	mgf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἕνα ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ ἕνα ἐξ εὐωνύμων αὐτοῦ	1	Here, Mark uses the adjectives **right** and **left** as nouns to refer to Jesus’ right and left sides. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “one on his right side and one on his left side”
15:28	xybh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Καὶ ἐπληρώθη ἡ γραφὴ ἡ λέγουσα Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη	1	See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The notes below discuss translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it.
15:28	tkdc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἐπληρώθη ἡ γραφὴ ἡ λέγουσα	1	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Isaiah 53:12](../isa/53/12.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “the passage in Isaiah was fulfilled that says” or “what Isaiah the prophet wrote was fulfilled. He wrote”
15:28	itjz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπληρώθη ἡ γραφὴ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers crucifying Jesus with two robbers. Alternate translation: “that fulfilled the scripture” or “when the soldiers crucified those two robbers with Jesus, it fulfilled the scripture”
15:28	d5g8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “And they counted him with lawless ones” or “And others counted him with lawless ones”
15:29	v8nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς αὐτῶν	1	The people’s action of **wagging their heads** at Jesus showed that they felt disdain for him and that they disapproved of him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, or you could indicate what the gesture means. Alternate translation: “showing disdain for him by wagging their heads” or “wagging their heads to mock him”
15:29	a7ft		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	οὐὰ	1	Here, the word **Aha** expresses mock surprise. In other words, the people are pretending to be surprised that Jesus is on the cross in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea in your language. Alternate translation: “Wow” or “What”
15:29	hy37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ καταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ οἰκοδομῶν ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις	1	Here the people refer to Jesus by what the false witnesses testified during his trial that he had said (see [14:58](../14/58.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate more explicitly that the people are describing Jesus. Alternate translation: “You who said that you would destroy the temple and rebuild it in three days”
15:29	zhpn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις	1	Here, the phrase **in three days** refers to a time period made up of three days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [14:58](../14/58.md). Alternate translation: “during a period of three days”
15:30	r4dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	καταβὰς	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone down”
15:31	d5se			ἐμπαίζοντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	Alternate translation: “saying mocking things about Jesus among themselves”
15:31	o9qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄλλους ἔσωσεν	1	In context, the Jewish leaders are implicitly referring to how Jesus **saved others** by healing their diseases, releasing them from demon-possession, and saving them from other physical problems. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “He saved others by curing or exorcising them”
15:31	n13x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄλλους	1	The Jewish leaders are using the adjective **others** as a noun to mean other people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “other men and women”
15:32	q5qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ, ἵνα ἴδωμεν καὶ πιστεύσωμεν	1	Here the Jewish leaders use what they think is an imaginary situation to prove that Jesus is not really **the Christ, the King of Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “Imagine he really were the Christ, the King of Israel. In that case, he should come down now from the cross so that we might see and might believe” or “If he is the Christ, the King of Israel, let him come down now from the cross. Then, we will see and believe”
15:32	t1vm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω	1	Here the Jewish leaders mock Jesus by speaking about him as if he were **the Christ, the King of Israel** when they do not believe that he actually is. They actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words, as Mark indicated when he says that they mocked Jesus (see [15:31](../15/31.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that this is irony. Alternate translation: “Let the so-called Christ, the King of Israel, come down” or “He calls himself the Christ, the King of Israel. Let him come down”
15:32	f8yw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Christ, the King of Israel, must come down”
15:32	r6c4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “Let the Christ, the King of Israel, go down”
15:32	ljm7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἴδωμεν καὶ πιστεύσωμεν	1	Here the Jewish leaders imply that they **might see** Jesus coming down from the cross and then they **might believe** that he really is **the Christ, the King of Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “we might see him come down and might believe that he really is the Christ”
15:32	dcb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεσταυρωμένοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate’s soldiers were crucifying”
15:33	q1gh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὥρας ἕκτης & ὥρας ἐνάτης	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. So, **the sixth hour** would be around noon, and **the ninth hour** would be around three o’clock in the afternoon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated the similar time reference in [15:25](../15/25.md). Alternate translation: “12:00 PM … 3:00 PM”
15:33	m67d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὥρας ἕκτης & ὥρας ἐνάτης	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use cardinal numbers here or equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “hour six … hour nine”
15:33	ckv1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σκότος ἐγένετο	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express it in a different way. Alternate translation: “the sky darkened” or “the light dimmed”
15:33	b3dx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν γῆν	1	Here, **the whole land** could refer to: (1) the entire area around where Jesus was crucified. This could include just the city of Jerusalem or all of Palestine. Alternate translation: “over that whole region” (2) the entire earth. Alternate translation: “over the whole earth”
15:34	r6tj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ	1	See how you translated the phrase **the ninth hour** in [15:33](../15/33.md). Alternate translation: “3:00 PM”
15:34	o6ni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “at hour nine”
15:34	azt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐβόησεν & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	Here, the phrase **cried out with a loud voice** means that Jesus raised the volume of his voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “yelled loudly”
15:34	ls1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει?	1	This phrase is what Jesus **cried out** in his own language, either Aramaic or Hebrew. Mark has spelled the words out using Greek letters so his readers would know how they sounded. Since Mark states what these words mean later in the verse, you also should spell them out the way they sound in your language.
15:34	qw71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you expressed this construction in [15:22](../15/22.md). Alternate translation: “which one can translate as”
15:34	n09i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	ὁ Θεός μου, ὁ Θεός μου	1	The psalmist, whom Jesus is quoting, repeats the phrase **My God** to express the urgency and emotion of his question. If repeating this phrase would not express urgency or emotion in your language, you could eliminate the repetition and express the urgency and emotion in another way. Alternate translation: “Please, my God”
15:34	s6wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Θεός μου, ὁ Θεός μου, εἰς τί ἐγκατέλιπές με	1	See the discussion of this phrase in the chapter introduction.
15:35	apg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκούσαντες	1	Mark implies that the people did not understand what Jesus said. They heard him say “Eloi,” which means “My God,” but they thought it sounded like the name Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly that these people misunderstood Jesus. Alternate translation: “having heard Jesus speaking without understanding him”
15:35	zkid		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἴδε	1	Here, the word **Behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Pay attention” or “See”
15:36	hqvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σπόγγον	1	A **sponge** is a soft, porous object that can soak up and hold liquid, which comes out of it when the **sponge** is squeezed. If your readers would not be familiar with this object, you could use the name of something your readers would use for soaking up liquid, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something used to soak up liquid”
15:36	wegr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὄξους	1	Here, **vinegar** refers to the inexpensive and sour wine that common people in Jesus’ culture would usually drink. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of beverage, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “with cheap wine” or “with an inexpensive alcoholic beverage”
15:36	gvvp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περιθεὶς καλάμῳ, ἐπότιζεν αὐτόν	1	The person put the **sponge** on a **reed**, or long stick, so that he could hold the **sponge** up to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having put it around a reed, used the reed to lift the sponge up to Jesus to give it to him to drink”
15:36	yefo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγων	1	Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he declared”
15:36	mib7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄφετε	1	Here, the clause **Leave {him}** means that no one should do anything more to or for Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Wait” or “Stay away from him”
15:36	gzpm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἄφετε	1	Because this person is speaking to the other people there, the command **Leave {him}** is plural.
15:36	mys5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἔρχεται	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “goes”
15:36	tyuf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθελεῖν αὐτόν	1	Here the man implies that Elijah might **take him down** from the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to take him down from the cross”
15:37	xkpk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀφεὶς φωνὴν μεγάλην	1	Here, the phrase **having let out a loud voice** means that Jesus shouted loudly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [15:34](../15/34.md). Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly”
15:37	puak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐξέπνευσεν	1	Mark is referring to death in a polite way by using the word **expired**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state the meaning. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died”
15:38	sk3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God split the curtain of the temple”
15:38	t71k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ	1	Here Mark could be referring to **the curtain**: (1) that separated the Most Holy Place from the rest of **the temple**. Alternate translation: “the curtain that marked off the Most Holy Place in the temple” (2) that separated the Holy Place from the rest of **the temple** area. Alternate translation: “the curtain that marked off the temple building”
15:39	ve5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
15:39	q45e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ	1	Here, a place **opposite him** is directly in front of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Jesus in front of him” or “with Jesus before him”
15:39	gs62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	οὕτως ἐξέπνευσεν	1	Some ancient manuscripts read **he expired in this way**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “crying out in this way he expired.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
15:39	hue4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐξέπνευσεν	1	See how you translated the word **expired** in [15:37](../15/37.md). Alternate translation: “he passed away” or “he died”
15:39	nqv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς Θεοῦ	1	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
15:40	gkgi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens later in the story. The word does not introduce the next event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “During all those things,”
15:40	qm3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη	1	Consider how you might naturally include a list of three women with descriptions of them. The UST has moved **Salome** earlier in the list so that it is clear that she is not one of the children of **Mary**. Alternate translation: “also Mary Magdalene and Salome and Mary the mother of James the little and of Joses”
15:40	zc9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρία ἡ & μήτηρ	1	The word **Mary** is the name of a woman. This **Mary** was not **Mary Magdalene** nor Mary the mother of Jesus. Mark identifies her instead as **the mother of James the younger and of Joses**.
15:40	e0vc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ	1	The word **James** is the name of a man. This **James** is not James the brother of Jesus, James son of Zebedee, or James son of Alphaeus. The word **Joses** is also the name of a man. This **Joses** is not Jesus’ brother.
15:40	z5ra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ	1	When Mark refers to **James** as **the little**, he could mean that: (1) he was younger than one or more other people named James. Alternate translation: “of James the young” or “of the younger James” (2) he was less well-known than one or more other people named James. Alternate translation: “of James the less” or “of the less famous James” (3) he was a short man. Alternate translation: “of James the short”
15:40	qa0q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαλώμη	1	The word **Salome** is the name of a woman.
15:41	j15z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	αἳ ὅτε ἦν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ	1	Mark uses the statement **who, when he was in Galilee, were following him and serving him** to give his readers background information about the relationship that the three women mentioned in [15:40](../15/40.md) had with Jesus. Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to delete the comma at the end of verse 40. Alternate translation: “(these three women had followed him and served him when he was in Galilee)”
15:41	hrel		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ	1	Here, the phrase **were following him** indicates that these three women had traveled with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were traveling with him as his students”
15:41	a3qk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	αἱ συναναβᾶσαι	1	**Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “gone up” rather than **come up** in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “who had gone up with”
15:42-43	ekbl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	καὶ ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον & ἐλθὼν Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς τὸν Πειλᾶτον καὶ ᾐτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [15:42](../15/42.md) and [15:43](../15/43.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to introduce Joseph of Arimathea before stating what he did and why he did it. Alternate translation: “And Joseph, the one from Arimathea, a respected member of the council who also himself was waiting for the kingdom of God, came. And evening already having come, because it was the Day of Preparation, that is, the day before the Sabbath, having dared, he entered in to Pilate and asked for the body of Jesus”
15:42	duu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “Then,”
15:42	lxm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον	1	Here Mark indicates that Joseph of Arimathea acted as he did (see [15:43](../15/43.md)) **because** it was **the Day of Preparation**. Mark assumes that his readers will know that Jews would not move or bury a body on the **Sabbath** (the next day). He also assumes that his readers will know that the law includes a command to bury on the same day anyone who was executed as Jesus was (see [Deuteronomy 21:22–23](../deu/21/22.md)). So, if he wanted bury Jesus’ body, Joseph needed to receive the body and bury it quickly, before the next day began. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include this information in a footnote or make some of it more explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “evening already having come, because it was the Day of Preparation, that is, the day before the Sabbath when no one could bury anyone”
15:42	ug97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον	1	Here, as Mark indicates **the Day of Preparation** is **the day before the Sabbath**. On this day, Jews would prepare for the Sabbath so that they would not have to do work on that day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the day on which Jews prepared for the Sabbath, that is, the day before the Sabbath” or “the day before the Sabbath, the day on which Jews prepared for the Sabbath”
15:43	xn8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἐλθὼν Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν	1	Here Mark introduces **Joseph** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a man from Arimathea came. He was named Joseph, and he was a respected member of the council who also himself was waiting for the kingdom of God. Having dared, he entered in”
15:43	wgz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας	1	The word **Joseph** is the name of a man, and the word **Arimathea** is the name of the city he was from.
15:43	u7ll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	εὐσχήμων βουλευτής	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “an honorable member of the council” or “a member of the council whom others thought highly of,”
15:43	ov1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν	1	Mark uses the word **himself** to emphasize that **Joseph** was one of the people who was **waiting for the kingdom of God**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “who, he too, was” or “who indeed also was”
15:43	nu77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθὼν	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
15:43	zvw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ᾐτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	The reason that **Joseph** asked Pilate **for the body of Jesus** was so that he could bury it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “asked for the body of Jesus so that he could bury it”
15:44	vu11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
15:44	cnlz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν	1	Here Mark means that Pilate was not sure whether Jesus **had already died**, but he **marveled** that it might be true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates this kind of possibility. Alternate translation: “because it was possible that Jesus had already died”
15:44	f484		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν κεντυρίωνα	1	Here Mark implies that this is the same **centurion** who was in charge of crucifying Jesus (see [15:39](../15/39.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the centurion who was in charge of Jesus’ crucifixion” or “the centurion who oversaw Jesus’ execution”
15:44	u9o3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτὸν εἰ πάλαι ἀπέθανεν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he asked him, ‘Has he already died?’”
15:45	z3gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γνοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ κεντυρίωνος	1	Here Mark implies that Pilate **learned** that Jesus really was dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having learned from the centurion that Jesus had already died”
15:45	v5ys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐδωρήσατο τὸ πτῶμα τῷ Ἰωσήφ	1	Here Mark implies that Pilate commanded his soldiers to give **the corpse** to Joseph. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he told his soldiers to let Joseph have the corpse” or “he permitted Joseph to take the corpse”
15:46	g4c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σινδόνα & τῇ σινδόνι	1	The term **linen cloth** refers to a high-quality cloth made from the fibers of the flax plant. If your readers would be unfamiliar with **linen**, you could use a general expression. See how you translated **linen** in [14:51](../14/51.md). Alternate translation: “a fine cloth … in the fine cloth”
15:46	eb9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθελὼν αὐτὸν, ἐνείλησεν τῇ σινδόνι, καὶ ἔθηκεν αὐτὸν ἐν μνήματι ὃ ἦν λελατομημένον ἐκ πέτρας; καὶ προσεκύλισεν λίθον ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν τοῦ μνημείου	1	Here Mark implies that other people helped Joseph when he took Jesus’ body down from the cross, prepared it for the tomb, laid it in the tomb, and rolled a stone against the entrance to the tomb in order to close it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Joseph and the people who helped him took Jesus’ body down, wrapped the body in the linen cloth, and put it in a tomb, which was having been cut from rock. And they rolled a stone against the door of the tomb”
15:46	wh20		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθελὼν αὐτὸν	1	Here Mark implies that Joseph took Jesus’ body **down** from the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having taken him down off the cross”
15:46	ugph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐνείλησεν τῇ σινδόνι	1	This was the burial custom in this culture. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could indicate that more explicitly, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “he wrapped him in a linen burial cloth” or “he prepared him for burial”
15:46	fflq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἦν λελατομημένον ἐκ πέτρας	1	Here Mark means specifically a burial place that had been **cut** or chiseled out of **rock**, most likely into the face of a cliff. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of burial place, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “was having been chiseled into the rock” or “which had been specially prepared”
15:46	g9hf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦν λελατομημένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that it was people whom Joseph had hired. Alternate translation: “people had previously cut” or “Joseph had had people cut”
15:46	dfhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσεκύλισεν λίθον ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν τοῦ μνημείου	1	Here Matthew implies that Joseph **rolled** the **stone** to close up the **tomb**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he rolled a stone against the door of the tomb to close it up”
15:47	ltht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces something that was happening at the same time as what Mark narrated in the previous verse (Joseph burying Jesus’ body). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a simultaneous action, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “While Joseph was doing those things,”
15:47	yexp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρία ἡ Ἰωσῆτος	1	The word **Mary** is the name of a woman, the same woman whom Mark referred to in [15:40](../15/40.md). This **Mary** was not **Mary Magdalene** nor Mary the mother of Jesus. Mark identifies her instead as **the {mother} of Joses**.
15:47	m782		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσῆτος	1	The word **Joses** is also the name of a man, the same man whom Mark referred to in [15:40](../15/40.md). This **Joses** is not Jesus’ brother.
15:47	v3wu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τέθειται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Joseph of Arimathea. Alternate translation: “Joseph of Arimathea had put him”
16:intro	j5yz				0	# Mark 16 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n8. Jesus’ resurrection (16:1–8)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### The “young man”\n\nMark indicates that a “young man” clothed in white was sitting inside the tomb. He implies that this “young man” was an angel who appeared in human form. This is supported by how Matthew tells the story, since he indicates explicitly that an angel was at the tomb (see [Matthew 28:2–7](../mat/28/02.md)). Both Luke mentions two men at the tomb, whom he implies are angels ([Luke 24:4–7](../luk/24/04.md)), and John refers to two angels ([John 20:12–13](../jhn/20/12.md)). It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include some information about these men, or angels, in a footnote.\n\n### The resurrection\n\nMark does not narrate the resurrection, but he does indicate that the stone was rolled away from the tomb and that an angel in the form of a young man told the women that Jesus had resurrected. It is not clear exactly when Jesus actually rose from the dead, although it is clear that this happened before the tomb was opened. When Jesus rose from the dead, he was a living human being again, and he could never die again. Make sure that it is clear that Jesus came back to life as a living human being.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nAll the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in speeches that are given to groups of people. Because of this, all forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 4, and 6. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])\n\n### The ending of Mark’s gospel\n\nThere are at least four different endings to Mark’s Gospel that are found among various ancient manuscripts. However, only two of those are found among the earliest and most reliable manuscripts. One of these endings is the text of [16:9–20](../16/09.md), which is found in some early manuscripts and many later manuscripts. The other ending, the one found in the early manuscripts that scholars consider to be the most reliable, stops at [16:8](../16/08.md) and does not include any further words. The ULT and UST include [16:9–20](../16/09.md) in brackets, and there are no translation notes on these verses. If you do include these verses in your translation, it is recommended that you put them in a footnote or in brackets to indicate that some of the earliest manuscripts do not include them.
16:1	c21a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
16:1	p61n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου	1	Here Mark indicates that the sun had set on Saturday, which meant that **the Sabbath** had ended. The three women were now permitted to do work, like buying **spices**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when it was evening and the Sabbath had ended” or “the Sabbath having passed at sunset and the period of rest having ended”
16:1	fd3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἡ Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου, καὶ Σαλώμη	1	Consider how you might naturally include a list of three women with descriptions of them. The UST has moved **Salome** earlier in the list so that it is clear that she is not one of the children of **Mary**. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene and Salome and Mary the mother of James”
16:1	fm8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου	1	The word **Mary** is the name of a woman, the same woman whom Mark referred to in [15:40](../15/40.md) and [15:47](../15/47.md). This **Mary** was not Mary Magdalene nor Mary the mother of Jesus. Mark identifies her instead as **the {mother} of James**.
16:1	m7qt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰακώβου	1	The word **James** is the name of a man, the same man whom Mark referred to in [15:40](../15/40.md). This **James** is not James the brother of Jesus, James son of Zebedee, or James son of Alphaeus.
16:1	nmvs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαλώμη	1	The word **Salome** is the name of a woman. She is the same woman whom Mark referred to in [15:40](../15/40.md).
16:1	qrhc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀρώματα	1	Here, the word **spices** refers to any good-smelling herbs, ointments, and oils. In Jesus’ culture, it was customary to put these good-smelling things on dead bodies to cover up bad smells and to honor the people who had died. Since the women plan to **anoint** Jesus with these **spices**, the **spices** must be herbs mixed with oil or some kind of ointment. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of good-smelling item, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “pleasant herbs” or “good-smelling oils”
16:1	zrcf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθοῦσαι	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
16:1	g9q0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλείψωσιν αὐτόν	1	In Jesus’ culture, it was customary for people to **anoint** dead bodies when they were buried. Joseph of Arimathea had not done this because he had to bury Jesus quickly before the Sabbath began. These three women now plan to finish the customary burial preparations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might anoint him to complete the burial customs”
16:2	o6qf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λείαν πρωῒ τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	Here Mark refers to sunrise on **the first of the week**, that is, Sunday. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “very early in the morning on the first of the week, that is, Sunday”
16:2	qcmt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ μιᾷ	1	Mark is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean the first day. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “on the first day”
16:2	jh6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τῇ μιᾷ	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day one”
16:2	u9b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνατείλαντος τοῦ ἡλίου	1	Here, the phrase **the sun having come up** refers to sunrise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to sunrise. Alternate translation: “the sun having risen” or “the sun having appeared above the horizon”
16:3	knly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἔλεγον	1	Here Mark implies that **they were saying** this while they were going to the tomb. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “And as they were going to the tomb, they were saying”
16:3	lv8o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον πρὸς ἑαυτάς, τίς ἀποκυλίσει ἡμῖν τὸν λίθον ἐκ τῆς θύρας τοῦ μνημείου?	1	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were asking one another about who would roll away the stone for them from the entrance of the tomb.”
16:4	kld9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “somebody had rolled the stone away”
16:4	ij5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **for** could introduce: (1) further information about the **stone**. Alternate translation: “and as for that stone,” (2) a reason why the women were able to see the **stone** from far away when they **looked up**. Alternate translation: “which they could observe because” (3) a reason why the women were concerned about who would roll the stone away for them (see [16:3](../16/03.md)). Alternate translation: “and they had been asking each other about the stone because”
16:5	oaqk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τοῖς δεξιοῖς	1	Here Mark is referring to the **right side** of the tomb from the women’s perspective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “inside the tomb on the right side from their perspective”
16:5	cuy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	περιβεβλημένον στολὴν λευκήν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with a white robe on”
16:5	ei8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεθαμβήθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what the women saw. Alternate translation: “these things alarmed them”
16:6	q47y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces what the young man says in contrast to how the women reacted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
16:6	mo0d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ ἐκθαμβεῖσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be what the women saw. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [16:5](../16/05.md). Alternate translation: “These things must not alarm you”
16:6	ie57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν ἐσταυρωμένον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Pilate’s soldiers. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate’s soldiers crucified”
16:6	x6ne		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη	1	Here, the word **raised** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He was restored to life”
16:6	x9m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the young man could be implying that: (1) God did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him up” (2) Jesus himself did it. Alternate translation: “He rose up”
16:6	wf0l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἴδε	1	Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the three women and asks them to look at something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks someone to look or pay attention. Alternate translation: “See” or “Observe”
16:6	ni6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ τόπος ὅπου ἔθηκαν αὐτόν	1	Here the young man refers to **the place** within the tomb where Joseph of Arimathea and his helpers **put** Jesus’ body. This **place** was probably a shelf or ledge. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this is the flat area where they put his body” or “this is the ledge within this tomb where they put him”
16:7	fc4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces a command that contrasts with what the young man said in the previous verse about seeing where Jesus’ body lay. Now, in contrast, the angel commands the women to leave the tomb. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” or “But do not stay here. Instead,”
16:7	x3u1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ Πέτρῳ	1	The phrase **and to Peter** is not making a distinction between **Peter** and the disciples by indicating that **Peter** is not part of the group of Jesus’ **disciples**. Rather, the phrase **and Peter** is being used to emphasize that of all of the disciples of Jesus, these women should take special care to tell **Peter** the information that follows this phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to Peter and to the rest of his disciples” or “to his disciples, and particularly to Peter”
16:7	axgu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Πέτρῳ, ὅτι προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν; ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε, καθὼς εἶπεν ὑμῖν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to Peter that Jesus is going before them to Galilee and that they will see him there, just as he said to them”
16:7	mk04		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προάγει	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “He is coming before”
16:8	m1eg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξελθοῦσαι, ἔφυγον ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου; εἶχεν γὰρ αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because trembling and amazement was gripping them, having gone out, they ran from the tomb”
16:8	dlji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐξελθοῦσαι	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
16:8	bdgb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἶχεν & αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις	1	Here, when **trembling and amazement** are **gripping** people, it means that these people are overcome by **trembling and amazement**. In other words, they cannot help but experience these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were overcome by trembling and amazement” or “they could not help but experience trembling and amazement”
16:8	sh40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἶχεν & αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **amazement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were trembling and greatly amazed”
16:8	trqu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις	1	Here Mark implies that the women were **trembling** because of their **amazement**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “trembling because of amazement”
16:8	feiu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐδενὶ οὐδὲν εἶπον; ἐφοβοῦντο γάρ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because they were afraid, they said nothing to anyone”
16:8	ydb0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδενὶ οὐδὲν εἶπον	1	The words translated **nothing** and **to anyone** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “they told no one anything”